GIFT  OF 
A lb in  Putzker 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.arGhive.org/details/elementarygrammaOOfontrich 


AN 

ELEMENTARY   GRAMMAU    Grrccr^ 


OF    THE 


ITALIAN   LANGUAGE 


PROGRESSIVELY  ARRANGED 


FOR    THE    USE    0 


SCHOOLS    AND    COLLEGES 


BY 


G.   B.   rONTANA. 


NEW  YOEK: 
D.    APPLETON    AND    COMPANY, 

C49    &    551    BROADWAY. 

1877. 


770 

f(on 


lutci-ed  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  yeai  1858,  by 

G.    B.    FONTANA, 

lu  Uie  Clerk'8  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  District  of  Massachusctte. 


PREFACE 


The  study  of  languages  offers  to  a  discriminating 
observer  not  only  a  collection  of  words  and  idioms, 
but  the  knowledge  of  customs,  tastes,  and  national 
peculiarities.  It  is  true  that  there  are  general  prin- 
ciples which  may  be  applied  in  common  to  all  lan- 
guages,—  the  system  of  ideas  having  everywhere 
the  same  foundation,  —  but  these  are,  in  their  appli- 
cation, subjected  to  conditions  peculiar  to  each  peo- 
ple. The  formation  of  words,  the  construction  of 
phrases,  and  the  modulation  of  sounds,  are  but 
the  results  of  the  national  character  pervading  the 
minutest  details  of  a  language. 

The  Italian  language,  like  all  others,  has  national 
characteristics.  The  strength  of  its  metaphors,  the 
conciseness  of  its  phrases,  its  flexible  adaptability  to 
thought,  its  sonorous  terminations,  expressive  articiv 
lation,  and  musical  prosody,  are  the  living  monu- 
ments of  a  people  eminently  artistic,  and  endowed 
with  a  high  organic  sensibility.  Their  early  oppo- 
Bition  to  foreign  despotism,  and  triumph  oyer  bar- 
barism during  the  political  struggles  of  forty  Italian 


567177 


IV  PREFACE. 

republics;  created  an  elegant,  energetic,  and  express- 
ive language,  possessing  an  innate  nobleness  and 
beauty. 

A  logical  and  philosophical  method  is  therefore 
necessary  to  impart  the  Italian  language,  as  well  as 
intelligence,  memory,  and  a  musical  ear,  on  the  part 
of  the  learner.  The  latter  attainments  are  often  to 
be  found,  but  there  is  no  Italian  grammar  within 
my  knowledge  which  combines  all  the  requisites  of 
a  clear  and  concise  treatise ;  some  aiming  to  teach 
the  classical  tongue  of  the  thirteenth  century,  others 
to  give  the  mechanical  translation  of  words  and 
phrases,  without  rules  and  precepts. 

The  object  of  this  work  is  to  present  the  elements 
of  the  language  as  it  is  spoken  to-day,  in  its  simplest 
garb,  both  theoretically  and  practically. 

The  grammar  is  divided  into  two  parts,  embracing 

sixty  lessons  and  sixty  exercises.     The  first  part  is 

«.xclusively  given  to  rules  indispensable  to  a  general 

idea  of  the   language;   the   second   is  framed  for 

those  who  are  desirous  of  having  an  insight  into  its 

theory,  and  consists  of  synonyms,  maxims,  idioms, 

and  figurative  expressions.     The  student  will  thus 

1)0  enabled  to  observe  the  distinctive  features  of 

t  lie  two  languages :  the  strength  and  gravity  of  the 

Engh'sh  —  man,  in  his  full  vigor;  the  softness  and 

elegance    of  the  Italian  —  woman,   in   her  perfect 

beauty. 

^  0.  B.  F. 


INTRODUCTION. 


To  begin  a  course  of  lessons  in  Italian  with  the  arti- 
cle, and,  after  having  stated  that  il  is  used  for  the  mas- 
culine gender,  and  la  for  the  feminine,  to  call  upon  the 
pupil  for  an  exercise,  is  not  at  all  logical.  The  pupil 
must  first  know  that  lihro,  a  book,  is  of  the  masculine 
gender,  because  ending  in  o,  and  tavola,  a  table,  of  the 
feminine  gender,  because  ending  in  a;  and  then  he  can 
properly  apply  the  article,  and  say  il  lihro,  la  tavola. 

The  method  adopted  in  this  grammar  consists  in  not 
introducing  any  part  of  speech,  except  a  few  connecting 
words,  without  having  first  given  its  appropriate  rule. 

The  first  lesson  is  therefore  exclusively  given  to  gen- 
ders of  nouns.  As  the  pupil  knows  nothing  but  the 
genders,  he  can  write  no  exercise  ;  hence,  no  exercise  is 
attached  to  the  first  lesson. 

In  the  second  lesson  the  pupil  finds  the  article,  the 
personal  pronouns,  and  the  auxiliary  verb  to  have. 
These,  together  with  his  previous  knowledge  of  the 
gender  of  nouns,  give  him  material  enough  to  write  a  sen- 
tence ;  consequently,  he  is  furnished  with  an  exercise. 

The  third  lesson  embraces  the  plural  of  nouns :  not 
all  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the  plural,  but  simply 
those  necessary  to  one  commencing  the  language.  The 
remaining  rules  are  introduced  after  things  more  import- 
ant and  useful  to  a  beginner  have  been  considered. 


n  INTRODUCTION. 

Progressing  thus  gradually  aud  methodically,  the 
pupil  becomes  familiar  with  the  language  in  a  short 
time,  and  without  much  effort. 


The  irregular  verbs,  which  in  other  grammars  occupy 
one  third,  and  sometimes  half  of  the  book,  have  been 
gimplified  and  reduced  to  rules,  which  are  given  in  a 
single  lesson.  

The  indefinite  pronouns  have  been  placed  in  three 
classes :  those  used  for  persons,  those  for  things,  and 
those  for  persons* and  things. 


In  Italian  dictionaries  some  English  words  are  found 
with  two  or  more  corresponding  Italian  words,  which 
would  naturally  lead  the  pupil  to  use  indiscriminately 
the  one  or  the  other ;  yet  no  two  words  have,  in  Italian, 
precisely  the  same  import.  The  directions  for  the  proper 
■use  of  these  synonyms  have  been  given,  in  the  course 
of  the  lessons,  under  the  head  bearing  that  caption. 


No  definitions  have  been  given  for  the  various  parts 
of  speech,  as  it  is  presumed  that  no  one  studies  the 
grammar  of  a  foreign  language  without  first  knowing 
that  of  his  own. 


Several  rules  common  to  both  languages  have  not 
been  noticed,  to  avoid  complicating  the  work.  In  such 
cases  the  pupil  can  follow  the  precepts  of  his  own 
language. 

Particular  pains  has  been  taken  to  finish  the  lessons 
in  pages,  so  that  the  vocabulary  is  always  found  on 
the  same  page  as  the  exercise. 


INTRODUCTION.  VII 

In  the  arrangement  of  the  vocabularies,  the  English, 
and  not  the  Italian  words,  are  placed  alphabetically ; 
for,  knowing  the  Italian  word,  the  pupil  has  no  need  of 
looking  it  out. 

The  exercises  contain  words  and  expressions  in  com- 
mon use  on  topics  which  constitute  daily  familiar  con- 
versation. The  forty  exercises  of  the  first  part  are  pre- 
ceded by  their  corresponding  vocabulary,  so  that  the 
pupil  can  proceed  in  his  study  without  the  aid  of  a  dic- 
tionary. But  if  he  feels  the  need  of  a  dictionary,  he 
should  procure  a  good  one.  Pocket  dictionaries  are 
only  useful  to  travellers. 


When  the  pupil  has  acquired  a  sufficient  knowledge 
of  the  language  to  allow  him  to  pass  to  the  second 
part,  he  is  left  free,  in  applying  the  rules  previously 
learned,  to  select  those  expressions  which  he  thinks 
most  fit  to  convey  the  English  idea.  Consequently,  no 
vocabulary  is  attached  to  the  lessons. 


The  exercises  of  the  second  part  are  more  difficult 
than  the  preceding  ones.  Some  of  them  contain  extracts 
from  celebrated  poems,  translated  into  plain  prose,  so 
that  the  pupil  may  compare  his  Italian  translation  with 
the  original,  which  has  been  inserted  for  that  purpose  at 
the  end  of  the  book.  Others  are  biographical  sketches 
of  the  most  prominent  among  the  Italian  writers ;  by 
which  means  the  pupil,  whilst  acquiring  the  language, 
may  become  familiar  with  the  life  and  works  of  some 
of  the  classic  Italian  authors,  such  as  Manzoni,  Alfieri, 
Tasso,  Petrarch,  and  the  father  of  the  Italian  language 
and  literature,  Dante  Alighieri. 


ITALIAN   GRAMMAR. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

The  pronunciation  of  a  spoken  language  can  only 
be  acquired  perfectly  from  the  voice  of  a  native. 
An  attempt  to  represent  the  sounds  of  one  language 
by  the  written  approximate  sounds  of  another, 
would  fail  to  give  a  perfect  idea  of  its  peculiarities. 
It  would,  therefore,  be  impossible  to  give  rules  and 
exceptions  for  the  various  shades  and  almost  imper- 
ceptible gradations  of  some  of  the  Italian  sounds. 
But,  as  a  native  Italian  teacher  is  not  always  to  be 
procured  by  those  desirous  of  acquiring  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  language,  a  few  general  remarks  are 
here  given  on  some  of  the  letters  whose  pronuncia- 
tion differs  essentially  from  the  English. 

There  are  but  twenty-one  letters  in  Italian,  viz. : 

A,    B,     C,     D,     E,     F,    G,     H,     I,    L,    M,     N, 

ah,      be,      che,       de,        a,         ef,       ge,     ahk'kah,    e,        el,       em,       en, 

0,.  P,    Q,    R,    S,    T,    U,    V,    Z. 

o,        pe,        coo,    ajrrr,      ess,      te,        oo,         ve,    dzata. 

|[^"  W  and  y  do  not  belong  to  the  Italian  alphabet,  nor  have  they 
any  corresponding  sound  in  the  language.  The  k  and  x  are  supplied 
by  ch,  c,  or  s ;  as,  Keel,  chiglia  ;  except,  eccetto  ;  express,  espresso. 
The  letter  y  is  almost  entirely  rejected  by  modern  writers,  and  is  repre- 
sented by  i  at  the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  words,  or  by  it  at  the 
end  ;  as,  ieri,  aiuto,  principii,  not  jeri,  ajuto,  principj. 


2  ^  P.UO^yNCIATIONv 

VOWELS. 

The  vowels  are  invariably  pronounced  as  follows: 

A  like  the  a  in  father ;  ^^^fame^  jpane. 

E  like  the  e  in  met ;  as,  penna^  metto,  except  at 
the  close  of  a  syllable,  when  it  is  somewhat  more 
prolonged  and  open;  as, ^ena,  vena.^ 

The  usual  way  of  teaching  that  the  Italian  e  has, 
beside  the  close  sound  of  the  e  in  met,  an  open 
sound  corresponding  to  that  of  the  a  in  fate,  has  led 
pupils,  particularly  in  singing,  to  mispronounce 
this  vowel,  giving  to  it  the  closing  sound  of  the 
Italian  i.  This  is  an  error  which  should  be  care- 
fully avoided.  Prolong  the  e  as  much  as  you  like, 
but  always  give  the  same  sound  from  the  beginning 
to  the  end.     Say  pe-e-e-e-ne,  but  never  ^e-e-e-i-ne. 

I  like  the  ee  in  feet ;  as,  Jine,  vino. 

0,  as  pronounced  in  English,  has  a  terminal  sound 
of  the  Itahanw;  thus,  no  is  really  pronounced  in 
English  no-u;  or,  expressed  in  English  sounds,  no-oo. 
The  Italian  o  is  pronounced  precisely  like  the  first 
part  of  the  English  o,  without  the  teiTninal  sound  oiu. 
Pronounce  roll,  and  stop  on  the  middle  of  the  word, 
and  it  is  i:)recisely  the  Italian  o.* 

B^  When  0  is  preceded  by  i  or  w,  it  is  slightly  more  prolonged  and 
open,  but  has  never  the  closing  sound  of  the  u  ;  aB,fidret  cuore,  piove. 

U  like  the  oo  in  root ;  as,  fane,  rujje. 
CONSONANTS. 

C  or  g  followed  by  a,  o,  or  u,  are  pronounced  as 
in  Englisli ;  but,  when  followed  by  e  or  i,  c  has  the 

*  For  wonls  with  a  double  moaning,  whose  real  significance  is  identified  by  the 
of  tills  vowel,  sec  list,  page  226. 


PRONUNCIATION.  3 

Bound  of  ch  in  cherry ;  as,  cenaj  cima,  and  g  the 
sound  of  g  in  gem  ;  as,  gemma,  giro. 

12^  The  hard  sound  of  ca,  co,  cu,  and  ^a,  ^^-0,  i;'M,  becomes  soft  by 
the  insertion  of  an  i;  as  the  soft  sound  of  ce,  ciy  and  ge,  giyheoome^ 
hard  by  the  insertion  of  an  h.    Thus,  they  are  expressed  : 

The  hard  sound  by  cOy  che,  chiy  cOy  cu;  gay  ghey  ghiy  gOy  gu. 

The  soft  sound  by  cihy  ce,  ci,  cioy  ciH  •  giay  gey  giygioy  giu. 

Gn  always  forms  one  syllable,  in  Italian,  and  has 
the  sound  of  m  in. poniard;  o^Sjignaro,  Signore. 

Gl  is  pronounced  as  in  English  except  before  i, 
when  it  has  the  sound  of  II  in  hrilliant ;  as,  figlio. 

S^"  Gli  has  the  English  sound  in  negligenzay  Angliay  Anglicano. 

H  has  no  sound  in  Italian;  it  is  only  used,  1.  To 
harden  the  soft  sound  of  c  and  g.  2.  To  prolong 
the  sound  of  the  interjections;  as,  ah  1  ahimel 
3.  As  a  mark  of  distinction  in  the  present  of  the 
verb  avere,  to  have. 

D  and  t  have  the  English  sound,  with  the  differ- 
ence that  in  Italian  they  have  a  softened  character, 
while  in  English  they  both  are  strongly  and  mark- 
edly associated  with  a  somewhat  explosive  force. 

Tt  or  del  have  the  sound  of  single  English  t  or  d. 

H  has  the  same  sound  as  in  English,  but  at  the 
end  of  a  syllable  it  is  always  heard  as  a  distinct  letter, 
being  aspirated  with  a  slight  snap  of  the  end  of  the 
tongue.  The  two  words  dardo  and  dado  can  never 
be  mistaken  in  their  pronunciation,  as  is  the  case  in 
English  with  the  words /ar^Aer  and  father,  because, 
while  in  English  the  r  is  often  pronounced  without 
a  ringing  close,  in  Italian  it  receives  its  full  sound, 
distinctly  showing  its  presence. 

8,  at  the  beginning  of  words,  has  the  hissing 
sound  as  in  English ;  as,  sano,  seno,  sine,  sono,  sudo 


i  PRONUNCIATION. 

S  between  two  vowels,  or  followed  by  h,  d,  r,  or  t?. 
is  pronounced  with  a  soft  sound,  somewhat  like  z  j 
as,  hose,  casa,  sbagliare,  sdegnare,  sradicare,  svolgere. 

5^*  S  retains  the  sharp,  hissing  sound,  1.  In  compound  words 
whose  primitive  is  a  word  commencing  with  s ;  as,  ri-sano.  2.  In 
words  with  the  pronoun  si  affixed  to  them  ;  as,  dice-si,  crede-si. 
3.  In  adjecti^  es  ending  in  oso,  osa,  osi,  ose  ;  as,  glorioso,  gloriosa. 

Sc  followed  by  e  and  t,  like  sh  ;  as,  sceriffo,  scisma. 

Zj  like  dz  in  all  words  which  have  z  in  the  English 
word  ;  as,  zona^  zone ;  gazetta,  gazette. 

It  is  pronounced  like  tz  when  preceded  by  I  or  r, 
or  followed  by  two  vowels,  and  in  nouns  ending  in 
zzo,  or  in  verbs  whose  infinitives  end  in  zzare;  as, 
colza,  forza,  grazia,  azi07ie,  ragazzo,  spazzo. 

It  has  nearly  the  sound  of  s  in  all  words  ending 
in  anza,  enza ;  as,  speranza,  penitenza. 

Single  consonants  are  generally  pronounced  soft ; 
as,  fato,  caro,  pena. 

Double  consonants  are  pronounced  in  one  sound, 
but  stronger  and  more  marked  than  when  single,  by 
dwelling  on  the  preceding  vowel,  and  pronouncing 
it  with  an  accent ;  thus,  fatto,  carro,  penna,  though 
forming  their  syllables  fat-to,  car-ro,  pen-na,  should 
be  pronounced  as  if  written  fd-tto,  cd-rro,  pe-nna. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

Diphthongs  are  short  and  long;  in  each  of  them 
the  vowels  must  be  distinctly  heard,  with  the  differ- 
«'nco  that  in  the  long  diphthong  each  vowel  is  dis- 
tinctly articulated,  as  if  making  a  syllable  for  itself; 
as,  E'U-rO'pa;  in  the  short  diphthong  both  vowels 
lire  pronounced  unitedly  and  quickly  ;  as,  guancia. 


ACCENT. 


Accent,  in  its  common  acceptation,  is  but  a  sign 
placed  over  syllables  to  show  that  they  must  bo 
uttered  more  forcibly  than  the  others.  The  Italians 
have  but  one  accent,  the  grave  (^),  which  is  gene- 
rally used  to  mark  the  distinction  between  words 
otherwise  written  alike :  as,  amOj  I  love ;  amo^  he 
loved ;  and  also  in  words  which  in  their  origin  were 
written  with  an  additional  syllable ;  as,  bontdj  virtu j 
instead  of  bontate,  virtute.  This  accent  is  limited  to 
vowels  at  the  end  of  a  few  words ;  yet  everv  word 
has,  in  Italian,  its  unwritten  accent,  1  >  every 

word  has  ^^owel  on  which  the  voice  must  chiefly 
dwell.  This  inflection  of  the  voice,  this  rhythmic 
accent,  being  the  most  marked  and  the  most  varied 
in  Italian,  is,  of  course,  the  most  difficult  to  be 
acquired  by  foreigners  who  are  not  in  immediate 
correspondence  with  natives,  because  harmony  can- 
not be  expressed  by  written  words,  and  yet  har- 
mony is  to  a  language  what  color  is  to  a  picture. 

It  is  true  that  the  vowels  have,  in  Italian,  an 
expressive  significance  :  that  the  open  sound  of  the 
a  and  o  naturally  expresses  strength  and  gravity ; 
the  meagre  sound  of  the  e  and  i,  meekness  and 
feebleness ;  the  obtuse  sound  of  the  u,  something 
sad  and  disagreeable;  and  that  these  vowels,  prop- 
erly modified  by  the  sounds  of  corresponding  con- 
sonants, make  the  language  eminently  expressive, 


6  ACCENT. 

and  so  flexible  as  to  give  to  the  words  a  distinctive 
character,  and  establish  an  immediate  analogy 
between  the  sounds  and  the  ideas ;  but  this  power 
of  expression,  as  in  the  words  rimbombarej  ulularCy 
rugire,  fulmine,  could  not  be  brought  to  its  height 
without  the  necessary  proportion  of  measure  in  the 
modulation  of  articulated  sounds. 

The  rhythmic  accent-should  be  considered  under 
two  different  aspects :  1,  as  a  means  to  give  signifi- 
cance to  a  word ;  2,  as  a  means  to  give  harmony  to 
a  word.  Take,  for  example,  the  word  ca-pi-to,  and 
pronounce  it,  giving  to  each  syllable  the  same  quan- 
tity, and  you  find  that  the  word  has  neither  meaning 
nor  harmony  ;  pronounce  it  as  if  with  an  accent  on 
the  first  vowel,  raise  the  voice  on  the  first  syllable, 
and  dwell  upon  it  during  the  time  occupied  by  the 
other  two  (cd-pi-to),  and  you  have  given  to  the  word 
a  pleasant  modulation,  and  the  meaning  of  I  arrive. 
Change  now  the  accent  from  the  first  to  the  second 
syllable,  give  to  it  the  quantity  of  the  first  and 
third  (cajj-i-to),  and  you  have  changed,  not  only  the 
harmony,  but  also  the  meaning  of  the  word,  which 
is  now  understood.  Then  pronounce  the  last  vowel 
as  if  it  were  accented,  give  to  the  last  syllable  the 
quantity  of  the  two  others  {cOrpi-to),  and  you  have 
given  to  the  word  a  new  harmony  and  a  new  mean- 
ing ;  viz..  He  arrived. 

To  the  above  example  another  may  be  added,  in 
the  word  ca-pi4a-no.  Pronounce  it  with  the  accent 
on  the  second  a,  as  ca-pi-td-no,  and  you  have 
expressed  the  word  captain.  Pronounce  it  with  the 
accent  on  the  first  a,  as  C(i-pi4a-no,  and  you  have 
changed  the  meaning  of  the  word  into  they  arrive. 


ACCENT.  7 

From  these  practical  illustrations,  it  may  be  seen 
that  the  purity  of  pronunciation,  in  Italian,  is  based 
on  the  principle  of  giving  to  the  accented  syllable  a 
certainj)ause^  occupying  in  utterance  nearly  the  same 
"length  of  time  as  that  given  to  the  others  together, 
as  if  the  meaning  of  the  word  were  contained  in 
^^^£inglo_sjllab]e^  '  Tlii^  is  obtained  by  dwelling 
on  the  accented  vowel  without  much  prolonging  it, 
and  emitting  the  others  rapidly  and  less  forcibly. 
The  accented  vowel  must,  therefore,  receive  more 
or  less  quantity,  according  to  the  number  of  sylla- 
bles contained  in  the  word.  Thus,  the  syllable  cd 
is  properly  shorter  in  cd-pi-to  than  in  cd-pi'ta-no^ 
because  in  the  former  there  are  but  two  follow- 
ing vowels,  while  in  the  latter  cd  is  more  pro- 
longed, because  followed  by  three  syllables,  which 
must  be  pronounced  in  the  same  length  of  time  as 
the  first. 

Monosyllables  and  dissyllables  cause  no  embarrass- 
ment.    Polysyllables  are  divided  into  four  classes  : 

1.  Parole  tronclie  (truncated  words),  ending  with 
accented  vowels ;  as,  scJiiavitu,  libertd. 

2.  Farolepiane  (smooth  words),  with  the  rhythmic 
accent  on  the  penultimate.  This  class  is  the  most 
numerous  in  the  language,  comprising  aU  the  infin- 
itives ending  in  are  and  ^Ve,  and  the  first,  second, 
and  third  persons  singular,  and  the  first  and  second 
plural  of  the  past  and  imperfect  tenses  of  all  verbs  ; 
as,  perdono,  cantarej  partire,  cantava,  cantai. 

3.  Parole  sdrucciole  (sliding  words),  with  the 
rhythmic  accent  on  the  antepenultimate,  comprising 
the  third  person  plural  of  the  past  and  imperfect  of 
all  verbs ;  as,  folgore,  amavano,  perdettero. 


5  ACCENT. 

4.  Parole  bisdrucciole  (more  sliding  words),  with 
the  accent  on  the  last  syllable  but  three ;  as,  dite- 
melOj  ordinano. 

The  predominance  of  words  belonging  to  each 
of  these  classes,  according  to  the  ideas  the  writer 
wishes  to  convey,  gives  to  the  expressions  a  flowing 
smoothness,  or  a  solemn  gravity. 

The  two  following  stanzas  from  Tasso  are  given 
with  the  object  of  exemplifying  the  different  influ- 
ences produced  by  their  rhytl^nic  construction. 

Teneri  sdegni  e  placide  e  tranquille 

Repulse  e  cari  vezzi  e  liete  paci, 

Sorrisi,  parolette  e  dolci  stille     • 

Di  pianto,  e  sospir  tronchi  e  moUi  baci ; 

Fuse  tai  cose  tutte,  e  poscia  unille, 

Ed  al  fuoco  tempro  di  lente  faci, 

E  ne  formo  quel  si  mirabil  cinto 

Di  ch'ella  aveva  il  bel  fianco  succinto. 

Gerus  lib.,  canto  16,  8«'«,  25 
Chiama  gli  abitator  delle  ombre  eterne 
II  rauco  suon  della  tartarea  tromba  ; 
Treman  le  spaziose  atre  cavern  e, 
E  I'aer  cieco  a  quel  rumor  rimbomba.    ,    , 
Ne  stridendo  giammai  dalle  superne 
Regioni  del  cielo  il  folgor  piomba ; 
Ne  si  scossa  giammai  trema  la  terra 
Quando  i  vapori  in  sen  gravida  serra. 

Gerus  lib.,  canto  4,  S*'",  3. 

The  number  of  the  vowels  e  and  i,  and  the  liquid 
sound  of  the  I,  make  the  first  stanza  smooth  and 
flowing.  The  predominance  of  the  a,  o,  and  r,  makes 
the  second  stanza  powerful  and  terrible.  The  first 
stanza  represents  the  girdle  of  a  beautiful  maid  ;  the 
second,  the  effect  of  the  sound  of  a  trumpet  to  call 
the  demons  to  councjl. 


READING  EXERCISE 


LA    ITALIA. 


QuAL  hdvvi  terra  che  il  s61e  illiimini  con  Idee  piii 
ser^na  o  che  riscdldi  con  piii  d61ce  tepdre  I  D(5ve  un 
pill  vfvido,  un  piu  piiro,  un  piu  spirabil  dere  si  espdnde  ? 
Dove  s6rgono  ruine  piii  famdse  e  piti  dtte  a  congiiin- 
gere,  ad  orndre,  a  rinforzdre  la  pres^nte  bellezza  coUe 
imdgini  della  passdta  pot^nza,  di  un'  antica  maestk,  di 
un  tempo  glorioso  invdno  dai  pdsteri  ai  loro  pddri  invi- 
didto  ?  A  qudl  pdrte  del  mdndo  fu  concediita  una  mag- 
gior  c(5pia  d^ingdgni,  ed  a  quest!  una  maggidr  attitiidine 
al  ragiondre  profdndo  e  al  delicdto  sentire  ?  D6ve  si 
pdrla  una  lingua  che  sia  piu  ricca  di  chidre  pardle  e  di 
mddi  elettissimi,  e  che  sfa,  c6me  la  ndstra  lo  e  mirabil- 
mente,  id6nea  ad  esprimere  1  piii  sublimi  pensieri  e  gli 
afiKtti  pill  teneri;  arrendevole  a  piegdrsi  ad  ogni  deside- 
rio,  ad  <5gni  bisdgno,  ad  6gni  volontk,  docile  a  trasc6r- 
rere  per  una  scdla  d'infiniti  grddi,  dalle  armonie  piti 
tenui  alle  piii  grdvi  e  solenni,  dai  piii  ddlci  sudni  ai  piii 
concitdti  e  veemdnti,  linico  vincolo  che  tuttavfa  con- 
gidnge  le  ndstre  membra  divise,  liltima  reliquia  di  una 
fratelldnza  temiita  e  spenta?     Qudl  mdi   hdvvi  ttJrra, 


10  READING  EXERCISE. 

c6me  la  Italica,  bagnata  da  diie  mdri;  incorondta  dalle 
Alpi,  irrigata  da  mille  fonti,  frequente  di  cittk  magni- 
fiche  e  di  amenissime  viUe,  6ra  stesa  in  verdi,  fecdnde, 
immense  pianiire,  dra  sorgente  in  cdlli  ridenti  per  dgni 
vaghdzza,  dra  eretta  in  ampie  catene  di  monti,  che  nel 
Idro  istdsso  selvdggio  drrore  mdstrano  infinite  bellezze, 
c  nelle  foreste  sterminate,  e  nei  gidghi  variamente  diru- 
pdti  ed  aggruppati,  e  nelle  valli  fortunate,  e  nelle  acque, 
ascorrdnti  in  rfvi  frdschi  e  mdlli,  o  romoreggianti  nei 
^"-tOrrdnti,  o  percaterdtte  balzdnti,  od  inlimpidi  laghi  chiiise 
e  riposate  ?  0  ItaMni,  prostrdtevi,  venerate  questa 
sdcra  terra  che  vi(ie  sdpra  sd  cdrrere  tdnti  nemici,  tdnti 
stranidri,  tdnte  cruddli  fazidni,  e  tante  guerre  combdt- 
tersi,  e  tdnti  incdndi,  tdnte  mdrti,  tdnti  tradimdnti,  tdnte 
rapine  commdttersi,  e  pur  sdmpre  rimdse  bdlla,  vagheg- 
gidta,  desiderdta  I  Ma  bacidndo  qudsta  cldssioa  tdrra, 
cercdte  in  dssa  con  riverdnza  le  vestigia  che  i  vdstri 
maggidri  v'  imprdssero,  e  segiiitele. 
;^<^       ■  -'-^  .:^' 

(  "^J  '  •    -r         ^  ..    .•   '      '  C , 

5^  The  following  wffrds  snould  be  carefully  pronounced  and  com. 
mitted  to  memory. 


Ugly .  Brutto. 

Why Chi. 

House Casa. 

So Cost  or  si. 

Sister-in-law    .   .   .  Cognata. 

Brother-in-law.    .    .  Copnato. 

Easy Facile. 

Handkerchief  .   .   .  Fazzoletto. 

Wide Largo. 

Husband Mariio. 


Not JSTo. 

Poor Povero. 

Possible    ....  Possibile. 

Looking-glass,     .  Specchio. 

Same Stesso. 

Dear Caro. 

To  spend  ....  Passare. 

Next Venturo. 

As Poiche. 

Good  morning  .   .  Buon  giorno 


PARTS   OF   SPEECH. 


LESSON   I. 


NOUNS. 

1.  Nouns,  in  Italian,  have  two  Genders,  —  the 
Masculine  and  the  Feminine. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  a  are  feminine ;  as,  JDonna, 
woman ;  penna,  pen. 

Exceptions. 

1.  Proper  names,  and  nouns  expressing  rank,  titles,  and,  profes- 
sions of  men  ;  as,  Petrarca,  Petrarch  ;  Papa,  Pope  ;  DucUf  Duke  ; 
Profeta,  Prophet. 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  ma  derived  from  the  Greek  ;  as.  Climax  cli- 
mate ;  idioma,  idiom  ;  poema,  poem. 

N.  B.  —  See  list  of  masculine  nouns  ending  in  a,  page  223. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  o  are  masculine ;  as,  UomOj 
man ;  other o,  tree. 

Exceptions. 

1.  Proper  names  of  women  ;  as,  Saffo^  Sappho  ;  Calipso,  Calypso  ; 
Aletto,  Alecto. 

2.  The  words  eco,  echo,  and  mano,  hand. 

3.  Nouns  abbreviated  in  poetry  ;  as.  Dido,  Dido,  instead  of 
Didone  ;  imago,  image,  instead  of  imagine. 

4.  Nouns  ending  in  e  are  either  masculine  or 
feminine.  Nouns  appropriate  to  women,  and  those 
ending  in   ie.  tone,  dine,  and  gine,  are   generally 


12  NOUNS. 

feminine  ;  as,  Nutrice,  nurse  j  superficie,  surface ; 
lezione,  lesson ;  ancudine^  anvil ;  origine,  origin ; 
colazione,  breakfast. 

5.  Nouns  ending  in  me,  re,  ente,  are  masculine. 

Exceptions.  —  Famey  hunger  ;  spemey  hope  ;  febhrey  fever  ;  col- 
trey  coverlet ;  polvere^  dust ;  scnrcy  axe  ;  torrcy  tower  ;  gentCy  peo- 
ple ;  mente,  mind  ;  sorgentCy  spring  ;  corrente,  current. 

Observation.  —  Pupils  acquainted  with  Latin  or  French  will  find 
no  difficulty  in  ascertaining  the  gender  of  nouns  ending  in  e.  Those 
which  come  under  no  given  rule  will  be  found  in  the  examples  of  the 
following  lessons,  with  the  article  prefixed. 

6.  Nouns  ending  in  i  are  feminine. 

Exceptions.  —  Barbagianniy  owl ;  ecclissi,  eclipse  ;  party  peer  ; 
brindisiy  toast ;  Tamigiy  Thames  ;  diy  day,  with  its  compounds. 

7.  Nouns  ending  in  u  are  feminine. 

Exceptions.  —  GesUy  Jesus  ;  PerUy  Peru  ;  raguy  ragout. 

Observation.  —  Nouns  ending  in  a  and  u  retain  their  feminine 
gender  when  to  these  terminations  are  added  de  in  prose,  and  te  in 
verse ;  e.  g.,  Bonta,  virtuy  are  always  of  the  feminine  gender,  even 
when  written  bontatCy  virtutey  or  bontadey  virtude. 

N.  B.  —  No  nouns  in  the  Italian  language  end  in  unaccented  u. 


Pupils  should  commit  to  memory  the  following  nouns,  and  ascer- 
tain their  gender  by  the  above  rules. 


VOCABULARY. 

Axe      y  Scure. 

Brass Rame. 

Butter Burro. 

Candlestick     .    .   .    Candeliere. 

Chair Sedia. 

Cheese Cacio. 

Coat Abito. 

Fever 4*«  Febbre. 

Flower Fiore. 

Fork Forchclla. 


Glass  (drinking)  Bicchiere. 

Heart Cuore. 

Knife Coltello. 

Oil Olio. 

Spoon Cucchiaio, 

Sitgar Zucchero. 

Table Tavola. 

Vinegar    ....  Aceto. 

Water Acqua. 

Wine     ....  Fino. 


DEFINITE  ARTICLE.  13 


LESSON   II. 


THE   ARTICLE. 

8.  There  are  in  Italian,  as  in  English,  two  Arti- 
cles,— the  Definite  and  the  Indefinite. 

OF  THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

9.  The  definite  article,  which  in  English  is  em- 
ployed only  to  limit  the  noun,  has,  in  Italian,  two 
uses  :  —  1,  It  limits  the  noun ;  and,  2,  It  shows  the 
gender  and  number  of  the  noun. 

10.  The  definite  article  the  is  expressed  in  Italian 
by  ilj  lo,  and  la. 

11.  i7  is  placed  before  nouns  of  the  masculine 
gender  beginning  with  any  consonant  except  z  or 
s  impure,  i.  e.,  s  followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  II 
libro,  the  book ;  il  vinOj  the  wine ;  il  saUj  the  salt. 

12.  Lo  is  used  before  masculine  nouns  beginning 
with  2,  s  impure,  or  a  vowel,  in  which  latter  case  it 
drops  the  o  and  takes  an  apostrophe ;  as,  Lo  zio^ 
the  uncle ;  lo  spirito,  the  spirit ;  VamicOj  the  friend. 

13.  La  is  used  before  feminine  nouns ;  as.  La 
spada,  the  sword ;  la  carta,  the  paper. 

Observation.  —  This  feminine  form  loses  the  a  and  takes  an  apos- 
trophe when  the  noun  begins  with  a  vowel ;  as,  L'anima,  Verba. 

N.  B.  —  The  vowel  is  retained  before  names  of  countries  and  king- 
doms ;  as,  La  America^  la  Italia. 


u 


DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


/o     .    .    . 

.   .    .  I. 

JsToi   .   .   . 

.   .    Wc 

Tu      .   . 

.   .   .  Thou. 

Voi    .   .   , 

.   .  You. 

Egli.     . 

.   .   .  He. 

Eglino  .    . 

.   .  They,  m 

Ella  .    . 

.   .   .  She. 

Elleno  .   . 

.   .  They,/. 

Eszo  .    . 

.   .   .  He  or  it 

Essi  .   .   . 

.   .  They. 

AUXILIARY  VERB  AVERE,  TO  HAVE. 

PBESENT. 

Ho I  have.  I        Abbiamo  ...    We  have. 

Hai Thou  hast      i        Avete    ....    You  have. 

Ha He  has.  Hanno     .   .   .    They  have. 

N.  B.  —  Let  the  pupil  here  commit  to  memory  the  conjugation  of 
the  entire  verb.     (See  page  197.) 


14.  In  an  affirmative  sentence  the  verb  follows 
its  subject,  and  must  agree  with  it;  as,  lo  hOj  I  have ; 
vol  avete,  you  have ;  egli  avrd,  he  shall  have. 

15.  To  form  a  negative  sentence,  non  is  placed 
before  the  verb  ,*  as,  lo  non  ho,  I  have  not ;  voi  non 
avete,  you  have  not;  egli  non  avrd,  he  shall  not 
have. 

16.  To  form  an  interrogative  sentence,  the  sub- 
ject, whether  a  noun  or  a  pronoun,  must  be  placed 
after  the  verb;  as,  Ho  to?  Have  I? — Avete  voi? 
Have  you? — Avrd  egli ?    Shall  he  have ? 

17.  An  interrogative  negative  sentence  is  formed 
by  placing  non  before  the  verb,  and  the  subject 
after  it;  as,  Non  Jio  to?  Have  I  not? — Non  avete 
voi?  Have  you  not? — Non  avrd  egli?  Shall  he  not 
have  ? 


DEFINITE   ARTICLE.  15 


VOCABULARY. 


And E* 

Bi-ead     .   .   .   .  I J  Pane. 

But Ma. 

Coffee      Caffe. 

Honor Onore. 

Madam       ....  Signora. 

Milk Latte. 

Miss Signorina. 

Mr.  or  Sir  .   .    .   .  Signore. 

No JSTo. 


Odious Odioso. 

Or      O. 

Passion      ....  Passione. 

Penknife    ....  Temperino„ 

Pepper Pepe. 

Salt Sale. 

Soldier Soldato. 

Star Stella. 

Tea Te. 

Yes Si. 


*  If  followed  by  a  vowel,  Ed. 


EXAMPLES. 

I  have  the  bread.  lo  ho  il  pane. 

Have  you  the  tea  ?  Avete  voi  il  te  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  not  the  tea.  JVb»  Signore,  io  non  ho  il  ie. 

Has  he  the  milk  ?  Ha  egli  il  latte  ? 

He  has  the  milk  and  the  coflfee.  Egli  ha  il  latte  ed  il  caffe. 

lie  has  not  the  pepper.  Egli  non  ha  il  pepe. 

Have  you  the  salt?  Avete  voi  il  sale ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  not  the  salt.  JVo,  Signore,  io  non  ho  il  sale 

Have  you  not  the  knife  ?  JVoti  avete  voi  il  coltello  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  the  knife.  Si,  Signore,  io  ho  il  coltello. 


EXERCISE  I. 

Have  you  the  bread  ?  I  have  the  bread.  Have  you  not  the 
butter  ?  No,  sir  ;  I  have  not  the  butter.  Has  he  the  cheese  ? 
He  has  not  the  cheese.  Have  you  not  the  water  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  we 
have  the  water.  Have  they  not  the  wine  ?  No,  sir  ;  they  have 
not  the  wine.  Hast  thou  not  the  tea  ?  I  have  not  the  tea. 
Have  you  the  coffee  ?  No,  sir  ;  I  have  not  the  coffee ;  they  have 
the  coffee.  Have  they  the  sugar  ?  They  have  not  the  sugar. 
Have  you  not  the  milk?  I  have  not  the  milk.  Has  he  the 
pepper  ?  He  has  the  pepper  and  the  salt.  Has  he  not  the  vin- 
egar ?  No,  he  has  not  the  vinegar  ;  we  have  the  vinegar.  Have 
I  the  spoon?  No,  sir  ;  you  have  not  the  spoon.  Have  you  not 
the  knife  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  we  have  the  knife  and  the  fork.  Have 
they  the  water  or  the  wine  ?  They  have  the  water  and  the 
wine. 


16  FORMATION  OF  THE  PLURAL. 


LESSON   III. 


FORMATION    OF    THE    PLURAL, 

PLURAL  OP  NOUNS. 

18.  Masculine  Nouns  form  their  plural  by  chang 
ing  the  final  vowel  of  the  singular  into  i;  as, 


Papa Pope. 

Vino Wine. 

Sale Salt. 


Papi Popes. 

Vini Win^ 

Sali Salts.* 


19.  Feminine  nouns  ending  in  a  form  their  plu- 
ra;l  by  changing  the  a  into  e  ;  as, 

Donna Woman.    I     Donne Women. 

Penna Pen.  j     Penne Pens. 

20.  Feminine  nouns  ending  in  o  and  e  form  their 
plural  by  changing  these  vowels  into  i  ;  as, 

Mano Hand.        1     Manx Hands. 

Madre Mother.     |     Madri Mothers. 

21.  Monosyllabic  nouns,  and  nouns  ending  in  t,  te, 
or  with  an  accented  vowel,  are  invariable.  Their 
plural  is  determined  by  the  article ;  as. 


lire The  king. 

II  barhagianni .    .  The  owl. 

La  specie    ....  The  kind. 

La  tirtU     ....  The  virtue. 

La  citta The  city. 


I  re The  kings. 

/  barbagianni  .  The  owls. 

Le  specie  .   .   .  The  kinds. 

Le  virtu    .   .   .  The  virtues. 

Le  cilta     .   .   .  The  cities. 


FORMATION  OP  THE  PLURAL.  17 

22.   The  following  nouns  are  irregular  in  their 
r)lural : 


Uomo Man. 

Bio God. 

£ue Ox. 

Moglie Wife. 

Mille Thousand. 


Uomini  ....  Men. 

Dei Gods. 

Buoi Oxen. 

Mogli Wives. 

Mila Thousands. 


23.  When  several  nouns  of  different  gender  and 
number  follow  each  other,  the  appropriate  form  of 
the  article  must  be  placed  before  each  ;  as, 

II  padre,  la  madre,  ifanciulli  e  le  fanciuUe. 
The  father,  mother,  boys  and  girls. 


PLURAL  OF  THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

24.  The  plural  of  il  is  i;  as, 

/  libri     ....    The  books.       |      /  vini  .....   The  wines. 

25.  The  plural  of  ?o  is  gli;  as, 

Lo  zecchino    .   .    The  sequin,    j     Gli  zecchini     .  The  sequins. 
Lo  spirito    .   .   .    The  spirit.     I     Gli  spiriti     .   .  The  spirits. 

N.  B.  —  Before  nouns  commencing  with  an  i^  gli  loses  the  i,  and 
takes  an  apostrophe  ;  as, 

GV  idioti  ....    The  idiots.    |     GV  ignoranti   .  The  ignorants. 

26.  The  plural  of  la  is  le,  which  drops  the  e  when 
the  noun  following  it  begins  with  an  e  ;  as, 

Le  spade  ....    The  swords.    I      Le  carte    .   .   .    The  papers. 
Le  anime     .   .    .    The  souls.*     I      L'erbe  ....    The  herbs. 

N.  B.  —  This  vowel  is,  however,  retained  in  the  plural  of  invariable 
nouns  commencing  with  c  ;  thus, 

i'da,  Vereditaj  are  singular  nouns. 
Le  eta,  le  eredita,  are  plural  nouns. 

2 


18 


FORMATION  OF  THE  PLURAL. 


VOCABULARY. 


Bird Uccello. 

Book Libro. 

Boot Stivale. 

Cat Gaiio. 

Dictionary   .   .   .  Dizionario. 

log Cane. 


English 
French 
Grammar 
Hat  .   .   . 


Inglese. 
Francese. 
Grammaiica. 
Cappello. 


Ink  .  . 
Inkstand 
Man  .  . 
Neither  . 
Nor  .  . 
Umbrella 
Paper  . 
Pen  .  . 
Shoe  .  . 
Slipper  . 


Inchiosiro. 

Calamaio 

Uomo. 

JVon,  ne.* 

JVe. 

Omhrello. 

Carta. 

Penna. 

Scarpa. 

Pianella, 


*  Non  before  the  verb,  ni  after  it. 


EXAIilPLES. 


Have  yoTi  the  knives  ? 

I  have  neither  the  knives  nor  the 
forks. 

Has  the  Englishman  the  pen- 
knife and  the  pens  ? 

He  has  the  penknife,  but  he  has 
not  the  pens. 

Have  you  the  glass  ? 

No,  sir  ;  I  have  not  the  glass. 

I  have  the  boot. 


Avete  voi  i  coltelli  ? 

lo  non  ho  ne  i  coltelli  ne  le  for- 

chetie. 
Ha   V Inglese  il    temper ino  e    le 

penne ? 
Egli  ha  il  temperino,  ma  egli  noA 

ha  le  penne. 
Avete  voi  il  bicchiere  ? 
JVo,  signore;  lo  non  ho  il  bicchiere. 
lo  ho  lo  stivale. 


EXERCISE  II. 
Have  you  the  books  ?  I  have  not  the  books.  Have  you  the 
pens?  I  have  the  pens.  Has  he  not  the  paper ?  He  has  the 
paper  and  the  ink.  Have  you  not  the  knives?  We  have  tho 
knives,  but  we  have  not  the  forks.  Have  they  not  the  tables? 
They  have  neither  the  chairs  nor  the  tables.  Have  I  the  look- 
ing-glass ?  You  have  the  looking-glass.  Hast  thou  the  hats  ? 
I  have  not  the  hats.  Have  I  not  the  oil  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  you  have 
the  oil.  Has  the  Frenchman  the  paper  or  the  ink?  He  has 
neither  the  paper  nor  the  ink,  birt  he  has  the  knives  and  the 
forks.  Has  he  the  glass  ?  He  has  neither  the  glass  nor  the 
water.  Have  you  the  coats  ?  No,  sir  ;  we  have  not  the  coats. 
Have  you  the  umbrellas?  Yes,  sir;  we  have  the  umbrellas. 
Have  the  English  the  boots  and  slippers  ?  They  have  the  boots 
and  the  shoes,  but  they  have  not  the  slippers. 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


19 


LESSON    IV. 


POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

27.  Possessive  Pronouns  are  preceded  by  tlie 
definite  article,  and  agree  in  gender  and  number, 
not  with  the  possessor,  as  in  English,  but  with  the 
object  possessed; 


It  suomroiZt^^ 


Lamapenna^^^/^^ 


POSSESSIVE 

PRONOUNS. 

MASCULINE. 

FEMININE. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

•My  .   . 

.    iZ  mio 

/  mie.i. 

La  mia 

Le  mie. 

Thy.   . 

.    II  tuo 

ItuoL 

La  tua 

Le  tue. 

His,  her 

.    II  suo 

I  suoi. 

La  sua 

Le  sue. 

Our  .    . 

.    II  nostro 

I  nostri. 

La  nostra 

Le  nostre. 

Your    . 

.    .    II  vostro 

I  vosiri. 

La  vostra 

Le  vostre. 

Their   .   . 

.     Illoro 

I  loro. 

La  loro 

Le  loro. 

28.  Possessive  pronouns  take  no  article  (loro 
excepted)  when  immediately  followed  by  a  noun  in 
the  singular  expressing  rank  or  kindred. 

Your  son Vostro  figlio. 

His  brother Suo  fratello. 

Your  lordship Sua  signoria. 

Their  brother H  loro  fratello. 

N.  B.  —  The  article  must  be  used  if  the  pronoun  follows  the  noun  ; 
if  the  noun  is  used  in  the  plural,  or  in  a  diminutive  form  ;  if  pre- 
ceded by  the  words  Signore,  Signora^  Signorinay  or  by  any  adjec- 
tive ;  as. 

My  brothers /  miei  fratelli. 

Your  brothers /  vostri  fratelli. 

My  little  brother II  mio  fratellino. 

My  brother II  fratello  mio. 


20 


POSSESSIVE   PRONOUXS. 


VOCABULARY. 


American  ....  Americano. 

Brother Fratello. 

Daughter  ....  Figlia. 

Enemy JVemico. 

Father Padre. 

Friend Amico. 

Glove Guanto. 

Horse Cavallo. 

Italian Italiano. 

Life    ....        .  Vita. 


Mother 
Moon  . 
Nation  . 
Pencil  . 
Picture 
Rich  .  . 
Remorse 
Sister  . 
Son  .  . 
Work    . 


.  Madre. 

.  Luna. 

.  JVazione. 

.  LapiSf  maiita 

.  Quadro. 

.  Hicco. 

.  Rimorso. 

.  Sorella. 

.  Figlio. 

.  LavorOf  opera. 


Has  my  sister  her  book  ? 

My  sister  has  her  book  and  her 

pen. 
Have  your  friends  my  dog  ? 
No,  sir;  they  have  not  your  dog, 

but  they  have  your  flowers. 
Has  my  brother  their  birds  ? 
He  has  your  cat,  but  he  has  not 

their  birds. 


EXAMPLES. 

Ha  mia  sorella  il  suo  libro  ? 
Mia  sorella  ha  il  suo  librOy  e  la  sua 

penna. 
Hanno  i  vostri  amici  il  mio  cane  ? 
JVb,  signore;  essi  non  hanno  il  vostro 

cane,  ma  essi  hanno  i  vostri  fiori. 
Ha  mio  fratello  i  loro  uccelli. 
Egli  ha  il  vostro  gatlo,  ma  egli 

non  ha  i  loro  uccelli. 


EXERCISE  III. 
Have  you  my  pen?  No,  sir ;  I  have  not  your  pen.  Have  you 
not  my  book  ?  I  have  neither  your  books  nor  your  pens.  Have 
I  not  your  pencil  ?  No,  sir  ;  my  sister  has  my  pencil.  Has  my 
friend  your  penknife  ?  He  has  not  your  penknife.  Have  they 
not  his  handkerchief?  They  have  not  his  handkerchief.  Have 
your  brothers  my  flowers  ?  No,  sir  ;  they  have  not  your  flowers. 
Has  your  sister  my  gloves  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  she  has  your  gloves  and 
your  pencil.  Has  he  my  paper  ?  He  has  not  your  paper.  Have 
they  your  chair?  They  have  not  your  chair.  Has  your  mother 
my  birds?  Yes,  miss  ;  she  has  your  birds.  Has  my  sister  your 
picture  ?  No,  sir ;  she  has  not  your  picture.  Has  he  not  my 
hat  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  he  has  your  hat  and  your  gloves.  Have  your 
friends  my  horse?  No,  sir  ;  they  have  not  your  horse,  but  they 
have  your  dog.  Has  my  mother  your  pencil  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  she  has 
my  pencil,  your  dictionary,  and  their  grammar. 


ARTICLES   AFFIXED    TO   PREPOSITIONS.  21 


LESSON   V. 


ARTICLES  AFFIXED   TO  PREPOSITIONS. 

29.  The  Articles  are  aflSxed  to  certain  preposi- 
tions, with  the  change,  omission,  or  addition  of  somo 
letters. 

30.  The  prepositions  most  commonly  joined  to 
the  articles  are,  c?i,  of;  a,  to ;   da^  from ;  per^  for 
con,  with ;  in,  in ;  su,  on,  upon. 


of"'^  Lot 

Singular 

MASCULINE. 

del      dello 

di  il           di  In 

FEMININE. 

della 

dila 

Plural. 

MASCULINE.                FEMININK 

del     degli      delle 

di  i        di  gli           di  le 

At5         ^  not 

al 

ail 

alio 

a  lo 

alia 

a  la 

ai 

a  i 

agli 

a  gli 

alle 

ale 

Fromthe^^^^ 

dal 

dail 

dallo 

da  lo 

dalla 

da  la 

dai 

dai 

dagli 

da  gli 

dalle 

dale 

For  the    \^^, 

pel 

per  il 

pello 

per  lo 

pella 

per  la 

pel 

peri 

pegli 

per  gli 

pelle 

per  le 

With  the  5      , 
^  not 

col 

con  il 

coUo 

con  lo 

colla 

con  la 

coi 

con  i 

cogli 

con  gli 

colle 

con  le 

In  the      \      , 

I  not 

nel 

in  il 

nello 

in  lo 

nella 

in  la 

71  ei 

in  i 

negli 

in  gli 

nelle 

in  le 

On  the     \      , 
I  not 

Sid 

suil 

sidlo 

su  lo 

sulla 

su  la 

sui 

su  i 

sugli 

su  gli 

sulle 

su  le 

N.  B.  —  The  above  prepositions  may  be  separated  from  the  article, 
except  con  il,  con  i.  — When  the  article  is  separated  from  per^  lo  and 
gli  must  be  used,  and  never  il  or  i. 


22 


ARTICLES   AFFIXED   TO   PREPOSITIONS. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS  WITH  NOUNS. 


My,  our 
Of  my,  of  our 
To  my,  to  our 
From  my,  from  our 


book. 


E  miOy  il  nostro 
Del  miOf  del  nostro 
Al  mio,  al  nostro 
Dal  miOy  dal  nostro 


libra. 


Mj,  our 
Of  my,  of  our 
To  my,  to  our 
From  my,  from  our 

My,  our 

Of  my,  of  our 

To  thy,  to  our 

From  his,  from  their 


books. 


pen. 


/  miei,  i  nostri 
Dei  mieiy  dei  nostri 
Ai  mieiy  ai  vostri 
Dai  mieiy  dai  nostri 

La  miuy  la  nostra 
Delia  mitty  della  nostra 
Alia  tuay  alia  nostra 
Dalla  sutty  dalla  loro     ; 


libri 


>  penna. 


My,  our 

Of  my,  of  our 

To  thy,  to  your 

From  his,  from  their  ^ 


pens. 


Le  mie,  le  nostre 
Delle  miCy  delle  nostre 
Alle  tuCy  alle  vostre 
Dalle  sue,  dalle  loro 


penne. 


31.  The  name  of  the  thing  possessed,  followed  by 
the  preposition  dl,  always  precedes  the  name  of  the 
possessor ;  as, 

John's  book,  II  libro  di  Giovanni. 


AUXILIARY  VERB  ESS  ERE  y  TO   BE. 


lo  sono  .    . 

.   .   ,    I  am. 

JVoi  siamo   . 

.   .  We  are. 

Tu  sei    ,   . 

.   .   .    Thou  art. 

Voi  siete  .   . 

.    .    You  ara 

E(/liB     .   . 

.   .   .    He  is. 

Eglino  sono 

.   .    They  are. 

N.  B.  —  The  pupil  is  required  to  be  thoroughly  acquainted  -with 
the  entire  conjugation  of  this  yerb.     (See  page  197.) 


ARTICLES  AFFIXED   TO   PREPOSITIONS. 


23 


VOCABULAEY. 


Bed Letto. 

Dish Piatto. 

Earth Terra. 

Handkerchief   .    .  Fazzoletto, 

Humanity      .    .    .  Umanita. 

Husbandman    ,   .  Agricoltore. 

Key Chiave. 

Meat Carne. 

Napkin Salvietta. 

Pianoforte     .   .    .  Pianoforte. 


Room Stanza 

Rose Rosa. 

Salad Insalata. 

Scourge     ....  Flagello. 

Store Bottega. 

Sun Sole. 

True   ......  Vero. 

Tyrant Tiranno 

Uncle Zio. 

Useful Utile. 


Is  the  key  on  the  table  ? 
The  meat  is  in  the  room. 
My  friend  has  my  brother's  piano- 
forte. 
Is  the  paper  in  the  book  ? 
Yes,  sir;  the  paper  is  in  the  book. 


EXAMPLES. 

E  la  chiave  sulla  tavola  ? 

La  carne  e  nella  stanza. 

II  mio  amico  ha  il  pianoforte  dt 

mio  fratello. 
E  la  carta  nel  libra. 
Si,  signore  ;  la  carta  e  nel  libra 


EXERCISE  IV. 
Has  my  brother  your  friend's  book  ?  He  has  neither  your 
friend's  book  nor  your  sister's  paper.  Have  I  your  keys?  No, 
sir  ;  you  have  not  my  keys,  but  you  have  my  father's  penknife. 
Have  they  not  my  daughter's  handkerchiefs  ?  No,  sir  ;  they  have 
not  your  daughter's  handkerchiefs.  Has  my  sister  your  nap- 
kin? Your  sister  has  not  my  napkin.  Are  the  books  on  the 
table  ?  The  books  are  on  the  table  in  your  room.  Your  enemy 
has  my  brother's  knife.  Have  they  my  key  ?  No,  sir ;  they 
have  not  your  key,  but  they  have  your  friend's  key.  Is  my 
brother  in  your  room  ?  No,  sir :  your  brother  is  in  my  brother's 
room.  Have  you  the  salad '?"  1  have  neitner  the  salad  nor  the 
vinegar.  Has  your  daughter  my  gloves?  My  daughter  has 
your  gloves  and  your  handkerchief.  Have  you  the  water  or  the 
wine  ?  I  have  the  water  and  the  wine.  Has  my  brother  the 
bread  ?  My  brother  has  neither  the  meat  nor  the  bread.  The 
paper  is  in  my  brother's  book,  and  the  book  is  in  my  sister's 
room  on  the  table.  Have  you  not  their  pictures  ?  Yes,  sir ;  I 
have  their  pictures  and  your  pencU. 


24  QUALIFYING    ADJECTIVES. 


LESSOK"   VI, 


ADJECTIVES. 

82.   Adjectives  in  Italian  are  variable,  and  agree 
with  their  nouns  in  gender  and  number. 


QUALIFYING    ADJECTIVES. 

33.  Adjectives  ending  in  o  are  masculine ;  as, 

Uomo  virtuoso  ed  onesio.     Man  virtuous  and  honest. 

34.  Adjectives  ending  in  a  are  feminine ;  as, 

Donna  hella  e  sincera.     Woman  beautiful  and  sincere. 

35.  Adjectives  ending  in  e  are  of  either  gender;  as, 

Uomo  gentile  ed  affahile      .     .     .  Man  gentle  and  affable. 
Donna  gentile  ed  affabile    .     .     .  Woman  gentle  and  affable. 

36.  Adjectives  ending  in  o  become  feminine  by 
changing  the  o  into  a  ;  as, 

Uomo  virtuosOy  povero.     Donna  virtuosa,  povera. 

PLURAL  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

37.  Adjectives  ending  in  o  change  this  vowel 
into  t;  as,  Uomini  virtuosi,  poveri. 

38.  Adjectives  ending  in  a  change  this  vowel  into 
3  ;  as,  Donne  virtuose,  povere. 

39.  Adjectives  ending  in  e  change  it  into  i ;  as, 

Uomo  or  donna  cortese.     Uomini  or  donne  cortesi. 

40.  Adjectives  ending  in  ca  and  ga  have  che  and 
gJie  in  the  plural ;  thus,  lunga,  ricca,  make  lunghe, 
ricche. 


QUALIFH^'G   ADJECTIVES.  25 

41.  Adjectives  of  two  syllables,  ending  in  co  und 
go  J  take  clii  and  ghi  in  the  plural ;  thus,  ricco,  lungOj 
make  ricchi,  lunghi. 

42.  Adjectives  of  more  than  two  syllables,  ending 
in  CO  and  go,  take  no  7i,  except  antico,  ancient,  and 
sollngo,  solitary,  which  become  anticlii,  solingJii. 

N.  B.  —  The  following  adjectives  may  insert  or  reject  the  h : 
PubblicOf  public  ;  pratico,  skilful ;  mendico,  begging  ;  analogOy  anal- 
ogous ;  sofisticOj  sophistical ;  selvaticoy  Ycild  ;  siiticOy  peevish. 

43.  The  adjectives  hello,  grande,  santo,  lose  the 
last  vowel,  and  take  an  apostrophe  when  followed 
by  a  noun  commencing  with  a  vowel,  and  drop  the 
last  syllable  when  followed  by  any  consonant, 
except  z  or  impure  s. 


Bello  specchio 
Beir  anello 
Bel  libro 


Grande  storico 
Grand'  uomo 
Gran  ballo 


Santo  Stefano. 
SanV  Antonio. 
San  Vincenzo. 


N.  B.  —  The  plural  ofbel  is  bei  ;  that  of  bello  is  begli :  Bei  libri  ; 
begli  specchi.  Gran  is  used  for  both  masculine  and  feminine  singu- 
lar :  gran  ballo,  gran  casa. 

44.  Buono,  good,  drops  the  o  when  the  following 
noun  begins  with  a  consonant,  except  z  or  s  impure. 


45.  Adjectives  may  follow  or  precede  the  nouns. 

46.  Adjectives  of  two  syllables  generally  pre- 
cede the  noun. 

47.  Adjectives  of  more  than  two  syllables,  and 
adjectives  expressing  nationality,  color,  shape,  and 
taste,  or  those  preceded  by  molto,  much,  generally 
follow  the  noun ;  as. 

Libra  Francese.  I  Cappello  bianco.  I  Tavola  rotonda.  I  Uva  dolce. 
French  book.        |  White  hat.  I  Round  table.        |  Sweet  grapes. 


26 


QUALIFYING  ADJECTIVES. 


VOCABULARY. 


Beautiful Bcllo. 

Black JVero. 

Coach Carrozza. 

Courteous,  kind,  .    .  Cortese. 

Dress Veste. 

Fragrant Odoroso. 

Garden  .....  Giardino. 

Good Buono. 

Great,  large ....  Grande. 

Green Verde. 


Much,  very  .    .    .  Molto. 

Need Bisogno. 

Nun Monaca. 

Red Bosso. 

Roman  .....  Bomano. 

Sleeve Maiiica. 

Sweet Dolce. 

Virtue Virtu. 

"White Bianco. 

Yellow Giallo. 


EXAMPLES, 
father's    big    lo  ho 


I  have  your  good 
book. 

My  brother  has  the  white  hat. 

My  friend  has  my  sister's  beauti- 
ful horse. 

Have  you  the  English  dictionary  ? 

They  have  my  sister's  dress. 


il  gran   libro   del  vostrc 

buon  padre. 
Miofratello  ha  il  cappello  bianco. 
II  mio  arnica  ha  il  bel  cavallo  d% 

mia  sorella. 
Avete  voi  il  dizionario  Inglese? 
Essi  hanno  la  veste  di  mia  sorella. 


EXERCISE  V. 
Have  you  your  good  father's  black  coat?  I  have  not  his 
black  coat.  Are  your  sisters  in  my  brother's  coach  ?  They  have 
my  father's  beautiful  horses,  and  they  have  no  need  of  your 
brother's  coach.  You  are  very  kind,  sir.  Is  your  dictionary 
very  large?  No,  sir  ;  my  French  and  English  dictionary  is  not 
very  large,  but  my  friend's  dictionary  is  very  large.  Is  your 
sister's  dress  green  or  white?  My  sister's  dress  is  not  green. 
Have  you  the  white  gloves  with  you  ?  No,  sir  ;  my  white  gloves 
are  on  the  bed  in  my  brother's  room.  Have  they  not  my  red 
slippers?  Yes,  sir  ;  they  have  your  red  slippers  and  your  yellow 
shoos.  Is  my  friend's  red  wine  on  the  table?  No,  sir;  your 
friend's  wine  is  not  sweet,  and  we  have  no  need  of  his  wine  ;  we 
shall  have  my  good  friend's  white  wine.  My  mother's  yellow 
roses  are  not  fragrant.  Are  the  roses  of  your  garden  white  or 
red  ?  The  roses  in  myfgardcn  are  red ;  but  they  are  not  fra- 
grant. Has  not  my  friend  your  sister's  beautiful  picture?  My 
Bister's  picture  is  not  very  beautiful. 


VERBS.  27 


LESSON   VII, 


VERBS. 

48.  Italian  Yerbs  are  divided  into  three  classes 
or  conjugations,  whicli  are  known  by  the  termina- 
tion of  the  infinitive. 

49.  Infinitives  end  in  are,  ere,  ire. 

N.  B.  —  A  few  infinitives  which  do  not  end  in  either  of  these 
terminations  are  contractions  ;  as, 
Porre,  from  ponerCy  to  put ;  condurrCy  from  conducere,  to  conduct. 

50.  Infinitives  in  are  belong  to  the  first  conjuga- 
tion ;  as,  amare^  to  love  ;  cantarej  to  sing. 

51.  Infinitives  in  ere  belong  to  the  second  conju- 
gation ;  as,  joerdere,  to  lose  ;  ardere,  to  burn. 

52.  Infinitives  in  ire  belong  to  the  third  conjuga- 
tion ;  as,  partire,  to  depart ;  sentire,  to  hear. 

53.  Regular  verbs  are  conjugated  by  changing 
the  terminations  are^  ere,  ire,  of  the  infinitive,  into 
the  various  terminations  assigned  to  each  person  of 
all  the  tenses  of  each  conjugation. 


[FLECTION 

OF  A  REGULAR  VERB  OF  THE 

FIRST  CONJL 

GATION. 

AMJRE,  TO   LOVE. 

PRESENT, 

lo  amo      . 

.   .   .    Hove. 

JVbi  amiamo 

.    .    We  love. 

Tu  ami    . 

.   .   .    Thou  lovest. 

Vol  amate   . 

.   ,    Ye  love. 

Egli  arr.a 

...    He  loves. 

Essi  amano 

They  lovei 

See  pa 

ge  199. 

28  VERBS. 

54.  The  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  regular^ 
except  the  four  following  and  their  compounds: 
andare,  to  go ;  dare,  to  give; /are,  to  do ;  stare jto  stay. 

55.  Yerbs  ending  in  care,  gare,  take  an  h  after  the 
c  and  g,  whenever  these  consonants  are  followed  by 
i  and  e,  in  order  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  these 
letters ;  thus, 

Mancare.)       ,     (manchi^mancherOi')       .      ^  (manciy  mancero. 
_  >  make  A         ,.  ,     ^       r  ^^d  not  -^ 

56.  Verbs  ending  in  dare,  glare,  suppress  the  i 
of  the  root  before  e  and  i;  thus, 

Baciare.     ")       ,      (baciy  bacero,        ">        ,         r  bacii,  baciero. 

^makei  .  .    ^  and  not  J  ..  .    . 

Manffiare,)  {mangiy  manger Oy)  \mangiiy  mangier o. 

57.  Verbs  ending  in  gliare,  cliiare,  and  ghiare, 
drop  the  i  only  before  another  i ;  thus, 


Vegliarey 
Picchiare, 
Ragghiare, 


f  vegliy  veglieroy 
make  I  picchi,  picchieroy    \  and  not 
I  ragghiy  ragghiero. 


■  vegliiy  veglerh. 
picchii,  picchero. 
.  ragghiiy  ragghero. 


58.  The  past  participle  joined  to  the  verb  avere 
does  not  change  its  termination  to  agree  with  the 
subject,  but  joined  to  the  verb  essere  it  always 
agrees  with  the  subject. 

Mia  sorella  ha  avuio My  sister  has  had. 

Mia  sorella  t  stata My  sister  has  been. 

59.  There  is  in  Italian  but  one  present  tense 
which  expresses  both  a  present  action  and  the 
habit  of  repeating  the  same  action ;  as, 

I  am  writing,  or  I  write,  is  expressed  by  lo  scrivo. 


VERBS. 


28 


To  call  .   .  . 

Ji\j\jjn.jj 

That   ....    Che. 

Language .    . 
Harmonious  . 
Haughty   .    . 

.    .    .    Lingua. 
.   .   .    Armonioso. 
.   .    .    Altiero. 

To-morrow    .    Domani. 
To  think    .    .    Pensare. 
Truth     .    .    .     Verita. 
Undoubtedly .    IndubitatamenU 
Voice.   .   .   .     Voce. 
When     .    .   .    Quando. 

Reserved   .    . 
To  sinsT  •   •   • 

.   .   .    Riser vato. 

.     .     .      fln.nlnrp 

Small     .   .   . 

To  speak    .   . 
To  study    .   . 

,   .   .    Parlare. 
.   .   .    Studiare. 

Well   ....    £e7ie. 

Why  ?  because  Ferche  ?  perchL 

EXAM 

PLES. 

Is  my  sister's  voice  very  harmo- 
nious ? 

Where  shall  you  sing  to-morrow  ? 

Do  you  study  the  French  or  the 
English  language  ? 

Why  do  you  not  speak  French  ? 

Because  I  have  not  studied  much. 

E  la  voce  di  mia  sorella  violto 

armoniosa  ? 
Dove  canter ete  domani  ? 
Studiate  la  lingua  Francese  o  la 

lingua  Inglese  ? 
Perche  non  parlate  Francese  ? 
Perche  non  ho  studiato  molto. 

EXERCISE  VI. 

Why  is  your  sister  so  proud?  Because  she  sings  very  well. 
When  will  she  sing?  To-morrow.  Where?  At  my  father's 
house,  undoubtedly.  Why?  Do  you  sing?  Yes,  I  sing,  and 
my  voice  is  good  ;  but  I  am  not  proud.  Do  you  call  my  sister 
proud  because  she  is  reserved  ?  No,  I  do  not  call  your  sister 
proud  because  she  is  reserved,  but  because  she  thinks  that  her 
voice  is  rich  and  harmonious  ;  and  the  truth  is  that  her  voice  is 
Qot  very  harmonious.  Have  you  studied  the  French  language? 
Not  much.  Do  you  speak  Italian?  No,  sir.  Is  not  your  room 
very  small  ?  My  room  is  not  very  small.  Do  you  study  the 
English  language?  Yes,  sir ;  I  study  the  English  and  French 
languages.  Is  my  father  in  the  garden?  He  is  in  the  garden 
with  my  sister.  My  friend's  little  bird  sings  very  well.  Where 
are  my  gloves?  Your  gloves  are  in  my  brother's  room  on  his 
table.  Is  your  brother  in  his  room?  No,  sir  ;  he  is  not  in  his 
room,  and  I  have  not  the  key.  When  will  he  be  at  my  friend's 
house  ?    He  will  be  at  your  friend's  house  to-morrow. 


30  DEMONSTRATIVE  ADJECTIVES. 


LESSON   VIII 


DEMONSTRATIVE    ADJECTIVES. 

60.  Demonstrative  Adjectives  point  definitely  tc 
one  object,  or  to  several  of  the  same  kind. 

QuestOy      this.  Ciby  this  or  that  thing. 

'  I  that.  '         Y  same. 

QuellOy  )  MedesimOy ) 

61.  Questo  determines  an  object  near  to  or 
named  by  the  person  speaking  or  writing. 

62.  Cotesto,  an  object  near  to  the  person  spoken  to. 

63.  QuellOj  an  object  distant  both  from  the  per- 
son speaking  and  the  person  spoken  to. 

Observation,  —  Quello  is  used  only  with  nouns  commencing  with 
z  or  impure  s,  or  when  it  is  at  the  end  of  the  sentence.  Before  any 
other  consonant  it  makes  quely  and  before  a  vowel  quell'. 

Quello  specchio That  looking-glass, 

Questo  libra  o  quello This  book  or  that  one. 

Queir  amico That  friend. 

Quel  libra That  book. 

N.  B.  —  Questo  and  quello  are  often  used  as  relative  pronouns  in 
the  sense  of  the  latter  and  the  former.  In  this  case,  questo  invariably 
points  to  the  last-mentioned  object ;  as,  Voi  avete  il  coltellOy  ed  il 
temperino  ;  questo  e  buonOy  quello  e  catlivo.  Here  questo  has  reference 
to  temperinoy  and  not  to  coltello. 

64.  Cid  (invariable)  is  used  instead  of  questa^ 
quella,  or  cotesta  cosa,  this  or  that  thing,  or  what ;  in 
which  case  it  is  always  followed  by  cite;  thus^ 

Cib  eke  ia  scrivoy  what  I  write,         means  questa  casa  eke  io  tcrivo. 

Cio  che  tu  scrivi,  what  thou  writest,  means  cotesta  cosa  che  tu  scrivi. 
do  che  egli  scrivCy  what  he  writes,  means  quella  cosa  che  egli  scrivf 


DEMONSTRATIVE   ADJECTIVES. 


31 


VOCABULARY. 

Academy Accademia.    Industrious  Industrioso. 

Avaricious     .    .    .  •  Avaro. 

Carpet Tappeto. 

Close,  narrow  .   .   .  Stretto. 

Coward. Codardo. 

Day Giorno, 

Difficult Difficile. 

To  find Trovare. 

Happy Felice. 

How Come. 


Falsehood  Mcnzogna. 

Large  .    .  Largo. 

Lesson .    .  Lezione. 

Morning  .  Matiina^  mattino. 

Never  .    .  JVon ;  mai.* 

Song    .    ,  Canzone. 

Time    .    .  Tempo. 

To-day     .  Ogyi. 

Whimsical  Capriccioso,  bisbetic§ 

*  Non  before  the  verb,  and  mai  after  it. 


Is  this  your  grammar  ? 
Have  you  studied  the  lesson  ? 
Shall  you  sing  this  song  ? 
Is  that  pencil  your  brother's  ? 
I  have  this  book,  not  that. 


EXAMPLES. 

E  questa  la  vostra  grammatica  ? 
Avete  vol  studiato  la  lezione  ? 
Canterete  voi  questa  canzone  ? 
E  quel  lapis  di  vostra  fraiello  ? 
lo  ho  questo  libro,  non  quello. 


EXERCISE  VII. 
Is  this  my  brother's  dictionary  ?  Your  brother  does  not  study 
Italian.  This  is  not  his  book.  This  is  my  Italian  dictionary. 
Is  that  man  your  good  father's  friend  ?  My  father  has  never 
spoken  to  that  man,  and  he  has  never  been  his  friend.  Do  you 
find  your  French  song  difficult  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  find  the  French  lan- 
guage very  difficult.  When  vrill  you  sing  the  Italian  song? 
To-morrow.  I  am  poor,  but  you  are  avaricious  and  vrhimsical. 
Is  your  carpet  narrow  or  wide  ?  My  carpet  is  neither  narrow 
nor  wide,  because  I  have  no  carpet.  Have  you  studied  your  les- 
son ?  I  have  not  studied  my  lesson,  because  I  have  had  no  time. 
Shall  you  sing  with  my  sister  to-day  ?  Not  to-day.  Why  not  ? 
Becau»3  I  never  sing  when  she  sings.  When  shall  I  speak  to 
your  father  ?  To-morrow.  Where  shall  I  find  my  hat  ?  You 
will  find  your  hat  and  your  black  gloves  in  my  father's  room,  on 
the  little  table.  I  have  no  need  of  my  black  gloves.  Is  this 
your  father's  piano?  Yes,  sir  ;  this  piano  is  my  father's.  How 
does  your  friend  speak  the  French  language?  He  does  not  speak 
the  French  language  very  well.  Shall  you  sing  this  or  that 
flong  ?    I  shall  sing  this  song,  not  that. 


32  PERSONAL   PRONOUNS. 


LESSON   IX. 


PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

65.  Personal  Pronouns  are  words  used  instead 
of  nouns,  and  serve  to  designate  an  object  as  belong- 
ing to  the  first,  second,  or  third  person.    They  are, 

lo    tu       egli    ella    noi    vox    eglino    elleno     esso. 

I        thou      he         she        we        you      they,  m.    they,/.       he  or  it 

which  make,  in  the  objective  case, 

Me      te       lid      lei      noi      voi       loro       esso 

me        thee      him        her        us  you        them         him  or  it. 

66.  Personal  pronouns  have  the  objective  form 
in  the  relations  of  possession  (genitive),  attribution 
(dative),  and  derivation  (ablative). 

I,  lo.  He,  Eglu  She,  Ella. 

Of  me,       Dime.  Of  him,        Dilui.  Of  herself.      Disc. 

To  me,       A  me.  To  him,       A  lui.  To  herself,      A  se. 

From  me,  Da  me.  From  him.  Da  lui.  From  herself,  Da  se. 

67.  To  give  force  to  the  expression,  personal 
pronouns  are  often  followed  by  the  demonstrative 
adjectives  stesso  and  medesimo. 

Jo  stesso  pai  lai  a  vostro  padre    ...    I  myself  spoke  to  your  father. 
Essa  medesima  mando  il  libro    .   .   .    She  herself  sent  the  book. 

N.  B.  —  No  pronoun  is  prefixed  to  the  word  selfy  as  in  English. 
lo  stessoy  I  self,  and  not  lo  mestesso- 

68.  Se  is  used  only  for  the  third  person,  and  has 
reference  to  the  subject. 

Egli  parla  di  se He  speaks  of  himself. 

Ella  non  ama  che  se     ....    She  loves  but  herself. 


PERSONAL   PRONOUNS.  33 

69.  The  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  where  preceded  by 
the  preposition  C07i,  should  be  transposed  and  united 
with  the  elision  of  the  n.     Thus  : 

Con  me  "]  fmeco. 

Co7i  te     >  make  \  teco. 
Con  se   J  [seco. 

N.  B.  —  JVoscOt  voscOy  instead  of  co/i  noi,  con  voi,  are  obsolete. 

70.  Loro  in  the  dative  takes  no  preposition,  if 
placed  before  the  direct  object;  as, 

Date  loro  questo  libro.     Give  them  this  book. 

Loro  in  the  genitive  is  elegantly  placed  between 
the  noun  and  the  article  without  the  preposition;  as^ 

n  loro  libro.     Their  book,  or  the  book  of  them. 

71.  Instead  of  e??a,  Za  can  be  used. 

La  mi  vuol  bene.     She  loves  me. 

72.  Egli  and  ella  are  often  used  as  expletives  in 
the  sense  of  it. 

Egli  e  vero.  It  is  true. 

Ella  e  impossibile.     It  is  impossible. 

N.  B.  —  7/ ,  used  in  English  as  an  expletive,  is  generally  omitted 
in  Italian. 

E  vero.  It  is  true. 

E  impossibile.     It  is  impossible. 

73.  Esso  is  moreover  used  for  animate  and  inani 
mate  objects ;  and,  with  its  feminine  and~  plurals,  is 
elegantly  written  dessOj  after  the  verbs  esserCj  to  be, 
and  parere,  to  seem. 

Egli  e  desso.       It  is  he. 

Mi  par  dessa.    It  seems  to  be  she. 

Eran  desse,  qual  tu  sei,  sul  mattino  delV  eta. 

They  were,  as  thou  art,  in  the  morning  of  life. 


34 


PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 


VOCABULARY. 


Acute Acuta. 

To  assure Assicurare 

Blow Cdlpo. 

To  burn Bruciare. 

Cloth Panno, 

To  cost Costare. 

Daughter-in-law      .  JVuora. 

Father-in-law  .    .    .  Suocero. 

How  much    ....  Quanta 


Large 


Largo 


Last  night  ....  leri  sera. 

To  look Guardare* 

Mother-in-law    .   .  Suocera, 

Nose JVaso. 

Prudent Prudenie. 

Shrewd Accorto, 

Silk Seta. 

Son-in-law  ....  Genero. 

Whiteness    ....  Bianchezza 

Word Parola. 


EXAMPLES, 
1  have  not  sung  the  Italian  song, 

because  it  is  too  long. 
Your  book  is  good  for  nothing. 
I  have  spoken  to  my  brother,  not 

to  your  friend. 


10  non  ho  cantato  la  canzone  Ita- 
liana,  perche  e  molto  lunga, 

11  vostro  libro  non  e  buono  a  nulla, 
lo  ho  parlato  a  mio  fratello,  non 

al  vostro  amico. 


EXERCISE  VIII. 
When  shall  you  study  your  lesson  ?  I  shall  study  my  lesson 
when  your  sister  sings  her  song.  Will  she  sing  the  same  song  ? 
Yes,  she  will  sing  the  same  song  with  me.  Why  do  you  not 
eing  the  Italian  song  ?  Because  it  is  difficult,  and  my  voice  is 
not  very  harmonious.  Will  your  voice  be  harmonious  when  you 
eing  with  her?  Undoubtedly.  Do  you  speak  to  my  father? 
I  speak  to  you,  not  to  him.  How  much  does  this  cloth  cost? 
Not  much.  Where  is  your  father-in-law  ?  He  is  in  my  broth- 
er's garden  with  my  good  mother-in-law  and  his  friend.  Am  I 
not  very  shrewd  ?  Why  do  you  think  so  ?  Because  I  am  prudent. 
I  have  burnt  their  books  because  they  were  good  for  nothing  Is 
it  possible?  Yes,  it  is  possible.  Who  is  with  your  mother? 
Her  son-in-law  is  with  her.  Is  that  man  with  the  big  nose  your 
mother's  son-in-law?  It  is  he.  Where  is  my  brother?  He  is 
in  my  friend's  room.  Where  is  your  friend's  book?  It  is  in  my 
father's  room.  Is  your  father  in  the  room?  No,  sir  ;  my  father 
is  not  in  the  room ;  he  is  in  my  brother's  garden  with  your  good 
Bister's  friend.  My  sisters  have  boon  with  your  friends,  and  1 
have  been  in  my  room  with  my  mother.  Has  your  mother  been 
with  you  ?    She  has  been,  and  is  always,  with  me. 


INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


LESSON   X. 


INDEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

74.  The  Indefinite  Article  is  uno  for  the  mas- 
culine, and  una  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 

Uno  specchiOf  a  looking-glass.     Una  donna,  a  woman. 

75.  Uno  drops  the  o  when  followed  by  a  conso- 
nant other  than  s  impure  or  z,  or  by  a  vowel ;  as, 

Un  uomo,  a  man.     Un  libroy  a  book. 

76.  The  indefinite  article  must  be  repeated  with 
every  noun ;  as, 

Un  uomOy  una  donna^  ed  un  ragazzo.    A  man,  woman,  and  boy. 

77.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  : 

1.  Before  the  adjectives  alcuni,  pocJii,  a  few ; 
inolti,  a  great  many  ;  as, 

,   ,     (pochilibri.  ^^         C  a  few  books. 

Ioho\^    7..  ,-L   .  I  have -^  ^  ,     , 

C  molti  libri.  i  a  great  many  books. 

2.  Before  a  noun  in  the  predicate  after  a  verb 
passive  or  neuter,  and  before  a  noun  placed  in  appo- 
sition with  a  noun  or  pronoun,  unless  it  be  con- 
nected with  some  qualifying  word  or  phrase  ;  as, 

Mio  fratello  e  mercante   ....    My  brother  is  a  merchant. 

Egli  e  Francese He  is  a  Frenchman. 

Mio  fratello  i  un  ricco  mercante  My  brother  is  a  rich  merchant. 

3.  After  the  adjective,  qualifying  a  noun,  which 

follows  the  words  cosi,  so  or  as ;  troppo,  too  ;  as, 

Cost  grand*  uomo So  great  a  man. 

Troppo  pericolosa  spccolazione    .    Too  dangerous  a  speculation. 


36  INDEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

4.  After  che^  or  anj  other  word  expressing  ad 
miration  or  surprise ;  as, 

Che  bel  cavallo  ! What  a  beautiful  horse  ! 

Qual  matto  ! What  a  fool ! 

78.  The  indefinite  article  precedes  the  word  talt^ 
such ;  as, 

Un  tal  malto Such  a  fool. 

Un  tal  cavallo Such  a  horse. 

79.  The  definite  article  is  used  instead  of  the 
English  indefinite  article  before  nouns  of  measure 
and  weight : 

Due  dollari  la  libbra  ....    Two  dollars  a  pound. 
Tre  scellini  la  botliglia  .    .    .    Three  shillings  a  bottle. 

80.  TJno  is  often  used  without  a  noun,  and  is 
sometimes  suppressed. 

Egli  e  uno   che  calunnia  tuiti    He  is  a  man  who  slanders  everj 

indistintamente.  body  indiscriminately. 

£ffli  e  uomo  di  cattivafama.  He  is  a  man  of  bad  reputation. 


PARTITIVE    ARTICLE. 

81.  The  partitive  article  is  expressed  in  Italian 
by  the  preposition  di  and  the  definite  article  : 

lo  ho  del  pane,  delV  inchiostro,  dello    1  have  bread,  ink,  sugar,  paper, 
zuccherOf  della  carta,  del  libri.  and  books. 

82.  The  partitive  article  is  omitted  in  a  negative 
sentence,  or  when  wo  wish  to  make  prominent  the 
object  and  not  its  quantity : 

Jlvete  del  pane  ? Have  you  any  bread  ? 

lo  non  ho  pane I  have  no  bread. 

lo  ho  vino  ed  acqua  ....    I  have  wine  and  water. 


INDEFINITE   ARTICLE. 


37 


VOCABULARY. 

To  ask    ... 

.    Domandare. 

Long     .... 

Lunyo. 

Beneficent  .    . 

.    Beneficente. 

Modesty    .   .   . 

Modestia. 

Bitter.    .   .   . 

.    Ainaro. 

Mouth  .... 

Bocca, 

To  commence 

.    Cominciare. 

Night    .    .    .   . 

JVotte. 

Conduct .    .   . 

.     Condotta. 

Odd  mistake     . 

Sproposito. 

To  confess  .  . 

.    Confessare. 

On  the  contrary 

AL  contrario. 

Gentle     .   .   . 

.    Gentile. 

To  praise  .   .    . 

Lodare. 

Hammer     .   . 

.    Martello. 

Short     .... 

Corto. 

To  hope  .    .   . 

.    Sperare. 

Subject.    .    .    . 

Suddilo. 

Indispensable 

.    Indispensabile. 

Then     .... 

Alloroy  dunque 

EXAMPLES. 
Have  you  any  friends  ? 
I  have  no  friends. 
Is  she  not  a  very  beautiful  woman  ? 
When  did  you  speak  to  my  sister  ? 


Avetc  vol  degli  amici  ? 

lo  non  ho  amici. 

JVon  e  ella  una  donna  molio  bella, 

Quando  parlasie  a  mia  sorella  ? 


EXERCISE  IX. 
Is  not  this  a  beautiful  book  ?  Why  do  you  call  this  a  beau- 
tiful book?  Because  it  is  a  very  easy  book.  On  the  contrary, 
this  book  is  not  very  easy.  What  a  beautiful  picture  !  Has 
your  friend  any  good  books  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  he  has  a  few  good  books. 
Hovp-  many  ?  Not  a  great  many.  Have  your  brothers  any  birds  ? 
My  brothers  have  some  very  beautiful  birds,  but  they  do  not 
sing.  When  vt^ill  you  begin  your  French  lesson?  To-morrovr. 
Shall  you  begin  your  lesson  vv^ith  my  sister  ?  Your  sister  has 
studied  the  French  language  with  my  friend.  With  your  friend  ! 
where  is  he?  Is  he  not  a  good  man ?  I  ask  where  he  is.  He  is 
in  my  brother's  room.  Do  they  study  their  English  lesson  ? 
They  do  not  study  their  English  lesson  ;  they  sing  an  Italian 
song.  Have  you  any  good  pens  ?  I  have  a  great  many  pens, 
but  they  are  not  very  good.  Where  shall  I  study  my  lesson  ? 
In  your  room.  It  is  not  very  easy  (di)  to  study  my  lesson  in 
my  room.  Why?  Because  my  brother,  his  friend,  and  his 
friend's  ugly  sister,  are  studying  their  French  lesson  in  my  room. 
Why  do  you  call  your  friend's  sister  ugly?  Because  she  has  a 
very  short  nose,  and  a  very  big  mouth.  Is  she  rich?  Yes,  she 
is  very  rich.  Then  she  is  not  ugly ;  on  the  contrary,  she  is  beau- 
tiful.    What  an  odd  mistake  ! 


38  FORMATION   OF  THE   PLURAL. 


LESSON   XI 


FORMATION  OF   THE  PLURAL,  continued. 

83.  Nouns  ending  in  ca  and  ga  require  an  h  in 
the  plural  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of  the  singu- 
lar; as, 

Duca,  monarca,  piaga,  make  duchi,  monarchi,  piaghe. 

84.  Nouns  ending  in  cia  and  gia  tshange  ia  into 
e,  if  this  termination  is  a  diphthong  ;  as, 

Bilancia.,  spiaggia,  make  bilance,  spiagge. 

N.  B.  — i  Camiciay  shirt,  makes  camicie  in  the  plural,  to  distin- 
guish it  from  the  singular,  camicey  a  priest's  vestment. 

85.  If  the  termination  of  the  cia  and  gia  is  not  a 
diphthong,  the  general  rule  is  applied ;  as, 

Regia,  bugioy  make  regie y  bugie. 

86.  Some  nouns  are  used  only  in  tlie  singular ;  as, 

Schiatta,  race  ;  genie,  descendants  ;  progcnie,  progeny  ; 

Mane,  morning  ;  prole,  offspring  ;  stir pe,  "stock  ;  cento,  hundred. 

Others  are  used  only  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Esequie,  funeral  obsequies  :  nozze,  marriage  ;  vanni,  wings. 
Sponsali,  nuptial  rites  ;  forbid,  scissors  ;  pantaloni,  pantaloons. 

87.  Proper  names  of  persons  are,  by  antonomasia^ 
used  only  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Gli  Alessandri  ;  gli  Annibali. 

88.  Names  of  metals  in  the  plural  express  objects 
made  of  the  same  metals ;  as, 

n  fe'^ro,  iron  ;  I  ferri,  iron  tools. 


FORMATION   OP  THE   PLURAL. 


39 


89.  Names  of  virtues  in  the  plural  express  tLe 
practice  of  them  ;  as, 

i'  elemosina,  the  virtue  of  almsgiving. 
Le  elemosiney  practical  almsgiving. 

90.  To  proper  names  another  name  or  a  quality 
IS  added  when  they  might  be  confounded  with 
others  of  the  same  family;  as, 

Errico  primogenito.     Errico  cadeito. 
Pieiro  padre.     Pietro  jiglio. 

91.  Proper  names  of  distinguished  families  are 
often  used  in  the  plural ;  as, 

I  Medici.  I  Leniuli.  I  Fabbii.  I  Pisoni. 


MONTHS. 

Gennajo 

.  January. 

Luglio  . 

.  July. 

Febbrajo 

.  February. 

Agosto  . 

.  August. 

Marzo   . 

.  March. 

Settemhre 

.  September. 

Aprile  . 

.  April. 

Oitohre  . 

.     .  October. 

Maggio  . 

.  May. 

Novemhre 

.  November. 

Giugno 

.     .  June. 

Dicemhre 

.     .  December. 

DA 

YS. 

Lunedi     . 

.  Monday. 

Giovedi    . 

.  Thursday. 

Martedt    . 

.  Tuesday. 

Venerdi    . 

.  Friday. 

Mercoledt 

.  Wednesday. 

Sahato  .  . 

.  Saturday. 

Domenica 

.  Sunday. 

SEASONS. 
Primavera    .  Spring.  l  Autunno       .  Autumn. 

Esta    .     .     .  Summer.  Invemo   .     .  Winter. 


40  ■  FORMATION   OP   THE   PLURAL. 


VOCABULARY. 


Bean Fava. 

Button      Bottone. 

Companion  ....  Compagno. 

Convent Convento. 

Courage Coraggio. 

Egyptian Egiziano. 

Family Famiglia. 

Fruit Frutto. 

History Jstoria. 

Illustrious     ....  Illustre. 


Lentil Lente. 

Name JVbme. 

Nature JVaiura. 

Origin Origine, 

Pea Pisella. 

Project Progetto. 

Slave Schiavo. 

Success Successo. 

Tree Albero. 

Vegetable     ....  Legume. 


EXAMPLES. 

Have  you  brought  my  shirts  ?  Aveie  vol  portalo  le  mie  camicie  ? 

Have  you  my  scissors  ?  Avete  voi  le  mie  forbid  ? 

I  have  neither  scissors  nor  knives.  lo  non  ho  ne  forbid,  nl  coltelU. 

Have  you  the  name  of  this  vege-  Avete  voi  il   nome  di  questo  Ic 

table  ?  gume? 

Have  you  any  lentils  ?  Avete  delle  lenti  ? 

EXERCISE  X. 

Where  is  your  brother  ?  My  brother  is  with  my  sister.  Are 
not  your  sisters  in  the  convent  ?  No,  they  are  not  in  the  con- 
vent ;  they  are  not  nuns.  Where  are  your  tools  ?  In  my  broth- 
er's room,  on  the  chair.  The  Roman  soldiers  were  husbandmen  ; 
the  fruits  and  vegetables  which  they  had  in  their  gardens  are  the 
origin  of  the  names  of  some  illustrious  families  :  the  LeniuU,  from 
lentils  ;  the  Fabbii,  from  beans  ;  and  the  Pisons,  from  peas.  The 
wives  are  the  companions,  and  not  the  slaves,  of  their  husbands. 
Llie  stars  and  the  oxen  were  among  the  gods  of  the  Egyptians. 
The  sleeves  of  my  coat  are  very  short.  Have  you  the  scissors? 
I  have  the  buttons  of  my  pantaloons.  Where  are  your  daugh- 
ters? They  are  in  their  rooms.  Are  your  brothers  in  their 
stores?  Yes,  sir  ;  they  are  in  their  stores.  Have  they  many 
books?  No,  sir;  they  have  not  many  books,  but  they  have  a 
great  many  pictures.  Have  they  a  great  many  beautiful  pic- 
tures ?  They  have  many  pictures,  but  they  are  not  very  fine. 
Where  are  your  shirts?  They  are  in  my  sister's  room.  I  have 
a  great  many  trees  in  my  garden.  Have  you  many  books  in 
your  room  ?    I  have  a  few  books,  but  they  are  good. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION.  41 


LESSON   XII. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION 

AJSTDARE,  TO   GO.  DARE,  TO  GIVE. 

PRESENT. 


Vado  or  vo     ...  I  go. 

Vat Thou  goest. 

Va He  goes. 

Andiamo     ....  We  go. 

Andate You  go. 

Vanno They  go. 


Do I  give. 

Dai Thou  givest 

Da He  gives. 

Diamo We  give. 

Date You  give. 

Danno They  give. 


N.  B.  —  For  the  remaining  tenses,  see  page  201. 

92.  The  verb  andare  requires  the  preposition  a^ 
when  followed  by  an  infinitive,  or  when  it  expresses 
going  to  some  place  ;  as, 

Vado  a  parlare.       I  am  going  to  speak. 
Vado  al  mercato.     I  am  going  to  market. 

If  we  speak  of  going  to  any  person's  house,  da  is 
used;  as, 

Vado  dal  medico.  I  am  going  to  the  physician's. 

Andro  da  mio  fratello.    I  shall  go  to  my  brother's. 

93.  The  following  nouns  require  the  preposition 
di  after  them  when  used  before  an  infinitive ;  as, 


Coraggio Courage. 

Desiderio Desire. 

Voglia Wish. 

Ragione Right. 


Paura .  Fear. 

Vergogna Shame. 

Tempo Time. 

Torto Wrong. 


94.  The  adverbs  jprimaj  before,  and  dopo,  after^ 
are  followed  by  the  preposition  dij  and  take  the 
infinitive  instead  of  the  gerund*  as  in  English;  as, 

Dopo  di  aver  parlato.     After  having  spoken. 
Prima  di  andare.  Before  going. 

*  The  gerund  in  Italian  corresponds  to  the  present  participle  in  English 

3 


IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


VOCABULARY. 


Agreeable  . 
Always  .  . 
Coming  .  . 
Company  . 
Compliment 
Custom  .  . 
Evening  . 
To  fix.  .  . 
To  learn  . 
Memory     . 


.  Aggradevole. 

.  Sempre. 

Venturo. 

.  Compagnia. 

.  Complimento. 

.  Costume. 

.  Sera. 

.  Fissure. 

.  Im  par  are. 

.  Memoria. 


Morning 
Neighbor 
Other  .    . 
Pleasure 
To  present 
Probably 
Reward  . 
Visit  .    . 
Week  .    . 
Yesterday 


.  Mattina. 

.  Prossimo. 

.  Mtro. 

.  Piacere. 

.  Presentare. 

.  Probabilmenie. 

.  Ricompenza. 

.  Visita. 

.  Settimana. 

.  leri 


EXAMPLES. 

Spero  di  andare  con  vol. 

Avete  voi  dei  buoni  libri  ? 

lo  ho  del  libri  molto  buoni. 

many     Egli   non    ha   mai   avuto 

mt  Ux 

amici. 

I  hope  to  go  with  you. 
Have  you  any  good  books  ? 
I  have  very  good  books. 
He  has  never  had  a  great  many 
friends. 


EXERCISE  XI. 
When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure  of  your  company  ?  My  com 
pany  is  not  very  agreeable ;  but  I  shall  go  to  spend  an  evening 
with  your  brother-in-law  next  week,  and  then  I  hope  to  present 
my  compliments  to  you  and  to  your  dear  mother  Have  you 
fixed  the  day?  No,  I  have  not  fixed  the  day  ;  but  I  hope  to  be 
with  my  friend  to-morrow  morning.  He  will  probably  go  with 
me  to  visit  a  few  friends,  and  I  think  that  we  shall  be  at  your 
brother's  house  next  Tuesday.  Did  your  friends  speak  of  me  to- 
day? They  spoke  of  you,  but  not  much.  Have  your  brothers 
commenced  their  French  lesson  ?  They  commenced  their  French 
lesson  yesterday,  but  they  did  not  study  much.  Shall  you  go  in 
my  carriage?  I  shall  go  to  my  friend's  garden.  My  father  has 
not  a  very  good  horse.  On  the  contrary,  I  think  that  your 
father  has  always  had  some  very  good  horses.  Have  you  any 
good  books  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  have  some  very  good  books.  Where 
are  they?  They  are  on  the  little  table  in  my  mother's  room. 
Have  you  studied  your  lesson  ?  I  have  studied  my  French  les- 
son, but  I  have  not  sung  my  Italian  song.  Have  you  not  a  good 
memory  ?  I  have  a  good  memory,  but  my  voice  is  not  very  good. 
When  shall  you  go  to  your  father's  ?    To-morrow. 


CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS. 


43 


LESSON   XIII. 


CONJUNCTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

95.  \yHEN  the  personal  pronouns  are  governed 
by  a  verb,  and  employed  in  the  dative  and  accusa- 
tive, they  take  a  new  form.  Instead  of  the  dative 
and  accusative, 


A  me 

.     to  me 

.     .    mi     .     is  us 

Me    .     . 

.     me 

.     .   mi    , 

A  noi 

.     to  us  . 

.     .   ci  or  ne       " 

Noi  .     . 

.     us 

.   ci  or  ne       " 

Ate.     . 

.     to  thee 

.    ti,     .     ,     '' 

Te     .     . 

.     thee    . 

.   ti.     . 

A  vol 

.     to  you 

.   vi 

Vol   . 

.     you    . 

.   vi 

AM 

.     to  him 

.   gli      . 

Lui   . 

.     .     him     . 

.   lo  or  il 

AM 

.     to  her 

.     .   le.     . 

Lei   . 

.     her     . 

,   la.     . 

A  loro 

.     to  them 

.    loro    . 

Loro 

.     them  .     . 

.    lim.,lef. 

A  se  .     . 

.     to  oncsel 

f    .    si  .     . 

Se     . 

.     oneself 

.   si  .     . 

96.  These  pronouns,  thus  used,  are  called  con 
junctive;  as, 

lo  gli  parlai.    I  spoke  to  him.       Literally :  I  to  him  spoke. 
lo  Z'  amo.  I  love  her.  Literally :  I  her  love. 

97.  Conjunctive  pronouns  follow  or  precede  the 
verb. 

They  follow  the  verb,  and,  with  the  exception 
of  loro,  are  united  to  it : 


44  CONJUNCTIVE   PEONOUNS. 

1.  In  the  affirmative  imperative,  except  the  third 
person;  as, 

Scrivimi  e  spera Write  to  me,  and  hope. 

Scriveteci  e  sperate Write  to  us,  and  hope. 

2.  In  the  gerund,  affirmatively ;  as, 

Scrivendoglii  diro  la  verita.     Writing  to  him,  I  will  tell  the  truth. 

3.  In  the  affirmative  infinitive,  which  loses  the 
final  e  ;  as, 

Vederla^  parlarle,  e  morire.     To  see  her,  to  speak  to  her,  and  to  die. 

98.  In  all  other  tenses,  and  in  the  third  person  of 
the  affirmative  imperative,  the  conjunctive  pronoun 
precedes ;  as, 

Ci  scriva  se  vuole.  Let  him  write  to  us  if  he  wishes. 

N.  B. — In  the  imperative,  gerund,  and  infinitive,  used  negatively,  the 
conjunctive  pronoun  is  placed  between  the  negation  and  the  verb  ;  as, 
JVon  ci  scriva  e  fara  molto    Not  to  us  let  him  write,  and  he  will 

meglio.  do  much  better. 

JVon   gli  scrivendo    lo  faro    Not  to  him  in  writing,  him  I  will 

disperare.  make  despair. 

JVon  le  scrivere  e  crudelta.         Not  to  her  to  write  is  cruelty. 

99.  Conjunctive  pronouns,  gli  excepted,  double 
their  first  letter  when  affixed  to  a  verb  of  one  sylla- 
ble,  or  to  a  verb  ending  with  an  accented  vowel, 
in  which  case  the  accent  is  omitted ;  as, 

Fammi  guesto  favor  e^  instead  of /a  mi. 
Dirogli  di  venirCy        instead  of  diro  gli. 

100.  The  pronoun  it  should  be  expressed  by  *7, 
Zo,  l\  when  referring  to  a  masculine  noun;  and  by  la, 
l\  when  referring  to  a  feminine  noun ;  as, 

Lo  faro  con  piacere.    I  will  do  it  with  pleasure. 

101.  The  pronoun  them  is  expressed  by  li  (somd- 
times  by  gli)j  m.,  and  le,  f. ;  as, 

lo  li  avro  domani.     I  shall  have  them  to-morrow. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 


VOCABULARY. 


To  abuse  .  .  . 
To  bring,  carry 
To  buy  .... 
Color  .... 
Dress-maker  . 
To  forget  .    .    . 

Gold 

To  leave  .  .  . 
Misfortune  .  . 
Necessity  .    .    . 


Abusare. 

For  tare. 

Comprare. 

Colore. 

Sarta. 

Dimenticare. 

Oro. 

Lasciare. 

Disgrazia. 

JVecessita. 


New JVuovo. 

Old Vecchio. 

Opinion Opinione. 

Poverty Poveria. 

Prosperity  ....  Prosper ita. 

Ready Pronto. 

Reason Ragione, 

Ruin Rovina. 

Shoemaker ....  Calzolaio. 

Tailor Sarto 


EXAISIPLES. 

Are  you  going  to  the  tailor's?      Andate  dal  sarto? 


No,  I  am  going  to  my  store. 
Your  dress  has  a  good  color. 
Good  books  or  not. 


JVb,  io  vadj  alia  mia  boltega. 
La  vostra  veste  ha  un  buon  colore 
Buoni  libri,  o  no. 


EXERCISE  XII. 

Has  the  shoemaker  brought  my  boots  ?  No,  sir  ;  I  went  to  his 
store  yesterday,  and  they  were  not  ready.  When  will  he  bring 
them  ?  He  will  bring  them  to-morrow.  Why  does  he  not  bring 
them  to-day?  Because  they  will  not  be  ready  to-day.  Give  me 
my  gloves.  Where  are  they?  I  left  them  in  your  brother's 
room.  Shall  you  not  speak  to  my  father  ?  I  shall  speak  to  him, 
undoubtedly.  Shall  you  not  speak  to  his  sister  ?  No,  sir  ;  I 
shall  not  speak  to  her.  Why  not  ?  I  shall  not  speak  to  her  to- 
day because  she  did  not  speak  to  me  yesterday.  This  is  not  a 
good  reason.  Good  reason  or  not,  I  shall  not  speak  to  her  to- 
day. I  will  buy  this  beautiful  horse  for  my  sister.  Why  do  you 
not  buy  it  for  yourself?  Because  I  have  no  need  of  a  small 
horse.  The  dress-maker  brought  me  a  white  dress  ;  it  is  too 
large  for  me,  and  I  shall  give  it  to  my  mother.  Give  him  tha", 
inkstand,  and  I  will  give  you  this  penknife.  Have  you  studied 
your  lesson  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  my  lesson  was  not  very  difficult  to-day. 
When  your  lesson  is  not  very  difficult,  it  is  very  easy  to  study  it. 
Bring  me  my  old  black  coat.  Shall  you  give  it  to  your  friend? 
No,  I  shall  not  give  it  to  my  friend  to-day,  because  the  tailor 
has  not  brought  my  new  coat.  AYill  he  bring  it  to-morrow  ? 
To-morrow  is  Sunday.     Is  it  not  Friday  to-day  ?    No,  sir. 


46  IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


LESSON   XIV. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION 


FAREy  TO  MAKE.  STARE,  TO  STAY 

PRESEKT. 

Fo  or  faccio     .   .  I  make. 

Fai      Thou  makest. 

Fa He  makes. 

Facciamo ....  We  make. 

Fate You  make. 

Fanno They  make. 


Sto I  stay. 

Stai Thou  stayest 

Sta He  stays. 

Stiamo We  stay. 

State You  stay. 

Stanno They  stay. 

(See  page  201.) 
N.  B.  — The  verb /are  is  derived  from  the  Latin /acere,  and  should 
properly  belong  to  the  irregular  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

102.  The  verb  fare  is  idiomatically  employed  in 
expressions  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather ;  as, 

Che  tempo  fa  ogyi  ?    How  is  the  weather  to-day  ? 

N.  B.  —  The  verb /are,  thus  employed,  must  precede  the  noun, 
except  in  an  interrogative  sentence. 

Fa  hel  tempo  oggi.    It  is  fine  weather  to-day. 
Not  II  tempo  fa  bello  oggi. 

103.  The    verb  stare   is    idiomatically   used    in 
expressions  concerning  one's  health  ;  as, 

Come  state,  signora  ?     How  do  you  do,  madam  ? 


104.   The  following  nouns  require    the  verb  to 
have,  and  not  to  be,  as  in  English : 

Torto  ....    Wrong. 
Paura    .   .   .    Fear. 


Fame  ....    Hunger. 
Sete     ....    Thirst. 
Rag-'one .    .   .    Right. 


Vergogna  .    .    Shame. 


/  am  hungry,  is  expressed  by  lo  ho  fame,  I  have  hunger. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS,  FIRST   CONJUGATION. 


47 


VOCABULARY. 


To  accompany  .  Accompagnare. 

Civility  ....  Civilta. 

Cold Freddo. 

Dear Caro. 

To  deserve     .    .  Meritare. 

To  embrace    .   .  Abbracciare, 

Fear Ti/nore. 

House     ....  Casa. 

Ingratitude    .    .  Ingratiludine. 

Kino: Re. 


Money  .  .  . 
To  pass,  spend 
Past  .... 
To  reproach  . 
To  sepax'ate  . 
Soon  .  .  . 
To  spai'kle 
To  thank  .  . 
Temperance  . 
"Warm     .    .    . 


Denaro, 

Passare. 

Passato. 

Rimpr  over  art 

Separare. 

Presto. 

Sciniillare. 

Ringraziare. 

Te/nperanza. 

Caldo. 


EXAMPLES. 

Are  you  thirsty  or  hungry?  Avetefame  o  sete  ? 

I  am  neither  thirsty  nor  hungry.    JVon  ho  nefame  ne  sete. 

How  are  your  brothers?  Come  stanno  i  vostrifraielli  ? 


EXERCISE  XIII. 
Good-morning,  sir  ;  how  do  you  do  ?  I  am  very  well,  I  thank 
you.  How  is  your  sister?  My  sister  is  not  very  well.  Where 
did  you  spend  the  day  yesterday?  I  was  with  my  friend.  Give 
me  some  water.  Are  you  thirsty?  Yes,  I  am  thirsty  and  hun- 
gry. Am  I  not  right  in  reproaching  him  for  his  ingratitude  ? 
What  has  he  done  ?  He  has  not  spoken  to  my  mother.  You 
are  right ;  he  is  proud,  and  he  deserves  it.  How  is  the  weather 
to-day?  It  is  very  fine  weather.  Was  it  fine  weather  yester- 
day? Yesterday  the  weather  was  very  beautiful.  Have  you 
time  to  study  your  French  lesson  ?  I  have  time,  but  I  have  no 
desire  to  study  it.  Has  your  brother  a  desire  to  buy  my  car- 
riage ?  He  has  a  great  desire  to  buy  it,  but  he  has  no  money. 
When  will  he  have  money  ?  He  will  probably  have  some  money 
next  month.  Then  I  will  give  him  my  horse  now,  if  he  will 
give  me  the  money  next  month.  Is  it  cold  to-day?  No,  sir  ;  it  is 
not  very  cold.  Was  it  warm  yesterday  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  it  was  very 
warm  yesterday.  Are  you  afraid  to  go  with  me  ?  Where  shall 
we  go?  We  will  go  to  the  shoemaker's.  Has  he  not  brought 
your  boots?  He  has  brought  neither  the  boots  nor  the  shoes. 
Let  us  go,  then  ;  I  am  not  afraid  to  go  with  you  ;  I  was  only 
desirous  to  speak  with  your  sister  before  going.  She  is  not  at 
home.     When  Vill  she  be  at  home  ?    She  will  be  at  home  soon. 


48  USE   OF   THE   DEFINITE  ARTICLE, 


LESSON   XV. 


USE   OF  THE  DEFINITE    ARTICLE. 

105.  The  Definite  Article  is  used  before  noung 
taken  in  the  full  extent  of  their  signification.  It  is 
thus  used  before  nouns  designating,  1st,  A  class.  2d, 
A  species  of  a  class.    3d,  An  individual  of  a  species, 

1.  Gli  uomini  sono  mortali.  Men  are  mortal.  Here  the  word 
uomini  is  used  to  represent  a  class,  in  its  whole  extent ;  i.  e.,  all  men. 

N.  B.  —  Instead  of  gli  uomini^  Vuomo  can  be  used,  because  a 
singular  noun  may  often' be  used  as  a  representative  of  the  whole  class, 

2.  Gli  uomini  virtuosi  sonofelici.    Virtuous  men  are  happy. 
Here  uomini  virtuosi  represents  a  species,  or  a  number  of  men  who 

have  the  quality  of  virtuosi.     We  can  also  say,  I'uomo  virtuoso, 
because  a  singular  noun  may  represent  the  whole  species. 

3.  i'  uo7no  di  cui  vi  parlo.    The  man  of  whom  I  speak  to  you. 
Here  the  noun  uomo  is  taken  individually,  and  the  article  serves  to 

limit  it  to  a  single  individual  whom  we  wish  to  particularize. 

Observation.  —  Whenever  a  noun  is  used  in  an  indefinite  manner, 
1.  €.,  when  we  do  not  wish  to  consider  it  as  a  whole  class,  as  a  whole 
species,  or  as  a  particular  individual,  the  article  may  be  omitted. 
Thus,  we  may  say,  Amore,  a  odio  ci  guida  or  L'amore  o  Vodio  ci  guida. 
But,  in  the  first  case,  amore  and  odio  are  used  in  a  general  or  indefi- 
nite sense ;  while,  in  the  second  case,  they  are  limited  or  determined  by 
Bome  circumstances  which  are  understood,  such  as  Vam-ore  {che  por- 
iiamo  at  buoni),  V  odio  (che  scntiamo  pei  cattivi.) 

Dante  says  :  Risposemi :  non  uomOy  uomo  gia  fui.  He  replied  to 
me  :  I  am  not  a  man,  man  once  I  was. 

Here  the  poet  wishes  only  to  give  the  indefinite  idea  of  which  uomo 
is  the  sign.      Uomo  is  here  used  somewhat  like  a  qualifying  adjective* 

106.  Abstract  nouns,  used  alone,  take  the  definite 
article ;  as,  la  virju,  virtue.  But,  when  two  or  more 
nouns  are  joined  together,  the  article  may  bo 
omitted-,  as,  virtii  ed  onorXj  virtue  and  honor. 


USE    OF   IIIE    DEFINITE   ARTICLE.  4i> 

107.  Before  names  of  countries,  kingdoms,  and 
provinces,  the  article  may  be  used  or  omitted.  If 
we  wish  to  mention  the  whole  country  or  the 
province,  we  must  use  the  article ;  as. 

La  Italia  e  una  bella  contrada.     Italy  is  a  beautiful  country. 

But,  if  we  view  the  country  in  a  general  manner, 
or  as  a  point,  without  reference  to  its  extent,  then 
the  article  is  not  necessary ;  as, 

Veil  go  da  Italia.     I  come  from  Italy. 

108.  The  article  is  also  used  before  names  of  the 
mountains  celebrated  by  the  poets,  and  before  the 
words  Signore,  Signora,  Signorina;  as, 

iZ  Pindo,  il  Parnasso,  U  Elicona.       Pindus,  Parnassus,  Helicon. 
n  Signor  Giovanni^  La  Signora  C.     Mr.  John,  Mrs.  C. 

109.  The  article  is  omitted  in  a  direct  address ;  as, 

UomOy  tu  set  mortale.  Man,  thou  art  mortal. 

Italiay  0  tu  cui  die  la  sorte .  .        Italy,  thou  to  whom  fate  has  given . . 

Signor  B.^  dove  e  la  Signora  C.  ?  Mr.  B.,  where  is  Mrs.  C.  ? 

110.  Yerbs,  adverbs,  and  adjectives,  used  sub- 
stantively, take  the  article  ;  as, 

n  leggere    .    The  reading.      I      II  perche  .   .    The  why. 
n  buono  .    .    The  good  one.    I      II  rosso     .    .    The  red  one. 

111.  The  article  is  used  before  nouns  expressing 
titles,  which  are  followed  by  the  proper  name  of  the 
person,  or  family.     The  word  papa  is  excepted ;  as, 

n  Re  Giorgio.     King  George.     Papa  Sisto.     Pope  Sixtus. 
n  Generate  Washington.     General  Washington. 

112.  Family  names  of  persons  generally  known 
are  preceded  by  the  article ;  as,  il  Tasso,  il  Hilton. 

N.  B.  —  Say  VAlighieri,  but  not  il  Dante,  because  Dante  is  thf 
proper  name,  and  not  the  family  name,  of  the  great  Italian  poet 


60  USE   OF   THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


VOCABULAKY. 


Alps Alpi. 

Bad Cattivo. 

To  corrupt    .   ,   .  Corrompere. 

Death Morte. 

Discord     ....  Discordia. 

Element    ....  Elemento. 

Europe Europa. 

France Fraiicia. 

Health Salute, 

Interest     ....  Inter  esse. 

Invention  ....  Invenzione. 


Italy Italia. 

Justice Giustizia. 

Masterpiece  .    .   .  Capo  lavoro. 

Merit Merits. 

Mortal Mortale. 

Paris Parigi. 

To  show    ....  Mostrare. 

To  wait  for   .    .    .  Aspettare. 

Wicked Malvaggio. 

Woman     ....  Donna. 

To  reveal  ....  Rivelare. 


EXAMPLES. 
It  is  for  our  interest  to  preserve    E  pel  nostra  interesse  il  preser- 

our  health.  vare  la  nostra  salute. 

That  invention  cost  him  much.  Quella  invenzione gli  costo  molto 


EXERCISE  XIV. 
Man  is  mortal.  Man,  thou  art  mortal.  Tyrants  are  the 
scourge  of  humanity.  Tyrants,  you  are  the  scourge  of  human- 
ity. Death  makes  kings  and  subjects  equal.  Falsehood  is 
odious  in  itself.  Prosperity  and  success  are  not  alv^^ays  the 
reward  of  an  industrious  man.  Evil  companions  corrupt  good 
manners.  Bread  and  water  are  indispensable  to  man.  Is  not 
man  the  masterpiece  of  nature  ?  Fear  and  selfishness  make  men 
wicked.  True  merit  is  always  accompanied  by  civility  and  mod- 
esty. Black  and  white  are  not  colors.  History  is  the  picture 
of  times  and  men.  Necessity  is  the  mother  of  invention,  and 
health  is  the  daughter  of  exercise  and  temperance.  Discord  is 
the  ruin  of  states.  Justice  embraces  many  virtues.  Where  is 
Madam,  Mr.  John  ?  She  is  in  her  room.  Has  she  given  my 
book  to  your  father  ?  Yes,  she  gave  the  book  to  my  father  last 
night.  The  Alps  separate  Italy  from  France.  My  brother  is  in 
Italy,  and  my  son  will  go  to  Paris  next  week.  General  Warren 
is  a  name  dear  to  the  Americans.  Italy  is  the  garden  of 
Europe.  How  is  your  mother  to-day  ?  She  is  not  very  well. 
Is  she  in  her  room?  No,  she  is  in  the  garden.  Have  you  many 
flowers  in  your  garden  ?  We  have  very  few  flowers  in  summer- 
time, but  in  the  spring  we  have  a  great  many  flowers  and  birds. 
Poverty  and  misfortune  reveal  true  friends. 


RELATIVE   PRONOUNS.  61 


LESSON    XVI 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

113.  Relative  Pronouns  are  always  expressed  in 
Italian.     They  are 

Quale,  che  .  .  .  .  .  who,  -which,  what. 
Chi who. 

114.  Quale  and  c7ie  are  used  for  persons  and 
things. 

115.  Quahj  plural  quali,  is  always  preceded  by 
the  definite  article,  which  determines  its  gender;  as, 

H  libro,  il  quale The  book  which. 

La  donna,  la  quale The  woman  who. 

I  libri,  i  quali The  books  which. 

Le  donne,  le  quali The  women  who. 

116.  C7ie  takes  no  article,  and  is  invariable  in  the 
nominative ;  in  the  objective  and  after  prepositions 
it  is  changed  into  cui ;  as, 

L^uomo  che  persevera  riesce    .   .  The  man  who  perseveres  succeeds. 

La  donna  cui  voi  amate  ....  The  woman  whom  you  love. 

L^uomo  a  cui  scrivete       ....  The  man  to  whom  you  write. 

La  donna  di  cui  parlate      .   .   .  The  woman  of  whom  you  speak. 

117.  H  che,  or,  more  elegantly,  loccJie,  has  refer- 
ence to  the  whole  preceding  sentence  ;  as, 

Mia  madre  e  ammalaia  ;  locche  mi  afiige. 
My  mother  is  sick  ;  (a  thing)  which  afflicts  me. 

118.  Cui  is  often  used  without  the  preposition; 
and  in  the  genitive  it  precedes  the  noun  ;  as, 

L*uomo,  cui  voi  parlate The  man  to  whom  you  speak 

Una  donna  la  cui  bellezza  e  estrema  .  A  woman  of  extreme  beauty 


52  RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 

Observation.  —  Instead  of  cui  and  quahy  onde  is  often  used  in 
poetry  ;  as, 

Quella  virtude  onde  mi  sento  acceso. 

That  virtue  by  which  I  feel  myself  inflamed. 

119.  Chi  is  often  used  alone,  referring  to  some 
noun  understood ;  as,  Jie  wJio,  or  the  man  who  ;  as, 

Chi  persevera  riesce.    He  who  perseveres  succeeds. 

120.  ISfe  is  also  classed  among  the  relative  pro- 
nouns, and  stands  for  some  of  it,  or  for 

With,  about,  of,)  ,  .      ,        .^   ^. 
^       „  ,         >-  him,  her,  it,  them. 

For,  from,  by,   ) 

This  pronoun  must  always  be  expressed  in  Italian, 
even  in  cases  where  it  is  understood  in  English ;  as, 

J^'e  parlai  a  mio  fraiello  .   I  spoke  to  my  brother  about  it. 
Avete  del  denaro  ?  .    .    .    .   Have  you  any  money  ? 
JVe  ho I  have  (some  of  it). 

Ne  is  always  placed  before  the  verb  ;  as, 

lo  ne  ho.     I  have  some  of  it. 

121.  In  order  to,  in  Italian,  is  expressed  by^er^ 
which  is  never  understood,  as  in  English ;  as, 

Vado  al  mercato  per  comprare  della  came. 
I  am  going  to  market  to  buy  some  meat. 


EXAMPLES. 

Where  are  you  going  ?  Dove  andate  ? 

I  am  going  to  buy  some  bread.  VUdo  a  comprare  del  pane. 

Has  he  any  good  books  ?  Ha  egli  dei  buoni  libri  ? 

He  has  some  good  ones.  Effli  ne  ha  dei  buoni. 

Whose  books  are  these?  Di  chi  sono  questi  libri? 

They  are  my  brother's.  Sono  di  miofratello. 

The  merchant  has  money.  E  mercante  ha  denaro 

The  painter  is  generous.  7Z  pittore  e  gcneroso. 

How  is  the  weather  to-day  ?  Che  tempo  fa  oggi  ? 

We  have  bad  weather  to-day,  Jibbiamo  cattivo  tempo  oggt. 


RELATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


53 


VOCABULARY. 


To  admire     ....  Ammirare. 

Beauty Bellezza. 

To  change     ....  Cambiare. 

Evil Male. 

Generous Generoso. 

Ilat Cappcllo. 

Ignorant Jgnorante. 

To  languish  ....  Ltinguire. 

Learned  .   .    .  Dotto, 

To  lend Prestare. 

Market Mercato. 


Merchant 

Often     . 

Painter 

Perhaps 

Physician 

Poor  .    . 

To  pronounce 

Pronunciation 

To  send     .    . 

Teacher     .    . 

Thought    . 


Mercante. 

Spesso. 

Pittore. 

Forse. 

Medico. 

Povero. 

Pronunziare. 

Pronunzia. 

Mandare. 

Maestro. 

Pensiero. 


EXERCISE  XV. 
What  do  you  think  of  my  horse?  I  think  that  your  horse  is 
very  good.  Where  are  you  going?  I  am  going  to  market. 
What  are  you  going  to  buy  ?  I  am  going  to  buy  some  butter 
Did  you  not  buy  your  butter  yesterday  ?  The  butter  (which) 
I  bought  yesterday  was  not  good,  and  I  am  going  to  market  (in 
order)  to  change  it.  The  painter  has  no  time  to  commence  my 
picture.  Give  him  some  money,  and  he  will  begin  it  soon. 
Then  it  is  the  money,  and  not  the  time,  that  he  has  not.  Per- 
haps he  has  no  time,  but  I  am  sure  that  he  has  no  money.  How 
does  your  brother  pronounce  the  French  language  ?  He  has  not 
a  very  good  pronunciation.  Why  not  ?  Because  it  is  very  dif- 
ficult to  pronounce  well  without  a  French  teacher.  You  are 
right.  Have  you  any  good  books?  I  have  some,  but  I  have 
not  a  good  French  grammar.  Why  do  you  not  buy  one  (of 
them)  ?  Because  I  have  no  money.  What  did  you  do  with  the 
money  (that)  I  lent  you  yesterday?  I  bought  a  black  hat. 
Why  did  you  not  buy  a  grammar  ?  Do  not  reproach  me  for  my 
ignorance.  Are  you  a  merchant,  sir?  No,  sir  ;  I  am  a  physi- 
cian. How  is  the  weather  to-day?  We  have  fine  weather  to- 
day, sir.  Is  it  cold?  No,  sir.  Is  it  warm  ?  It  is  neither  cold 
nor  warm.  Shall  we  go  to  my  friend's  garden  ?  Yes  ;  but  I  am 
hungry.  Shall  I  give  you  some  bread  and  butter  ?  No.  I  thank 
you  ;  I  have  some  in  my  room.  Then  I  shall  give  my  bread  to 
the  man  who  is  in  the  garden.  Is  he  poor?  He  is  not  poor, 
but  he  is  not  proud.  Is  not  his  brother  the  man  to  whom  I 
spoke  yesterday  in  your  father's  garden  ?    He  has  no  brothers 


54  DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


LESSON   XVII. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

122.  The  Demonstrative  Pronouns  are  used  sub 
stantively  for  persons.     They  are, 

QuesH This  man. 

Costei This  woman. 

Costoro These  men  or  women. 

Cotesti,  quegli That  man. 

Cotesteiy  colei That  woman, 

Cotestoro,  coloro Those  men  or  women. 

Questi  makes,  in  the  objective,  costuk 
Cotesti  makes,  in  the  objective,  cotestui, 
Quegli  makes,  in  the  objective,  colui. 
The  other  pronouns  are  invariable. 

r  Cosfui,  cotestui,  colui  ;  m.,  sing. 
Diy  a,  da,  <  Costei,  cotesteiy  colei  ;     f.,     ** 

C  Costoro,  cotestoro,  coloro  ;  plural. 

123.  Demonstrative  pronouns  in  the  genitive  can 
elegantly  precede  the  noun  without  the  prepo- 
sition. 


Per  la  costui  bonta 
Per  la  bonta  di  costui 


,  j-  Through  his  goodness. 


124.  Questi  points   to   the   person  near  to  the 
speaker. 

125.  Cotesti  points  to  the  person  near  to  the  one 
spoken  to. 

126.  Quegli  points  to  a  person  equally  distant 
from  the  speaker  and  the  person  spoken  to. 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


55 


INFLECTION    OF  A  REGULAR  VERB    OF    THE  SECOND 
CONJUGATION. 


CREDERE,  TO  BELIEVE. 

PEESENT. 

Crediamo  ,  . 
Credete  .  .  . 
Credono    .   . 


Credo   ....  I  believe.  Crediamo  .   .   .  We  believe. 

Credi    ....  Thou  believest.  Credete  ....  You  believe. 

Crede    ....  He  believes.  Credono    ...  They  believe. 
See  page  199. 

Observation.  —  Some  of  the  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  accentea 
on  the  last  vowel  but  one  ;  as,  temere,  to  fear  :  others,  on  the  last  but 
two  ;  as,  credere. 

N.  B.  —  For  the  few  verbs  in  which  the  accent  falls  on  the  last 
vowel  but  one,  see  page  218. 

127.  What  is  the  matter ,  i&  expressed  by  che  and 
the  verb-  avere  ;  as, 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?       Che  avete  ?  Literally:  What  have  you  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  me.     JVbn  ho  nulla.    I  have  nothing. 


N.  B.  —  Remember  that  questiy  cotesHy  quelli,  joined  to  nouns,  are 
the  plurals  of  the  adjectives  questo,  cotesto,  quello. 


EXAMPLES. 


Are  you  right  in  reproaching  me 
for  my  bad  translation  ? 

I  have  never  spoken  to  that  man. 

Where  did  you  find  the  books  ? 

I  found  them  on  the  table. 

Why  did  you  not  bring  the  white 
dress  with  you? 

Do  not  cry  so  loud. 

I  had  the  pleasure  of  enjoying 
your  brother's  company  last 
night  and  this  morning. 

This  fish  is  not  good. 

Of  what  country  are  you,  sir  ? 


.dvete  ragione  di  rimproverarmi 

per  la  mia  cattiva  traduzione  ? 
JVon  ho  mat  parlato  a  quelV  uomo. 
Dove  irovaste  voi  i  libri  ? 
lo  li  trovai  sulla  tavola. 
Perche  non  portaste  la  veste  bi- 

anca  con  voi  ? 
JVbn  gridate  si  forte, 
lo  ebbi  il  piacere  di  godere  la 

compagnia   di  vostro  fratello 

ieri  sera  e  sta  mane. 
Questo  pesce  non  e  buono. 
Di  qual  paese  siete  voi,  signore  f 


56  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


VOCABULARY. 

To  assist Assistere. 

Bear Orso. 

To  cry Gridare. 

To  dine Franz  are 

Example Esempio. 

Expense Spesa. 

Eire Fuoco. 

If Se. 

Moment Momento. 


Obstinate    .    .    .  Ostinato. 

Possible   ....  Possibile. 

To  prove,  try  .    .  Provare. 

To  receive   .    .   .  Ricevere. 

Snow JVeve. 

So,  thus  ....  Cost  or  su 

Strong,  loud   .   .  Forte. 

Translation     .    .  Traduzione. 

Yet Ancora,pure. 


Negligence  ....    JVeyligcnza.    To  yield   ....    Cedere. 


EXERCISE  XVI. 
Have  you  received  any  money  this  week  ?  Yes ;  I  have 
received  some  from  my  father.  I  hope  (that)  you  will  assist  me 
in  my  French  translation.  If  it  is  difficult,  I  will  assist  you.  I 
think  that  my  French  translation  is  very  difficult  to-day.  V^aa 
it  difficult  yesterday  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  found  it  very  difficult.  Is 
this  the  physician  of  whom  your  father  spoke  to  me  last  week  ? 
No,  sir  ;  my  father  has  never  spoken  to  him.  Have  you  found 
your  gloves  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  have  found  my  gloves.  Where  did 
you  find  them?  In  my  friend's  store.  Is  it  possible?  —  you 
have  not  been  to  your  friend's  store  to-day.  I  have  not  been 
to  his  store  to-day,  but  I  was  at  his  house  ;  and  when  he  found 
the  gloves  in  his  room,  he  was  sure  that  they  were  my  gloves,  and 
carried  them  to  his  store.  Am  I  not  right  in  reproaching  you 
for  your  carelessness  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  you  are  right.  Have  you  any 
good  books  ?  I  have  some,  but  I  have  not  a  good  French  gram- 
mar. Have  you  dined?  No,  sir  ;  I  am  going  to  dine  with  my 
brother.  Have  you  tried  the  red  wine  I  sent  him  last  month  ? 
No,  sir  ;  I  have  not  yet  tried  it.  Give  me  the  book  which  I  lent 
to  your  brother.  I  thought  that  the  book  was  my  brother's, 
and  I  lent  it  to  my  friend's  sister.  Why  does  my  mother  cry  so 
loud  ?  Because  the  dress-maker  did  not  bring  her  the  black 
dress.  Is  the  dress-maker  with  her  ?  She  is  not  with  her  ;  she 
sent  the  white  dress,  but  the  black  dress  will  not  be  ready  before 
Saturday.  It  is  time  to  go  to  my  friend's  store.  I  will  go  with 
you,  if  you  wait  a  moment.  I  will  wait  with  pleasure.  Why  is 
your  sister  so  obstinate  ?  She  is  always  obstinate  ;  she  thinks 
that  I  am  always  wrong,  and  she  never  yields  to  my  wishes. 


OMISSION   OP  THE  DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 


57 


LESSON   XVIII 


OMISSION   OP  THE  DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 

128.   The  Definite  Article  is  omitted : 

1.  Before  names  of  kindred  preceded  by  the 
proper  name  of  the  person ;  as, 

Guglielmo,  figlio  di  Giovanni.    William,  the  son  of  John. 

2.  Before  ordinal  numbers  which  follow  proper 
names  of  monarchs  and  popes,  or  any  noun ;  as, 

Gregorio  Settimo Gregory  the  Seventh. 

Errico  Quarto Henry  the  Fourth. 

Libra  Secondo Book  the  Second. 

3.  Before  such  names  as  casaj  house ;  hottegaj 
store ;  cucina,  kitchen,  when  we  speak  of  our  own 
house,  store,  kitchen  j  as, 

JEgli  e  in  cucina  .   .   .  He  is  in  the  kitchen. 
lo  saro  in  casa  subito   .  I  shall  be  at  home  soon. 


INTERJECTIONS. 
129.  The  following  are  the  principal  interjections: 


Ahimel 

Alas! 

Bravo  I 

Bravo  I 

Ah! 

Ah  I 

Ola! 

Ho,  there  I 

AUoI 

Stop! 

Piano  ! 

Softly ! 

AM  lasso  I 

Poor  me  ! 

Vergogna  ! 

Shame  ! 

Dehl 

Ah,  pray ! 

Viva  ! 

Huzza !  hurra ! 

Ebbene  I 

Well! 

Zitto! 

Hush! 

130.  Lasso  agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the 
person  or  persons  speaking ;  as. 

Lasso  me  !    Poor  me  !       Aid  lassi  !    Poor  ua 


58  CONJUNCTIONS. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


Dopo  che,      After  that, 

Subiio  che,  )   . 

'  y  As  soon  as. 
Toslo  die, 


:■} 


Pure,  Yet. 

Gia,  Already. 

Non  che.  Not  that. 

Prima  che,  Before  that. 

131.  Pure  is  employed  in  the  sense  of  yet^  alsOf 
or  even ;  as, 

Son  poverOy  pure  sonfelice. 

I  am  poor,  yet  I  am  happy. 

JVon  e  solo  bellay  e  pure  amabile. 

She  is  not  only  beautiful,  but  also  lovely. 

JUi  contentassi  pure  di  uno  sguardo. 

I  should  be  contented  even  with  a  look. 

132.  Pure  and  gid  are  often  used  as  expletive 
words;  as, 

Fate  pure  cio  che  vi  place     .   .  Do  what  you  like. 

Abra  gia  che  io  voglia  lodarvi  .   Not  that  I  wish  to  praise  you. 

133.  Non  che  is  sometimes  used  elliptically  for 
not  only  hut ;  as, 

Essa  merita  stima  non  che  rispetto. 

She  deserves  not  only  esteem,  but  respect 

134.  The  verb  following  prima  che,  dopo  che, 
eubito  che,  tosto  che,  is  used  in  the  future  as  in 
English,  when  futurity  is  implied ;  as, 

Gli  parlero  subito  che  mi  scriverete. 

I  will  speak  to  him  as  soon  as  you  write  to  me. 


EXAMPLES. 

Shall  we  have  any  books  to-day  ?      Avremo  dci  libri  oggi  1 

I  have  had  no  books,  and  I  shall     Io  non  ho  avuto  libriy  e   ion  ne 

have  none.  avru. 

He  is  in  town,  not  in  the  country,     Egli  e  in  ciilay  non  in  campagna. 
Where  are  you  going  to-morrow  7      Dove  andrete  domani  f 


ARTICLE.  —  INTERJECTIONS.  —  CONJUNCTIONS.      59 


VOCABULARY. 


Ball   ....  Ballo. 

City    ....  Citta. 

To  conciliate  Conciliare. 

Country     .    .  Campagnay  paese. 

Curiosity  .   .  Curiosita. 

Deaf  ....  Sordo. 

Error,  mistake  Errore,  shaglio. 

Table     .   .    .  Tavola. 

Faithful     .    .  Fedele. 

Fish   ....  Pesce. 


John  .  .  . 
Lame  .  . 
Now  .  .  . 
Only.  .  . 
Persevering 
Punishment 
Reward  . 
Romance  . 
Studious  . 
William     . 


Giovanni. 

Zoppo. 

AdessOy  ora. 

Solamenie. 

Ferseveranie. 

Pena. 

Ricompensa. 

Romanzo. 

Studioso. 

Guglielmo. 


EXERCISE  XVIL 

Where  is  your  father  ?  He  is  at  home.  What  is  he  doing  ? 
He  is  doing  nothing.  Why  does  he  not  go  to  the  country? 
Because  his  horse  is  lame.  Have  you  studied  your  lesson?  No, 
sir ;  I  have  had  no  time.  What  have  you  been  doing  ?  Nothing. 
Shame  !  I  have  studied  not  only  the  French  lesson,  but  the  Ital- 
ian translation.  Who  gave  you  this  book  ?  John,  the  son  of 
my  friend.  Is  he  in  town?  No,  he  vrent  into  the  country  last 
night.  Are  you  ashamed  to  speak  ?  I  am  not  ashamed,  but  I 
am  afraid.  Afraid  of  what  ?  Afraid  of  making  mistakes.  If 
you  are  afraid  of  making  mistakes,  you  will  never  speak.  Where 
are  you  going  to-night?  I  am  going  to  the  ball.  At  what 
time  shall  you  go  ?  As  soon  as  you  go  to  your  father's.  My 
friend  has  no  money,  yet  he  has  a  good  heart.  Who  gave  you 
this  pencil  ?  William.  William,  the  son  of  my  friend  ?  No  ; 
William,  the  brother  of  your  friend.  Alas !  What  is  the  matter 
with  you  ?  I  have  not  studied  my  lesson.  Why  do  you  not 
study  it  now  ?  Because  I  have  no  time.  Not  that  you  have  no 
time,  but  you  have  not  the  wish  to  study.  I  am  not  only  stu- 
dious, but  persevering.  Are  you  thirsty  ?  No,  I  am  not  thirsty. 
Are  you  deaf?  No,  I  am  not  deaf.  Have  you  any  books  ?  Yes, 
I  have  some.  Are  they  good  books?  Some  of  them  are  good. 
Why  do  you  not  lend  me  some  romances  ?  Because  I  have  no 
romances.  Are  you  afraid  to  lend  me  books  ?  I  am  not  afraid  • 
I  have  no  reason  to  be  afraid.  You  are  a  good  friend,  and  you 
are  right.  When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure  of  enjoying  youi 
company?    The  pleasure  is  mine,  sir  ;  and  I  shall  come  to-night. 


60 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


LESSON   XIX 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 
135.   Numeral  Adjectives,  or  adjectives  which 


express  number 


Uno ,     . 
Due  . 
Tre  . 
Quattro 
Cinque 


Sette .     . 
Otto  ,     . 
Nove 
Died     . 
Undid  . 
Dodid  . 
Tredid  . 
Quaitordid 
Quindid 
Sedid    . 
Didassette 
Didoito 
Vidannove 
Venti     . 
Ventuno 


are  the  following : 


.    One. 

.  Two. 

Three. 

.  Four. 

.  Five. 

.     Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

.  Nine. 

.    Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

.  Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

as 


Twenty- two. 

.     Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Thirty-two. 

Forty. 

.  Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

One  hundred. 

I  Two  hundred. 


Ventidue 

Trenta  . 

Trentuno 

Trentadue 

Quaranta 

Ginquanta 

Sessanta 

Settanta 

Ottanta  . 

Novanta 

Cento     . 

Duecentoov' 

Dugento 
Trecento  .  Three  hundred. 
Mille  .  .  One  thousand. 
Due  mila  .  Two  thousand. 
Died  mila .  Ten  thousand. 
Un  milione  .  One  million. 
Due  milioni  .  Two  millions. 
Un  hilione  .  One  billion, 
Due  bilioni    .  Two  bilHons. 


Cento  has  no  plural ; 

Tre  cento  toldati.  Three  hundred  soldiers. 

Mille  makes  in  the  plural  mila  ;  as, 

Quattro  mila  soldati.     Four  thousand  soldiers. 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES.  61 

136.  Cardinal  numbers  are  invariable,  except 
uno,  which  makes  una  for  the  feminine. 

137.  Uho  drops  the  o  before  a  masculine  noun 
commencing  with  a  vowel,  or  with  a  consonant 
which  is  not  z  or  impure  s  ;  as, 

Un  libro,  un  uomo,  uno  spirito,  U7ia  donna,  uii*  aniico,  w?i'  arnica. 
N.  B.  —  Uno  and  una  suffer  no  elision  at  the  end  of  a  phrase. 

138.  The  noun  which  follows  ventuno,  trentuno, 
should,  for  euphony,  be  in  the  singular ;  as, 

Venlun'  anno,  trentun  libro,  quarantunu  lettera. 
N.  B. — This  rule  is  not  to  be  observed  if  the  noun  precedes  or 
when  the  number  is  preceded  by  the  article  ;  as, 
Anni  ventuno  ;  libri  trentuno  ;  i  trentuno  libri  ;  le  ventuna  lettere. 

139.  The  preposition  on  is  not  expressed  in  Ital- 
ian, before  the  date  of  the  month  ,*  as, 

E  quindici  di  Luglio On  the  fifteenth  of  July. 

Quanti  ne  abbiamo  del  mese  ?    .  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 
JVe  abbiamo  quindici  ?   ....  It  is  the  fifteenth. 

140.  The  conjunction  and  is  omitted  between 
the  numbers  in  the  notation  of  years  ;  as, 

Mille  otto  cento  cinquanta.     One  thousand  eight  hundred  and  fifty. 

141.  The  indefinite  article  one  or  a  is  also  omitted 
before  hundred  and  thousand  ;  as. 

Cento  cavalli  .   .   .  One  hundred  horses. 
Mille  soldati  ...  A  thousand  soldiers. 

142.  The  date  of  the  century  is  preceded  by  the 
article ;  as, 

JVel  1858,  and  not  in  1858. 

143.  In  mentioning  the  various  epochs,  the 
numeral  mille  is  omitted ;  as, 

Uno  scriltore  del  trecento,  and  not  del  mille  trecento. 


62  N'JMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 

144.  Cardinal  numbers,  with  the  exception  of 
uno,  are  employed  for  the  date  of  the  month ;  as, 

E  primoy  il  due,  il  venti    .  The  first,  the  second,  the  third. 
A  quanii  siamo  del  mese  ?  .  What  day  of  the  month  is  it? 
Siamo  al  quindici    ....  It  is  the  fifteenth. 

145.  In  dating  letters,  the  article  may  be  used 
in  the  singular  or  plural,  and  the  preposition  di 
expressed  or  omitted ;  as, 

n  or  li  24  di  GiugnOy  or  il  24  Giugno. 

146.  The  expressions  twelve  hundred,  twenty-five 
hundred  J  etc.,  must  be  expressed  by  one  thousand 
two  hundred,  two  thousand  five  hundred,  etc. ;  as, 

Abbiamo  due  mila  trecento  franchi. 

147.  In  multiplication  the  word  via  is  used 
instead  of  times  ;  as. 

Due  via  due  f anno  quattro.     Two  times  two  make  four. 

148.  Cardinal  numbers  generally  precede  the 
nouns  J  as, 

Abbiamo  cento  venti  franchi. 

N.  B.  —  They  follow  the  noun  when  we  wish  to  fix  the  attention  to 
the  number,  rather  than  to  the  object  it  accompanies  ;  as, 
Abbiamo  franchi  centoventi. 

EXAJMPLES. 

It  was  last  week  that  I  spoke  to  Fu  la  setth  lana  passata  che  to 

your  friend.  parlai  al  vostro  amico. 

I  have  not  been  able  to  find  work  lo  non  sono  stato  capace  di  tro- 

for  your  son.  vare  lavoro  per  vostro figlio. 

You  are  not  able  to  sing  an  Ital-  Voi  non  siete  capace  di  cantart 

ian  song.  una  canzone  Italiana. 

I  thank  you,  sir.  Grazie,  signore. 

Where  is  your  friend  going  ?  Dove  va  il  vostro  amico  ? 

He  is  going  into  the  country.  Egli  va  in  campagna. 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


63 


VOCABULARY. 


Able  .  .  . 
To  believe 
Boy  .  .  . 
Certainly  . 
Cloud  .  . 
Command 
Destiny  . 
Door  .  .  . 
Gardener  . 
Labor    .   . 


Mile. 

Credere. 

Ragazzo. 

Certamente, 

JVuvola. 

Comando. 

Destino. 

Porta. 

Giardiniere. 

Lavoro. 


To  lose  .... 
Near,  nearly  . 
To  neglect  .  . 
Noise  .... 
Prayer,  request 
Prince  .... 
Round  .... 
Scene  .... 
To  wish  .  .  . 
To  work    .   .    . 


Perdere. 

Vicino,  quasi 

Trascurare. 

Rumor  e. 

Preghiera 

Principe. 

Rotondo. 

Scena. 

Desiderare 

Lavorare. 


EXERCISE  XVIII. 
Is  this  man  a  merchant?  No,  sir  ;  this  is  the  man  who  sold 
you  his  black  horse  last  winter.  My  black  horse  !  I  did  not  buy 
it  last  winter.  Then  it  was  last  summer.  Are  you  afraid  of 
my  dog?  I  am  not  afraid  of  your  dog  ;  I  am  ashamed  of  you. 
Of  me!  what  have  I  done?  You  have  not  assisted  that  poor 
man ;  he  is  poor  and  without  work,  has  three  children ;  and 
you  ask  me  what  you  have  done !  You  have  neglected  him, 
and  you  have  forgotten  my  request.  Why  do  you  speak  so? 
I  have  not  forgotten  your  command,*  but  I  have  not  been  able 
to  assist  him  as  I  wish.  Why  do  you  not  make  him  work  in 
your  father's  garden  ?  My  father  has  two  very  able  gardeners, 
and  they  never  work  in  winter ;  when  December  is  near,  they 
go  to  their  houses  and  stay  with  their  families  four  months,  from 
December  to  March.  Is  your  son  afraid  to  go  to  my  friend's 
store?  He  is  not  afraid  ;  but  he  has  not  studied  his  lesson,  and 
he  has  no  time.  Why  does  your  sister  cry?  She  has  lost 
twenty-five  dollars.  What  noise  is  this  ?  0  !  your  sister  ;  how 
do  you  do,  madam?  I  am  very  well,  sir,  I  thank  you.  But 
you  are  not  very  well ;  what  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Nothing 
is  the  matter  with  me,  sir ;  I  had  twenty-five  dollars  in  my 
hand  this  morning,  and  now  I  am  not  able  to  find  a  shilling. 
If  I  show  you  where  the  money  is,  will  you  give  me  this  rose  ? 
If  you  will  show  me  where  it  is,  I  will  certainly  give  you  the 
rose,  and  all  the  flowers  which  I  have  in  my  room,  in  my  gar- 
den, and  in  my  brother's  garden  Your  money  is  in  that  hand- 
kerchief on  that  round  table  near  the  door.  I  am  very  much 
obliged  to  you,  sir. 


64  INTEEROGATIVE  PRONOUNS. 


LESSON   XX, 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

149.  The  Interrogative   Pronouns  are  as  fol. 
lows: 

Chi Who.  I       Quale  ....    Which  one. 

Che What.         I      Quanto    .   .   .    How  much. 

150.  CM  is  used  substantively  for  persons  j  as, 

Chi  e  venuto  con  voi? Who  has  come  with  you  ? 

Chi  e  la? Who  is  there? 

A  chi  scrivete  ? To  whom  do  you  write  ? 

151.  CJie,  without  a  noun,   is   used   for  things 
indefinitely,  and  signifies  che  cosa?  what  thing?  as, 

Che  volete  da  me?   .   .   . ' .   .   .    What  do  you  want  of  me  ? 

Di  che  parlate  ? Of  what  (thing)  do  you  speak  ? 

152.  Quale,  without  a  noun,  is  used  for  things 
definitely;  as. 

Quale  voleiCy  il  buono  o  il  caitivo  ? 
Which  do  you  like,  the  good  or  bad  one  ? 
Quale  sceglietCi  questo  o  quello  ? 
Which  do  you  choose,  this  or  that  one  ? 

153.  QuantOj  used  substantively,  is  invariable ;  as, 

^'Uanto  costa  questo  ?  .   .   How  much  does  that  cost  ? 

Quanto  vi  resia  a  fare  ?  .   How  much  does  there  remain  to  you  to  do  ? 

Quanto,  used  adjectively,  agrees  with  the  noun;  as, 

Quanto  denaro ")     .      .    .     How  much  money ") 

,,       ,         4      fvi  resta  ?    „  ,  *'  >■  have  you  left  ? 

Quanta  carta    )  How  much  paper  J  ^ 

Quanti  libri     'I  ,       ,   „      How  many  books  ^   , 

ri       i         4      l'  legffcte  ?      „  \  do  you  read  ? 

Quante  carte    )     ^^  How  many  papers  j 


INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  65 

154.  die  and  quale  or  qual  (plural,  quali  or  qnai) 
joined  to  nouns,  have  a  different  meaning.  Che 
directs  the  question  to  the  intrinsic  merit  of  the 
object ;  quale  is  used  in  any  other  inquiry  ;  as, 

Che  libro  leggete  ?   .    .    .       .  What  book  are  you  reading  ? 

Leggo  un  buon  libra  ....  I  am  reading  a  good  book. 

Qual  libro  leggete?    ....  Which  book  are  you  reading ? 

Leggo  il  vostro I  am  reading  yours. 

Che  lavoratori  son  questi  ?    .  What  kind  of  workmen  are  these  ? 

Sono  molto  abili They  are  very  skilful. 

Quai  lavoratori  son  questi  ?  .  Which  workmen  are  these  ? 

Sono  quelli  di  mio  padre  .    .  They  are  my  father's. 

155.  Cui  is  also  used  sometimes,  in  classic 
authors,  as  an  interrogative  pronoun,  instead  of 
cJii ;   as. 

Con  cui  andrete  voi  ?    With  whom  will  you  go  ? 

156.  Che,  quale,  and  quanta,  are  also  used  as 
exclamations ;  as, 

Che  bel  quadro  ! What  a  beautiful  picture  ! 

Qiiale  strepito  ! What  a  noise  ! 

Quanto  ho  sofferto  !     .   .    .   How  much  have  I  suffered  ! 


EXAMPLES. 

I  bought  ten  books  yesterday.  lo  comprai  died  libri  ieri. 

I  shall  buy  a  book  if  I    have  lo   comprero  un    libro  se    avrb 

money.  denaro. 

I  am  going  to  buy  a  new  hat  to-  lo  comprero  un  cappello  nuovo 

morrow.  doinani. 

When  shall  you  go  to  the  book-  Quando  andrete  dal  libraio? 

seller's  ? 

Vou  are  not  right  in  calling  him  a  Voi  non  avete  ragione  di  chia 

fool.  marlo  matto. 

How  many  books  have  you  re-  Quanti  libri  avete   voi  ricevulo 

ceived  this  month  ?  questo  mese  ? 

4 


66  INTERROGATITE   PRONOUNS. 


VOCABULARY. 


Banker Banchiere. 

Beggar Mendico. 

Blind Cieco. 

Bookseller    .    .   .  Libraio. 

California     .   .    .  California. 

To  create  ....  Creare. 

Crown  (a  coin)     .  Scudo. 

Dollar Dollar  o._ 

To  enjoy    ....  Godere. 

Envy Invidia. 


Fool Matto. 

Gun Fucile. 

Hatter Cappellaio. 

Head Testa. 

Intelligent  ....  Jntelligente, 

Number JVumero. 

Respectful  ....  Rispetioso, 

Servant Servitore. 

To  run Correre. 

World Mondo. 


EXERCISE  XIX. 
How  many  trees  have  you  bought  this  week?  I  bought 
BIX  Monday,  sixteen  yesterday,  and  to-morrow  I  shall  buy 
twenty-one  trees,  if  I  have  money.  I  will  give  you  the 
money  for  the  twenty-one  trees  that  you  are  going  to  buy  to- 
morrow. You  are  very  kind,  sir.  Which  book  is  this  ?  The 
bookseller  sent  it  to  my  father.  When  shall  we  go  to  the  tai- 
lor's? To-morrow.  What  shall  you  do  with  your  gun?  I 
will  give  it  to  my  brother.  How  many  horses  has  your  father  ? 
He  has  four.  Lend  me  some  money.  How  much?  Three  hun- 
dred and  sixty  dollars.  I  have  not  the  money  with  me  ;  I  paid 
three  thousand  and  twenty-one  crowns  to  my  banker,  and  I 
have  but  one  hundred  and  six  dollars.  Are  you  afraid  to  lend 
me  money?  I  am  not  afraid.  Then  I  shall  send  my  servant. 
Very  well.  Is  this  the  man  of  whom  you  speak  so  often  ?  Yes, 
sir ;  this  is  the  man  of  whom  I  have  spoken  so  often,  and  of 
whom  I  speak  this  moment,  and  I  shall  always  speak  well  of 
him.  What  has  he  done  ?  Do  you  not  believe  me  ?  Yes,  I 
believe  that  you  enjoy  his  company  ;  but  who  is  he  ?  He  is  a 
man  of  merit,  generous  and  intelligent.  Shall  I  speak  the 
truth  ?  Certainly.  There  are  a  great  many  fools  in  this  world, 
and  you  are  one  of  the  number.  Why,  sir  ?  Because  I  think 
that  you  are  blind,  and  that  he  is  a  beggar.  A  beggar  !.he  is  a 
man  of  honor,  sir  ;  and  you  are  wrong  in  calling  him  a  beggar ; 
if  he  has  no  mc  ney ,  he  has  a  heart  and  a  head.  Have  I  not  a  heart 
and  head  too  ?  Yes,  sir ;  but  your  heart  was  created  in  Cali- 
fornia, and  your  head  in  your  father's  garden. 


REGULAR   VERBS,  THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


67 


LESSON    XXI 


REGULAR    VERBS. 

.NFtECTION   OF  A  REGULAR  VERB   OF    THE   TIHRD 
CONJUGATION. 


PARTIRE,  TO  DEPART. 
Present. 


Parto 
Parti 
Parte 

157. 

gation 

158. 
retain 
sound 


.    I  depart. 

.    Thou  departest. 

.    He  departs. 


We  depart. 
You  depart. 
They  depart. 


Pariiamo   . 
Partite    .   . 
Partono  .    . 
(See  model,  page  199.) 
There  are  but  few  verbs  of  the  third  conju- 
which  are  regular.     (See  list,  page  218.) 

The  verbs  in  which  ire  is  preceded  by  a  c 
the  i  before  o  and  a,  to  preserve  the  soft 
of  the  infinitive  ;  thus, 

Cucire  makes  cucio,  cuciay  and  not  cuco,  cuca. 

159.  Some  of  the  verbs  of  this  conjugation  add 
the  letters  isc  before  the  regular  inflection  of  all  the 
persons  of  the  singular,  and  of  the  third  person  plu- 
ral of  the  imperative,  as  well  as  the  present  indica- 
tive and  subjunctive.  Thus,  gioire,  to  enjoy,  makes 
Present. 


Indicative. 

Subjunctive. 
Gio-isc-a. 

Imperative. 

And  not 

Gio-isc-o, 

Gioo, 

Gioa. 

■ 

Gio-isc-i, 

Gio-isc-a, 

Gio-isc-i. 

Gioi, 

Gioa, 

Gioi. 

Gio-isc-e, 

Gio-isc-a, 

Gio-isc-a. 

Gioe, 

Gioa, 

Gioa. 

Gioiamo, 

Gioiamo, 

Gioiamo. 

— 

— 

— 

Gioite, 

Gioiate, 

Gioite. 

— 

— 

— 

Gio-isc-onc 

,  Gio-isc-ano, 

Gio-isc-ano. 

Gioono, 

Gioano, 

Gioam 

N  B.  —  The  first  and  second  persons  plural  are  never  irregular. 


68  EEGULAR  VERBS,  THIRD   CONJUGATION. 

160.  Some  of  these  verbs  can  be  conjugated  with 
or  without  this  addition ;  viz.,  nutrire  makes  nutre 
and  nutrisco. 

KB.  —  For  the  verbs  in  which  the  termination  isco  is  retained  or 
rejected,  see  list,  page  206. 

For  the  verbs  in  which  isco  is  indispensable,  see  list,  page  203. 

161.  In  counting  the  hours  of  the  day,  the  defi- 
nite article  is  added  to  the  cardinal  number,  and  the 
rioun  is  omitted.  The  verb  to  he  must  agree  with  the 
subject  which  always  follows  the  verb,  except  in  an 
interrogative  sentence ;  as, 

Che  oral? What  hour  is  it  ? 

E  V  una      It  is  one  o'clock. 

Sono  le  due It  is  two  o'clock. 

162.  Mezzo,  half,  after  the  noun  is  invariable.  It 
agrees  with  the  noun  when  it  precedes  it ;  as, 

Un*ora€  mezzo An  hour  and  a  half. 

Due  ore  e  mezzo Two  hours  and  a  half. 

Una  mezza  or  a Half  an  hour. 

163.  Half  past  twelve  is  idiomatically  expressed 
by  tJie  Jialf;  as, 

E  la  mezza.    It  is  half  past  twelve. 

164.  But  generally,  after  twelve,  the  word  ^05^  is 
translated  by  dopo,  after  ;  as, 

Egli  venne  ieri  alia  mezza  dopo    He  came  yesterday  at  half  past 
mezzo  giorno.  twelve. 

165.  A  quarter  past,  half  pa^t,  are  expressed  by 
a  quarter,  half,  joined  to  the  noun  by  the  conjunc- 
tion and;  as, 

Sono  le  ire  ed  un  quarto   .  It  is  a  quarter  past  three. 
Sono  le  otto  e  mezzo  ...   It  is  half  past  eight. 


REGULAR   VERBS,  THIRD    CONJUGATION.  69 

166.  A  quarter  of  is  expressed  by  meno  un 
quarto,  which  is  always  placed  after  the  whole 
number ;  as, 

Sono  Ic  due  meno  un  quarto,  or|i^  j^  ^  ^^^^^^^  ^^^^^^ 
E  Vuna,  e  Ire  quarii.  ) 

167.  Ago  is  expressed  by  fa  at  the  end  of  the 
phrase,  or  by  sono  or  e  at  the  beginning  of  it ;  as, 

Due  giorni  fa.    |  ^^^  ^^^.^  ^^^^         Un  anno  fa.  |  ^  ^^^^  ^^^^ 
Sono  due  giorni.)  E  un  anno.    ) 

168.  The  preposition  in  is  omitted  in  Italian 
before  the  words  mattina,  morning ;  dopo  pranzOj 
afternoon ;  sera,  evening ;  notte,  night.  It  is  changed 
into  of,  if  the  hour  is  mentioned ;  as, 

La  mattina,  0  la  sera  .    .    .   In  the  morning,  or  in  the  evening. 
Jllle  cinque  delta  sera  ...  At  five  o'clock  in  the  evening. 


EXAjVIPLES. 

Have  you  found  your  cane  ?  Avete  trovato  il  vostro  bastojie  ? 

I  dress  myself  at  half  past  six.  lo  mi  vesto  alle  sei  e  mezzo. 

Have  you  already  forgotten  it?  U  avete  voigia  dimenticato  ? 

I  do  not  think  I  shall  be  able  to  lo  non  credo  di  esser   capace  d\ 

go  to  the  ball  to-night.  andare  al  ballo  questa  sera. 

At  what  time  in  the  evening  ?  A  che  era  delta  sera  ? 

At  a  quarter  past  twelve.  Ad  un  quarto  dopo  mezzanotte. 


AMOR  TIMIDO. 

Placido  zeffiretto, 

Se  trovi  il  caro  oggettc 
Digli  che  sei  sospiro, 
Ma  non  gli  dir  di  chi. 

Limpido  ruscelletto 

Se  mai  t'incontri  in  lei, 
Dille  che  pianto  sei 
Ma  non  le  dir  qual  ciglio 
Crescer  ti  fe'  cosi. 


70 


REGULAR   VERBS,  THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


VOCABULARY. 

Already Gia. 

Ancient Antico. 

Ass Anno. 

Breakfast Colazione. 

Cane,  stick  ....  Bastone. 

To  comb Pettinare. 

Corner Angola. 

Ear Orecchio, 

Dark Oscuro. 

Dinner Pranzo. 


To  finish    . 

Folly  .  . 
To  hear     . 

Minute  .    . 

To  play  . 
To  print  . 
Prose     .    . 

Rare .    .    . 

To  sleep  . 
To  think  . 

Finire. 

Follia. 

Sentire. 

Minuto. 

SuonarBy  giocare 

Stampare. 

Prosa. 

Rare. 

Dormire. 

Pensare. 


EXERCISE  XX. 
Am  I  not  a  good  boy  ?  Not  always.  When  am  I  not  a  good 
boy?  "When  you  do  not  study  your  lesson.  And  when  am  I  a 
good  boy?  When  you  sleep.  Then,  good-night.  Where  are 
you  going  ?  I  am  going  to  be  a  good  boy.  How  many  hours 
do  you  sleep  in  the  night  ?  I  sleep  —  let  me  think  —  one,  two, 
three,  four,  four  —  what  is  the  number  after  four  ?  Five.  Five, 
six,  seven,  eight  —  how  many  hours  are  there  from  seven  to  eight  ? 
One  hour.  Then  I  sleep  only  one  hour.  Only  one  hour? 
Yes,  sir  ;  an  hour.  I  go  to  bed  at  seven  o'clock,  and  I  dress 
myself  when  the  bell  rings  for  breakfast  at  eight  o'clock  in  the 
morning.  How  many  hours  do  you  work  ?  I  work  six  hours 
and  a  half.  What  o'clock  is  it?  It  is  a  quarter  of  nine.  At 
what  time  shall  you  go  to  the  bookseller's  ?  I  had  already  for- 
gotten it ;  probably  at  half  past  twelve.  Then  I  shall  go  with 
you,  because  I  (have)  wish  to  buy  a  few  books,  and  I  am  sure 
that  he  will  show  me  particular  attention  if  I  (shall)  go  with 
you.  I  shall  be  at  your  service.  I  thank  you,  sir.  Let  us  see 
what  you  have  done  to-day.  I  have  not  done  anything.  Have 
you  not  studied  your  French  lesson  ?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  studied  it  two 
hours  and  a  half,  from  eleven  till  half  past  twelve.  That  makes 
an  hour  and  a  half.  Is  it  possible?  Yes,  an  hour  and  a  half, 
and,  after  all,  I  do  not  think  I  shall  be  able  to  recite  it  this  after- 
noon. At  what  time  in  the  afternoon  ?  At  a  quarter  of  five 
At  what  time  do  you  dine?  We  dine  at  a  quarter  past  two,  and 
I  shall  be  at  table  twenty-one  minutes.  Then  you  have  three 
hours  for  your  lesson  :  an  hour  and  a  quarter  before  dinner,  and 
an  hour  and  three  quarters  after  dinner. 


CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS.  71 


LESSON    XXII. 


CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS,  continued 


169.  The  Conjunctive  Pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi,  si, 
change  the  i  into  e,  and  gli  adds  an  e,  when  immedi- 
ately followed  by  the  pronouns  lo,  la,  li,  le,  ne. 

170.  If  the  conjunctive  pronouns  follow  the  verb, 
they  are  joined  to  it,  and  make  one  word.  If  they 
precede  the  verb,  they  can  be  united  only  when  the 
last  pronoun  is  lo,  which  loses  the  o  when  the  fol- 
lowing verb  commences  with  a  consonant,  except  z 
or  impure  s;  as, 

Te  la  mandero,  or  manderottela.   ^ 

Tel  TTMndero,  or  manderottelo.        I  I  will  send  it  to  you. 

Te  lo  spedirOi  or  spedirottelo.         J 

Fe  ne  mandero,  or  manderovvene.     I  will  send  you  some. 

171.  Gli  is  never  separated  from  the  following 
pronoun,  whether  it  precedes  or  follows  the  verb. 
Thus  used,  it  can  be  applied  to  both  genders  ;  as, 

Egli  glielo  mando,  or  mandoglielo.     He  sent  it  to  him,  or  to  her. 

172.  Loro  is  never  united  >to  any  pronoun,  and 
must  always  follow  the  verb. 

173.  When  the  pronouns  lo,  la,  li,  le,  and  ne,  are 
used  in  connection  with  ?oro,  they  must  precede  the 
verb,  except  in  those  cases  in  which  they  are 
affixed  to  it ;  as, 

Lo  mandai  loro I  sent  it  to  them. 

Mandatelo  loro Send  it  to  them. 

JVon  lo  mandate  loro Do  not  send  it  to  them. 


72  CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS. 

174.  When  an  infinitive  is  followed  by  another, 
the  conjunctive  pronoun  is  affixed  to  the  first ;  as, 

Spero  poterla  vedere,  and  not  spero  poter  vederla. 

175.  The  conjunctive  pronouns  mi,  ti,  ci,  vi,  si, 
though  not  followed  by  the  pronouns  lo,  la,  li,  le, 
ne,  may  be  expressed  by  me,  te,  noi,  vol,  se,  used 
after  the  verb  and  not  joined  to  it;  but  this  form 
is  used  only  when  we  wish  to  designate  the 
person  in  a  manner  more  precise,  and  to  the  exclu- 
sion of  all  other  persons ;  thus :  He  loves  me  may 
be  expressed  by  Egli  mi  ama,  or  by  Ugli  ama  me  ; 
but,  Ugli  mi  ama  has  the  meaning  that  he  loves  me, 
and  that  he  may  love  others  ;  whilst  Egli  ama  me 
shows  that  I  am  the  only  person  loved  by  him,  and 
that  no  other  person  shares  his  love. 

N.  B.  —  E(/li  mi  ama  is  then  properly  translated  by  He  loves  me. 
E(/li  ama  me  should  be  translated  by  He  loves  but  me. 

176.  Auxiliary  verbs  or  present  participles  which 
in  English  precede  the  past  participle  are  omitted 
in  Italian ;  the  conjunctive  pronoun  is  then  affixed 
to  the  past  participle ;  as, 

Vedutala  in  quelle  stato,  piansi  e  pregai. 
Having  seen  her  in  that  condition,  I  wept  and  prayed. 

177.  When  a  pronoun  forms  one  of  two  or  more 
objects  of  the  same  verb,  it  is  never  used  conjunc- 
tively ;  as, 

Jo  scrissi  a  luiy  e  non  a  lei,  and  not  lo  gli  scrissiy  e  non  a  lei. 

Jo  non  scrissi  ne  a  voi  ne  a  vostra  sorellay  and  not  Jo  non  vi  scrissi. 

178.  The  pronouns  ci  and  vi  are  also  employed 
as  adverbs  instead  of  qui,  here,  and  li,  there ;  as, 

Jo  ci  rimarru,  or  io  rimarro  qui .    .   I  will  remain  here. 
Jo  vi  andro,  or  io  andro  11  .  I  shall  go  there. 


CONJUNCTIVE   PRONOUNS. 


73 


In  this  case,  if  they  are  used  with  the  conjunctive 
pronouns  ci  and  vi,  they  must  follow  them,  and 
may  be  used  the  one  for  the  other,  when  the  law  of 
euphony  requires  it ;  thus, 

t-r  -I  •    1  ( Vol  ci  vi  fate  rimanere,  not 

\  ou  make  us  remain  here  .    j  ''"'■'-'■  '^''  ^"^"^  '  """■  ""  > 

C  Voi  ci  ci  fate  rimanere. 

We  send  you  there  ....    -f-^^''  ^^  ""  ^^^^^^o^  ^^^ 
IJVoi  vi  vi  mandiamo. 

I  go  there lo  ci  vadOy  not  io  vi  vado. 

They  can  be  transposed,  when  harmony  requires  it: 


He  will  see  us  there 


(  Egli  vi  ci  vedra^  better  than 
I  Egli  ci  vi  vedra. 


TABLE  OF  THE  COMPOUND  CONJUNCTIVE  PRONOUNS. 
Me,  to  me       .     . 
Te,  to  thee      .     . 
f  to  oneself 
'I to  themselves 
Ce,  to  us     . 
Ve,  to  you  . 
to  him 
to  her 


Gli-e 


■{ 


Lo,  him  or  it 
La,  her  or  it 
Li,  them 
Le,  them 
Ne,  some  of  it 


lo ;  la ;       li,  le ;         ne* 

him  or  it ;  her  or  it ;  them ;  some  of  it. 


loro,  to  them. 


EXAMPLES 
Did  he  give  you  the  books  which     Vi  diede  egli  i  libri  che  mio  padre 

my  father  sent  to  you?  vi  mandb  ? 

He  gave  them  to  me  yesterday.         Egli  me  li  diede  ieri. 
How  many  books  have  you  now  ?      Quanti  libri  avete  ora  ? 

*  The  pronouns  of  the  first  column  are  to  be  prefixed  to  those  of  the  second,  as 
occasion  may  require  ;  as,  melo.,  it  to  me 


u 


CC-pTJUNCTIVE  peonouns. 


VOCABULARY. 


Amiable    .   . 
Brother-in-law 
Comb    .   . 
Compliment 
Despotism 
Dictate  .    . 
To  excuse 
To  follow  . 
Grief     .   . 
Kingdom  . 


Amabile. 

Cognato. 

Pettine. 

Complimento. 

Dispotiswo. 

JDettame. 

Scusare. 

Seguire. 

Affanno. 

Regno. 


Ill,  unwell 
Illness  .  . 
Letter  .  . 
To  moralize 
To  resemble 
Ridicule  . 
To  sell  .  . 
Stone  .  . 
To  succeed 
Sure  ,    .    . 


Ammalato. 
Malattia. 
Lettera. 
Moralizzare. 
Kassomigliare . 
Ridicolo. 
Fender  e. 
Pietra. 
Riuscire. 
Sicuro. 


EXERCISE  XXI. 

Who  is  sick?  My  brother's  child  is  sick.  What  is  the  mat- 
ter with  him?  He  has  been  sick  for  some  time,  with  a  fever. 
Did  you  give  him  the  flowers  which  my  friend  sent  him  ?  Yes, 
sir;  I  gave  them  to  him  yesterday.  How  old  is  he?  He  is 
seven  years  old.  Give  him  this  rose.  I  will  give  it  to  him  with 
pleasure.  When  will  you  give  it  to  him?  This  afternoon. 
Then,  if  you  send  your  servant  to  my  house,  I  will  give  him  some 
flowers  for  the  boy,  and  for  his  pretty  sister.  Why  do  you  not 
send  me  some  roses?  Because  you  are  not  sick.  But  my 
pretty  niece  is  not  sick.  Well,  she  is  not  sick,  but  she  is  lovely, 
and  the  flowers  of  my  garden  are  for  her,  and  (for)  those  who 
resemble  her.  Excuse  me,  sir  ;  but  you  are  a  little  partial. 
Probably  ;  but  I  follow  the  dictates  of  my  heart.  Is  it  always 
safe  to  follow  the  dictates  of  the  heart  ?  Do  not  begin  your  old 
story.  Will  you  buy  my  horse?  I  have  two.  WiU  you  sell 
them  to  me?  One  is  already  sold.  To  whom?  To  my  brother- 
in-law.  When  did  you  sell  it  to  him  ?  Three  days  ago.  For 
how  much  ?  Two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars.  Then  you  have 
not  two  horses ;  you  have  but  one.  Well,  it  was  only  to  make 
you  understand  that  I  have  no  need  3f  your  horse.  You  are 
right,  sir.  My  friends  sent  this  note,  asking  me  to  lend  them 
the  two  books  of  which  you  spoke  yesterday.  They  are  on  that 
round  table  ;  send  them  to  them  with  my  compliments.  What 
is  the  matter  with  your  brother  ?  Nothing  is  the  matter  with 
him.  What  have  you  bought?  I  have  bought  three  birds. 
To  whom  shall  you  give  them  ?  I  shall  give  them  to  my  sister. 
She  has  two  cats,  and  cats  and  birds  are  not  good  friends. 


REMARKS  ON  THE  REGULAR  VERBS.       4  0 


LESSON  XXIII 


REMARKS  ON  THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 

179.  The  first  person  plural  of  every  tense  ends 
in  mo. 

The  second  person  plural  of  every  tense  ends  in  te. 

The  third  person  plural  of  every  tense  ends  in  no. 

N.  B.  —  Modern  writers  have  adopted  the  termination  rOy  instead 
of  nOy  in  the  third  person  plural  of  the  conditional,  and  of  the  imper- 
fect subjunctive. 

180.  The  accent  in  the  third  person  plural  of 
the  present  and  imperfect  indicative,  and  in  the 
present  subjunctive,  falls  always  on  the  last  vowel 
but  two,  and  not  on  the  last  vowel  but  one,  as  in 
the  other  persons  of  the  same  tenses  ;  as, 

amo,        ami,       ama,       amiamo,      amate,       amano. 
amava,    amavi,    amava,   amavamo,    amavate,   amavano. 
ami,        ami,       ami,        amiamo,      amiate,      amino. 

N.  B.  —  In  some  parts  of  Italy  the  regular  termination  of  the  first 
person  singular  of  the  imperfect  is  often  changed  from  a  into  o  ;  as, 

Amavo,  temevo,  dormivOy  instead  of  amava,  temeva,  dormiva. 
It  is  to  be  regretted  that  this  change  has  not  been  generally  adopted, 
because,  if  it  were,  the  first  person  could  not  be  mistaken  for  the  third 
person  of  the  same  tense. 

181.  Some  verbs  have  a  double  termination  ;  as, 

Tmpazzare  and  impazzire. 
Compiere  and  compire. 

With  the  termination  in  are  and  ere,  they  are  regular. 
With  the  termination  in  ire,  they  form  the  present 
in  isco. 


76 


REMARKS  ON  THE  REGULAR  VERBS. 


COLLECTIVE  NUMBERS. 
182.   The  Collectiye  Numbers  are  as  follows: 


Unpaio    .     .     . 
Una  decina   .     . 
Una  dozzina  . 
Una  quindicina 
Una  ventina  . 
Una  trentina 
Una  quarantina 
Una  cinquantina 
Un  centinaio 
Un  migliaio 


A  pair. 
Half  a  score. 
A  dozen. 
About  fifteen. 
A  score. 
About  thirty. 
About  forty. 
About  fifty. 
About  a  hundred. 
About  a  thousand. 


DISTRIBUTIVE  NUMBERS. 


Ad  uno  ad  uno 
A  due  a  due  . 
A  died  a  died 
A  venti  a  venti 
Una  volta 
Due  volte 
Tre  volte 


One  by  one. 

Two  by  two. 

Ten  by  ten. 

Twenty  by  twenty. 

Once. 

Twice. 

Three  times. 


Primieramente,  or  in  primo  luogo  .     .     .  Firstly. 

Secondariamente,  or  in  secondo  luogo  .     .  Secondly. 

In  terzo  luogo Thirdly. 

In  quarto  luogo Fourthly. 


EXAMPLES. 


I  am  much  obliged  to  you,  sir. 

I  have  not  had  any  answer. 

I  will  not  fail  to  speak  to  him 

about  it  to-morrow. 
Be  sure  of  it,  sir. 
Be  sure  of  it,  madam. 


lo  vi  sono  mollo  ohbligaiOy  signore. 
Jo  non  ho  avuto  nesstma  risposta. 
lo  non  manchero  di  parlargliene 

domain. 
Siatene  sicuro,  signore. 
Siatene  sicura,  signora. 


REMARKS   ON   THE   REGULAR   VERBS. 


77 


VOCABULARY. 


Answer 

Concert 
To  copy 
Disposed 
Engagement 
Exhibition 
Favor  .  . 
To  fear  . 
3entleman 
Invitation 
To  invite 


Risposia. 

Concerto. 

Copiare. 

Disposto. 

Impegno. 

JSsibizione. 

Favor  e. 

Temere. 

Gentiluomo. 

Invito. 

Invitare. 


Lovely      Amabile. 

Medicine Medicina 

Model Moddlo. 

To  oblige Obbligare 

Terfect Perfetto. 

Pocket Tasca. 

Storm Tempesta. 

Terrible Terribile. 

Theatre Teatro. 

To  want Bisognare 

Wife Moglie. 


EXERCISE  XXII. 


Give  me  the  sugar,  I  have  no  sugar.  Give  me  something 
then.  I  have  nothing.  Where  is  the  knife?  On  the  table, 
with  the  fork  and  the  spoon.  Where  is  the  English  grammar  ? 
In  my  room.  Have  you  copied  your  French  translation  ?  I  have 
copied  it  twice.  Have  you  lost  your  key  ?  My  key  is  in  my 
pocket.  Whose  key  is  this?  It  is  my  brother's.  He  who 
loves,  fears.  Are  you  disposed  to  do  me  a  favor  ?  I  am  at  your 
service.  Lend  me  your  horse,  then.  My  horse  is  lame.  Did 
you  go  to  my  father's  yesterday?  Yes,  sir;  I  was  with  him, 
and  I  enjoyed  his  agreeable  company  for  two  hours  and  a  half. 
Have  you  any  pens?  I  have  a  great  many.  Give  me  some. 
How  many  ?  Give  me  a  dozen.  Did  you  find  many  friends  at 
the  theatre  ?  Not  many  ;  half  a  score,  I  think.  With  whom 
did  you  go?  I  went  with  your  brother's  friend  and  his  wife. 
Was  their  little  daughter  with  them?  Yes,  she  was  with  us. 
Is  she  not  a  very  lovely  creature?  Yes,  she  is  a  model  of 
beauty.  Shall  you  go  to  the  great  ball  to-night?  Yes,  I  have 
already  invited  your  niece.  Has  she  accepted  the  invitation  ? 
I  have  had  no  answer  yet.  When  did  you  send  your  invita- 
tion? This  morning,  at  half  past  eight.  Probably  she  was 
not  at  home ;  she  went  to  the  exhibition  this  morning.  I  hope 
(that)  she  will  send  me  an  answer  soon.  She  will  not  fail  to 
send  you  an  answer ;  be  sure  of  it.  But  when  will  she  send  it  ? 
It  is  already  a  quarter  of  four,  and  I  have  made  no  other  engage- 
ment. Have  you  any  good  gloves  ?  I  have  some,  but  they  are 
not  very  good.     Will  you  accept  this  pair  ?    I  thank  you   sir. 


78  NUMBERS. 


LESSON   XXIV. 


ORDINAL    NUMBERS. 

Frimo First. 

Secondo  ....  .  Second. 

Terzo Third. 

Quarto Fourth. 

Quinto Fifth. 

Sesto Sixth. 

Settimo Seventh. 

Oltavo Eighth. 

Nono Ninth. 

JDedmo Tenth. 

XJndecimo Eleventh. 

Duodecimo Twelfth. 

Decimo  terzo Thirteenth. 

Decimo  quarto Fourteenth. 

Decimo  quinto Fifteenth. 

Decimo  sesio Sixteenth. 

Decimo  settimo Seventeenth. 

Decimo  ottavo Eighteenth. 

Decimo  nono Nineteenth. 

Ventedmo  or  vigedmo     .     .  Twentieth. 

Treniesimo Thirtieth. 

Quarantesimo Fortieth. 

Cinquantesimo .     .     .     .     .  Fiftieth. 

Sessantesimo Sixtieth. 

Settantesimo Seventieth. 

Ottantesimo Eightieth. 

Novantesimo Ninetieth. 

Centesimo One  hundredth. 

Millesimo One  thousandth. 

Milionesimo One  millionth. 


NUMBERS.  79 

183.  Ordinal  numbers  are  variable,  and  agree 
with  their  substantives  ;  thus, 

Atto  quarto,  scena  terza.    Act  fourth,  scene  third. 

184.  If  the  ordinal  number  is  a  compound  num- 
ber, both  numbers  must  agree  with  the  noun ;  as, 

La  lezione  decima  quarta     .    .   The  fourteenth  lesson. 
Le  decime  qidnte  file    Literally  -.    The  fifteenth  rows. 

185.  Ordinal  numbers,  commencing  from  the  thir- 
teenth, can  also  be  formed  by  changing  the  last 
vowel  of  the  cardinal  numbers  into  esimo ;  as, 

Tredicesimo      Thirteenth. 

Quattordicesimo Fourteenth. 

Quindicesimo Fifteenth. 

Sedicesimo Sixteenth. 

Diciasseitesimo Seventeenth. 

Diciottesimo Eighteenth. 

Ventiduesimo Twenty -second. 

Quarantacinquesimo    ....  Forty-fifth. 

Sessantasettesimo Sixty-seventh. 

Centotrentacinquesimo    .   .   .  One  hundred  and  thirty-fifth. 

Milletrecentoventiquattresimo  Thirteen  hundred  twenty-fourth. 


Doppio     .     .     Double 
Triplo       .     .     Triple. 


PROPORTIONAL  NUMBERS. 

Quintuplo .  Quintuple. 
Decuplo    .  Ten-fold. 
Gentuplo  .  A  hundred-fold. 


QuadrupJo     .     Quadruple. 

186.   Proportional  numbers  are  variable ;  as, 

Doppie  maniche,  double  sleeves.      Doppia  inferriata,  double  grate. 


EXAMPLES. 
If  I  were  sure  of  what  he  says.  Sefossi  sicuro  di  cio  che  dice. 

Be  sure  of  it.  Siatene  sicuro. 

have  not  received  a  letter  for  six    JVon  ho  ricevuto  una  letiera  da 

months.  sei  mesi. 


80 


NUMBERS. 


VOCABULARY. 


Advice 
Beside  .   . 
Catalogue 
To  classify 
Composition 
Course 
Cruel    .    . 
Difficulty 
To  examine 
German  . 
Heartily". 


Consiglio. 

Fuori  di. 

Catalogo. 

Classificare. 

Composizione. 

Corso. 

Crudele. 

Bifficolta. 

Esaminare. 

Tedesco. 

Di  cuore. 


Journey,  travel 
Library     ,   .    . 


To  persevere 

Sincere  .  .  . 

Sail    .   .  .  . 

Spanish  .  . 

Vanity  .  .  . 

Viper    .  .  . 

Volume  .  . 


Viaggio. 

Libreria, 

Pagina. 

Perseverare. 

Sincero. 

Vela. 

Spagnuolo. 

Vanita. 

Vipera. 

Volume. 


EXERCISE  XXIII. 
Shall  I  give  your  books  to  the  bookseller  ?  Give  them  to  him; 
if  you  wish.  Shall  I  give  them  to  his  friend?  Give  them  tc 
him  or  to  his  friend.  Why  do  you  not  speak?  Because  I  am 
afraid  of  making  mistakes.  You  will  never  speak  well,  if  you 
are  afraid  of  making  mistakes.  Have  you  examined  your 
French  composition?  I  examined  it  yesterday.  How  many 
mistakes  did  you  find  on  the  first  page?  A  dozen.  How  many 
on  the  second  ?  About  twice  as  many.  Twenty-four  mis- 
takes !  what  shall  I  do  ?  What  shall  you  do  ?  Study,  perse- 
vere, and  I  am  sure  that  you  will  overcome  all  difficulty  in  your 
translation.  If  I  were  sure  of  it !  What  would  you  do  ?  I 
would  study  heartily.  Study,  then,  and  be  sure  to  make  no 
mistakes  in  the  course  of  six  months.  Is  this  your  sincere 
advice  ?  The  advice  which  I  give  you  is  the  same  which  I  have 
given  to  my  brother,  sisters,  and  friends.  IIow  many  volumes 
are  there  in  this  library?  About  fifty  thousand.  Have  you  the 
catalogue  ?  Yes,  sir ;  you  will  find  the  books  classified  :  the 
English  books  are  from  the  first  page  to  the  seventy-sixth — about 
forty  thousand  ;  the  German,  from  the  seventy-seventh  page  to 
the  ninety-first  page — about  thirty-seven  hundred  volumes  ;  the 
others  are  French,  Italian,  and  Spanish  books.  What  is  the 
matter  with  your  sister  ?  She  is  beside  herself,  for  joy.  "Why  ? 
Her  friend,  who  has  been  absent  two  years  and  a  half,  and  from 
whom  she  had  not  received  a  letter  for  seven  months,  arrived 
yesterday.  Where  is  he?  Ho  is  with  her,  and  they  are 
nappy. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  81 


LESSON    XXV 


IREEGULAR    VERBS. 

187.  The  irregularity  of  the  Italian  verbs  is  com- 
monly in  the  perfect,  and  occasionally  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods,  in  the 
future,  conditional,  and  imperative. 


IRREGULARITY  OP  THE  PERFECT. 

188.    The  verb  accendere,  to  kindle,  is  irregular 
in  its  perfect. 

Instead  of  accendei    it  makes  accesi. 


accende 


•'       "  accenderono  "         accesero. 

N.  B.  —  The  second  person  singular  (accendesti)  and  the  first  and 
second  persons  plural  {accendemmo,  accendesie)  are  always  regular. 

From  this  example,  it  may  be  seen : 

1.  That  the  irregularity  of  the  perfect  is  in  the 
first  and  third  persons  singular,  and  in  the  third  per- 
son plural. 

2.  That  the  third  person  singular  is  formed  by 
changing  the  i  of  the  first  person  into  e. 

d.  That  the  third  person  plural  is  formed  by 
adding  ro  to  the  third  person  singular. 

N.  B .  —  The  above  rules  hold  good  for  all  irregular  perfects. 


82  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

IRREGULARITY  OF  THE  PRESENT  AND  IMPERATIVE 

189.  If  the  verb  venire  were  regular,  it  would 
make  for  the 

Present  Indicatiye.      Pres.  Subjunctive.  Imperative. 

VenOy  Venuy 

Veni,  Venuy  Veni, 

VenCy  Venay  Vena, 

VeniamOy  VeniainOy  VeniamOy 

VenitBy  VeniaUy  Venite, 

Venono.  Venano,  VevMno. 

But,  as  it  is  irregular,  it  makes 

VengOy  Vengay 

Vieniy  Vengay  Vienty 

Vieney  Vengay  Vengay 

VeniamOy  VeniamOy  VeniamOy 

Venitey  Veniatey  Venitey 

Vengono,  Vengano.  Vengano. 

From  the  above,  it  may  be  seen: 

1.  That  the  second  persons  singular  and  plural 
of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative  are  alike. 

2.  That  the  three  persons  singular  of  the 
present  subjunctive  and  the  third  person  singular 
of  the  imperative  are  alike,  and  formed  by  changing 
the  o  of  the  first  person  of  the  present  indicative 
into  a. 

3.  That  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present 
subjunctive  and  of  the  imperative  are  alike,  and 
formed  by  adding  no  to  the  third  person  singular. 

4.  That  an  a  is  added  before  the  termination  te 
of  the  second  person  plural  indicative,  to  form  the 
same  person  plural  of  the  present  subjunctive. 

N.  B.  —  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  change  ete  into  iale. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS.  83 

IRREGULARITY  OF  THE  FTTTURE  AND  CONDITIONAL 

190.  The  termination  of  the  future,  regular  or 
irregular,  is  always  rb,  raij  rd  remo,  rete,  ranno. 

191.  The  termination  of  the  conditional  is  always 
rei,  resti,  rehbe,  remmo,  resfe,  rehhero. 

192.  Ifvalere,  to  be  worth,  were  regular,  it  would 
make  for  the 


Future. 

Conditional. 

Valeroy 

Valerei, 

Valeraiy 

Valerestiy 

Valera, 

Valerebbey 

ValeremOy 

Valeremmo, 

Valerete, 

Valereste, 

Valeranno. 

Valerebbero. 

Ls  irregular, 

it  makes 

Varro,     ' 

Varreiy 

Varrai, 

Varrestiy 

Varra, 

VarrebbCy 

VarremOf 

Varremmo, 

Varretey 

VarrestCy 

Varranno. 

Varrebbero. 

From  the  above,  it  may  be  seen  : 

1.  That  the  irregularity  of  the  future  and  condi- 
tional rests  only  on  the  change  or  omission  of 
one  or  more  of  the  letters  preceding  the  regular 
termination. 

2.  That  the  alteration  which  takes  place  in  the 
first  person  singular  of  the  future  is  carried  through 
all  the  other  persons  of  the  same  future,  and  of  the 
conditional. 


S4  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

RfeUMl:  OF  THE  ABOVE  RULES. 

193.   In   order  to   master  the    Italian   irregular 
rerbs,  it  is  required  to  know  : 

1.  The  present  indicative. 

2.  The  first  person  of  the  perfect. 

3.  The  first  person  of  the  future. 

4.  The  past  participle. 

1^  The  first  person  of  the  perfect  and  future  and  the  past  par 
ticiple  -will  be  found  in  the  list,  page  207. 

The  few  irregular  presents,  and  any  other  exceptions  to  the  above 
rules,  will  be  found  in  a  separate  list,  page  219. 


EXAMPLES. 
He  gave  me  a  great  deal  of  sugar.     Egli  mi  diede  molto  zucchero. 
Look  at  this  portrait.  Guardate  questo  ritratto. 

May  I  ask  you  a  question  ?  Potreifarvi  una  domanda  ? 

He  asked  a  favor  of  me  to-night.       Mi  domando  un  favore  sla  sera. 
I  intend  to  go  to  the  ball.  Ho  intenzione  di  andare  al  ballo 


EXTRACT  FROM  LE  NOTTI  ROMANE. 
Romolo  fiso  allora  gli  occhi  alia  sua  lancia  formidabili  come 
lei,  e  robustamente  col  piede  nel  mezzo  la  spezzo.  Poscia,  get- 
tando  a  terra  con  dispettoso  cruccio  i  due  tronchi,  in  voce  com- 
pressa  mormoro  :  Yanne,  ministra  d'imperio  affannosa  :  il  lituo 
fu  pill  di  te  potente  o  felice.  Per  qual  fato  io  risurgo,  e  veggo 
la  mia  citth,  ora  trionfante  con  discipHne  contrarie  alle  mie?  E 
tu  che  fortemente  sostieni  i  nostri  aspetti,  se  mai  narri  a  questi 
abitatori,  forse  non  creduta  maraviglia,  ciob  che  meco  ragionasti, 
di'  loro  che  altrettanta  io  ne  provai  da  te  ascoltando  il  presente 
imperio  ;  che  vidi  Roma,  non  la  canobbi,  e  discendo.  Sparve,  e 
il  monte  muggi  con  rombo  di  terremoto.  Si  aperse  la  terra  sotto 
Io  spettro  sdegnoso,  e  in  quella  sospirando  piomb6,  coprendosi  il 
volto  con  la  visiera.  Le  ombre  raccolsoro  i  tronchi  dell'  asta 
fondatrice  del  glorioso  imperio,  e  I'une  all'altre  in  silenzio  se  li 
mostravano. 


IREEGULAR  VERBS. 


85 


VOCABULARY. 


To  belong 
Bottle    . 
Distance 
Eternal 
Glory    . 
To  imitate 
Imported 
To  paint 
Palace  . 
Petition 


Appartenere. 

Bottiylia. 

Distanza. 

Eterno. 

Gloria. 

Jmitare. 

Imporiato. 

Fittare. 

Palazzo. 

Petizione. 


Portrait    ....  Ritratto. 

Question   ....  Domanda, 

Receipt Ricevuta. 

To  revenge   .   .   .  Vendicarsi. 

To  see Vedere. 

Sight Vista. 

Society Societa. 

Steam Vapore. 

Trouble Imbarazzo. 

Truly     .....  Veramente. 


EXERCISE  XXIV. 
Good-morning,  John.  Good-morning,  William.  How  dc 
you  do,  to-day?  I  am  not  very  well.  What  is  the  matter  with 
you  ?  I  am  in  trouble.  What  can  I  do  for  you  ?  You  can  do 
a  great  deal  for  me.  I  am  at  your  service.  To-day  is  the 
twenty-seventh  of  the  month  ;  I  receive  my  money  the  twenty- 
ninth,  and  —    And  what  ?     And Look  at  that  paper  on 

the  table.  You  must  pay  two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars  to-day, 
and  you  have  not  the  money  ;  is  that  all?  Yes.  Two  hundred, 
twenty  and  twenty  are  forty,  and  ten  makes  fifty ;  two  hundred 
and  fifty  ;  are  you  still  in  trouble?  I  am  much  obliged  to  you  ; 
shall  I  give  you  the  receipt  ?  I  have  never  given  you  a  receipt 
when  you  have  lent  me  money.  I  thank  you.  Have  you  seen 
my  portrait  ?  It  is  very  good  ;  who  painted  it  ?  The  same 
painter  who  painted  my  two  children's  portraits.  It  is  truly 
beautiful.  How  much  did  it  cost?  One  hundred  and  fifty  dol- 
lars. It  is  not  very  dear.  Are  you  hungry  ?  No,  I  am  thirsty. 
What  shall  I  give  you  ?  Give  me  some  wine.  Are  you  not 
ashamed?  Of  what?  Have  you  forgotten  that  1  belong  to 
the  temperance  society?  No,  I  have  not  forgotten  it.  Then 
why  do  you  ask  me  such  questions  ?  You  are  right ;  I  cannot 
speak.  Why  not?  May  I  ask  you  a  question?  Certainly. 
Have  you  not  a  trunk  full  of  wines  ?  Yes  ;  but  my  wines  are 
imported.  What  is  the  difference  ?  The  difference  is  this  :  that 
not  many  can  pay  two  dollars  a  bottle  for  imported  wines.  May 
I  ask  a  favor  of  you  ?  Certainly.  Can  you  lend  me  your  black 
horse?  Yes,  with  pleasure;  where  do  you  intend  to  go?  To 
my  father's.  How  is  your  father?  He  is  very  well,  but  my 
mother  is  ill. 


86  AGREEMENT   OF   THE   VERBS. 


LESSON    XXVI. 


AGREEMENT   OF   THE  VERBS. 
104.   Every  verb  agrees  with  its  subject ;  as, 

Guglielmo  e  ricco William  is  rich. 

JVoi  siamo  ricchi We  are  rich. 

195.  If  the  subject  has  several  nominatives  in 
different  persons,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  first  person, 
if  one  of  the  nominatives  is  in  the  first  person ;  as, 

Guglielmo,  Giovanni,  voi  ed  io  siamo  ricchi. 
William,  John,  you  and  I  are  rich. 

196.  If  one  of  the  nominatives  is  in  the  second 
person,  and  the  others  in  the  third,  the  verb  must 
agree  with  the  second  person ;  as, 

Guglielmo,  Giovanni  e  voi  siete  ricchi. 
William,  John  and  you  are  rich. 

197.  If  all  the  nominatives  are  in  the  third  per- 
son, the  verb  is  put  in  the  third  person;  as, 

Guglielmo  e  Giovanni  sono  ricchi.    William  and  John  are  rich. 


USE  OF  THE  IMPERFECT  AND   PERFECT. 

198.  A  past  action  is,  in  Italian,  expressed  by 
either  the  imperfect  or  perfect  tense. 

199.  The  imperfect  tense  is  used : 

1.  To  express  an  action  which  was  still  existing 
(going  on)  when  another  action,  expressed  or 
understood,  took  place.  This  may  be  ascertained 
oy  observing  whether  the  English  past  tense  can  be 


AGREEMENT    OF   THE   VERBS.  87 

changed  into  was,  joined  to  the  present  participle 
of  the  verb  in  question ;  as, 

Quando  voi  entrasie  io  scriveva  lettere. 

When  you  entered  I  wrote  (I  was  writing)  letters. 

2.  To  express  the  repetition  of  a  past  action, 
or  the  habit  of  having  performed  some  action.  This 
may  be  ascertained  by  observing  whether  the 
Enghsh  past  tense  can  be  changed  into  /  used  to, 
with  the  infinitive  of  the  given  tense,  without  alter- 
ing its  signification  j  as, 

Io  andava  alia  scuola  ogni  giorno. 

I  went  (used  to  go)  to  school  every  day. 

200.  There  is  but  one  imperfect  in  Italian  ;  thus, 

/  wmti  or  /  used  to  go,  is  always  expressed  by  Io  andava. 

201.  The  past  tense  is  used  to  express  an  action 
which  is  completely  past,  and  which  has  no  relation 
to  any  other  action ;  as, 

leri  scrissi  lettere.     Yesterday  I  wrote  letters. 

202.  In  speaking  of  a  past  action  which  is  not 
determined  by  any  circumstance,  it  is  left  to  our 
will  to  use  either  the  perfect  or  the  imperfect  j  thus, 
we  may  say, 

Cesarefu  grande  e  valor oso,  or  )  ^  x       i      t     ^ 

^  ,  ,  ^  Caesar  was  great  and  vahant. 

Cesare  era  grande  e  valoroso.     ) 

But  in  the  first  case  the  tense  of  the  verb  is  inde- 
pendent of  any  other ;  in  the  second,  it  is  associated 
with  some  other  which  is  understood,  such  as  when 
he  lived,  or  when  he  fought. 


EXAJVIPLES. 
How  many  pages  have  you  read  ?     Quanie  pagine  avete  letto? 
I  have  read  but  seven  pages.  JVon  ho  htto  che  sette  pagine. 


88 


AGREEMENT  OF  THE  VERBS. 


VOCABULARY. 


Advantage    ....  Vantaggio. 

Affable AffabUe. 

Auction Incanto. 

Berlin Berlino. 

To  come Venire. 

To  compel     ....  For z are. 

To  fly Fuggire. 

Grapes Uva. 

To  humiliate    .    .    .  Umiliare. 

To  know*     ....  Sapere. 


Occasion  .  .  Occasione. 

Person  .    .  .  Persona. 

To  read    .  .  Leggere. 

To  say  .    .  .  Dire. 

Season  .   .  .  Stagione. 

To  turn    .  .  Voltare,  girare. 

To  unite,  add  Unire^  aggiungere. 

Victorious  .  Vittorioso. 

AVinter.    .  .  Inverno. 

To  "write  .  .  Scrivere. 


'  To  know  has  also  the  meaning  of  conoscere,  to  be  acquainted  with 


EXERCISE  XXV. 

Where  are  your  brothers  going?  They  are  going  to  the 
exhibition.  Why  did  you  not  go  with  them?  Because  I  was 
not  ready.  Have  you  spoken  to  my  father  ?  I  have  not  spoken 
to  him.  What  are  you  writing?  I  am  writing  a  letter.  To 
whom  ?  To  my  friend.  You  and  your  friend  have  always  been 
good  friends,  but  I  and  my  brother  have  never  found  a  true 
friend.  Does  your  friend  write  to  you  often  ?  He  wrote  two 
long  letters  last  week,  and  he  used  to  write  three  letters  a  week, 
when  he  was  in  Paris.  My  mother  was  always  affable,  but  on 
this  occasion  she  was  affable  and  generous.  How  many  pages 
of  that  book  have  you  copied?  I  have  copied  twenty-two  pages. 
To-day  I  copied  only  four  pages,  and  yesterday  I  (of  them) 
copied  six  ;  yet  there  was  a  time  when  I  copied  twelve  pages 
every  day.  Have  you  any  good  books  ?  No,  sir.  You  used  to 
have  very  good  books  last  winter ;  what  have  you  done  with 
them?  It  is  true  that  I  had  very  good  books  last  winter,  but, 
as  very  few  persons  came  to  buy  them,  and  I  was  in  great  want 
of  money,  I  sold  them  at  auction.  Were  you  at  home  when  my 
friend  came?  Yes,  I  was  at  home.  What  were  you  doing? 
I  and  my  sisters  were  reading  a  German  book.  Did  he  speak 
German  ?  No,  he  said  that  he  used  to  speak  German  two  years 
ago,  when  he  was  in  Berlin,  but  that  now  be  had  forgotten 
almost  all  of  it.  Did  you  believe  it?  I  did  not  believe  it ;  but 
what  could  I  do?  You  could  have  done  wliat  I  did  yesterday. 
What  did  you  do  yesterday?  I  made  him  speak  German  with 
out  asking  whether  he  knew  German  or  not. 


COMPARATIVES.  89 


IiESSON    XXVII. 


COMPARATIVES. 

203.  A  Qualifying  Adjective  becomes  a  com. 
parative : 

1.  Of  equality ;  with  the  following  adverbs  : 
TantOj  as,  so,  so  much ;  correlative  quanta,  as. 
Cosij  as,  so  J  "  come,  as. 
Quanto,eiS  TOLUch;                "  altr ettanto,  bo  mnoh. 
Quanta,  as  much.  |  ^.^^^^^  correlatives. 

Alpari  ai,  like.    J 

Essa  e  tanto  capricciosa  quanta  She  is  as  capricious  as  ungrato- 

ingrata.  ful. 

Voi  siete  cost  miser o  come  infelice.  You  are  as  wretched  as  unhappy. 

Quanto  e  onesio,  allretlanto  e  vir-  As  much  as  he  is  honest,  so  much 

tuoso.  he  is  virtuous. 

Egli  e  misero  quanto  voi.  He  is  wretched  as  much  as  you. 

Voi  siete  al  pari  di  me,  infelice.  You  are  like  me,  unfortunate. 

2.  Of  superiority  ;  with  the  adverbs  piu,  meglio. 

3.  Of  inferiority ;  with  the  adverbs  meno,  peggio. 

204.  If  the  comparison  of  superiority  and  infe- 
riority is  between  two  verbs  referring  to  the  same 
subject,  or  two  adjectives  referring  to  the  same 
noun  or  pronoun,  the  connecting  than  is  translated 
by  cJie;  as, 

Voi   potete  meglio  scrivere   che  You  can  write  better  than  read. 

leggere. 

Voi  siete  piu  saggio  che  ricco.  You  are  more  wise  than  rich. 

Voi  siete  meno  ricco  che  saggio.  You  are  less  rich  than  wise. 

5 


1)0  COMPAEATIVES. 

205.  If  the  comparison  is  between  two  nouns  or 
pronouns  to  which  the  same  adjective  refers,  than  is 
expressed  by  di,  of  (the  words  in  comparison  being 
understood) ;  as, 

Egli  e  meno  forte  di  voi.  He  is  less  strong  than  you. 

/  re  moderni  sono  piu  tiranni    The  modern    kings  are    greater 
degli  aniichi.  tyrants  tlian  the  ancient  ones. 

N.  B.  —  If  the  word  which  follows  than  has  a  complement  under-i 
stood,  che  or  di  may  be  used,  with  the  difference,  that  in  using  che 
the  following  pronoun  should  be  in  the  nominative,  as  in  English  ;  as, 
Egli  e  piu  infelice  di  me.  He  is  more  unhappy  than  I,  or 

Egli  e  piU  infelice  che  io  (the  verb  non  sono  being  understood). 
QuesV  uomo  e  piu  infelice  di  quella  This  man  is  more  unhappy  than 

donna,  that  woman,  or 

Quesf  uomo  e  piU  infelice  che  quella  donna  {non  e). 

In  such  case  the  Itahans  make  use  of  the  negative 
non.  In  all  other  comparative  phrases,  it  is  better 
to  use  che  than  di;  as, 

E  meglio  salvare  un  reo  che  pu-    It  is  better  to  save  a  guilty  man 
nire  un  innocente.  than  to  punish  an  innocent  one 

206.  Tale  and  quale  are  often  used  as  compara- 
tives of  equality ;  as, 

Felice  chi  vede  le  cose  tali  quali    Happy  he  who  sees  things  as  they 
sono.  are. 

N.  B.  —  Tale  is  often  suppressed  ;  as, 

Felice  chi  vede  le  cose  quali  sono. 


EXAMPLES. 
Do  you  know  how  to  translate    Sapete  voi  tradurre  quesia  pa- 

this  page  ?  gina  ? 

I  am  better  to-day  than  I  was  last    Io  sto  meglio  oggi  di  quel  che  era 

week.  la  setiimana  scorsa. 

To  do  good  to  anybody.  Far  bene  a  qualcuno. 


To  avoid 
Atheist    . 
Contagious 
To  deceive 
Dangerous 
Fatiguing 
To  gain   . 
Hypocrite 
Idle      .    . 
Injurious 


COMPARATIVES 

yi 

VOCABULARY. 

Evitare. 

Miser    .    .    . 

Avaro. 

Ateista. 

Numerous    . 

JSTumeroso. 

Contat/ioso. 

Openly  .    .    . 

Apertamente. 

lag  an  nave. 

Politician .    . 

Politico, 

Pericoloso. 

Precious    .    . 

Prezioso. 

Faticoso. 

Satisfactory  . 

Soddisfacenie. 

Guadagnare. 

Shamefully  . 

S  vergognatame  n  it 

Ipocrita. 

Skilful  .    .    . 

Abile. 

Ozioso. 

Thief     .    .    . 

Ladro. 

Ingiurioso. 

To  translate  . 

Tradurre. 

EXERCISE  XXVI. 

How  many  books  have  you  read?  I  do  not  know.  Have  you 
lead  more  than  I  ?  I  read  more  in  one  month  than  you  do  in  a 
year.  Do  you  speak  French?  A  little  ;  but  I  can  write  better 
than  I  can  speak.  This  is  often  the  case.  Nothing  is  more  pre- 
cious than  time.  Of  two  politicians,  one  as  skilful  as  the 
other,  the  one  gains  who  is  the  more  crafty.  He  who  gives  is 
more  happy  than  he  who  receives.  It  is  easier  to  advise  than 
to  do.  It  is  more  difficult  to  speak  a  language  than  to  translate 
it.  I  have  as  much  money  as  your  brother,  but  he  has  more 
friends  than  I.  My  brother  knows  how  to  make  friends  ;  and  I 
know  that  it  is  easier  to  make  money  than  to  make  friends  ;  and 
that  it  is  easier  to  make  a  friend  than  to  preserve  his  friendship. 
Nothing  is  more  satisfactory  to  man  than  to  do  good.  To  be 
idle  is  more  fatiguing  than  to  labor,  and  nothing  is  more  con- 
tagious than  bad  examples.  Are  you  sleepy  ?  Not  much ;  I 
am  more  thirsty  than  sleepy.  Yesterday  was  colder  than  to- 
day, but  to-day  I  am  colder  than  I  was  yesterday.  How  can 
that  be  ?  Yesterday  I  had  a  good  fire  in  my  room,  and  to-day 
I  do  not  find  any  fire  in  your  house.  Is  it  very  cold  in  this 
room?  I  do  not  know.  Why  do  you  speak,  then  ?  Because  I 
am  very  cold.  A  miser  is  as  injurious  to  society  as  a  thief. 
A  hypocrite  is  more  dangerous  than  an  atheist.  How  can  I 
believe  it  ?  The  atheist  tells  you  openly  what  he  is,  and  what 
he  believes,  and  you  can  avoid  his  company  ;  the  hypocrite  teUs 
you  what  he  is  not,  and  what  he  does  not  believe,  and  you 
believe  him,  and  you  find  that  he  has  cheated  you  shamefully. 


92  SUPERLATIVES. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 


SUPERLATIVES.. 

207.  There  are  two  forms  of  the  superlative  in 
Italian  :  the  relative  and  the  absolute. 

208.  The  relative  superlative  is  formed  by  plac- 
ing the  definite  article  before  the  adverbs  piu  and 
meno,  which  are  used  to  form  the  comparative ;  as, 

RiccOy   m.  s.  ■)   .  ,      piu  ricco     ■)    .  .  il  piu  ricco     )    .  ,     , 

D-    ,•  >rich.    ^  .^     ...     Uncher.      .     .^     .    ^.      [-richest. 

Rtcchi,  m.  p  j  piu  ricchi    )  i  piu  ricchi     ) 

Povera,  f.  s.    ")  meno  povera)  la  meno  povera^ 

^poor.  ^poorer.     ,  ^  ^poorest. 

Fovere,  i.  p.  )  meno  povere)  le  meno  povere) 

Obsekvation.  —  The  definite  article  is  omitted  when  piu  and  meno 
modify  a  yerb  ;  as, 

Quesio  e  cio  che  piu  mi  piace.     That  is  what  I  like  the  most. 

209.  The  absolute  superlative  is  formed  by 
adding  issim  between  the  last  vowel  and  the  preced- 
ing letter  of  the  qualifying  adjective  ;  as, 

DottOy  dott-issim-o.        Dotta,  doit-issim-a. 
Dottiy  dott-issim-i.        Dotie,  dott-issim-e. 

210.  Adjectives  ending  in  co  and  go,  or  ca  and  ga, 
take  an  A,  in  order  to  preserve  the  hard  sound  of 
c  and  g ;  as, 

RiccOy  ricchissimo  ;  lungay  lunghissima. 

211.  Some  of  the  adverbs,  as  hene,  male,  poco, 
molto,  spessOj  become  superlatives  by  changing  tlie 
last  vowel  into  issimo ;  as. 

La  vedo  pochitsimOy  benche  ci  vada  spessissimo. 
I  see  her  very  little,  though  I  go  there  very  often. 


SUPERLATIVES. 

IRREGULAR 

SUPERLATIVES. 

^cret          acrid. 

acerrimOy        very  acrid. 

Celebre,      celebrated. 

ccleberrimOf    very  celebrated. 

Integro,       upright. 

intcgerrimo^    very  upright. 

Inferiore,   inferior. 

injimot             very  inferior. 

MiserOf      miserable. 

miserrimOy       very  miserable. 

Saltibre,     salubrious. 

saluberrimOy    very  salubrious. 

Superiore,  superior. 

supremo,          very  superior. 

93 


N.  B.  —  The  comparative  and  the  relative  superlative  of  the  above 
adjectives  are  formed  regularly  with  the  adverbs  piu  and  meno  ;  as, 
Ac7-ef  meno  acre,  il  meno  acre. 

MiserOf  piu  misero,  il  piU  miscro. 

IRREGULAR  COMPARATIVES  AND   SUPERLATIVES 
RETAINED   FROM  LATIN. 

BuonOy        good.  migliore,    better.  ottimo,       best. 

Cattivo,      bad.  peggiore,    worse.  pessimOy     worst. 

Piccolo,      small.  minore,      smaller.  minimo,     smallest. 

Grande,      great.  maggiore,  greater.  viassimo,    greatest 

N.  B.  —  The  above  adjectives  may  form  the  absolute  superlative 
regularly  ;  as,  buonissimOy  cattivissimo,  piccolissimOy  grandissimo. 

5^"  The  adverbs  meglio,  peggio,  meno,  are  the  comparatives  of  th* 
adverbs  bene,  male,  poco. 


212.  A  superlative  is  formed  by  simply  placing 
the  article  between  the  noun  and  the  adjective ;  as, 
Napoli  la  hella,  Naples  the  beautiful. 

N.  B.  — The  repetition  of  the  adjective  to  form  the  superlative,  as 
una  donna  bella  bella,  is  obsolete. 


EXAMPLES. 
Which  is  the  best  portrait  ? 
My  son's  is  the  best. 
How    does    your    brother    speak 

French  ? 
[  went  to  see  him  at  the  hospital, 

and  he  was  in  very  bad  humor. 


QuaV  e  il  miglior  ritratto  ? 
Quello  di  mio  figlio  e  il  migliore. 
Come  ^parla   vostro  fratello   il 

Francese  ? 
lo  andai  a  vederlo  alVospedale,  ed 

egli  era-  di  cattivissimo  umore. 


94 


SUPERLATIVES. 


To  conform 
To  consume 
To  convince 
To  deny    . 
To  die   .   . 
To  dispose 
Heaven     . 
Honorable 
Hospital    . 
Humor  .   . 
Important 


Conformarsi 

Consumare. 

Convincere 

J^egare. 

Morire. 

Disporre. 

Cieto. 

Onorevole, 

Ospedale. 

Umore. 

Importante. 


VOCABULARY. 
To  live 


Logic  .  . 
Monument 
To  produce 
Productive 
Reply  .  . 
To  scold  . 
Study  .  . 
Sympathy 
While  .  . 
While  (in  a) 


Vivere» 

Logica. 

Monumento, 

Produrre. 

Produttivo, 

Risposia. 

Sgridare. 

Studiare. 

Simpatia. 

Mentre. 

In  poco  tempo 


EXERCISE  XXVII. 


Is  it  not  better  to  die  a  man  than  to  live  a  coward  ?  I  can- 
not answer  such  a  question.  Are  you  disposed  to  be  a  coward? 
No,  I  am  not  disposed  to  be  a  coward,  but  I  know  that  he  is 
the  most  cowardly  who  is  the  least  disposed  to  live?  Is  your 
brother  as  rich  as  my  uncle?  No,  your  brother  is  richer  than 
my  uncle  ;  but  my  friend  William  is  the  richest  merchant  (that) 
we  have.  Who  is  happy?  He  who  has  no  remorse.  And  who 
is  the  most  happy  ?  The  man  who  lives  in  a  world  of  sympathy. 
I  cannot  deny  that  you  have  a  good  horse  ;  but  mine  is  better 
than  yours,  and  my  brother's  is  the  best  of  all.  The  poor  man 
is  often  more  happy  than  the  rich.  I  believe  it ;  but  why  so  ? 
Because  he  has  fewer  wants  than  the  rich.  How  does  my  sister 
pronounce  French  ?  Very  well.  The  earth  is  smaller  than  the 
sun,  but  it  is  not  so  small  as  the  moon.  As  we  cannot  make  the 
world  as  we  wish,  let  us  conform  to  the  world  in  which  we  live. 
Those  who  work  the  most,  often  gain  the  least.  The  man  who 
lives  in  society  is  bound  to  produce  at  least  as  much  as  he  con- 
sumes. The  study  of  languages  is  very  useful,  because  the  lan- 
guage of  a  nation  is  the  most  important  monument  of  its  his- 
tory. What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Notliing  is  the  matter 
with  mo  ;  you  see  that  I  am  very  well,  but  I  have  been  scolding 
my  friend.  Who  is  that  woman  ?  She  is  my  mother's  dress- 
maker, lie  who  is  generous  is  always  a  good  man  ;  but  ho  who 
is  ignorant  is  always  ignorant.  Then  ho  who  is  learned  is 
always  learned.  On  the  contrary,  ho  who  is  learned  is  often 
Tory  ignorant. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  95 


LESSON     XXIX. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS,  continued, 

213.  The  Possessive  Pronoun  is  often  omitted 
when  the  noun  which  follows  it  has  reference  to  the 
subject;  as, 

Mettetevi  la  mano  al  cuore.    Put  your  hand  on  your  heart. 

214.  The  possessive  pronouns  minej  thine,  etc., 
which  in  English  follow  the  noun  with  a  preposi- 
tion, precede  it  in  Italian  without  the  preposition;  as, 

Questo  into  amico This  friend  of  mine. 

Un  vostro  parente     ....  A  relation  of  yours. 

215.  Possessive  pronouns,  used  substantively  in 
the  singular,  signify  one's  property ;  in  the  plural 
they  stand  for  friends,  folloioers,  relatives',  as, 

lo  spendo  il  mio.  I  spend  my  property. 

Come  stanno  i  vostri  ?  How  are  your  friends  ? 

Quando  i  miei  viddero  il  nemico.  When    my   (soldiers)    saw  the 

Vassalirono.  enemy  they  assaulted  him. 

216.  Possessive  pronouns  relating  to  a  noun 
before  mentioned  take  no  article,  if  we  wish  only  to 
mark  possession ;  as, 

Questo  cavallo  e  mio,  ed  e  il  mio  che  corre  il  piU.    . 
This  horse  is  mine,  and  it  is  mine  that  runs  the  swiftest. 

217.  To  avoid  ambiguity,  suo  and  sua  are 
changed  into  di  lui  and  di  lei,  when  they  do  not 
relate  to  the  subject  of  the  proposition ;  as, 

E(/li  ha  il  libro  di  lui.     He  has  his  book. 
N.  B.  —  Egli  ha  il  suo  libro  would  signify  his  own  book. 


96  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

218.  Instead  of  the  possessive  pronouns,  conjuno 
live  pronouns  are  used  with  nouns  which  refer  to 
the  limbs  of  the  body,  or  a  part  of  one's  dress:  as, 

JUi  ruppi  il  braccio  ....  I  broke  my  arm. 

Si  iaglio  il  diio He  cut  his  finger. 

Vi  bruciaste  V  abiio     .    .   .  You  have  burnt  your  coat. 

Gli  tagliarono  la  testa  .    .   .  They  cut  off  his  head. 

N.  B.  —  Several  other  expressions  are  so  used  for  anabgy  ;  as, 
Egli  non  gli  e  padre,  or  egli  non  e  suo  padre. 
He  is  not  his  father. 

219.  The  gerund,  which  in  Enghsh  follows  the 
possessive  pronoun,  as  my  being,  his  loriting,  is 
expressed  in  Italian  by  the  infinitive  with  the 
definite  article ;  the  possessive  pronoun  is  then 
changed  into  the  corresponding  personal  pronoun  in 
the  nominative,  and  placed  after  the  verb  ;  as, 

iy'  esser  io  .  .  .  My  being  .  ,  . 

Lo  scriver  vol  .  .  .  Vour  writing  .  . 

i'  avir  egli  scriito  .  .  .     His  having  written  .  .  . 

220.  As  the  verb  must  (bisognare)  is  impersonal 
in  Italian,  a  change  of  construction  in  the  phrase  is 
necessary.  The  sentence  should  begin  with  the 
verb  must,  bisogna,  followed  by  the  conjunction  c7ie, 
and  the  subject  of  must  should  be  placed  before  the 
following  verb,  which  is  used  in  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Bisogna  che  Guglielmo  scriva  una  lettera. 
William  must  write  a  letter. 
Bisogna  che  io  vada  alia  scuola. 
I  must  go  to  school. 
N.  B.  —  This  expression  is  the  same  as  the  use  of  It  is  necessary, 
in  English  ;  as,  It  is  necessary  that  I  should  go. 

Observatio.v.  —  If  the  subject  be  a  pronoun,  the  sentence  may  bo 
expressed  as  in  English,  with  the  change  of  the  personal  pronoun  into 
a  conjunctive  pronoun  ;  as,  Mi  bisogna  andare  alia  scuola. 


POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 


97 


VOCABULARY. 

Affectation    . 

.    AJfeitazione. 

To  put    .    . 

.    Mettere. 

Coachman    . 

.    Cocchicre. 

To  present  . 

.    Fresentare. 

Etiquette  .    . 

.    Etichetla. 

Properly     . 

.    Propriamente. 

Familiar  .    . 

.    Familiare. 

To  repeat    . 

.    Ripeiere. 

Generally      . 

.    .    Generalinente. 

Superior     . 

.    Superiore. 

Lackey  .    .    . 

.    Lacche. 

To  take  off . 

.     Tot/Here. 

Memorial .    . 

.    Siipplica. 

Term   .    .    . 

.    Tennine. 

Nobleman     . 

.    JVobile. 

To  tremble     . 

.    Tremare. 

To  omit     .    . 

.    0  metier  e. 

Various  .    . 

,   .     Vario. 

Patience   .    . 

.    Pazienza. 

Wife    .   .    . 

.    Moylie. 

EXERCISE  XXVIII. 
Good-morning,  madam.  Good-morning,  sir.  How  do  you 
do?  I  am  very  well,  I  thank  you.  How  is  your  daughter? 
She  is  very  well.  Where  is  she?  "She  is  at  my  father's  to-day. 
Whose  pencil  is  this  ?  It  is  mine.  Is  yours  better  than  mine  ? 
I  do  not  know.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  yours  ?  A  dollar 
and  a  half.  And  I  paid  twice  as  much  (the  double)  for  mine. 
Three  dollars?  Certainly.  My  pencil  is  three  times  better 
thaji  yours.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  friend?  He  has  lost 
all  his  property,  and  is  now  in  great  trouble.  Has  he  not  a 
rich  father  ?  Yes,  but  he  wishes  to  be  independent.  Put  on 
your  gloves  and  take  off  your  hat.  Who  is  that  man  ?  He  is 
a  brother  of  mine.  How  many  brothers  have  you  ?  Only  one. 
Why  do  you  not  say  he  is  my  brother  ?  Because  I  can  say  he 
is  a  brother  of  mine  even  when  I  have  but  one  brother.  I  think 
that  this  is  a  mistake.  No,  this  is  not  a  mistake.  Well,  can 
you  say  this  is  a  wife  of  mine?  I  don't  .  .  .  No,  I  cannot. 
Then  you  cannot  properly  say  a  brother  of  mine,  when  you  have 
but  one  brother.  Is  it  true  that  the  Italians  and  French  always 
say  Mister,  Madam,  and  Miss,  before  mother,  father,  and  sister  ? 
I'^es,  they  generally  do  (say  so),  but  this  etiquette  is  omitted 
when  they  are  on  familiar  terms,  or  when  they  speak  of  their  own 
friends  to  a  superior,  because  in  such  cases  it  would  be  affected. 
A  certain  nobleman  who  had  lost  his  property  went  once  to  pre- 
sent a  petition  to  the  Prince  of  Conde,  and  began  to  repeat  Mis- 
ter my  father,  and  Madam  my  mother,  so  many  times,  that  the 
Prince  lost  his  patience,  and,  calling  his  servant,  he  said,  "  Mister 
my  lackey,  say  to  Mister  my  coachman  to  put  Messrs.  my  horses 
to  Madam  my  coach." 


98  USE   OF   THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 


LESSON    XXX. 


USE    OF    THE    SUBJUNCTIVE. 

221.  Any  verb  expressing  doubt,  such  as  pregare^ 
temere,  duhitare,  sperare,  or  any  conditional  proposi- 
tion which  conveys  to  the  mind  the  idea  of  a  thing 
not  yet  accomplished,  and  which  may  be  fulfilled  or 
not,  according  to  circumstances,  if  followed  by  the 
conjunction  cJie,  that,  governs  the  following  verb  in 
the  subjunctive. 

222.  The  subjunctive  verb  is  put  in  the  present 
if  the  verb  of  the  principal  proposition  be  in  the 
present  or  future  ;  in  any  other  case,  it  is  put  in  the 
imperfect;  as, 

Temo  die  il  mio  amico  parta  I  fear  that  my  friend  will  leave 
senza  vedermi.  without  seeing  me. 

Temeva  che  mio  fratello  pariisse  I  feared  that  my  brother  would 
senza  vedermi.  leave  without  seeing  me. 

Remark.  —  It  is  not  the  word  preceding  the  verb,  but  the  spirit, 
the  intention,  the  object  we  have  in  view,  which  determine  the  proper 
use  of  the  subjunctive.  Thus,  if  we  wish  to  express  more  or  less  cer 
tainty  or  doubt,  we  may  say, 

Credo  che  egli  e  ammalatOy  or  ^  _  ,   ,,        ,    .  ,     . 

_     .     .       , .    .  ,  ^      ?■  1  believe  that  he  is  sick. 

Credo  che  egli  sia  ammalato.  ) 

Credo  che  egli  e  arrivatOy  or  ^  ^  ,  ,.       ^,    ^^ ,     ,  .     , 

_,,,,..  .    ,      ^  I  believe  that  he  has  arrived. 

Credo  che  egli  sia  arrivato.  ) 

fl.nd  we  would  say, 

Credo  che  Dio  I  il  Creatore  delV  uiiiverso,  and  not  che  sia  .  .  . 

I  believe  that  God  is  the  Creator  of  the  universe. 

223.  As  the  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express 
the  idea  of  anything  which  is  conditional,  or  not  yet 
accomplished,  so  the  future  may  be  used  instead  of 


USE   OP   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE.  99 

the  present  subjunctive,  and  the  conditional  instead 
of  the  imperfect  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Temo  che  e<;li  parta,  or  pariira  senza  vcdermi. 
Tcineva  che  Cffli  partisse,  or  pariirebbe  senza  vedermi. 
N.  B.  —  The    conjunction  che  is  sometimes  elegantly  suppressed 
after  verbs  implying  doubt,  fear,  hope,  in  the  same  way  that  that  is 
suppressed  in  English  ;  as, 

Dubito  me  lo  avesse  fatlo  apposta. 
I  suspect  he  did  it  to  me  on  purpose. 
Spero  mi  accogliera  cordialmenie. 
I  hope  he  will  receive  me  cordially. 
Temo  mi  faccia  aspettare  molto. 
I  fear  he  will  make  me  wait  long. 

224.  The  conjunction  se,  if,  though  of  a  condi- 
tional nature,  is  followed  by  the  indicative,  if  the 
prevailing  idea  is  positive ;  as, 

Se  parlo  piano,  e  perche  non  posso  parlar  forte. 

If  I  speak  low,  it  is  jDecause  I  cannot  speak  loud. 

Se  ballava  ogni  ffiorno,  era  perche  mi  vi  forzavano. 

If  I  danced  every  day,  it  was  because  they  forced  me  to  it. 

Partiro  domani,  se  potro. 

I  shall  leave  to-morrow,  if  I  can. 

But,  if  a  doubt  prevails,  the  subjunctive  is  used ;  as, 

Parlerei  forte,  se  potessi   .   .    I  would  speak  loud,  if  I  could. 
Sarei  malato,  se  ballassi  .   .    I  should  be  sick,  if  I  danced. 
Partirei,  se  potessi     ....    I  would  leave,  if  I  could. 

225.  When  futurity  is  implied,  the  verb  following 
se  must  be  in  the  future,  and  not  in  the  present,  as 
in  English ;  as, 

Gli  scrivero,  se  voi  gli  scriverete. 
I  will  write  to  him,  if  you  will  write  to  him. 
N.  B.  —  The  present  tense  may  be  employed  as  in  English,  if  allu 
•ion  is  made  to  the  present  time  ;  as, 

Gli  scrivero,  se  mi  date  il  consenso. 
I  will  write  to  liim,  if  you  give  me  leave. 


100  USE    OF   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

226.  When  se  lias  the  meaning  of  whether,  the. 
subjunctive  may  be  used  or  not ;  as, 

Sepiange  o  ride  \^^^^  viHmporta.i^^^^^^^  ^®  ^®®P^  ^^  laughs,  it 
Se  pianga  o  rida  J  I       makes  no  diflerence  to  me. 

227.  Impersonal  verbs  require  the  following  verb 
in  the  subjunctive,  if  the  sentence  is  in  the  plural ; 
in  the  subjunctive  or  infinitive,  if  the  sentence  is  in 
the  singular  J  as, 

JBasta  che  si  faccino  vederCy  or  basta  farsi  vedere. 
It  is  enough  that  they  make  themselves  seen. 

228.  A  relative  superlative  followed  by  che  takes 
the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Egli  e  il  piu  felice  uomo  che  to  conosca. 

He  is  the  most  happy  man  that  I  am  acquainted  with. 

229.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  after  the  con- 
junctions and  adverbs  which  express  a  conditional 
idea,  such  as  quantunque,  bencMj  purche,  fincM, 
accioccM,  quand'anche;  as, 

Benche  mi  creda Although  he  believes  me. 

Pur  che  m*  ami Provided  he  loves  me. 

.  J^"  Notwithstanding  this,  Tasso  makes  Sophronia  say  : 

Benche  ne  furto  e  il  mio^  ne  ladra  io  sono. 

Although  mine  is  not  a  theft,  nor  am  I  a  robber. 


EXAMPLES. 

How  does  he  know  it  ?  Come  lo  sa  ? 

[s  he  acquainted  with  that  man?  Conosce  egli  qucW  uomo ? 

Does  he  know  his  lesson?  Sa  egli  la  sua  Iczione  ? 

In  good  plain  French.  In  buon  chiaro  Francese. 

I  hope  he  will  write  to  me.  Spero  mi  scrivera. 

He  is  not  ill,  yet  he  takes  some  Egli  noneammalato,  pure prendt 

medicine  every  morning.  delle  medicine  ogni  mattina. 

My  business  docs  not  permit  me  /  mici  affari  non  mi  permettono 

to  do  so.  di  farlo. 


USE   OP   THE  SUBJUNCTIVE.  101 


VOCABULARY. 


To  address    .   .   .  Indirizzare. 

AlFair,  business    .  Affare. 

To  be  acquainted  .  Conosccre. 

Cottage     ....  Capanna. 

Clear Chiaro. 

Comedy     ....  Commedia. 

To  conjecture    .    .  Cony ettur are. 

Deep Profondo. 

Fashion     ....  Mo'da. 

Free Libero. 


Foreigner Forestiere. 

Last Ultimo. 

Late Tardi. 

To  laugh Rider e. 

Learning Dottrina 

Presence Presenza 

To  protect     ....  Proteggere 

Remedy Rimedio. 

To  suspect     ....  Sospettare. 

To  take Prendere. 


EXERCISE  XXIX. 

Are  you  acquainted  with  that  man  ?  No,  I  do  not  know  who 
he  is.  It  appears  that  he  does  not  know  where  to  go.  I  think 
tiiat  he  is  a  foreigner.  No,  I  know  that  he  is  not  a  foreigner. 
How  do  you  know  (it)  ?  Suspecting  that  he  was  a  Frenchman, 
1  addressed  him  a  few  words  in  French,  and  he  laughed,  and 
laughed,  and  finally  he  said,  in  good  plain  English,  "  I  guess 
not."  Then  he  is  a  Yankee.  Have  you  dined?  No,  sir  ;  we 
dine  at  five  o'clock.  I  wish  that  you  would  dine  with  us  to-day. 
I  thank  you,  but  I  cannot,  because  my  presence  is  indispensable 
at  my  father's.  Then  we  shall  be  happy  to  see  you  to-night. 
I  will  try  to  come,  if  eight  o'clock  is  not  too  late.  You  must 
come,  whether  it  be  late  or  not.  Very  well.  How  is  your 
brother?  He  is  ill.  If  he  is  a  physician,  why  does  he  not  take 
some  medicine  ?  He  never  takes  any  medicine  ;  physicians  never 
take  medicine.  Have  you  been  at  my  brother's?  No,  but  I 
shall  go  to-morrow,  if  my  friend  will  lend  me  his  horse.  Is  it 
not  better  to  go  now  ?  VTell,  I  will  go  now,  if  you  will  go  with 
me.  I  cannot  leave  my  business,  but  I  will  be  at  »your  service 
to-night.  At  what  time?  At  eight  o'clock.  Very  w^ell ;  but, 
no,  I  cannot  go  to-night ;  I  must  go  to  a  concert  at  half  past 
eeven.  That  man  speaks  a  great  deal,  but  says  nothing. 
Where  are  you  going  ?  I  must  go  to  see  my  father.  Is  he  at 
home  ?  I  do  not  know  whether  he  is  at  home.  If  you  are  not 
sure  that  he  is  at  home,  why  do  you  go  there  ?  I  must  go  to  my 
father's  house,  whether  he  is  at  home  or  not.  Have  you  spoken 
to  that  man?  I  have  not  yet  spoken  to  him,  but  I  shall  speak 
to  him  to-morrow  at  my  brother's  store. 


IQ;2  .     ,  ,  ^        P^ST  •  .PARTICIPLE. 


LESSON    XXXI 


PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

230.  A  Past  Participle,  without  the  auxiliary 
verb,  agrees  with  the  noun  it  modifies;  as, 

77  libro  leito The  book  read. 

I  libri  letti The  books  read. 

La  casa  eretta The  house  erected. 

Le  case  erette The  houses  erected. 

231.  A  past  participle  employed  with  the  auxil- 
iary verb  avere  never  changes  its  termination  to 
adapt  itself  to  the  subject ;  as, 

lo  ho  scritto I  have  written. 

Essa  ha  scritto She  has  written. 

Essi  hanno  scritto They  have  written. 

232.  It  may  agree,  or  not,  with  the  object  which 
precedes  it.  If  we  wish  to  make  prominent  the 
action  expressed  by  the  past  participle,  it  remains 
invariable;  as,* 

Quanti  dolori  ho  sofferto  !      How  many  griefs  have  I  endured  ! 

If  we  wish  to  give  particular  attention  to  the 
object,  the  past  participle  is  then  used  as  an  adjec- 
tive, and  must  agree  with  the  object ;  as, 

Quanti  dolori  ho  sqfferti!      How  many  griefs  have  I  endured  ! 

In  the  first  case,  the  mind  is  occupied  with  the 
intensity  of  suffering ;  in  the  second,  with  the  many 
pains  suffered. 

233.  According  to  this  rule,  the  past  participle 
must  agree  with  the  pronouns  ilj  lo,  la,  le,  and  ne 


PAST  PARTICIPLE.  103 

because  they  represent  the  dominant  idea  of  the 
phrase ;  aS; 

Avete  scritto  Ic  leitere  ?  .   .   ,    Have  you  written  the  letters  ? 

lo  le  ho  ffia  scritte I  have  already  written  them. 

N.  B.  —  This  agreement,  however,  does  not  take  place  if  the  direct 
object  belongs  to  a  verb  which  follows  the  past  participle  ;  as, 
Li  ahbiamo  comprati,  ma  non  li  abbiamo  potato  leggere. 
We  have  bought  them,  but  we  have  not  been  able  to  read  them. 

234.  A  past  participle,  joined  to  the  verb  esserey 
is  used  as  an  adjective,  and  must  agree  with  the  sub- 
ject or  the  object.  It  agrees  with  the  subject  when 
the  subject  is  in  the  plural  and  the  object  in  the 
singular ;  as, 

Le  mie  sorelle  si  son  comprate  una  carrozza. 
My  sisters  have  bought  a  coach  for  themselves. 

It  agrees  with  the  object  when  the  object  and  the 
subject  are  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Le  mie  sorelle  si  son  comprati  i  cavalli. 

My  sisters  have  bought  the  horses  for  themselves. 

If  the  subject  be  in  the  singular,  the  past  participle 
maj  agree  with  the  subject  or  the  object ;  as, 

Eyli  si  e  tolto  i  guantiy  or  ^  _    ,       ,  ,         ^  , .      , 
„,...,,,..  , .         ?-  lie  has  taken  off  his  gloves. 

E(/li  SI  e  tolti  I  guanti.        )  ° 

235.  The  verb /are,  used  reflectively,  is  followed 
by  the  infinitive,  and  not  by  a  past  participle,  as  in 
Enghsh;  as, 

Essa  si  fa  odiare  da  iutti.     She  makes  herself  hated  by  everybody. 

236.  The  present  participle  of  the  auxiliary  verbs 
is  often  elegantly  omitted ;  as, 

Scritia  la  letterat  mi  addormeniai. 
Having  written  the  letter,  I  fell  asleep. 
1^"  If  a  conjunctive  pronoun  had  been  joined  to  the  present  par- 
ticiple which  is  omitted,  it  must  be  afi&xed  to  the  past  participle  ;  aa, 
Scrittala  mi  addormentai.     Having  written  it,  I  fell  asleep. 


104 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 


VOCABULARY. 


Arm Braccio. 

To  adopt Adottare. 

To  beat Battere. 

Brief Breve. 

Dialogue Dialoyo. 

Eye Occhio. 

To  finish Finire. 

Fury Furia. 

To  hold Tenere. 

Husband Marito. 


Ill-treat 
To  invent 
Invention . 
Plant     . 
Poet  .    . 
Method . 
To  rave 
Side  .    . 
Simple  . 
Thorn    . 

Maltrattare. 
hiventare. 
Invenzione. 
Pianta. 
Poeta. 
Metodo. 
Vaneggiarc 
Lata. 
Semplice. 
Spi?ia. 


EXERCISE  XXX. 


Have  you  written  your  translation?  My  translation  has 
been  written  and  copied  twice.  To  whom  did  you  give  my  let- 
ters? I  gave  them  to  your  sister.  Did  she  read  them?  She 
had  not  read  them  when  I  left  her.  Have  you  found  the  books? 
I  "have  found  them.  I  thought  they  were  lost.  No,  they  are 
not  lost ;  my  sister  loaned  them  to  her  friend.  Has  not  your 
friend  finished  them  ?  Not  all ;  she  has  finished  the  first  and 
second  volume.  How  many  songs  have  you  sung?  Only  three  ; 
but  the  first  two  have  been  sung  twice.  Have  you  read  many 
books?  I  have  read  twenty-one.  Twenty-one  books?  Yes, 
twenty-one ;  what  a  wonder !  In  how  many  days  ?  In  two 
days  and  a  half.  How  have  you  been  able  to  read  them  in  so 
short  a  time  ?  I  have  adopted  the  new  method  of  reading  books. 
I  cannot  believe  that  a  new  method  has  been  invented  for  read- 
ing. Yes,  there  is  one  ;  and  it  is  already  adopted  by  many  per- 
sons. What  is  it?  It  is  to  read  by  steam.  A  fine  invention, 
indeed  ;  you  rave,  my  dear.  "  How  could  you  marry  your 
daughter  to  an  enemy  of  yours?  "  said  John  to  William.  "  It 
was  to  revenge  myself,"  answered  AYilliam.  After  a  few 
months,  the  daughter,  who  had  been  ill-treated  by  her  husband, 
went  to  her  father,  saying  that  her  husband  had  beat  her  ;  at 
which,  the  father,  in  great  anger,  gave  her  another  blow,  saying, 
"  Tell  your  husband  that  if  he  has  beaten  my  daughter,  I  have 
beaten  his  wife."  Are  you  thirsty  ?  No,  sir  ;  I  am  not  thirsty. 
Are  you  hungry?  A  little.  What  shall  I  give  you?  Give  me 
what  you  like.  Shall  I  give  you  some  bread  and  butter  ?  I  will 
ftscept  it  with  pleasure. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  PLURAL.        105 


LESSON   XXXII 


FORMATION   OF   THE   PLURAL,  continued. 

237.   Nouns  ending  in  io,  preceded  by  a  vowel, 
or  by  c,  g,  Jij  gl,  drop  the  o  in  the  plural ;  as, 


Calzolaio   . 

.  Shoemaker. 

Calzolai 

.   .  Shoemakers. 

Arancio  .   . 

.   Orange-tree. 

Aranci  . 

.    .   Orange-trees. 

Raggio    .    . 

.  Ray. 

Raggi    . 

.   .  Rays. 

Occhio     .    . 

.  Eye. 

Occhi     . 

.  Eyes. 

Figlio  .   .   . 

.  Son. 

Figli,    . 

.  Sons. 

238.  If  the  termination  io  is  preceded  by  any 
other  consonant,  the  o  is  changed  into  i;  as, 

ZiOy  uncle.    Zii,  uncles.      |    Pendio,  declivity.    Pendii,  declivities. 

239.  Dissyllabic  nouns  ending  in  co  and  go  insert 
an  h  in  the  plural,  in  order  to  preserve  the  hard 
sound  of  the  c  and  g ;  as, 

FuocOy  fire.     Fuochi^  fires.     |     Logo,  lake.     Laghi,  lakes. 
Exceptions.  —  Greco,  a  Greek  ;  mago,*  a  "wise  man  ;  porcoy  a 
swine,  which  make  Greci,  magi,  porci. 

240.  Polysyllabic  nouns  ending  in  co  and  go  insert 
the  h  only  when  this  termination  is  preceded  by  a 
consonant ;  as, 

Albergo,  inn.   Alberghi,  inns.  |  Obelisco,  obelisk.    Obelischi,  obelisks, 
Exceptioxs. —  Castigo,  punishment;  obligo,  obligation;  dialogo, 
dialogue,  which  make  castighi,  oblighi,  dialoghi. 

(N.  B.  —  See  list  of  nouns  which  have  the  h,  though  co  and  go  are 
i)receded  by  a  vowel,  page  224.) 

241.  Some  of  the  polysyllabic  nouns  take  or 
reject  the  A. 

(For  a  list  of  such  nouns,  see  page  223.) 

*  Mago,  a  magician,  has  maghi  in  the  pluraL 


106 


FORMATION   OF   THE   PLURAL. 


24i.  The  following  nouns,  which  are  masculine 
in  the  singular,  become  feminine  in  the  plural  : 

Singular.  Plural. 

Cantaio  ....  A  weight Cantata. 

Centinaio  ...  A  hundred    .   .       .  Centinaia. 

Migliaio     ...  A  thousand  ....  Migliaia. 

Miglio     ....  A  mile Miylia. 

Moggio    ....  A  measure    ....  Moggia. 

Paio A  pair Paia. 

Staio A  bushel Staia. 

Uovo An  egg Uova. 

243.  Some  masculine  nouns  ending  in  o  have 
two  plurals,  one  in  ^,  masculine,  and  one  in  a,  femi- 
nine;  as, 

LabbrOy  lip,      (plural)   labbri  and  labbra. 
DitOy      finger,       «'         diti        *'     dita. 

N.  B.  —  The  preference  is  given  to  the  plural  in  a.  (See  list  of 
such  nouns,  page  224.) 

244.  Some  masculine  nouns  have  a  masculine  or 
feminine  plural,  according  to  their  meaning : 

MurOy         a  wall;       muray       (of  a  city);    muriy     (of  a  house). 
, ,     ,        fa  member,         ,         (limbs  of  the  .    .  (members  of  an 

•^^^^^'  1    a  limb ;   '^"^^'^^  {    body  ;        ^^'^^^riy^^  assembly. 

fhorns  of  an  _„„„,•     /musical  in- 
\    animal ;  *    \  struments. 

(dessert,  at  frutH,     fruits. 
(    table  ; 

(sticks  of  leani     /conveyance, 
t    wood;  ^  I  carriageB. 

laughter ;  risiy         rice. 


CornOy 

Frutto, 
LegnOy 
RisOf 


limb;    '""""-"' 
horn.:         corna, 


fruit ; 
wood  ; 


fruitay 
legnay 


EXAMPLES. 


He  is  always  weeping. 
What  makes  him  say  so  ? 
The  vivifying  light  of  the  sun. 
Have  you  many  fruit-trees  in  your 
garden  ? 


Egli  nonfa  altro  che  piangere. 
Che  cosa  glifa  dir  cosi  ? 
La  luce  vivijicante  del  sole. 
Avete  voi  molti  albeti  fruitifert 
nel  vostro  giardino  ? 


FORMATION   OF  THE   PLURAL. 


107 


Cl^erry  .  . 
To  compare 
Couditiou 
To  dim  .  . 
Dimension 
Inflexible  . 
Knee  .  . 
Light  .  . 
To  move  . 
Nevertheless, 


stUl 


VOCABULARY. 

Cirieggia. 

Cotnparare. 

Condizione. 

^ppatmare. 

JJimenzione. 

Injlessibile, 

Ginocchio. 

Luce. 

Muovere. 

JVulladimeno. 


Omnipotent 
Peach  . 
Place  . 
Prodigal 
Ray  .  . 
Scarcely 
Step  .  . 
Tear  .  . 
To  remember 
Vivifying  .    . 


Onnipotente* 
Pesca. 
PostOy  luoga, 
Prodigo. 
Raggio. 
Appena. 
Passo. 
Lagrima. 
Ramineniare. 
Vivijicante. 


EXERCISE  XXXI. 
Where  are  your  sons?  They  are  in  the  garden.  In  whosa 
garden  ?  In  my  brother's  garden.  Are  there  many  fruit-trees 
in  your  brother's  garden  ?  Not  many.  Has  he  many  cherries  ? 
Yes,  he  has  many  cherries  and  peaches,  though  he  has  only  five 
cherry-trees  and  six  peach-trees.  How  is  your  mother  ?  The- 
same  ;  she  can  scarcely  move  her  limbs  ;  her  knees  are  always 
trembling,  and  her  arms  are  always  stiff.  Has  she  not  two  phy- 
sicians? Yes,  she  has  two  physicians,  and  they  are  very  prodi- 
gal in  counsels  and  remedies  ;  but,  nevertheless,  she  is  always 
in  the  same  condition.  How  many  miles  is  it  (are  there)  from 
your  father's  garden  to  my  brother's  house?  How  many  miles? 
Why  do  you  not  say,  "  How  many  hundreds  of  thousands  of 
miles  ?  ' '  Why  so  ?  Because  the  distance  is  only  a  few  steps  ;  a 
quarter  of  a  mile,  I  believe.  Have  you  any  looking-glasses  ? 
Yes,  sir  ;  I  have  a  great  many  looking-glasses.  My  uncles  are 
desirous  to  have  a  looking-glass,  but  they  did  not  give  me  the 
dimensions.  Have  you  studied  your  lesson  ?  I  have  studied  it, 
but  I  do  not  know  the  dialogues.  Are  they  long  ?  They  are 
long,  and  in  some  places  very  diflBcult.  Have  you  much  time  for 
your  Italian  lesson  ?  I  have  but  a  few  minutes  for  my  Italian 
lesson.  How  much  did  these  two  books  cost  ?  Twenty-five 
francs.  Who  would  pay  twenty-five  francs  for  two  old  books  ? 
They  are  not  old  books,  sir.  What  makes  you  think  that  they 
are  old  books  ?  Because  they  were  printed  in  the  year  one  thou- 
sand six  hundred  and  forty-one.  I  hope  that  you  will  remem- 
ber the  difference  between  old  books  and  ancient  books,  and 
that  many  things  are  ancient  without  being  old. 


108  AUGMENTATIVES  AND   DIMINUTIVES. 


LESSON   XXXIII 


AUGMENTATIVES   AND   DIMINUTIVES. 

245.  The  Italians  modify  the  signification  of 
nouns  by  additional  terminations.  Grammarians 
have  but  increased  the  difficulty  of  properly  using 
the  augmentatives  and  diminutives  by  a  multi- 
plicity of  terminations,  to  each  of  which  they  have 
endeavored  to  give  a  special  meaning.  Practice 
and  familiarity  with  Italian  writers  is  the  only  guide 
to  their  use  ;  yet,  as  a  general  rule, 

1.  By  changing  the  last  vowel  of  a  noun,  an 
adjective,  or  an  adverb,  into  one,  its  meaning  is 
augmented;  as, 

Libro  ...  A  book.  Librone  ...  A  big  book. 

Tavola   .    .  A  table.  Tavolone    .    .  A  big  table. 

Furbo     .   .  A  cheat.  Furbone  ...  A  great  cheat. 

Bene    .    .    .  AVell.  Benone    ...  Very  well. 

2.  By  changing  the  last  vowel  into  accio  for  the 
masculine,  and  accia  for  the  feminine,  to  the  mean- 
ing of  bigness  is  added  that  of  ugliness  ;  as, 

Uomo  .    .   A  man.     *       Uomaccio     .   A  corpulent,  ugly  man. 
Camera   .  A  room.  Cameraccv   .  A  large,  ugly-looking  room. 

.  i^"  All  words  ending  in  ce  and  ge  take  an  i  before  the  termina- 
tion of  the  augmentative,  to  preserve  the  soft  sound  ;  as, 

„  .        (Vocione,  a  strong,  loud,  manly  voice. 

Foce,  voice.  <  ^^    .       .        ,    ,    ,.  n        • 

(  Vociaccuiy  a  bad,  disagreeable  voice. 

3.  By  changing  the  last  vowel  into  etto  or  ino  for 
the  masculine,  and  etta  or  ina  for  the  feminine,  a 
generally  pleasing  idea  of  smallness  is  conveyed. 


AUGMENTATIVES   AND   DIMINUTIVES.  109 

occasionally  accompanied  by  expressions  of  praise, 
sympathy,  or  flattery ;  as, 

Libro    .   .    .  Book.  Libretto  .  A  pretty  little  book. 

Mano    .  .    .  Hand.  Manina  .  A  pretty  little  hand. 

Povero  ...  A  poor  man.  Povcrino  (expresses  sympathy). 

246.  The  two  terminations  etto  and  ino,  or  etta 
and  ina,  are  often  joined  together ;  as, 

Pezzettino ,  A  very  little  piece. 

Tavolinetio A  very  little  table. 

Boccheitina A  very  little  mouth. 

Marianninctta Pretty  little  Mary  Ann. 

N.  B.  —  Many  words  end  in  the  above  terminations  without  being 
augmentatives  or  diminutives  ;  as, 

Canavaccio,  towel.  Bastone,  stick.      Borraccia,  leather  bottle. 

JlrchitettOf  architect.         BracciOy  arm.       Magazzino^  warehouse. 

B.EMARK.  —  The  use  of  the  augmentatives  and  diminutives  should 
be  limited  to  those  words  which  practice  and  experience  have  rendered 
familiar.  In  case  of  doubt,  it  is  better  to  foi^m  the  augmentative 
regularly,  as  in  English.  Thus  :  from  fool,  mattOy  to  express  a  great 
fool,  say  un  gran  matto ;  because  in  this  case  mattoney  instead  of 
meaning  a  great  fool,  means  a  brick. 


EXAMPLES. 

Take  of  it  as  much  as  you  like.  Prendetene  quanto  vi  piace. 

Go  and  speak  to  that  man.  Andate  a  parlare  a  quelV  uomo. 

Little  Mary  has  sung  a  little  Marietta  ha  cantato  una  can- 
song,  zoncina. 

She  has  a  charming  pretty  little  Essa  ha  un*  incantevole  bocchet^ 

mouth,  a  beautiful  little  hand,  iinayUna  bella  manina^  e  gru' 

and  small,  pretty  feet.  ziosi  piedini. 

Your  sister's  affectation  has  no  Z«'  affettazione  di  vostra  sorella 

limit.  non  ha  limiti. 

I  thank  you,  sir.  Grazie,  signore^  or  vi  ringrazio. 

Be  attentive,  and  do  not  lose  your  Siate  attento,  e  non  perdete  la 

patience.  pazienza. 

'y  and  my  friend  are  on  familiar  lo  ed  il  mio  amico  siamo  in  ier- 

terms.  mini  familiari. 


no 


AUGMENTATIVES   AKT)   DIMINUTIVES. 


VOCABULARY. 


Anger .  .  . 
Basket  .  . 
Bell.  .  .  . 
To  bereave . 
Bulwark .  . 
Eye-witness 
Foot.  .  .  . 
Mary  .  .  . 
Music  .    .    . 


Rabbia. 

Canestro. 

Campana. 

Abbandonare. 

Baluardo. 

Testimonio  ocular e. 

Piede. 

Maria. 

Musica. 


Path  .    . 
To  permit 
Pi'ophet 
lliver 
To  walk 
Week.    . 
To  weep 
Witness . 
Worthy  . 


.  Sentiero. 

.  Permetiere. 

.  Prof  eta. 

.  Fiume. 

.  Camminare. 

.  Settimana. 

.  Piangere. 

.  Testimonio. 

.  Meritevole. 


EXERCISE  XXXII. 


Who  is  that  lovely  little  creature  ?  She  is  my  little  niece. 
How  old  is  she  ?  She  is  only  seven  years  old.  What  is  her 
name?  Mary.  Little  Mary,  have  you  studied  music?  Yes, 
sir.  Will  you  sing  a  little  song  ?  I  cannot  sing,  sir.  Can  you 
play  ?  I  can  play  a  very  little,  but  my  teacher  does  not  allow  me 
to  sing.  Will  you  give  me  a  little  piece  of  paper  ?  You  can 
take  as  much  paper  as  you  like.  Where  shall  I  find  it  ?  You 
will  find  it  on  the  little  table  in  my  study.  How  do  you  do 
to-day?  I  am  extremely  well,  I  thank  you.  IIow  is  your 
nephew  ?  He  is  pretty  well.  How  much  did  you  pay  tor  that 
Dook  ?  Two  dollars  and  a  half.  Two  dollars  and  a  half  for 
that  ugly  little  book  !  It  is  a  good-sized  book,  and  not  an  ugly- 
looking  book.  Where  shall  I  put  these  flowers  ?  Put  them  in 
that  little  basket.  What  shall  I  do  now  ?  Ring  the  little  bell, 
and  go  and  study  your  lesson  in  William's  room.  I  do  not  like 
to  go  to  that  ugly  little  room.  Go  in  my  little  room,  then. 
How  many  men  often  say  of  a  pretty  woman,  "  What  a  lovely 
little  creature !  0,  the  beautiful  little  hands  !  0,  the  charming 
little  mouth  !  What  a  pretty  little  foot !  "  But  how  few  per- 
sons say,  "Is  she  truly  the  little  angel  she  appears  to  be? 
Have  those  pretty  little  hands  always  been  useful  ?  Has  that 
charming  little  mouth  ever  spoken  two  sweet  little  words  to  the 
bereaved  widow,  to  the  poor  and  the  sick  ?  Is  that  pretty  little 
foot  always  walking  in  the  riglit  path  of  honor  and  virtue  ?  " 
The  poets  compare  two  beautiful  eyes  to  two  bright  stars  ;  for- 
getting that  the  stars  are  always  sparkling  with  heavenly  light, 
and  speak  always  of  the  glory  of  the  Omnipotent,  whilst  the 
most  beautiful  eyes  are  often  dimmed  with  tears  and  sorrow. 


ADVERBS. 


Ill 


LESSON   XXXIV. 


ADVERBS. 

247.  The  Adverbs  are  generally  formed  by  add 
iug  mente  to  the  feminine  adjective ;  as, 

Generosa  .   .   Generous.  Generosamenie  .   .   Generously 

Cortese  .   .   .  Polite.  Corieseinenie  .   .    .  Politely. 

248.  Adjectives   ending   in  le  and  re  drop   the 
final  e;  as, 

Facile   ....   Easy.  Facilmenie    .   .   .  Easily. 

Regolare   .  .    .  Regular.         Regolarmenie   .   .  Regularly. 

S^°  Some  adjectives  are  used  as  adverbs  without  the  additional 
mente  ;  as,  poco,  molto,  forte,  piano. 

Remark.  —  When  the  above  words  modify  a  noun,  they  are  adjec- 
tives ;  when  they  modify  a  verb,  they  are  adverbs  ;  as, 

lo  ho  siudiato  molto I  have  studied  much. 

lo  ho  molto  pane I  have  much  bread. 

249.  Adverbs  in  a  superlative  degree  are  formed 
by  adding  mente  to  the  feminine  superlative  j  as, 

Co rtesissima ,  coriesissim amente. 
Generosissima ,  generosissimamente. 


OBSERVATIONS  ON  SOME  OF  THE  ADVERBS. 


JVb,  non     .   .    .  No. 

Si Yes. 

Maiy  giammai  .  Never. 

Gia Already. 

Bene WeU. 

Punto\ 
Mica  J 


AtaU. 


^vanti\ 
Prima) 
Dopo     .   . 
Qui,  qua . 
Li,  la,  cola 
Costl,  costa 
Ami  che  no 


Before. 

After. 

Here. 

There. 

There. 

Rather. 


112  ADVERBS. 

250.  No  stands  by  itself;  non  is  used  to  form  a 
negative  sentence ;  as, 

JVoy  non  posso  permeitarlo.    No,  I  cannot  allow  it. 

251.  No  and  si  following  a  verb  in  the  same  sen- 
tence are  preceded  by  di;  as, 

Penso  di  si I  think  so. 

Egli  mi  disse  di  no He  told  me  no, 

Ed  egli  mi  disse  "  no^  nol  faro.''^ 

And  he  said  to  me,  "  No,  I  will  not  do  it." 

N.  B.  —  JVon  lo  makes  nol,  when  followed  by  a  verb  not  com- 
aiencing  with  a  vowel,  z,  or  s  impure. 

252.  The  adjective  or  participle  which  in  English 
follows  rather  J  anzi  die  no,  in  Italian  precedes  it,  or 
is  placed  between  anzi  and  cJie  no ;  as, 

Amabile  anzi  che  no,  or  |  ^,^^^^^  ^^^.^^^^ 
Anzi  amabile  che  no.       ) 

253.  Mai  and  giammai  are  used  with  non  except 
when  they  answer  a  question  for  themselves  ;  as, 

JVbn  /'  ho  mai  vista.     Mai  ?    JVo,  giammai. 
I  have  never  seen  her.     Never  ?    No,  never. 

^^Mai  and  giammai  in  interrogative  sentences,  and  in  conditional 
or  doubtful  phrases,  are  used  without  non,  and  stand  for  ever  ;  as, 

Se  mai  la  vedessi If  ever  I  could  see  her. 

i'  avete  mai  veduta?  ....  Have  you  ever  seen  her? 

254.  Gid,  bene,  punto,  mica,  are  often  used  as 
expletives ;  as, 

JVon  e  mica  da  scherzo  .   .   .  It  is  not  a  thing  to  joke  about. 
JVon  gia  che  Z'  ami     ....  Not  that  I  love  her. 

255.  Prima  and  dopo  are  generally  followed  by 
di  y  as. 

Prima  di  me.     Before  mc.  Dopo  di  vol.     After  you, 

Dopo  del  tempo  prefisso.     After  the  appointed  time. 


ADVEliUS.  113 

256.  The  use  of  the  adverbs  prima  and  avanti 
requires  particular  attention.  Prima  is  an  adverb 
implying  thne.     Avanti  implies  locality  ;  as, 

JSffli  venne  prima  deW  ora  pre-    lie   came    before    the   appointed 

fissa.  hour. 

Eyli  frese  posto  avanti  di  me.  He  took  a  seat  before  me. 

257.  Costa  and  costi  point  to  the  place  of  the 
person  spoken  to. 

258.  Lij  Idj  and  coldj  point  to  a  place  distant 
both  from  the  speaker  or  writer  and  from  the  per- 
son spoken  to. 

259.  Qulj  U,  costi,  are  more  definite  than  qud^  Idy 
costd  ;  as, 

E(/li  sara  qui  doniani.    He  will  be  here  to-morrow  ;  i.  e.,  in  this  house. 
^  E(/li  sara  qua  domani.    He  will  be  here  to-morrow  ;  i.  <?.,  in  this  city. 


EXAMPLES. 

Your  sister  speaks  better  than  she  Vostra  sorella  parla  meglio  d% 

writes.  quel  che  scrive. 

I  shall  go  to  my  father's  first,  and  lo  andro  prima  da  mio  padre  e 

afterwards  to  my  friend's  store.  poi  alia  bottega  del  mio  amico. 

Is  he  within,  or  without  ?  E  egli  al  di  dentro,  o  al  difuori  f 

You  are  late,  sir.  Voi  siete  in  riiardo,  signore. 

Have  you  read  the  paper  to-day?  Avete  voi  letto  il  giornale  oggi  ? 


SoGNA  11  guerrler  le  schiere, 
Le  selve  11  cacciator, 
E  sogna  11  pescator 
Le  retl  e  I'amo. 

Sopito  in  dolce  obblio 
Sogno  pur  lo  cosl 
Colel  che  tutto  11  di 
Sospiro,  e  chiamo. 

6 


114 


ADVERBS. 


VOCABULARY. 


To  arrive  . 
Cup  .  .  . 
Different  . 
To  equalize 
Entirely  . 
To  flourish 
To  happen 
To  imagine 
Independence 
To  murder     . 


Arrivare. 

Tazza. 

Differenie. 

Uyuagliare. 

I/itieramente. 

Fiorire. 

Accadere. 

Iinmaginare. 

Jndipendenza. 

Trucidare. 


Newspaper  . 
Originality  . 
To  plunge 
Post-oflice 
Progress  .  . 
To  reflect  .  . 
To  rule,  govern 
Sin  .... 
Situation  .  . 
Tranquil     .  '. 


Giornale. 

Originalitd. 

Tuffare. 

Posta. 

Progresso. 

RiJiMere. 

Governare. 

Peccato. 

Situazione. 

Tranquillo. 


EXERCISE   XXXin. 

How  is  the  weather  to-day?  Yes,  sir.  Yes,  sir,  what? 
What  did  you  say?  I  ask,  How  is  the  weather  to-day?  Do 
you  hear  ?  Do  not  speak  so  loud  ;  I  am  not  so  deaf  as  you 
imagine ;  the  weather  is  very  fine  to-day.  Why  do  we  find  little 
originality  in  this  world?  Because  men  imitate  much,  and 
reflect  little.  Has  your  friend  made  much  progress  in  the  study 
of  the  French  language?  Yes,  sir;  he  reads  correctly,  speaks 
well,  and  writes  better  than  he  speaks.  How  long  has  he 
studied  it  ?  Two  years  and  a  half.  He  must  certainly  know 
the  language,  then.  He  knows  a  great  deal  of  the  language, 
because  he  has  studied  assiduously  and  faithfully.  Will  you  go 
to  the  exhibition ?  I  cannot  go  now.  When  can  you  go?  If 
you  will  come  here  to-morrow  morning  at  ten  o'clock,  I  can 
easily  go  to  the  exhibition,  and  to  your  banker's.  Where  shall 
we  go  first  ?  We  can  go  wherever  we  like.  I  think  that  it  will 
be  better  to  go  to  the  banker's  first,  ar(d  afterwards  to  the  exhi- 
bition.  The  honor  of  man  and  that  of  woman  are  two  plants 
of  an  entirely  different  nature  :  the  one  flourishes  out  of  doors, 
the  other  within.  Where  are  you  going  so  early?  I  am  going 
to  the  post-oflBce ;  I  am  afraid  that  I  shall  be  late.  No,  you 
are  not  late  ;  you  can  take  a  cup  of  coffee  with  me,  and  after- 
wards wo  will  go  there  together.  What  time  is  it?  It  is 
exactly  nine  o'clock,  and  the  steamer  never  arrives  before  ten. 
I  should  like  to  take  a  cup  of  coffee  with  you,  if  I  could  have  it 
immediately.  You  can  have  it  in  five  minutes.  Very  well, 
then,  I  shall  read  tlie  newspaper  meanwhile. 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  115 


LESSON    XXXV. 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

260.  Indefinite  Pronouns  are  such  as  are  used 
in  a  general  sense,  without  referring  to  any  partic- 
ular person  or  thing. 

INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  USED-  SUBSTANTIVELY  FOR 

PERSONS. 

Altri     .    .   Other  or  others. 

Chi    .    .   .   Some  one,  who,  some  others. 

Chiunque  .   Whoever. 

Tutti  .    .   .  All,  everybody. 

Si    ...    .   One,  they. 

Chicchessid)  ^,  ,  i      i  f  Chicchesiano. 

y  VVhosoever  or  whomsoever  ;  plural  < 
Chisivoglia)  C  Chisivoghano, 

Veruno  ^ 

JVessuno  >  No  one.   With  their  irregular  feminines,  but  no  plural. 


Invariable. 


J\riuno 

Taluno      .  Such  a  one, 

Qualcuno  .   Some  one 


^^*  I"  With  the  regular  feminine  and  plurals. 


261.  Altri  is  used  only  in  the  nominative ;  in  the 
objective  it  makes  altrui,  which  in  the  genitive  and 
dative  is  often  used  without  a  preposition.  In  the 
genitive  it  often  precedes  the  noun ;  as, 

JVe  voi  ne  altri  sapra  convincermi. 

Neither  you  nor  others  can  convince  me. 

JVon  fare  altrui  cio  che  per  te  nan  vuoi. 

Do  not  do  to  others  that  which  you  do  not  wi^  for  yourself 

jL'  altrui  bonta  mi  guida. 

The  goodness  of  others  guides  me. 

262.  L^altrui  signifies  the  property  of  others ;  as, 

JVb»  appropriarli  r altrui. 

Do  not  appropriate  to  yourself  the  property  of  others. 


116  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 

263.  Chi,  preceded  by  non,  stands  for  no  07ie,  and 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Trovo  chi  lo  fece     .    .    She  found  some  one  who  did  it. 

JSTon  trova  chi  V  ami  .    She  does  not  find  any  one  who  loves  her. 

C^'  Chi  may  be  often  repeated  without  oflending  the  ear  ;  as, 

Chi  saliva,  chi  scendeva,  chi  cantava,  e  chi  ballava. 

Some  ascended,  some  descended,  some  sang,  and  some  danced. ' 

264.  Altri  and  cJii  are  often  used  in  a  distributive 
sense ;  as, 

Altri  nuotava,  altri  affondava.        Some  swam,  others  sank. 
A   chi   piace   la  toga   a  chi   la    The  toga  pleases  some,  and  some 
spada.  the  sword. 

265.  Tutti  takes  the  verb  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Tuiti  lo  dicono.     Everybody  says  so. 

266.  Si  is  used  with  a  verb  in  the  singular,  and 
when  followed  by  the  pronoun  ne,  the  i  is  changed 
into  e;  as, 

,Che  si  dice  del  mio  cavallo  ?  .    What  do  they  say  of  my  horse  ? 
JVon  se  ne  dice  nulla   ....    They  say  nothing  about  it. 

267.  Chicchessia  and  cJiisivoglia  take  the  verb  in 
the  subjunctive,  with  the  conjunction  che;  as, 

Chicchessia  che  vengay  dite  che  dormo. 
Whoever  mr.y  come,  say  that  I  am  asleep. 

268.  Veruno,  nessuno,  and  niunOj  following  a 
verb,  take  non  before  them  ;  as, 

JVesstmo  lo  sa,  or    )  ^.^  , 

,^      ,  ^  No  one  knows  it 

JYon  lo  sa  nessuno.  ) 

Remark.  —  tn  an  interrogative  sentence,  vcrutio,  nessu7i0y  and 
niuno,  stand  for  anybody  ;  as, 

JVbn  vedete  nessuno  ?    Do  you  not  see  anybody  ? 

N.  B.  — Vedete  nessuno  is  often  used,  but  in  such  a  case  it  would 
be  better  to  say  vedete  qualcuno. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


117 


VOCABULARY. 


Admiration 
Calm  .  . 
Child  .  . 
Coutent  . 
Counsel  . 
To  defend 
Defender  . 
Dreary  .  . 
To  exalt  . 
Experience 
Innocent   . 


Aminirazione. 

Cat  mo. 

Bimbo. 

Contento. 

Consiylio. 

Difendere. 

Difensore. 

Lugubre. 

Esaltare. 

Esperienza. 

Iiinoccnte. 


Liberty,  freedom 
Mercy   .    .    .    .    . 
Painful .... 
Penury.    .    .    . 
To  profit    .    .    . 
Save, except     . 
To  shriek  .    .    .    . 
Similar,  like     .    . 
Socrates    ... 
Stupid  .... 
Wealthy    .    .    .    , 
To  wrong  .    .    . 


Liberia. 

Misericordia. 

Penoso. 

Penuria. 

Profittare. 

Salvo. 

St  rider e. 

Simile. 

Socraie. 

Stupido. 

Ayiato. 

Far  torto  a. 


EXERCISE  XXXIV. 

In  a  free  country,  he  who  is  innocent  has  nothing  to  fear.  No 
one  is  more  worthy  of  profound  admiration  than  Socrates,  who 
was  always  calm  and  tranquil,  although  ho  had  a  capricious 
wife  and  stupid  children.  Happy  the  man  who  profits  by  the 
experience  of  others.  No  one  is  contented  with  his  situation. 
Everybody  is  a  good  counsellor  after  misfortune  arrives.  Who- 
ever may  come,  say  that  I  am  not  at  home.  Is  it  not  better  to 
say  that  you  do  not  like  to  see  any  one.  Do  not  say  so,  because 
it  is  not  always  safe  to  say  what  one  does  or  thinks.  0,  you 
princes  of  the  earth,  who  exalt  yourselves  above  your  fellow- 
men,  remember  that,  whoever  you  may  be,  there  is  an  Eternal 
Justice  overruling  the  world,  and  equalizing  the  destinies  of  all, 
whosoever  they  may  be !  No  one  is  a  prophet  in  his  own  coun- 
try ;  still,  everybody  longs  for  his  dear  home.  If  you  like  to 
have  a  good  name,  be  sure  never  to  wrong  anybody.  Do  not 
reproach  me  so  loud ;  speak  low,  that  no  one  may  hear  what 
you  say.  I  wish  to  say  that  it  is  a  great  sin  to  wish  for  the 
property  of  others,  and  that  those  who  are  comfortable  do  not 
reflect  that  many  others  are  in  penury.  The  city  is  in  the  hands 
of  our  enemies ;  no  one  can  imagine  the  distressing  scene  of 
which  I  was  an  eye-witness  :  the  brave  defenders  of  their  coun- 
try and  their  freedom  are  nearly  all  slain  on  the  bulwark  ;  and 
the  women  and  children,  —  0,  the  most  mournful  sight !  Some 
wept,  some  shrieked ;  others,  pressing  their  babes  in  their  arms, 
plunged  into  the  river ;  and  all  prayed  the  God  of  mercy  and 
iustice  to  defend  their  honor  and  independence. 


118  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 


LESSON   XXXVI 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  USED  SUBSTANTIVELY  FOR 
THINGS. 

269.  The  Indehnite  Pronouns  used  substantively 
for  things  are  as  follows  : 

Checche      .    .    .    ^ 

Checchessia   .   .     >  Whatever,  •whatsoever. 

Checchesivoglia     J 

PeVf*  perquanio   .    However,  however  much. 

JSTulla,  niente   .   .    Nothing. 

Tutto All. 

270.  Checchessia,  checchesivoglia,  require  che  after 
them;  and  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive.  CheccM 
dispenses  with  che;  as, 

Checche  scriviaie.  ^ 

Checchessia  or  checchesivoglia  che  scriviaie.)  ^  ^ 

^'  Checchessia^  besides  the  meaning  of  checche,  has  sia,  the  pres- 
ent subjunctive  of  the  verb  to  be  ;  consequently  it  can  form  a  sentence 
for  itself,  and  when  followed  by  a  verb  must  have  the  relative  pro- 
noun che  connecting  the  two  verbs  Thus,  the  meaning  of  Chec- 
chessia che  scriviaie  is,  "Whatever  may  be  the  thing  which  you 
write.  Hence  it  is  that  checche  is  never  followed  by  a  noun  without 
a  verb  ;  as, 

Checche  sia  il  vostro  parere.     Whatever  be  your  opinion 

N.  B.  —  The  same  rule  holds  good  for  checchesivoglia. 

271.  Per  is  generally  followed  by  an  adjective 
with  che,  and  by  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Per  ricco  che  sia  e  miserabile. 
However  rich  he  may  be,  he  is  wretched. 

*  "With  aij  adjective  following  it. 


INDEFIMTE    TROKOUXS.  119 


V  However  wretched  he  may  be. 


272.  Ferquanto  takes  the  verb  in  tlie  subjunc- 
tive, but  dispenses  with  die;  as, 

Perquanto  egli  sia  miserabile. 
Perquanto  miserabile  egh  sia, 

273.  Tutto  is  used  with  or  without  the  article  ;  as. 

So  tutto I  kuow  all. 

Mi  e  staio  detlo  il  tutto  .  All  has  been  told  to  me. 
N.  B  —  If  a  conjunctive  pronoun  precedes,  the  article  must  be 
used  ;  as, 

J\e  so  il  tutto.    I  know  all  of  it. 

274.  Nulla  and   niente  are  often  used  for  any^ 
tJiiJig ;  as, 

Volete  nierite? Do  you* want  anything  ? 

Direste  nulla  m  miofavorc  ?    Would  you  say  anything  in  my  behalf? 
E  dolce  far  nulla  *    ....  To  do  something  is  pleasant. 

275.  If  nulla  and  niente  follow  the  verb,  7ion  is 
placed  before  it ;  as, 

A'bn  mi  hisogna  nulla,  o^*^  _  ,  ,    „ 

,^  ,,        ...  Vl  have  need  of  nothing. 

JVulla  mi  otsogna.  )  ° 

If  they  are  followed  by  an  adjective,  they  take  the 
preposition  di ;  as, 

»N'ulla  di  buono Nothing  good. 

JViente  di  cattivo     ....    Nothing  bad. 

If  they  are  followed  by  a  verb,  they  take  the  prepo- 
sition da;  as, 

JVulla  da  fare Nothing  to  do. 

JViente  da  dire Nothing  to  say. 

EXAMPLES. 
What  did  your  brother  intend  to     Che  voleva  dire,  or  che  aveva  in- 

say?  tenzione  di  dire  vostrofratello? 

My  brother  intended  to  say  that     Mio  fratcllo  voleva  dire  che  egli 

he  cannot  come  to-night.  non  pub  venire  stasera. 

i  will  never  fail  to  do  so.  lo  non  manchero^mai  di farlo. 

"  The  meaning  of  this  expression  is,  "  It  is  sweet  to  do  sometliing,"  and  not,  aa 
is  sometimes  supposed,  "  It  is  sweet  to  do  nothing."  In  order  to  give  the  latter 
meaning,  it  would  require  the  negative  non  before  the  verb. 


120 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 


VOCABULARY 

Ancestor  .   . 

.    Antenato. 

To  hide     .   . 

.    Occultare, 

To  acquire    . 

.    Acquistare. 

Impatient      . 

.    Jmpaziente. 

Brute     .    .    . 

.    Bruto. 

In  spite  cf    . 

.    A  dispetto  dt 

To  conceal    . 

.    JVascondere. 

Laconism .    .    . 

.    Laconismo. . 

Cynic    .    .    . 

.    Cinico. 

To  obtain .    . 

.    Ottenere. 

Disagreeable 

.    Disaggradevole. 

Package    .   . 

.    Involto. 

llducation     . 

.    Educazione. 

Pedant  .    .    . 

.    Pcdante. 

To  exile     .    . 

.    Esiliare. 

Philosopher  . 

.    Filosofo. 

Exile     .    .    . 

.    Esule. 

Position    .    .    . 

.    Posizione. 

Eorehead  .    . 

.    Fronte. 

To  scrutinize 

.    Scrutinare. 

EXERCISE  XXXV. 
What  has  that  man  given  you  ?  He  has  not  given  me  any- 
thing—  Whatever  you  may  say,  I  cannot  believe  it,  because  I 
saw  that  he  gave  you  a  package,  and  you  put  it  in  your  pocket. 
Yes,  he  gave  me  something.  Then  why  did  you  say  that  he  did 
not  give  you  anything?  But  you  are  always  impatient,  and 
do  not  allow  me  to  finish  what  I  have  commenced  ;  I  intended 
to  say  that  he  had  not  given  me  anything  belonging  to  you. 
Shall  I  do  anything  for  you,  sir?  Not  anything  at  present,  I 
thank  you.  Have  you  read  that  letter  which  was  sent  to  a 
gentleman  by  his  wife?  No,  I  have  not  read  it.  It  is  here  : 
"  Having  nothing  to  do,  I  write ;  and  having  nothing  to  say,  I 
finish."  It  is  truly  a  model  of  laconism  ;  nothing  more  simple 
than  this.  Is  not  that  woman  very  beautiful  ?  Beautiful  as 
she  is,  she  is  not  gentle.  Whatever  you  may  think  of  her, 
she  is  the  belle  of  the  evening.  Do  you  know  what  your  boy 
has  done?  I  know  all,  but  what  can  I  do  ?  True  merit  cannot 
be  concealed,  whatever  you  may  do  to  hide  it.  What  have  you 
done  to-day?  Nothing  good.  And  nothing  bad,  I  hope.  I  have 
not  done  anything,  either  good  or  bad.  A  man  exiled  from  his 
country,  wliatever  be  the  reason  of  his  banishment,  or  whatever 
bo  the  position  he  has  obtained,  will  never  fail  to  long  for  the 
land  of  his  forefathers.  Without  a  good  education,  the  learned 
man  is  but  a  pedant,  the  philosopher  a  cynic,  the  soldier  a 
brute,  and  every  man,  whatever  he  may  bo,  a  very  disagreeable 
person.  How  is  the  weather  to-day?  It  is  very  warm  to-day. 
Was  it  warm  yesterday?  No,  sir ;  yesterday  was  not  so  warm 
fte  to-day. 


1^'DEFJAITE   rKONUlWS.  llii 


LESSON   XXXVII. 


With  their  regular  feminine 
but  no  plural. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  USED   SUBSTANTIYELY  FOR 
PERSONS  AND  THINGS. 

276.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  used  substantively 
for  persons  and  things  are  as  follows : 

Uno      One. 

Altro Another. 

CiascunOf  ciascheduno  .  Each  one. 

Qualcuno,  qualcheduno  .  Some  one. 

Taluno Some  one. 

Ognuno Every  one. . 

Tale      Such  an  one.  ■^   ^      ,    ,,  -,  ..,    ., 

_     ,  «  ,,  For  both  genders,  with  the 

Quale Some,  others.  >  i        i       i 

Coiale Such  an  one.  JSP* 

277.  Altro,  repeated  in  the  same  sentence,  signi- 
fies the  first  time,  one  tiling,  the  second  time, 
another  j  as, 

Altro  e  parlar  di  morte ;  altro  e  morire. 

It  is  one  thing  to  speak  of  death  ;  it  is  another  to  die. 

278.  Alt7'o  stands  for  anything  else;  as, 

Volete  altro  ?  .   .   .   .    Do  you  wish  anything  else  ? 
JVon  so  altro  ....    I  know  nothing  else. 

279.  Altro  is  sometimes  used  with  the  definite 
article;  as, 

L^uno  disse  di  si,  Valtro  disse  di  no. 
The  one  said  yes,  the  other  said  no. 

280.  L'uno,  Valtro,  in  the  nominative,  take  the 
verb  in  the  singular,  if  connected  with  the  conjunc- 
tion e;  as, 

L^uno  e  Valtro  parla  di  voi.     Both  speak  of  you. 


122  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 

281.  In   the    objective    the    preposition    accom- 
panying Vuno  must  be  repeated  with  Valtro  ;  as, 

Parlai  alV  uno  ed  aW  altro.    I  spoke  to  the  one  and  (to)  the  other. 
Scrissi  all'  una  ed  all*  altra.    I  wrote  to  the  one  and  (to)  the  other. 

282.  Per  altro  signifies  as  for  the  rest;  as, 

Egli  e  riservato  ;  per  altro,  e  sincero. 

He  is  reserved  ;  as  for  the  rest,  he  is  sincere. 

283.  Senz^  altro  stands  for  undoubtedly ;  as, 

Egli  verra,  senz*  altro.    He  will  come,  undoubtedly. 


EXAAIPLES. 
How  do  you  like  this  translation  ?     Come  vi  place  questa  iraduziofie  f 
I  do  not  like  it  much.  JVon  mi  place  molto. 

Have  I  anything  else  to  do  ?  Ho  io  altro  da  fare  ? 

You  have  nothing  else  to  do.  Vol  non  avete  nienV  altro  da  fart, 

I  am  very  glad  of  it.  JVe  sono  contentissimo. 


SONETTO  DEL  PETRACA. 

Solo  e  pensoso  i  piii  deserti  campi 
Vo  misurando  a  passi  tardi  o  lenti, 
E  gli  occhi  porto  per  fuggire  intenti 
Dove  vestigio  uman  I'arena  stampi. 

Altro  schermo  non  trovo  che  mi  scampi 
Dal  manifesto  accorger  de  le  genti  : 
Perche  negli  atti  di  allegrezza  spenti, 
Di  fuor  si  legge,  com'  io  dentro  avvampi 

Si  ch'io  credo  omai,  che  monti  e  piagge, 
E  fiumi  e  selve  sappian  di  che  tempre 
Sia  la  mia  vita,  ch'  e  celata  altrui. 

Ma  pur  si  aspro  vio,  ne  8\  selvagge 

Cercar  non  so,  clie  amor  non  venga  sempre 
Ragionando  con  meco,  ed  io  con  lui. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


VS. 


VOCABULARY. 


To  accommodate 
To  act  .    . 
Author    . 
Base     .    . 
To  be  born 
DitFereuce 

y-ss .  •  . 

Elevated  . 
To  enclose 
Historian 


Accommodarsi. 

Aijire. 

Alitor  c. 

Basso. 

JVasce.re. 

Differenza. 

Uovo. 

Elevato. 

Acchiudere. 

Storico. 


Idleness Ozio, 

Linen Tela. 

Note Biylietto. 

Objection    ....  Oyyezione. 

To  return    ....  Ritornare. 

Sensation    ....  Sensazwne 

Style Stile. 

Subject Sogycllo. 

Tender     .    .        .    .  J^enero. 

"Writer     .       .    .  Scrittore. 


EXERCISE  XXXVI. 
AV'ho  has  »een  here  ?  Two  of  your  friends  :  one  of  them  left 
this  letter  for  you ,  the  other  said  that  he  would  return  to-night. 
I  have  been  reading  the  two  books  which  you  sent  me  yesterday. 
I  find  that  one  is  very  good,  and  the  other  is  good  for  nothing, 
tliough  both  are  from  the  same  author.  Why  do  you  not  like 
the  latter  ?  Because  the  style  is  too  elevated  for  the  subject.  I  do 
not  like  the  book  much.  Well,  it  is  one  thing  to  say  that  you 
do  not  like  it  much,  and  another  that  the  book  is  good  for 
nothing.  Have  you  sent  the  letter  to  my  friends  ?  No,  I  wrote 
it  last  night,  but  I  have  not  sent  it  yet.  Will  you  enclose  this 
note  ?  Yes,  with  pleasure.  Is  there  anything  (else)  that  I  can 
do?  Nothing  else,  I  thank  you.  What  is  the  time  now? 
Half  past  twelve.  What  time  did  your  brother  say  that  he 
would  be  here  ?  He  said  that  he  would  be  here  after  twelve. 
AYell,  it  is  now  half  past,  and  he  has  not  come  :  it  is  better  not 
to  wait  any  longer  for  him.  Let  us  wait  until  one  o'clock  ; 
because,  if  he  said  that  he  would  be  here  after  twelve,  he  will  do 
so,  undoubtedly.  Have  you  written  to  your  sisters  about  Wil- 
liam and  John?  Yes,  I  have  already  written  to  the  one  and  to 
the  other  of  both,  but  I  have  not  received  an  answer  from 
either  the  one  or  the  other.  How  did  you  find  your  friends  ? 
Each  of  them  is  in  very  good  health  ;  and  each  of  their  coaches 
is  in  very  good  condition.  I  am  glad  of  it.  Where  is  my 
father's  cane?  It  is  in  his  room,  in  the  corner  near  the  door. 
What»o'clock  is  it  ?  It  is  half  past  twelve.  Is  it  possible  ?  At 
what  time  do  we  dine  ?  We  dine  at  half  past  two,  but  on  Sun- 
day we  dine  at  a  quarter  past  one. 


124 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 


LESSON  XXXVIII 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  USED   ADJECTIV^ELY  FOR 
PERSONS  AND   THINGS. 

284.   The  Indefinite  Pronouns  used  adjectivelj 
for  persons  and  things  are  as  follows : 

Uno One,  a,  an. 

Un  altro Another. 


With  their  regular  feminine. 


Ogyii Every,  all. 

Qualche Some. 

^ualunque  ....  Any,  whatever. 
PiU More. 


>■  Invariable. 


So  much. 


Qualsisia     \     ^   ^  ^^       whatever,  j  ^^"^  *^^^^  plurals  by  adding 

Alcuno Some. 

Ciascuno     ....  Each. 
Tanio   \ 
Cotanto)  ' 

Jilquanto A  little. 

AUrettanto  ....  As  much. 

Poco Little. 

Molto Much. 

Troppo Too  much 

Tutto All. 

Certo Certain. 

Altro Other. 


With  their  regular  feminine 
and  plurals. 


Veruno,  nessuno 
JViunOt  nullo 

Tale  \ 
Cotale) 


}• 


No  one. 


.   .   .  Such. 
Parecchi Several. 


f  With  the  regular  feminine  ; 
\      no  plural. 

f  For  both  gendei's,  with  the 
\      regular  pluraL 

No  singular  ;  regular  plural 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  125 

285.  The  noun  which  follows  ogni  and  qudlche 

must  bo   in  the   singular.     The   word    Ognissantij 

All  Saint's  Day,  and  the  nouns  following  cardinal 

numbers,  are  excepted ;  as, 

lo  trovo  qualche  errore  in  ogni  pagina, 
I  find  some  errors  on  every  page. 

lo  lo  vcdo  ogni  quaitro  giorni. 
I  see  him  every  four  days. 

286.  Qualunque  is  always  followed  by  a  singular 
noun,  but  the  verb  which  follows  it  must  be  in  the 
singular  or  plural,  according  to  the  subject ;  as, 

Qualunque  persona  puo  farlo  .   .   .    Any  person  can  do  it. 
Qualunque  sia  la  rostra  ragione  .    .    Whatever  be  your  reason. 
Qualunque  siano  le  vostre  ragioni  .    Whatever  be  your  reasons. 

287.  Tutto  preceding  a  noun  is  followed  by  the 
article;  as^ 

Tutto  il  denaro  fu  perduto   .   .  All  the  money  was  lost. 
Tutte  le  donne  gridavan  forte  .  All  the  women  cried  loudly. 
5^°  Tutto  used  after  the  verb,  and  referring  to  the  subject,  has  no 
article  ;  as, 

Erano  tutte  donne.     They  were  all  women. 

288.  Tutto  quanto  signifies '  the  whole,  without 
exception;  as,  • 

Perirono  tutii  quanti.    All  perished,  without  exception. 

289.  Tutti,  followed  by  the  cardinal  numbers  duCf 
ire,  quattro,  takes  the  conjunctive  e;  as, 

Tutti  e  due Both. 

Tutti  etre All  three. 

Tuttt  e  quattro All  four. 

290.  Tutti  is  followed  by  no  preposition  in  such 
expressions  as  these  : 

Tutti  voi All  of  you. 

Tutti  noi All  of  us. 


126 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS. 


VOCABULARY. 


To  adduce  .    .    . 
To  appeal'  .    . 
Citizen    .... 
To  condescend    . 

Cross 

Dolorous,  painful 
To  employ  .  .  . 
To  excite  .  .  . 
Grief  ..... 
Interval  .... 


Addurre. 

Jlpparire. 

Cittadino. 

Condiscendere. 

Croce. 

Boloroso. 

Impiegare, 

Eccitare. 

Dolore. 

Intervallo. 


Knowledge 
Nonsense  . 
Obligation 
Occupation 
To  place  . 
Proposal  . 
Sailor  .  . 
Valet  .  . 
Vessel  .  . 
Weeping   . 


Conoscenza, 

Sproposito. 

ObbLi(jazion& 

Occupazione. 

Piazzarfi 

Proposta 

Marinaio. 

Valletto. 

Bastimento. 

Pianto, 


EXERCISE  XXXVII. 


In  a  free  country  every  man  is  a  citizen.  Is  not  every  man 
a  citizen  in  every  country?  No  ;  under  despotism  no  man  is 
free  ;  they  are  all  subjects.  What  is  the  difference  between  a 
citizen  and  a  subject?  One  is  a  man,  the  other  is  a  slave.  You 
have  a  great  many  books  on  the  table  ;  are  they  all  English  ? 
Almost  all  my  books  are  English,  but  I  have  several  French 
romances.  Why  do  you  read  such  romances?  Generally 
speaking,  they  are  not  good  books  ;  but  mine  are  all  historical 
romances,  arid  they  cost  me  only  a  few  dollars.  Newton  was 
born  the  same  day  that  Galileo  died  :  no  interval  was  left 
between  these  two  great  philosophers.  If  folly  were  a  painful 
sensation,  we  should  have  weeping  in  every  house.  Everything 
is  in  God,  and  God  is  in  everything.  Every  obligation  is  a 
duty.  Death  is  the  end  of  all  misfortunes.  Why  did  all  three 
of  you  come?  To  tell  you  that  the  vessel  is  lost,  and  (that)  the 
sailors  all  died,  without  exception.  Every  rose  has  its  thorn, 
and  all  men  their  cross.  Idleness  makes  everything  appear 
difficult :  let  us,  then,  employ  our  time  in  some  useful  occupation. 
I  cannot  comply  with  y^ur  request,  whatever  be  the  reason  you 
adduce.  All  men  are  more  ready  to  speak  than  to  act.  Do 
not  be  proud  of  any  success  in  life.  No  bad  tree  produces  good 
fruit.  We  should  place  our  honor  above  everything  else  in  the 
world.  A  time  for  everything,  and  everything  at  its  time.  No 
man,  learned  as  he  may  be,  is  able  to  acquire  a  perfect  knowl- 
edge of  all  the  secrets  and  beauties  of  nature.  Envy  is  the 
meanest  of  all  passions.  Every  man  lias  in  himself  something 
which  excites  the  desire  of  an  envious  man 


FORMATION   OF   THE   FEMININE.  127 


LESSON    XXXIX. 


FORMATION    OF    THE   FEMININE. 

291.  Nouns  used  to  represent  animated  beings 
form  their  feminine  by  changing  o  into  a;  as, 

Gaito,  monacOy  amicOy  make  gatia,  monacal  arnica. 

292.  Nouns  ending  in  tore  form  their  feminine  in 
trice;  as, 

Attore^  benefattore,  make  attricef  benefattrice. 

293.  Some  of  the  nouns  of  animated  beings  are 
known  by  a  name  peculiar  to  each  sex ;  as, 

Toro  .   .   .  Bull.  Vacca  ....  Cow. 

Montone   .  Kam.  Pecora     .   .    .  Ewe. 

Becco     .   .  He-goat.     Capra ....  She-goat. 

Others  have  but  one  gender  for  both  sexes.  Thus, 
the  mascuhne  nouns  tordo,  corvo,  and  the  feminine 
nouns  viper  a  J  aquila,  express  both  the  male  and 
the  female.  To  ascertain  the  gender,  maschio  or 
femiiia  is  added  to  the  noun ;  as, 
Corvo  maschio  .   .  Male  crow.      Corvo  femina  .   .  Female  crow. 

294.  Names  of  trees  end  in  o,  and  are  masculine, 
except  querela,  an  oak-tree  ;  as, 

Pero,  a  pear-tree.     Pesco,  a  peach-tree.     Cirieggio^  a  cherry-tree. 

By  changing  the  o  into  a,  they  become  feminine, 
and  express  their  fruits ;  as,  pera^  pear. 

Exceptions.  —  The  following  nouns  express  the  fi-uit  and  the  tree  : 


Cedro  .   .   .   Citron. 
Fico    .   .   .  Fig. 
Pistacchio  .  Pistachio  nut. 


Dattero  ....   Date. 
Limone  ....   Lemon. 
Porno Apple. 


128  FORMATIOJS    OF   THE   FEMININE. 

Ij^^  JKbcCt  the  tree,  is  masouline  ;  noce,  the  fruit,  is  feminine  ;  as. 
Un  noce,  a  nut-tree.     Una  nocey  a  nut. 

295.  The  following  nouns  are  of  either  gender: 

Erede   .    .   Heir  or  heiress.     I  A''ipote     .   .  Nephew  or  niece. 
Parente   .  Eelation.  |  Consorte  .   .  Wife  or  husband. 

296.  Some  nouns  have  two  terminations  for  the 
same  gender;  as, 

La  veste  or  vesta,  the  dress.     La  canzone  or  canzona^  the  song. 

Irregular  FEnnNiNES. 

Sartore   .   .    Tailor.  Sarta   .   .    Seamstress 

Re    ....    King.  Regina     .    Queen. 

Duca  .   .   .    Duke.  Duchessa  .    Duchess: 
(See  list,  page  225.) 


EXAMPLES. 

I  find  him  everywhere.  lo  la  trovo  per  ogni  dove. 

How  do  you  like  this  book  ?  Come  vi  piace  questo  libro  ? 

I  like  it  very  much.  Mi  piace  moltissimo. 

No  one  would  doubt  that  you  are  JYessuno  dubiterebbe  che  vox  siete 

a  tailor.  sarto. 

How  did  he  like  the  letter  I  sent  Come  glie  piaciuta  la  letter  a  ch* 

yesterday  ?  io  gli  mandai  ieri  ? 


SPERANZA. 

Perche  gli  son  compagna 
L'  estivo  raggio  ardonte 
L'  agricoltor  non  sente  ; 
Suda,  ma  non  si  lagna, 
Deir  opra,  o  del  sudor  : 

Con  me  nel  career  nero 
Ragiona  11  prigioniero, 
Si  scorda  affanni,  e  pene, 
E  al  suon  di  sue  catena 
Cantando  va  talor. 


FORMATION   OP   THE   FEMININE. 


129 


VOCABULARY. 

Attendance  . 

.    Scguito. 

Menagerie    . 

.    Menageria. 

Bearded    .    .    . 

.    Barbuto. 

To  marry .    . 

.    Sposare. 

Chambermaid  . 

.    Camerisla. 

To  mean    .    . 

.     Voter  dire. 

Cyclopedia   . 

.     Ciclopcdia. 

To  personify 

.    Personificare, 

To  doubt  .   . 

.    Dubitare. 

To  reject  .    . 

.    Rigettare. 

Despair     .    . 

.    Disperazionc. 

Remarkable . 

.    Rimarchevole 

Everywhere . 

.    Per  0(jni  dove. 

Sense     .    .    . 

.    Senso. 

Fairy     .    .   . 

.    Fata. 

Steward    .    . 

.    Maggiordomo. 

*nditferent    . 

.    .    Indiffe rente. 

To  touch  .    . 

.    Toccare 

Magic   .   .    . 

.    Ma(/ico. 

Wand    .    .    . 

.     Verga. 

EXERCISE  XXXVIII. 
Will  you  sing  me  an  Italian  song  ?  What  shall  I  sing  ?  Sing 
what  you  like.  How  do  you  like  my  sister's  voice  ?  She  has  a 
good  voice,  and  she  is  a  very  good  singer.  Has  the  dressmaker 
brought  my  silk  dress  ?  She  has  not  brought  it  yet.  What  did 
you  see  in  the  menagerie?  I  saw  a  lion  and  a  lioness,  a  tiger 
and  a  tigress,  a  peacock  and  a  peahen,  two  beautiful  eagles,  and 
some  vipers.  How  many  pear-trees  have  you  in  your  garden? 
Only  four,  but  they  are  full  of  pears.  Have  you  any  cherry- 
trees?  Yes,  sir  ;  I  have  two,  but  they  have  no  cherries.  That 
lady  speaks  as  if  she  were  well  acquainted  with  medicine.  Cer- 
tainly ;  she  is  a  doctor,  and  when  she  speaks  about  business,  no 
one  would  doubt  that  she  is  a  merchant.  Is  she  a  philosopher  ? 
I  do  not  know.  If  she  is  a  philosopher  too,  we  may  call  her  a 
cyclopedia  personified.  Call  her  as  you  like,  I  think  (that)  she 
is  a  woman  remarkable  for  knowledge  and  good  sense.  IIoW  did 
you  like  the  play?  .  I  did  not  like  it  at  all.  What  was  the 
plot  ?  All  nonsense  :  a  shepherd  was  in  love  with  a  shepherdess, 
and  wished  to  marry  her  ;  she  rejected  him,  saying  (that)  she  did 
not  understand  what  he  meant ;  the  young  shepherd  was  in 
great  despair,  and  did  not  know  what  to  do.  At  this  point,  a 
fairy,  who  protected  the  lad,  gave  him  a  snake,  and  touched  the 
lass  with  a  magic  wand.  Now 'the  scene  was  changed:  he 
became  indifferent,  and  she  began  to  follow  him  everywhere. 
Finally,  the  little  cottage  in  which  they  were  was  transformed 
into  a  beautiful  palace  ;  the  shepherd  became  a  king,  and  the 
shepherdess  a  queen  ;  and,  as  they  had  no  attendants,  the  good 
fairy  changed  a  goat  into  a  long-bearded  steward,  a  cock  became 
a  count,  and  three  hens  three  beautiful  marchionesses. 


130  PREPOSITIONS. 


LESSON   XL 


PREPOSITIONS. 

297.  The  Prepositions,  thus  far,  have  been  con- 
sidered mainly  in  connection  with  the  article,  to 
show  the  various  cases  of  the  nouns.  But,  more 
particularly, 

298.  Di  is  used  to  indicate  possession,  material, 
character,  and  origin ;  as, 

Questo  libro  e  di  mio  padre  .   .    .  This  book  is  my  father's. 

Una  bottiglia  di  vino A  bottle  of  wine. 

Uti  uomo  di  merito A  man  of  merit. 

Un  giovahe  di  alii  natali     ...  A  youth  of  high  birth. 

Un  cappello  di  paglia A  straw  hat. 

299.  The  need  or  the  desire  of  expressing  our 
thoughts  with  rapidity  has  led  the  Italians  to  omit 
one  of  the  two  nouns  connected  by  the  preposition 
di;  consequently,  many  of  the  Italian  verbs  are  to 
be  found  governing  this  preposition.  By  a  close 
analysis  the  connecting  word  which  has  been  omit- 
ted can  be  ascertained;  for  example, 

Domandare  di  qualcuno     ...  To  ask  after  any  one. 

Dare  del  briccone  a  qualcuno    .  To  call  one  a  rogue. 

Fare  di  cappello  a  qualcuno  .   .  To  make  a  bow. 

Far  d*  occhio  a  qualcuno   ...  To  give  the  wink  to  any  one. 

The  ellipses  in  these  phrases  might  be  supplied  as 
follows : 

Domandare  la  persona  di  qualcuno. 
Dare  il  tilolo  di  briccone  a  qualcuno. 
Fare  un  saluto  di  cappello  a  qualcuno. 
Fare  un  ccnno  d^occhio  a  qualcuno. 


PREPOSITIONS.  131 

VARIOUS  USES  OF  THE  PREPOSITION  DL 

Mori  di  morte  improvvha    .  He  died  suddenly. 

Scrisse  di  propria  pugno  .    .  He  wrote  with  his  own  hand. 

Parti  di  volo,  di  corsa  ...  He  departed  in  haste. 

Lo  dico  di  cuore I  say  it  from  the  heart. 

Penso  di  scrivergli         .    .    .  I  think  of  writing  to  him. 


300.  The  preposition  a  is  generally  employed  to 
express  the  tendency  of  the  subject  towards  a  per 
son,  place,  or  thing,  whether  the  motion  is  under- 
stood,  commenced,  or  ended  ;  as, 

Verra  a  Parigi  suhilo  ....    He  will  come  to  Paris  soon. 
Giunse  a  Roma  ieri  sera     .    .    He  reached  Rome  last  night. 
Se  andassi  a  casa  rostra  ...    If  I  could  go  to  your  house. 

301.  All  the  verbs  of  motion  which  express  a 
direction  towards  any  object  are  followed  by  the 
preposition  a;  as, 

Vado  a  Roma.     I  am  going  to  Rome. 

This  preposition  is  also  used  to  connect  the  word 
expressing  the  motive  power  with  that  expressing 
the  object  set  in  motion  ;  as, 

Mulino  a  vento Windmill. 

Legno  a  vcle Sail-boat. 

Macchina  a  vapore Steam-engine. 

VARIOUS  USES  OF  THE  PREPOSITION  A. 

Una  casa  a  pian  terreno.  A  house  with  a  ground-floor 

Una  casa  a  ire  piani.  A  house  w^Uj^tfeee  storigs. 

Andavano  a  due  a  due.  They  wentrtwo  by  two. 
Si  divisero  a  quatiro,  a  cinque.     They  divided  themselves  into  groups 

a  otto.  of  four,  of  five,  of  eight. 

Una  scala  a  lumaca.    ,  A  spiral  staircase. 

Da  oggi  a  otto.  This  day  week. 

Da  oggi  a  quindici.  This  day  fortnight. 

Fu  battuto  a  morte.  He  was  beaten  to  death. 


132 


PREPOSITIONS. 


VOCABULARY. 


Beyond,  besides  .   .  Oltre. 

Boat Baiiello. 

Brick Mattone. 

Captain Capitano. 

Country  girl    .    .    .  Contadina. 

To  deceive     ....  Ingannare. 

To  dress Vesiire. 

Gold Oro. 

Kitchen Cucina. 

Story Piano. 

Present Presenie. 


To  receive     ....  Ricevere. 

Residence Residenza. 

Ribbon JVastro. 

Satin Raso. 

Sea Mere. 

Shore Spiaggia. 

Silver Argento. 

Straw Paglia, 

Velvet Velluto. 

Watch Oriolo. 

To  wear Portare. 


EXERCISE  XXXIX. 
Where  is  your  silver  watch  ?  I  sold  it  yesterday.  Vi^'hy  did 
you  sell  it  ?  Because  I  have  received  a  present  of  a  gold  watch. 
How  is  your  friend?  He  was  well  last  week.  Have  you  not 
seen  him  this  week?  No,  because  he  went  to  Paris  last  Satur- 
day. "With  whom  did  he  go  ?  With  his  brother,  tlie  captain 
of  the  steamboat  "  Europa."  If  you  will  give  me  a  black  cloth 
coat,  I  will  give  you  this  fine  silk  dress.  AVhat  shall  I  do  with 
it?  This  is  a  very  good  dress  for  your  sister.  I  would  give 
you  what  you  ask,  if  I  were  rich.  It  is  time  to  go  home.  What 
o'clock  is  it?  It  is  half  past  eleven.  Where  are  you  going? 
I  am  going  to  market.  What  are  you  going  to  do  at  market? 
I  am  going  to  buy  some  peaches  and  cherries.  Have  you  no 
cherries  in  your  country-house  ?  I  have  two  cherry-trees,  but  I 
have  no  cherries  this  year.  Where  do  you  intend  to  go  next 
summer  ?  I  shall  go  to  the  sea-shore.  To  your  sister's  resi- 
dence? I  am  not  sure.  Do  you  know  how  many  rooms  there 
are  in  your  father's  tliree-story  brick  house  ?  I  believe  (that) 
there  are  seventeen  rooms  beside  the  kitchen  and  the  dining- 
room.  Who  is  that  lady  with  a  satin  dress  ?  I  do  not  know, 
but  I  think  (that)  she  is  my  music-teacher's  sister.  I  thought 
(that)  she  was  a  country  girl.  Why  did  you  think  so  ?  Because 
she  wjars  a  straw  hat  with  a  velvet  ribbon,  and  this  is  not  the 
fashion.  I  think  (tliat)  the  boat  fashion  is  to  bo  simple  and 
without  affectation  in  dressing,  speaking,  and  in  everything. 
You  are  mistaken,  sir  ;  there  is  a  fashion  in  every  tiling,  and  if 
we  do  not  follow  it,  every  one  calls  us  rude.  Let  the  fool  drees 
08  others  wish  ;  let  the  wise  do  what  he  likes. 


PREPOSITIONS.  133 


LESSON    XLI 


THE  PREPOSITIONS  DA,  PER. 
302.   The  Preposition  da  is  used, 

1.  To  express  a  relation  of  dependence,  origin, 
or  departure ;  as. 

La  mia  riuscita  dipende  da  vol  .   .    My  success  depends  on  you. 
La  cariia  comincia  da  se  stesso  .   .    Charity  begins  at  home. 
'^  Some  verbs,  "which  express  by  themselves  the  action  of  parting 
from  an  object,  instead  of  da  take  di,  if  the  noun  has  no  article  ;  as, 

Uscir  di  casa      To  go  out  of  the  house. 

Levarsi  di  tavola To  leave  the  table. 

Cadere  di  mano To  fall  out  of  the  hand. 

But,  if  the  noun  is  preceded  by  the  article,  da  is  used  ;  as, 

Uscir  dalla  casa  di  qualcuno  .    .    To  go  out  of  any  one's  house. 
Levarsi  dalla  tavola To  leave  the  table. 

2.  Before  all  words  which  express  the  use  or 
destination  of  any  object ;  as, 

Boiiiglia  da  vino Wine-bottle. 

Casa  da  vendere House  for  sale. 

Tabacco  da  fumare Smoking  tobacco 

3.  To  express  <  at  >  the  Jiouse  of;  as, 

[to  J 

Lo  trovereie  da  mio  fratello  .    You  will  find  him  at  my  brother's. 

Andro  dal  medico I  shall  go  to  the  physician's. 

Vado  dalui I  am  going  to  his  house. 

N.  B.  —  If  the  personal  pronoun  which  follows  da  is  an  objective 
pronoun  in  the  same  person  with  the  subject,  as  io  da  me,  tu  da  ie, 
these  pronouns  da  me,  da  te,  have  the  meaning  oi  alone  ;  thus, 
Io  vado  da  me       means  I  am  going  by  myself  (alone). 
Voi  andate  da  voi     '*       You  are  going  by  yourself. 
But       Io  vado  da  voi       means  I  am  going  to  your  house. 
Voi  andate  da  me     *'       You  are  going  to  my  house 


134 


PREPOSITIONS. 


VARIOUS  USES  OF  THE  PREPOSITION  DA 


Avete  da  fare  ? 

Datemi  da  lavorare. 

Gli  diedi  da  venti   dollari  ieri 

mattina. 
Vi  promettOf  da  galantuomo^  di 

non  parlare. 
Dite  da  vero  o  dite  da  burla  ? 
lofaccio  da  maestro  di  musica. 
Egli  fa  da  gran  signore. 
Venite  da  me. 
JVon  e  da  scherzo, 
Un  uomo  da  bene. 
Questo  e  un  soggello  da  commedia. 
Egli  vive  da  principe. 
Sono  stato  morso  da  quel  cane. 
Un  uomo  da  lodare. 
Un*  arma  da  difendere. 
Da  noi  non  si  par  I  a  Inglese. 
Egli  e  pazzo  da  catena. 
Fate  da  pranzo  per  died. 
Da  uomo  di  onore. 
Voi  parlate  da  senno. 
L'uomo  dair  abito  nero. 
J\oi  viaggiammo  da  otto  mesi. 
Passai    invano   da   casa   vostra 

ieri  sera. 


Have  you  anything  to  do  ? 

Give  me  something  to  do. 

I  gave  him  about  twenty  dollafs 

yesterday  morning. 
I  promise  to  you,  on  the  faith  of  a 

gentleman,  not  to  speak. 
Do  you  speak  in  earnest  or  in  jest  ? 
I  teach  music. 
He  plays  the  great  lord. 
Come  to  my  house. 
'T  is  not  a  thing  to  joke  about. 
A  good  man. 

This  is  a  subject  fit  for  a  comedy 
He  lives  like  a  prince. 
I  have  been  bitten  by  that  dog. 
A  man  to  be  praised. 
An  arm  (weapon)  for  defence. 
With  us  English  is  not  spoken. 
He  is  mad  enough  to  be  chained. 
Prepare  dinner  for  ten. 
As  a  man  of  honor. 
You  speak  wisely. 
The  man  with  the  black  coat. 
We  travelled  about  eight  months. 
It  was  in  vain  that  I  passed  by 

your  house  last  night. 


303.  The  preposition  per  is  used  to  express  the 
reason  why,  the  cause  hy  which,  and  the  manner  in 
which,  a  thing  is  accomplished.  It  answers  to  the 
English  for,  through,  in  order  to,  and  must  always 
be  expressed  in  Italian,  though  understood 
English;  as, 


m 


Scrivo  per  compiacervi. 

Per  le  continue  piogge,  il  fiume 

sbocco. 
Per  me  si  va  nella  cilia  dolente. 


I  write  to  please  you. 

Because  of  the  continual  rains, 

the  river  overflowed. 
Through  me  one  goes  into  the  citj 

of  woe. 


PREPOSITIONS.  135 

304.  Per  followed  by  an  infinitive  after  the  verbs 
stare  and  essere  signifies  to  he  about,  to  he  on  the 
point  of;  as, 

Sto  per  patire.  I  am  about  to  depart. 

lo  era  per  par  tire   quanto  egli    I  was  about  to  depart  when  he 
venne.  came. 


VARIOUS  USES   OF  THE  PREPOSITION  PER. 

Falelo  per  me.  Do  it  on  my  own  account. 

Fatelo  per  me  !  I  pray  do  it  for  (the  love  of)  me  ! 

Ebbi  pane  per  nove  giorni.  I  had  bread  nine  days. 

Per  we,  non  lofarei.  As  for  me,  I  would  not  do  it. 

Per  me  (per  conto  mio)  non  lo  I  would  not  do  it  on  my  owd 

farei.  account. 

Fu  adorato  per  sanio.  He  was  adored  as  a  saint. 

La  citta  fu  'assalita  per  mare  e    The  city  was  assailed  by  sea  and 

per  terra.  land. 

305.  In  fuori  sometimes  follows  the  case  it  gov 
erns;  as, 

In  fuori  di  questo,  iuito  va  bene.  ")  „        x  x,  • 

rr,  ,,         r        J.         4    •     ^       •    ^  Except  this,  everything  goes  well. 

Tutio  va  bene  di  questo  m  fuori.  ) 

306.  Di  Id  and  di  qua  are  followed  by  the  prepo- 
sition da;  but  al  di  Id  and  al  di  qua  are  generally 
followed  by  the  preposition  di;  as, 

Di  qua  dal  fiume     )    nr,.     -i      ,..,       . 
^,j-      ^   /,  ^         ^  This  side  of  the  river. 
^l  di  qua  del  fiume  ) 

Al  di  la  del  ponte.    1  m    ^    •  i     i?xi,    u  -j 
_.. -^   ,  ,      ^  y  That  side  of  the  bridge 

Di  la  dal  ponte         ) 


ex.\:mples. 

Did  I  leave  my  book  here?  Ho  io  lasciato  il  mio  libro  qui? 

You  left  it  at  my  sister's.  Voi  lo  lasciaste  da  mia  sorella. 

I  can  go  out  whenever  I  like.  Posso  uscire  quando  voglio. 

That  soldier  is  a  brave  man.  Quel  soldato  e  un  valoroso. 


136 

PREPOSITIONS. 

VOCABULARY. 

Arrogant  .    .    . 

.    Arrogante. 

Mouthful  . 

.    Boccone. 

To  ascertain      . 

.    Accertarsi. 

To  meet     . 

.    Iiicontrare,. 

Boldly   .    .    .    . 

.    Arditumente. 

Necklace  . 

.    Collana. 

Consequence     . 

.     Conseqxienza. 

To  nourish 

.    Alimentare,. 

To  consider  .    . 

.    Considerare. 

Rabble  .    . 

.     Canaglia. 

To  consume  .    . 

.    Consumare. 

To  remark 

.    Rimarcare. 

Courtesy  .    .    . 

.    Cortesia. 

To  rush     . 

.    Lanciarsi. 

i)anger.    .    .    . 

.    Pericolo. 

Temper     . 

.    Temper  amento. 

To  grapple   .    . 

.    Aygrappare. 

Violent.    . 

.     Violento. 

Match   ,    .    .   . 

.    Accojjpiare. 

Whenever 

.    Ogni  qual  volta. 

EXERCISE  XL. 

Have  you  my  brother's  French  dictionary,  or  mine  ?  I  have 
neither  your  brother's  dictionary  nor  yours  ;  I  have  my  sister's 
dictionary.  Is  your  sister's  dictionary  as  good  as  mine  ?  My 
sister  always  has  the  best  books  that  can  be  found  ;  so  that,  if  it 
is  not  better  than  yours,  it  must  certainly  be  as  good  (as  yours). 
If  you  promise  me  to  come  and  see  me  this  afternoon,  I  will  go 
with  you  to  my  father's.  I  have  many  things  to  do,  and  shall  not 
be  able  to  come.  Where  did  you  leave  your  gloves  ?  I  left  them 
in  my  bed-room.  Why  does  that  man  always  go  alone  ?  Because 
he  has  no  friends.  Would  you  call  a  man  who  does  not  know 
what  danger  is  a  brave  man  ?  No,  I  would  not  call  him  so ; 
because  he  who  rushes  upon  danger  without  considering  its 
consequences  has  in  him  the  nature  of  a  brute.  Then  who  is 
to  be  called  a  brave  man  ?  The  man  who,  knowing  the  danger, 
meets  it  boldly,  either  through  necessity,  or  for  some  honorable 
cause.  Where  did  your  brother  find  that  wine-bottle  ?  That 
is  not  a  wine-bottle.  What  is  it,  then  ?  It  is  a  bottle  of  wine. 
0,  I  thought  it  was  empty;  but  where  did  you  find  it?  I 
found  it  at  my  father's.  At  what  time  could  I  go  to  your 
father's  to-night  ?  You  can  go  whenever  you  like  ;  but  I  will 
send  my  servant  to  ascertain  when  he  will  be  at  home.  Do 
they  speak  English  in  your  country  ?  But  few  persons  speak 
English  in  our  country,  but  many  read  and  translate  it  very  well. 
The  lady  wliom  Milton  married  after  he  had  become  blind  was 
very  beautiful,  but  of  a  violent  temper.  One  of  the  poet's 
friends,  wishing  to  praise  her  beauty,  remarked  that  she  was 
a  rose.  "  I  know  it,"  said  Milton,  "  not  by  the  color,  but  by 
the  thorns." 


USE   OP   THE   THIRD    PERSON   FEMININE.  137 


LESSON    XLII. 


USE   OF   THE   THIRD    PERSON   FEMININE. 

307.  Beside  the  way  of  addressing  an  individual 
in  the  second  person  plural,  common  to  all  other 
languages,  the  Italians  have  adopted  the  use  of  the 
third  person,  Ella,  which  is  equivalent  to  the  title 
Vostra  Signoria,  Your  Lordship,  or  Your  Ladyship. 
This  peculiar  form  of  address  is  chiefly  used  to 
evince  a  mark  of  respect  to  a  superior,  and  often  as 
a  mere  matter  of  etiquette  in  speaking  to  a  gen- 
tleman or  lady  with  whom  one  is  not  intimately 
acquainted.  In  such  a  case,  the  verb  is  to  be  used  in 
the  third  person  singular  if  the  subject  is  Ella,  and 
in  the  third  person  plural  if  the  subject  is  Elleno, 
The  past  participle  or  any  adjective  must  also  be  in 
the  feminine  form,  and  must  agree  with  the  subject. 

E  Ella  contenta  ?  Are  you  contented  (lady  or  gentleman)  ? 

Sono  Elleno  contente  ?  Are  you  contented  (ladies  or  gentlemen)  ? 

f^  Particular  care  should  be  taken  to  liave  all  the  pronouns 
referring  to  the  subject  Ella  or  Elleno  in  the  third  person  ;  as, 
Ha  Ella  studiato  la  sua  lezione. 
Hanno  Elleno  studiato  la  loro  lezione. 
And  not 

Ha  Ella  studiato  la  vostra  lezione. 
Hanno  Elleno  studiato  la  sua  lezione. 

308.  This  peculiarity  of  the  Italian  language  is 
not  recommended  to  foreigners, 

1.  Because  it  did  not  originate  with  the  language. 
Dante,  Petrarch,  Boccaccio,  did  not  adopt  this  form, 
but  always  used  the  second  person  plural,  voi. 
7 


138 


IDIOMATIC   EXPRESSIONS. 


2.  Because  the  progress  of  democracy  tends  now 
to  equalize  all  classes,  and  this  mode  of  address  ia 
beginning  to  be  obsolete. 

3.  Because  foreigners/ who  visit  Italy,  with  a 
limited  knowledge  of  the  language,  would  be  more . 
at  home  in  addressing  persons  in  their  usual  way ; 
moreover,  they  can  say  to  any  lady  or  gentleman 
Come  state:  Fatemi  un  favore,  without  the  least 
apprehension  of  being  charged  with  want  of  refine- 
ment, whilst  it  would  be  ludicrous  to  address  a  ser- 
vant or  a  porter  in  the  third  person,  and  say.  Mi  dia 
un  hicchier  d^acqua.   Mandi  questa  lettera  alia  posta. 


IDIOMATIC  EXPRESSIONS. 


Avere  in  pregio. 

Avere  in  odio. 

Avere  per  ignorante. 

Avere  un  tempo  di  paradiso. 

Aver  fretta. 

Aver  fumo. 

Aver  d'  uopo. 

Avere  in  ordine.  or  in  pronto. 

Aver  mala  voce. 

Averla  con  uno. 

Essere  da  qualche  cosa. 

Essere  a  cavallo. 

Eisere  di  buona  nascita. 

Essere  a  parte  di  .  .  .  , 

Esser  benveduto. 

Esser  malveduto. 

Essere  in  grado  di  .  .  .  . 

Essere  a  mal  termine. 

Esser  scar  so  di  denari. 

Essere  in  ritardo. 


To  appreciate. 

To  hate. 

To  beHeve  (some  one)  ignorant 

To  have  a  good  time. 

To  be  in  haste. 

To  be  proud. 

To  have  need. 

To  have  in  readiness. 

To  be  ill  spoken  of. 

To  be  angry  with  one. 

To  be  good  for  something. 

To  be  out  of  trouble. 

To  come  of  a  good  family. 

To  be  partaker  of  ...  . 

To  have  a  good  reputation 

To  have  a  bad  name. 

To  be  able  to  ...  . 

To  be  in  a  bad  condition. 

To  have  but  little  money. 

To  be  la  to. 


EXAMPLES   AND   EXERCISE.  139 

EXAMPLES. 

[  am  afraid  I  shall  see  my  broth-  Temo  di  non  vedere  mai  inu  V 

er's  friend  no  more.  amico  di  mio  fratello. 

Have  I  offended  you  in  any  way  ?  Vi  ho  io  mai  offeso  ? 

I  think  him  impertinent.  Io  credo  che  egli  sia  impertinenU 

I  mean  to  say  that  he  is  proid.  Io  voglio  dire  che  egli  e  orgogliosc. 

I  asked  my  brother  for  money.  Domandai  denaro  a  mio  fratello. 

How  old  are  you  ?     I  am  eighteen  Quanti  anni  avete  ?     Ho  dicioilo 

years  old.  amii. 

But  as  for  my  books.  Ma  in  quanio  ai  miei  libri. 

So  much  the  better.  Tanio  meglio. 


EXERCISE  XLI. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you,  my  good  friend?  I  cannot 
tell  you  what  is  the  matter  with  me,  but  the  sight  of  that  man 
always  puts  me  in  a  state  that  I  cannot  describe.  Probably  it 
is  because  you  are  not  well  acquainted  with  him.  I  hope  1 
shall  never  have  such  acquaintances.  Has  he  offended  you  in 
any  way  ?  He  has  not  (offended  me) ,  but  he  is  conceited,  and  I 
dislike  men  like  him,  because  they  generally  have  but  little  wit. 
Then  you  think  him  ignorant.  Certainly,  he  is  not  only  igno- 
rant and  superstitious,  but  he  is  spoken  ill  of  too.  I  pity  him. 
And  I  hate  him.  0,  no  ;  we  must  never  hate  any  one.  I  do 
not  mean  to  say  that  I  really  hate  him,  but  I  can  never  find 
his  society  as  agreeable  as  it  may  be  to  you.  "  How  old  are 
you  ?  "  asked  a  lady  of  one  of  her  tenant-farmers.  "  I  cannot 
really  tell,"  replied  he,  "  whether  I  am  thirty-eight  or  forty- 
eight.'-  "  How  can  you  forget  your  age?  "  said  the  lady,  with 
surprise.  "Madam,"  said  he,  "I  could  tell  you  how  much 
money  I  possess,  how  many  cows  and  sheep  I  have  ;  but  as  for 
my  years,  I  never  trouble  myself  to  count  them,  as  I  cannot  lose 
one  of  them,  and  no  one  can  take  one  from  me."  I  wish  I  had 
twenty  thousand  dollars  ;  and  I  wish  to  have  a  good  reputation. 
What  could  you  do  with  your  good  reputation  without  a  penny 
in  your  pocket  ?  I  do  not  know ;  yet  I  should  prefer  a  good 
name  without  money  to  a  bad  name  with  plenty  of  it.  But  you 
must  remember  that  a  man  without  money  is  not  able  to  do 
what  he  likes.     So  much  the  better. 


140  OP  THE   PRONOUN  SI. 


LESSON    XLIII. 


OF   THE    PRONOUN   SI. 

309.  When  the  pronoun  si  is  used  before  a  verb, 
although  it  can  be  expressed  in  English  by  the 
indefinite  pronoun  one  or  they,  or  by  the  passive 
voice,  it  is  in  Italian  but  the  object  of  the  verb  used 
reflectively.  Si  dice,  si  vede,  have  the  meaning  of 
questa  cosa  e  detta,  or  veduta, — this  thing  is  said  or 
seen.  Consequently,  the  verb  must  agree  v^ith  the 
subject,  if  a  subject  is  to  be  found  in  the  sentence  * 

Si  vende  un  cavallo A  horse  is  sold. 

Si  vendono  due  cavalli     .   .    .    Two  horses  are  sold. 

310.  In  compound  tenses,  the  verb  essere,  to  be, 
must  be  employed  instead  of  the  verb  avere,  to  have, 
because  all  reflective  verbs  in  Italian  are  conjugated 
with  the  verb  essere  ;  as. 

Si  e  venduto  un  cavallo     ...    A  horse  has  been  sold. 
Si  sono  venduti  due  cavalli  .   .    Two  horses  have  been  sold. 
!j^  We  may  also  say,  as  in  English,  E  stato  venduto  un  cavallo; 
tono  stati  venduti  due  cavalli. 

311.  Instead  of  si,  una  may  be  used,  when  si  can 
be  replaced  by  one,  a  man,  a  person  ;  as, 

Quando  uno  dorme,  non  pensa  a  guai. 
When  one  sleeps,  he  does  not  think  of  troubles. 
Ij^"  We  may  also  say,  quando  donniamo  non  pensiamo  a  guai. 

312.  When,  in  compound  tenses,  si  is  used  with 
a  conjunctive  pronoun,  the  verb  venire  may  be 
employed  instead  of  essere,  with  the  omission  of  the 
pronoun  si ;  as. 

Mi  si  g  detlo,  or       ^ 

Mi  e  stato  dettoy  or  >  It  has  been  said  to  me. 

Mi  vicn  ietto.  J 


SYNONYMS  AND   IDIOMS. 


141 


SYNONYMS. 
FEAR,  PAURA,  TIMORE. 
The  coward  hasj^awra!,  but  not  timore,  of  doing  a  thing. 
A  brave  man  has  timore,  but  not  paura,  of  doing  a  thing. 
Paura  originates  in  cowardice  ;  timore,  in  excessive  prudence. 
We  have  timore^  and  not  paura,  of  God. 
The  good  citizen  is  afraid  of  the  hiws.    Ha  timore  dclle  hggi. 
The  thief  is  afraid  of  the  laws.     Ha  paura  dclle  leggi. 


TO  RUB,  STOFINARE,  STROPICCIARE. 

Sirojinare  is  the  act  of  rubbing  gently  with  the  hand,  or  with 
a  soft  object. 

Stropicciare  is  the  act  of  rubbing  hard  with  the  foot,  or  with 
a  hard  object. 

AVe  rub,  strofiniamo,  a  piece  of  amber,  or  a  stiffened  limb. 

We  rub,  stropicciamo,  a  horse,  or  the  floor. 


IDIOMATIC  EXPEESSIONS. 


Andar  dietro  a  .  .  .  . 
Andar  in  collera. 
Andare  in  buon  ora. 
Andar e  in  malora. 
Andar  per  la  mente. 
Andare  a  cavallo. 
Andare  a  spasso. 
Andare  alio  scuro. 
Andare  a  monte. 
Andare  a  verso. 
Andar  col  pie  di  piombo. 
Andar  dicendo. 
Andare  in  bestia. 
Andar  tentone. 
Questo  vi  sta  bene. 
Stare  in  disagio. 
Stare  a  galla. 
Stare  in  pericolo. 
Star  zitto. 


To  follow,  or  solicit. 

To  put  one's  self  in  a  passion. 

To  go  in  peace. 

To  be  ruined. 

To  come  into  one's  mind. 

To  ride  on  horseback. 

To  go  a  walking. 

To  act  in  ignorance. 

To  prove  vain. 

To  succeed  well. 

To  go  heedfuUy. 

To  report. 

To  fall  into  a  passion. 

To  grope  about. 

That  becomes  you  well 

To  live  in  sorrow. 

To  float. 

To  be  in  danger. 

To  be  hushed. 


142  EXAMPLES   AND   EXERCISE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Your  sister  was  oflFered  a  book  by  Un  libro  fu  offer  to  a  vosira  $o- 

her  friend.  rella  dal  suo  amico. 

I  am  well  provided  with  money.  Sono  ben  provveduto  di  denaro. 

All  will  succeed  well  with  me.  Tulto  mi  riuscira  bene. 

I  saw  him  writing.  lo  lo  vidi  scrivere. 

He  does  not  know  what  to  say.  E(/li  non  sa  cio  che  dice. 


EXERCISE  XLII. 
A  brave  soldier,  who  had  lost  both  arms  in  a  combat,  was 
offered  a  dollar  by  his  solonel.  I  thank  you  for  your  generosity, 
said  the  brave  soldier  ;  you  must  certainly  think  that  I  have  lost 
but  a  pair  of  gloves.  A  traveller  should  be  provided  with  four 
pockets  :  the  first,  for  his  health  ;  the  second,  for  a  good  com- 
panion ;  the  third,  larger  than  the  others,  for  patience ;  and  the 
fourth,  the  largest  of  all,  for  his  money.  "With  such  means,  he 
will  be  sure  that  everything  will  succeed  well  with  him.  How 
many  miles  can  you  walk  in  a  day  ?  I  have  never  made  the 
attempt,  but  I  think  I  could  walk  about  tw^enty-one  (miles),  if 
I  were  obliged  to  do  so.  I  hope  that  you  will  never  be  obliged 
to  walk  so  far,  because  I  am  sure  that  you  could  not  walk  more 
than  twelve  miles.  You  do  not  know  what  to  say.  Do  not  put 
yourself  into  a  passion  ;  I  say  what  I  mean.  A  man  like  yourself, 
accustomed  to  ride  always  on  horseback,  could  not  walk  more 
than  ten  miles  a  day ;  take  my  word  for  it.  Diogenes,  seeing 
one  day  a  young  man  blushing,  "  You  are  afraid  of  making  mis- 
takes," said  he  ;  "  courage,  my  boy,  this  is  the  color  of  virtue." 
Do  you  see  that  man  at  the  corner  of  the  street  ?  I  see  him.  Do 
you  know  him  ?  No,  I  do  not  (know  him),  but  I  think  that  he 
is  not  a  good  man,  because  he  follows  everybody,  and  I  am  afraid 
(that)  he  will  follow  me,  if  he  sees  mo  alone  in  the  street.  How 
does  the  color  of  this  dress  become  me  ?  The  color  becomes  you 
well,  but  I  do  not  like  the  dress.  Why  not  ?  Because  it  is  too 
largo  and  too  long.  This  is  the  fashion.  I  do  not  care  about 
the  fashion  ;  I  cannot  boar  to  see  a  lady  dragging  about  a  skirt 
as  large  as  the  cupola  of  St.  Peter  in  Home.  Silence !  and  do 
not  fall  into  a  passion  for  what  cannot  be  helped. 


ELLIPSES,  143 


LESSON   XLIV 


ELLIPSES. 

313.  The  Italian  language,  though  easy  in  its  pro- 
nunciation, and  regular  in  its  construction,  presents 
many  difficulties  to  those  who  aim  at  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  it,  because  of  its  being  filled  with 
elliptical  phrases,  whose  meaning,  though  readily 
caught  by  the  natives,  accustomed  to  express  a 
long  series  of  ideas  by  a  single  word,  a  look,  or  a 
gesture,  can  only  be  understood  by  foreigners 
through  a  keen  activity  of  judgment  and  an  accu- 
rate analysis.  The  following  practical  observations 
may  be  of  some  help  to  students. 

ELLIPSES   OF  NOUNS. 

314.  The  preposition  di  or  an  adjective  naturally 
presupposes  a  noun.  If,  to  give  a  greater  degree  of 
interest  and  beauty  to  the  phrase  by  its  conciseness, 
the  noun  is  omitted,  it  may  be  supplied  by  analy- 
sis; as, 

n  dotto  inventa,  V  ignorante  imita,  i.  e.,  V  tiomo  doito,  or  igjiorante. 
Si  domanda  di  voi,  i.  e.,  si  domanda  la  persona  di  vol. 
Era  di  primavera,  i.  e.,  era  nella  stagione  di  primavera. 
Cadere  da  alto,  i.  e.,  cadere  da  luogo  alto. 

ELLIPSES  OF  CONJUNCTIONS  AND  CORRELATIVES. 

315.  The  conjunction  die  is  often  omitted  before 
verbs  used  in  the  subjunctive  mood ;  as, 

Vorrei  mi  diciate  la  veriia,  for  Vorrei  che  mi  diciate  la  verita. 

316.  Instead  of  jpercM,  cM  is  often  used ;  as, 

Che  nan  corriamo  alia  ciila  che  e  meta,  for  Perche  nan  .... 


144 


ELLIPSES    AND   IDIOMS. 


317.  The  antecedent  or  consequent  term  of  a 
comparison  is  often  understood  ;  as, 

Siccome  non  fu  bene  accolto  se  ne  partly  for  cosi  se  ne  parti. 
Mi  trovate  quale  mi  lasciaste,  for  tale,  quale  ... 

ELLIPSES  OF  VERBS  AND   Px\RTICIPLES. 

318.  A  verb  or  participle  is  suppressed  in  a  prop- 
osition when  its  meaning  can  be  easily  supphed  by 
analogy ;  as. 

Via  di  qua,  i.  e.,  andate  via  di  qua. 

Mandare  pel  medico,  i.  e.,  mandare  una  persona  a  cercare,  o  chia» 

mare  il  medico, 
Appenafui  al  posto  assegnato,  i.  e.,  appena  Jui  arrivato  .  . 
JVel  mezzo  del  cammi?i  di  nostra  vita,  i.  e.,  essendo  ncl  mezzo  del 


IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS. 


Darscia  a  gambe. 

Dar  fede  a. 

Dare  ad  intendere. 

Dare  in  luce. 

Dar  si  pensiero. 

Dare  in  prestito. 

Dar  sicurta. 

Dar  la  caccia. 

Dar  principio,  fine 

Dar  si  alio  studio. 

Dar  si  bel  tempo. 

Dare  a  credenza. 

Dare  a  pigione. 

Dar  si  briga. 

Dar  da  bere,  da  mangiare. 

Dar  fondo. 

Dar  la  baia. 

Dar  ncl  berzaglio. 

Dar  norma. 

Daie  un^  occhiata. 

Dar  si  ad  una  cosa. 


To  run  away. 

To  believe. 

To  make  one  believe. 

To  give  birth,  to  publish. 

To  care  for. 

To  lend. 

To  bail. 

To  pursue. 

To  begin,  to  end. 

To  apply  one's  self  to  study. 

To  divert  one's  self. 

To  sell  upon  credit. 

To  let  out  on  rent. 

To  trouble  one's  self. 

To  give  sometoing  to  drink,  eat 

To  cast  anchor. 

To  mock  at. 

To  hit  the  mark. 

To  prescribe  a  rule. 

To  cast  an  eye  at. 

To  apply  one's  self  to  a  thing. 


EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE.  145" 

EXAMPLES. 
To  enter  a  room.  Entrare  in  una  stanza. 

I  used  to  write.  loera  solito  di,  or  soleva  scrivere 

Not  in  the  least.  JViente  affatlo. 

I  put  my  hand  to  my  heart.  Mi  misi  la  mano  al  cuore. 


EXERCISE  XLIII. 
A  literary  man  was  once  so  much  absorbed  in  the  translation 
of  a  book  that  he  gave  orders  to  his  servants  never  to  allow  any 
one  to  enter  his  library,  where  he  used  to  work  from  morning 
until  evening.  One  day,  when  he  was  nearly  at  the  end  of  his 
work,  a  servant  came  in  great  haste  and  announced  that  his 
lady  had  fallen  down,  and  that  she  was  seriously  hurt.  Do  you 
think  that  he  started  at  the  news  ?  Not  in  the  least.  Turning 
over  the  leaves  of  a  large  Greek  dictionary,  he  told  the  servant 
to  go  for  the  doctor.  After  a  while,  another  servant  came  in, 
telling  him  that  his  lady  was  at  the  point  of  death,  and  that  she 
wished  to  see  him.  "  I  will  be  ready  in  a  moment,"  said  he  ;  "I 
have  but  a  few  lines  to  translate."  Scarcely  had  he  said  so,  when 
the  chambermaid  entered,  with  her  eyes  filled  with  tears,  say- 
ing that  her  mistress  had  expired.  Did  the  translator  drop  the 
pen  he  held  in  his  hand  ?  No  ;  but,  putting  his  left  hand  to  his 
forehead  and  rubbing  it  gently,  he  exclaimed,  "Ah,  poor  me  ' 
she  was  a  very  good  woman,"  and,  rubbing  his  forehead  for  a 
while,  which  seemed  to  erase  the  memory  of  the  good  woman, 
went  on  in  his  work.  I  cannot  believe  such  a  story.  Do  you 
think  that  I  would  try  to  make  you  believe  it,  if  it  were  not  true? 
No,  I  do  not  think  so,  but  I  would  apply  myself  to  the  reading 
of  such  books  as  elevate  the  mind  and  ennoble  the  heart,  rather 
than  stories  invented  only  to  call  forth  the  evil  part  of  our 
nature.  But  should  we  not  mention  a  circumstance,  which  has 
really  taken  place  ?  Not  anything  which  is  contrary  to  common 
sense,  and  the  natural  flow  of  feeling  in  a  human  heart.  What 
you  have  just  mentioned  is  not  creditable  ;  it  must  be  exagger- 
ated ;  and  if  it  were  just  as  you  mention  it,  it  is  an  exception  to 
the  general  rule,  and  I  would  advise  you  not  to  repeat  it,  or 
embellish  it  only  to  divert  yourself,  because,  if  you  do  so,  no  on« 
will  believe  what  you  say,  even  when  you  speak  in  earnest. 


146  ELLIPSES. 


LESSON    XLV 


ELLIPSES,  continued, 

ELLIPSES  OF  PERSONAL,  POSSESSIVE,  AND  RELATIVE 
PRONOUNS. 

319.  Personal  Pronouns  are  commonly  omitted 
before  verbs,  because  the  number  and  person  of  the 
verb  is  indicated  by  the  termination  of  each  tense. 
Amo  has  always  the  meaning  of  /  love,  and  amate 
of  you  love,  because  o  is  the  characteristic  ter- 
mination of  the  first  person  singular,  and  te  of  the 
second  person  plural.  Nevertheless,  personal  pro- 
nouns must  be  expressed  when  their  omission  might 
cause  doubt,  as  well  as  when  we  wish  to  point  at 
one  person  to  the  exclusion  of  another ;  as, 

Egli  scrivBy  or  ella  scrive  ;  io,  or  effliy  or  ella  scriveva 
Eglino  scrivevano,  or  elleno  scrivevano. 
Voi  avete  detto  cost ;  egli  non  disse  nulla. 

320.  The  possessive  pronoun  is  often  omitted 
when  the  idea  of  possession  can  be  easily  identified 
and  supplied  by  analogy.  If  we  say,  Mio  frafello 
verrd  qui  colla  moglie,  coi  figli  e  con  tutta  la  fami- 
glia,  we  mean  with  his  wife,  children,  and  family ; 
but  the  possessive  pronoun  is  omitted  in  Italian, 
being  considered  superfluous.  In  the  same  way 
if  we  say  vado  in  casa,  in  hottega,  we  mean  my  Jiouse, 
my  store,  because  it  is  generally  admitted  that  in 
such  phrases  the  person  speaking  refers  to  his  own 
house  or  store.  Likewise,  if  we  say  non  7io  studiato 
la  lezione,  we  understand  that  it  is  my  lesson,  be 


ELLIPSES   AND   IDIOMS.  147 

f^ause  one  would  not  properly  lose  his  time  in  study- 
ing the  lesson  of  another. 

JE^  The  possessive  pronoun  can  be  supplied  by  the  adjective  pro- 
Tprio;  egli  parti  collapropria  carrozza,  instead  of  colla  sua  carrozza 

321.  It  is  very  common  in  Italian  to  suppress  the 
relative  pronouns  che  or  il  quale,  together  with  the 
auxiliary  verbs  essere  and  avere,  when  used  in  the 
indicative  mood.  The  past  participle  must  in  this 
case  agree  with  the  subject ;  as, 

A'on  posso  raccontarvi  Ic  cose  dette  ofatte,  i.  e.,  le  cose,  rhe  sono  state 

dette  0  fatte. 
Mi  dolffo  del  libri  perdutiy  i.  e.,  dei  libri  che  ho  perduto. 

N.  B.  —  This  elision  may  also  take  place  by  changing  the  verb 
from  a  passive  into  an  active  form  ;  as, 
n  denaro  datomi  daW  amico  for  II  denaro  che  V  amico  mi  ha  dato 


IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS. 

Al  far  del  giorno.  At  the  break  of  day. 

Al  far  della  notte.  Towards  evening. 

Far  di  mestieri.  To  be  necessary. 

Far  si  innanzi.  To  come  forvrard. 

Fare  a  gara.  To  strive  for  the  victory. 

Fare  alV  amore.  To  make  love. 

Far  alto.  To  halt. 

Fare  una  cosa  a  pennello.  To  do  a  thing  exactly. 

Far  bisogno.  To  be  needful. 

Far  cerchio.  To  make  a  ring. 

Far  cipiglio.  To  look  frowningly. 

Far  colazione.  To  breakfast. 

Far  f route  a.  To  face. 

Fare  i  fatti  suoi.  To  foUovr  one's  own  affairs. 

Fare  il  balordo.  To  play  the  ninny. 

Far  le  carte.  To  deal  (at  cards) . 

Far  lo  spasimato.  To  play  the  lover. 

Far  sapere  a  qualcuno.  To  let  one  know. 

Far  stare  a  segno  qualcuno.  To  keep  one  under 


148  EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Not  being  able  to  ■write.  JVbn  potendo  scrivere. 

Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  .  .  .  Vorreste  aver  la  bonta  di  .  . 

To  ask  for  a  thing.  Domandare  una  cosa. 

To  ask  for  a  person.  Domandare  di  una  persona. 


EXERCISE  XLW. 
A  preacher  who  had  tired  his  audience  with  a  sermon  on  th« 
beatitudes  wab  receiving  the  congratulations  of  his  friends, 
when  a  lady  of  sense,  not  able  to  bear  their  ridiculous  flattery, 
approached  him,  and  with  the  greatest  civility  told  him  (that)  she 
was  sure  that  he  had  forgotten  to  mention  one  of  the  beatitudes, 
which  she  thought  would  have  been  warmly  received  by  the 
audience.  "How  can  that  be?"  said  the  preacher,  looking 
frowningly.  "  It  is  impossible,  madam  ;  I  know  very  well  what  I 
am  about ;  you  must  have  been  distracted,  and  probably  you  did 
not  follow  the  connection  of  the  several  points  of  my  sermon." 
*'  Not  so,  reverend  father,"  said  the  lady  ;  "  I  was  too  attentive, 
and  for  this  reason  noticed  it."  "  Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to 
mention  it?  "  "If  you  will  allow  me,  I  will  do  so  with  pleas- 
ure," said  the  lady,  as,  with  a  smile  on  her  lips,  she  said, 
"  Father,  you  forgot  to  say.  Blessed  are  those  who  did  not  hear 
your  sermon,"  and,  making  a  respectful  bow,  she  retired.  At 
what  time  do  you  breakfast  ?  Not  always  at  the  same  hour. 
When  we  are  in  the  country  we  breakfast  at  break  of  day,  but 
while  we  remain  in  town  we  generally  breakfast  at  eight  o'clock. 
If  you  are  not  going  to  the  country  to-morrow,  I  will  try  to 
come  and  take  breakfast  with  you.  I  will  let  you  know  (it). 
Who  knocks  ?  Can  one  see  a  friend  at  this  late  hour  ?  I  am 
glad  to  see  you,  my  friend  ;  come  in.  Is  it  necessary  to  ask  for 
permission  ?  Sit  down.  How  do  you  do?  How  have  you  been? 
Uow  is  your  mother  ?  And  your  sisters,  how  are  they  ?  They 
are  all  well,  and  I  am  perfectly  well,  I  thank  you.  How  long 
have  you  been  gone?  Two  years  and  a  half.  0,  you  must  give 
us  a  relation  of  all  that  you  have  seen  and  done  ;  we  should  be 
delighted  to  hear  it.  Should  I  relate  to  you  all  that  I  have  seen 
and  done,  it  would  take  me  many  a  day  ;  but  I  will  certainly 
comply  with  your  wish  by  giving  you  an  account  of  my  journey 
I  shall  be  very  much  obliged  to  you. 


DIMINUTION  OF  WORDS.  149 


LESSON   XLVI. 


DIMINUTION   OF   WORDS.      . 

322.  The  Italian  language  claims  its  preeminence 
among  the  living  languages  for  its  musical  and  sono- 
rous pronunciation.  All  words,  except  the  article 
il  and  a  few  monosyllables,  end  in  vowels ;  their  syl- 
lables, formed  by  an  almost  equal  proportion  of 
vowels  and  consonants,  are  so  arranged  as  to  pre- 
sent an  admirable  smoothness  in  their  articulation. 
This  peculiarity  of  the  language,  giving  to  the  words 
an  easy  and  flowing  softness,  distinguishes  it  from 
the  English,  whose  chief  tendency  is  to  be  direct  and 
manly,  by  the  use  of  sharp,  brief,  and  harsh  sounds. 

323.  To  avoid  the  uniform  termination  of  the 
same  vowels,  and  to  give  more  vigor  to  the  expres- 
sion, the  Italians  often  suppress  the  last  vowel,  and 
sometimes  the  last  syllable  of  a  word. 

324.  No  definite  rules  can  be  assigned  for  these 
abbreviations,  the  only  sure  guide  being  the  law 
of  euphony  subject  to  judgment. 

325.  The  following  rules  are,  however,  to  be 
observed : 

1.  No  final  vowel  characteristic  of  the  feminine  or 
plural  of  nouns  can  ever  be  omitted. 

2.  No  final  vowel  can  be  suppressed  in  the  conju- 
gation of  any  verb,  except  in  the  infinitive,  in  the 
third  person  of  both  numbers,  and  sometimes  in  the 
first  person  plural. 


150  MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OP  SPEECH. 

Hi^  The  i  of  the  second  person  of  the  imperative  of  verbs  ending 
in  nere  and  idre  is  often  omitted  when  the  following  word  commences 
with  a  consonant. 

3.  No  final  vowel  is  suppressed  in  words  at  the 
end  of  a  sentence,  or  in  words  which  are  imme- 
diately followed  hj  z  or  s  impure, 

N.  B.  —  This  rule  is  not  observed  in  poetry. 

4.  Words  ending  in  a,  i,  or  in  an  accented  vowel, 
are  never  retrenched,  except 

Suora,  a  title  for  nuns ;  as,  Suor  Mai^ia. 

Oraj  now ;  with  its  compounds ;  as,  ancoVj  tahr. 

Fuori,  out. 

Giovanni,  John,  when  followed  by  another  proper 
name  ;  as,  Giovan  BcUtista. 

leri,  yesterday,  when  joined  to  sera  or  notte;  as, 
ier  notte,  ier  sera. 


MAXIMS  AND  FIGURES  OF  SPEECH. 

Tenere  uno  sulla  corda.  ")  m    ,  .     .      i      i 

.n    1  XI  r  1^0  keep  one  on  tenter-nooks. 

10  keep  one  on  the  rope.  }  '■ 

Essere  una  cosa  da  dJzzina.         |  rj.^  ^^  something  very  common. 
To  be  a  thing  by  thfe  dozen.       J 

Far  hottega  di  ogni  cosa.  \  To  keep  an  eye  to  the  main 

To  make  shop  of  everything.      J      chance 
Comprarsi  hrighe  a  denari  con- 
tanti.  I  To  make  one's  own  troubles. 


To  buy  troubles  with  cash. 

Farla  pagare  con  usura.  ^  To  make  one  pay  dearly  for  an 

To  make  pay  with  usury.  j      injury. 

Eompere  i  fill  di  una  trama,  \ 

To  break  the  thread  of  a  plot.  }  To  nip  the  evil  in  the  bud. 

Pagare  di  cattiva  moneta,  \ 

To  pay  in  bad  money.  j  ^o  be  ungrateful. 


EXAMPLES   AND  EXERCISE.  151 

EX.LMPLES. 

How  long  will  it  take  you  to  copy  Q,uanto  tempo  vi  bisognera  per 

that  letter  ?  copiare  quella  lettera  ? 

I  wish  I  could  write  it  in  twenty-  lo  vorrei  poterla  scrivere  in  ven- 

one  minutes.  tun  minuto. 

I  told  him  so,  but  it  is  of  no  use.  lo  glielo  ho  dettOy  ma  invano. 

To  persist  in  doing  a  thing.  Persistere  a  fare  una  cosa. 


EXERCISE  XLV. 
A  man  can  desire  no  mortal  thing  more  than  to  behold  hia 
enemy  prostrated  before  him,  and  reduced  to  such  a  condition 
that  he  has  him  at  his  mercy ;  but  the  greater  the  offence,  the 
more  the  injured  one  is  bound  to  render  himself  glorious  by  par- 
doning it ;  this  is  one  of  the  peculiar  qualities  of  a  generous 
and  exalted  spirit.  How  long  does  it  take  you  to  make  an  arti- 
ficial flower  like  that  ?  I  can  make  them  with  little  trouble, 
1  wish  I  could  have  some  of  them.  How  many?  Only  a  few. 
Very  well ;  I  will  send  them  to  your  house  towards  evening. 
You  are  very  kind.  How  do  you  like  the  flowers  my  friend's 
sister  wears  on  her  bonnet  ?  I  do  not  like  them  at  all ;  they 
are  very  ugly  flowers.  Why  does  your  brother  keep  that  man 
on  tenter-hooks  ?: — is  it  not  better  to  say  that  he  cannot  do  any- 
thing for  him  ?  He  has  tried  several  times  to  get  rid  of  him,  but 
it  is  of  no  use  ;  he  persists  in  thinking  that  my  brother  has  the 
power  to  help  him.  Does  your  friend  know  of  the  death  of  her 
daughter  ?  No,  she  does  not  know  of  it  yet ;  we  have  only  men- 
tioned that  she  was  very  ill,  and  that  possibly  she  might  not 
recover,  but  I  have  not  had  the  courage  to  tell  her  of  the  death 
of  her  only  daughter  ;  I  have  endeavored  to  prepare  her  first 
saying,  that  should  misfortune  come,  she  must  submit  to  Provi- 
dence and  be  resigned.  I  would  rather  speak  plainly  than  tor- 
ture her  thus  with  anxiety.  I  am  going  to  do  so  to-night ;  but 
fthe  is  very  feeble,  and  the  doctor  fears  that  such  overwhelming 
intelligence  might  prove  fatal  to  her.  Who  is  that  man  ?  I  do 
not  know  ;  but  I  think  that  my  brother  knows  him  well.  Do 
you  think  that  he  has  an  ugly  look  ?  Yes,  indeed.  He  has  not 
only  an  ugly  look,  but  he  is  an  exceedingly  disagreeable  person. 
You  are  too  severe  upon  him. 


1.52  DIMINUTION   OF    WORDS. 


LESSON    XLVII. 


DIMINUTION  OF  WORDS,  continued. 

326.  The  final  e,  forming  a  syllable  with  the  pre* 
ceding  consonant  I,  n,  and  r,  is  often  omitted ;  as, 

Una  ial  cosa Such  a  thing. 

Pan  nero Dark  bread. 

Cuor  fedele Faithful  heart. 

N.  B.  —  The  e  is  not  omitted  if  the  consonants  Z,  n,  and  r,  are  pre- 
ceded by  any  other  consonant  in  the  same  syllable. 

327.  When  the  final  e  is  preceded  by  a  double  r, 
instead  of  the  e  the  final  syllable  re  is  omitted  ;  as, 

Condur,  indur,  and  not  condurry  indurr. 

328.  When  two  infinitives  follow  each  other,  the 
first  infinitive  is  always  used  without  the  e ;  as. 

Far  chiamare.     Poter  scrivere. 

329.  The  final  o  is  omitted  when  preceded  by  the 
consonant  I,  m,  n,  and  r,  in  one  syllable  ;  as. 

Pel  maculato.     Uom  da  nulla 
Man  bianca.      Lor  Siynore. 

330.  When  the  o  is  preceded  by  a  double  ?,  as 
cappello,  cavallo,fa7iciullo,  followed  by  a  word  com- 
mencing with  a  consonant,  except  z,  or  s  impure, 
instead  of  the  o  the  syllable  lo  is  omitted ;  as, 

Cappel,  cavalyfanciul,  not  CappelU  cavally  fanciull. 

Fanciul  vezzoso Charming  youth. 

Caval  feroce Wild  horse. 

N.  B.  —  It  has  been  mentioned  in  the  preceding  lessons  that  bello, 
grandty  santo,frate,  drop  the  last  syllable,  or  change  the  last  vowel 
into  an  apostrophe,  acccording  to  the  beginning  of  the  word  following 
them 


MAXIMS    AND    FIGURES    OF   SPEECH.  153 

331.  Though  the  laws  of  euphony  are  the  chief 
elements  of  the  existence  of  Italian,  the  above  rules 
have  been  generally  established  by  the  best  writers 
of  the  language,  to  add  to  it  more  elegance,  beauty, 
and  harmony. 

332.  It  is  also  for  the  sake  of  euphony  that  an  i 
is  prefixed  to  words  commencing  with  s  impure, 
when  the  preceding  word  ends  in  n  or  r ;  as,  per 
iscIierzOj  con  istrade;  and  that  a  c^  is  added  to  the 
preposition  a,  and  to  the  conjunction  e,  when  these 
letters  are  immediately  followed  by  a  word  com- 
mencing with  a  vowel ;  as,  nemici,  ed  amid  corsero 
ad  incontrarlo. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 

Partare  acqua  al  mare.  )  ,         i.t 

„    ,    .  i.     i.    0.1      *  r  To  carry  coals  to  Nefwcastle. 

To  bring  water  to  the  sea.  J  "^ 

Mettere  il  capitale  a  frutto.         \  ^        ,  ,  .    , 

„         ^  ,,  -i^  1  J.    />    -i.  f  lo  put  money  at  interest. 

To  put  the  capital  to  iruit.        )        ^  •' 

11  male  mette  profonde  radici.     '\  The  evil   is  gaining  a   strong 

The  evil  strikes  deep  roots.        J     hold. 

Zappare   alV  acqua  e  seminars' 

al  vento. 

To  sow  to  the  wind  and  to  dig 


.  To  search  for  a  needle  in  a  hay- 
mow. 


|-  To  be  weak-minded. 


in  the  water. 
Non  aver  sale  in  zucca. 
Not  to  have  salt  in  the  squash. 
Salvare  la  capra  e  i  cavolL  I  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^,^  ^^^^  ^^^  ^^  ^^ 

To  save  both  the  goat  and  the  >      ., 

cabbage.  J 

Inarcare  le  ciglia.  ) 

To  arch  the  eyebrows.  I  "^^  ^  dumb-founded. 


164  EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE. 


EXA^IPLES. 


To  display  one's  own  ability.  Far  mostra  del  suo  talento, 

I  am  endeavoring  to  write  well.  Mi  sto  provando  di  scriver  bene 

He  is  going  away.  Effli  sen  (se  ne)  va  via. 

How  many  times  did  I  write  to  Quanie  volte  non  gli  scrissiy  ma 

him,  but  in  vain  !  invano ! 


EXERCISE  XLVI. 

A  preacher  was  once  displaying  all  his  abilities  in  a  panegyric 
in  praise  of  St.  George  ;  among  the  various  repetitions  which 
he  introduced,  with  great  pomposity  he  said,  "  Where  shall  I 
place  my  saint?  —  Among  the  angels  and  the  archangels?  No. 
Shall  I  place  him  among  the  patriarchs,  among  the  prophets  ? 
No.  Among  the  apostles,  the  evangelists,  or  the  doctors  of  the 
church  ?  No,  no.  Where  shall  I  plaCe  him,  then  ?  ".  .  .  And  he 
was  endeavoring  to  be  more  impressive  by  a  moment's  silence, 
when  one  of  the  auditors,  rising  from  his  seat,  exclaimed,  "  My 
father,  if  you  are  not  able  to  find  a  place  for  your  saint,  you  can 
give  him  my  seat,  because  I  am  going  away."  I  am  told  that 
your  friend  has  squandered  all  his  property  ;  can  I  believe  it  ? 
Yes,  it  is  so.  How  many  times  did  I  tell  him  not  to  be  so  open- 
handed,  and  to  put  his  money  at  interest !  But  he  did  not  listen 
to  me  :  on  the  contrary,  having  plenty  of  gold,  and  nothing  to 
do,  he  began  to  make  a  great  display  of  horses  and  carriages  ; 
his  house  was  always  crowded  with  men  of  little  merit,  and  with 
flatterers,  who  professed  to  be  his  friends  and  admirers  ;  and  now 
that  his  money  is  all  gone,  his  friends  have  disappeared,  and  he 
is  left  alone  and  uncared  for.  Is  he  discouraged  ?  Yes,  he  ia 
(discouraged),  and  regrets  that  he  did  not  listen  to  my  words. 
He  ought  to  be  resigned.  That  is  what  he  cannot  do.  It  is  hard 
in  misfortune  to  remember  happy  days,  and  be  resigned  ;  he  now 
repents  of  the  many  times,  that,  to  show  that  he  had  the  means 
of  doing  what  he  liked,  he  ran  great  risks,  and  now  finds  that  he 
has  been  left  alone,  no  one  caring  for  him  at  all.  My  friend, 
this  proves  that  when  a  man  refuses  to  listen  to  the  advice  of 
his  friends  he  cannot  help  being  ruined  ;  every  one  must  profit 
by  his  own  experience.  Very  true  ;  but  still  it  is  not  pleasant 
fco  see  a  friend  in  sorrow  and  misery 


TRANSPOSITION   OF   \V0RDi5.  155 


LESSON    XLVIII. 


TRANSPOSITION  OF  WORDS. 

333.  Though  the  Italian  language  draws  ita 
origin  from  the  Latin,  it  differs  considerably  in 
its  construction.  The  Latins  were  the  rulers  of 
the  world,  and  they  aimed  at  great  effects,  even 
in  the  use  of  their  language.  Their  style  was  ma- 
jestic, but  it  required  a  steady  and  close  attention. 
There  was  no  established  order  in  the  use  of  words, 
but  the  idea  of  the  phrase  was  strengthened  by  a 
transposition  and  antithesis  of  expression,  which 
excited  more  interest  in  the  hearer  than  a  formal  or 
prosaic  statement. 

334.  The  Italians  have  followed  the  logical  con- 
struction of  arranging  words  according  to  their 
respective  value  and  order  of  relation ;  i.  e.,  the 
subject  before  the  verb,  the  object  after  it,  and  the 
adjective  or  adverb  after  the  noun  or  verb  they 
modify. 

335.  This  grammatical  construction  has  generally 
been  adopted  in  the  familiar  and  descriptive  style. 
In  the  former,  any  transposition  of  words  is  consid- 
ered an  affectation ;  in  the  latter,  those  transposi- 
tions are  only  permitted  which  do  not  obscure  the 
clearness  of  the  sentence. 

336.  Yet  the  Italians,  because  of  the  flexibility 
of  their  language,  admit  of  the   transposition  of 


156  TRANSPOSITION   OF   WORDS. 

words  in  the  historical,  poetical,  and  oratorial  style, 
whenever  its  object  is  to  present  the  principal  idea 
of  a  sentence  in  the  highest  degree  of  clearness  to 
the  mind,  and  harmony  to  the  ear. 

337.  The  following  sentences  are  here  given, 
in  order  that  the  pupil  may  replace  the  words  in 
their  logical  arrangement,  and  compare  the  harmony 
and  vigor  of  both  forms  of  construction  : 

Perb  dell'  intenzione  che  avea  si  guardo  bene  di  fare  il  mini- 
mo  cenno. 

Nella  magnificenza  degli  edifizii,  la  Italia  supera  ogni  naziono. 

E  meglio  passar  sotto  silenzio  quello  che  senza  dolore  ricordar 
non  si  puo. 

Chi  ti  fa  carezze  piii  che  non  suole,  o  tradire,  o  ingannare  ti 
vuole. 

Ogni  mal  fresco  agevolmente  si  sana. 

Chi  fa  male  e  spera  bene,  se  stesso  inganna. 

La  fortuna  aiuta  i  pazzi  sempre,  ei  birbanti  assi  volte. 

Sanno  rarissime  volte  gli  uomini  essere  o  al  tutto  tristi  o  al 
tutto  buoni. 

In  cose  disoneste  obbligati  non  siamo  ad  ubbidire  a  nessuno. 

Dopo  la  burrasca  e  sempre  piii  lucido  il  sole. 

Pare  che  il  sole,  e  la  donna  deviso  si  abbiano  I'impero  del 
mondo  ;  I'uno  ci  da  i  giorni,  Taltra  li  abbellisce. 


SYNONYMS. 
STEP  OF  A  STAIRCASE,  GRADINO,  SCALING. 

Gradino  is  the  spacious  and  commodious  step  of  a  public 
ouilding. 

Scalino  is  the  step  of  a  staircase  in  a  private  dwelling. 

When  we  go  to  church  or  to  the  state-house,  we  ascend 
gradini. 

When  we  go  to  our  cellar  or  to  the  top  of  the  house,  we  gen- 
erally ascend  and  descend  scalini. 


EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE.  157 

EXAMPLES. 

A  book  has  been  stolen  from  me.  Mi  e  stato  rubato  un  libro. 

I  make  a  great  deal  of  money.  lo  guadagno  molto  denaro. 

He  cannot  succeed  in  injuring  me.  JVb/i  pub  riuscire  a  farmi  male. 

He  promises  much,  but,  after  all,  Eglipromette  molto,  ma,  alfar  dei 

he  does  not  keeps  his  word.  conti,  noii  mantiene  la  parola. 


EXERCISE  XLVII. 
A  certain  merchant,  from  whom  a  large  sum  of  money  had 
been  stolen,  suspecting  that  the  thief  was  one  of  his  servants, 
called  them  all  to  his  room,  and  said  that  the  angel  Gabriel,  to 
whom  he  was  particularly  devoted,  appeared  to  him  in  the  night 
and  told  him  that  the  man  who  had  stolen  the  money  was  not 
far  from  him,  and  that  his  patron  saint  would  show  the  thief 
in  the  morning,  if  he  would  kneel  and  pray ;  consequently  he 
knelt,  and  made  all  his  servants  kneel.  After  a  few  minutes  of 
silent  prayer,  he  exclaimed,  "  I  thank  thee,  my  guardian  angel, 
for  having  revealed  to  me  that  the  thief  can  be  detected  by  a 
white  spot  he  has  on  his  nose."  Then  rising,  and  asking  the 
others  to  rise  that  he  might  look  them  in  the  face,  he  saw  that 
one  of  the  servants,  instead  of  exposing  himself  to  his  examina- 
tion, was  trying  to  conceal  his  face  by  looking  at  some  pictures. 
"  Behold  the  thief,"  said  the  master  ;  "  I  can  see  very  plainly 
the  white  spot."  The  servant,  being  afraid,  confessed  all,  and 
the  merchant  recovered  all  his  property,  making  the  servant  pay 
dearly  for  it.  How  does  your  friend  succeed  in  his  undertaking  ? 
E  scarcely  know  ;  he  makes  a  great  deal  of  money  ;  but  he  has 
been  ungrateful  to  me.  What  has  he  done  ?  Well,  he  has  been 
endeavoring  to  enlarge  his  business  by  saying  that  I  have  too 
much  to  do,  and  that  I  cannot  attend  to  all  the  commissions  that 
are  given  me  ;  he  would  probably  have  succeeded  in  injuring  me, 
if  a  good  friend  of  mine  had  not  made  me  aAvare  of  his  secret 
manoeuvring.  I  am  very  sorry  ;  but  can  he  not  injure  you  now  ? 
No,  he  cannot.  I  have  already  nipped  the  evil  in  the  bud.  Who 
is  that  lady  on  your  right  ?  I  do  not  know  her  personally  ;  but 
I  am  told  that  she  is  proud,  and  prodigal  of  her  promises,  but, 
after  all,  she  never  accomplishes  what  she  says. 


158  DERIVATION   OF  WORDS. 


LESSON    XLIX, 


DEEIYATION    OF    WORDS. 

338.  The  effect  of  civilization,  and  the  need  of 
representing  ideas  by  words  in  common  use  in 
a  nation,  have,  to  a  great  extent,  contributed  to 
the  increase  of  the  vocabulary  of  the  various  idi- 
oms. When  a  word  borrowed  from  one  language 
is  adopted  into  another,  it  generally  preserves  ita 
radical  or  elementary  letters,  but  suffers  a  change 
in  its  primitive  termination.  This  change  varies  in 
nations  according  to  the  nature  and  tendency  of 
their  language  j  and,  if  no  remarkable  alteration 
takes  place  in  the  original  termination,  the  word 
becomes  naturalized,  and  is  christened  in  the  new 
language  with  a  mark  of  nationality  by  the  change 
of  its  pronunciation.  This  change  of  termination 
or  pronunciation  is  peculiar  to  each  language. 
The  English,  with  a  calculating  and  contemplative 
mind,  and  in  their  origin  influenced  by  the  Druidic 
religion,  express  themselves  in  a  language  full  of 
monosyllables  and  short  words,  of  sharp  and  inartic- 
ulate sounds,  and  exhibit  their  national  type  by  com- 
pressing and  condensing  the  newly-adopted  words. 
The  Italians,  with  a  more  flowing  and  graceful  ele- 
gance, give  to  the  new  words,  as  a  characteristic 
of  their  language,  a  polj^syllabic  nature,  and  an  easy 
and  musical  articulation. 

S39.  This  difference  of  the  two  languages,  though 


MAXIMS  AND  J^^IGURES  OF  SPEECH.      159 

obvious  in  itself,  is  made  more  sensible  by  simply 
examining  those  infinitives  and  adverbs  which, 
retaining  the  same  radical  letters,  assume  a  charac- 
teristic termination.  For  example  :  Comparing  the 
infinitives  to  Jln-ish,  to  jper-mitj  to  sack,  with  the  cor 
responding  Italian  Ji-ni-re,  per-met-te-re,  sac-cheg-gia- 
7'e,  it  will  be  easily  perceived  that  infinitives  in 
Italian  have  one,  two,  or  three  syllables  more  than 
those  in  English.  Likewise,  comparing  the  adverbs 
brie/-l2/,  ju-di-cious-ly,  with  the  corresponding  Italian, 
hre-ve-men-te,  giu-di-zi-o-sa-men-te,  it  will  be  seen 
that  the  termination  li/  of  the  adverbs,  used  in 
English  without  a  marked  accent,  and  only  to  pre- 
sent the  word  in  an  adverbial  form,  is  in  Italian 
expressed  by  mente,  a  termination  of  two  syllables, 
with  an  accent  on  the  first,  which,  as  illustrated 
in  the  above  examples,  represents  a  state  of  mind 
(mente)  disposed  to  brevity  and  judiciousness. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 

Tenere  uno  in  croce.  ")  rr,  .  ,  . 

n,    ,  ,,  y  lo  torture  one  with  anxiety. 

To  keep  one  on  the  cross.  j  "^ 

Battersila  guancia.  '\ 

To  smite  one's  own  cheek.         J  ^o  repent  of  anything. 

Mordersi  la  mano,  le  dita.  "j 

To  bite  one's  own  hand  or  fin-  \  To  be  in  despair. 

gers.  J 

Allargare  la  mano.  ) 

To  open  the  hand.  I  ^"  ^^  open-handed. 

j-  To  work  underhand. 


Lavorare  sotV  acqua 
To  work  under  water. 
Dare  molte  fronde  e  paca  uva. 
To  give  many  leaves  and  few 
grapes. 


Great  cry  and  little  wool. 


160  EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE. 

EXAMPLES. 

Egli  conjido   un  segreto   a  mio  He  intrusted  my  brother  with  a 

fratello.  secret. 

H  vostro  temperino  non  mi  place.  I  do  not  like  your  pen-knife. 

Egli  scrivera  una  buona  lettera  He  is  going  to  -write  a  good  letter 

domani.  to-morrow. 


EXERCISE  XLVIII. 
It  has  been  observed,  that  when  a  nation  has  the  opportunity 
of  colonizing  a  new  place,  it  gives  to  it  the  impress  of  its  promi- 
nent national  tendencies  :  the  Spaniards  build  a  convent,  the 
Italians  a  church,  the  Dutch  an  exchange,  the  English  a  for- 
tress, and  the  French  a  theatre  or  a  dancing-hall.  Cato  re- 
gretted that  he  had  made  three  great  mistakes  in  the  course 
of  his  life  :  the  first  was,  to  have  intrusted  his  wife  with  a 
secret;  the  second,  that  he  had  ridden  when  he  might  have 
travelled  on  foot ;  and  the  third,  that  he  had  spent  one  day  in 
idleness.  What  do  you  think  of  last  night's  lecture?  Not 
much  ;  the  orator  was  eloquent,  but  not  instructive.  It  is  often 
the  case  that  to  lectures  may  be  applied  the  proverb,  "  Great 
cry  and  little  wool."  How  did  my  teacher  like  my  French  com- 
position ?  He  did  not  like  it  much  ;  he  said  that  you  had 
written  better  ones,  and  he  hopes  that  the  composition  you  are 
going  to  write  to-morrow  will  be  better  than  any  of  the  others. 
Lord  Bacon  says  that  in  counsels  it  is  good  to  see  dangers,  but 
in  execution  it  is  better  not  to  see  them  at  all,  except  they  be  very 
great.  "Walpole  affirms  that  nations  are  most  commonly  saved 
by  their  worst  men,  because  the  virtuous  are  too  scrupulous  to 
attempt  to  arouse  the  people  against  their  tyrants.  The  voice 
of  the  people  is  likened  to  the  voice  of  God ;  for  it  has  been 
observed  that  an  universal  opinion  has  an  extraordinary  power 
in  its  prognostications,  so  that  it  seems  to  have  a  secret  vir- 
tue of  foretelling  its  own  happiness  or  misfortune.  Beware  of 
everything  which  may  do  harm,  and  can  do  you  no  good ;  con- 
sequently, in  the  presence  or  absence  of  another,  never  say  with- 
out necessity  anything  which  may  displease  him.  Remember, 
at  the  same  time,  that  it  is  foolish  to  make  enemies  without  a 
purpose,  and  that  civility  costs  nothing  and  buys  everything. 


DERIVATION  OP  WORDS. 


IGl 


LESSON   L. 


DERIVATION  OF  WORDS,  continued. 

340.  Words  which  originate  from  other  words  of 
the  same  language  are  mainly  verbs  derived  from 
nouns  ;  as,  cantare  from  canto,  or  from  an  adjective ; 
illustrare  from  illustre,  or  from  a  preposition ;  aj> 
2)ressare  from  presso. 

341.  Sometimes  nouns  and  adjectives  are  derived 
from  verbs ;  as,  adoraziojie,  adorabile,  from  adorare, 

342.  By  prefixing  a  letter  or  a  preposition  to  the 
primitive  word,  many  of  the  Italian  words  assume  a 
dijQferent  meaning.  Almost  all  these  prefixed  letters 
and  prepositions  can  be  illustrated  in  connection 
with  the  verb  mettere,  from  which  alone  twenty-four 
verbs  have  been  formed  ;  as. 


Am-mettere. 

Com-mettere. 

Com-pro-meitere. 

Di-metlere. 

Bis-mettere. 

E-mettere. 


Fram-mettere. 

Im-pro-mettcre. 

Infra-mettere. 

Inter -mettere. 

Intro-mettere. 

0-mettere. 


Per-mettere. 

Preter-mettere. 

Pro-mettere. 

Ri' com-mettere. 

Ri-mettere. 

Rim-pro-mettere. 


Ri-som-mettere. 

S-mettere. 

Som-mettere. 

Soito-meitere. 

Spro-mettere. 

Tras-meitere. 


340.   It  is  to  be  observed  that  dis  or  s  prefixed  to 
a  verb  gives  to  it  an  opposite  meaning  j  as, 

Pregiare  ...  To  appreciate.     JDis-pregiare  .    .    To  undervalue. 


Cucire  ....  To  sew.  S-cucire  ....    To  unsew. 

Some  of  the  verbs  have  dis  or  s  in  their  primitive  forma- 


N.  B 
tions  ;  as, 

Scrivere. 


Spargere.        Distinguere.         Discorrere, 


162  MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH, 

344.  Hi  prefixed  to  a  verb  expresses  the  repeti- 
tion of  the  same  action,  and  corresponds  to  the 
English  again;  as, 

Leggere To  read.        Hileggere  ,   .    To  read  again. 

Dire To  say.         Ridire  ...    To  say  again. 

342.  Hi  prefixed  to  a  verb  has,  sometimes,  the 
meaning  of  reaction,  opposition  ;  as, 

Mandare     .    .    To  send.         Rimandare  .    To  send  back. 

Dire     ....    To  say.  Ridire  ...    To  oppose  with  words. 

N.  B.  — Ri  is  often  the  radical  of  primitive  words  ;  as, 
Rimare,  to  rhyme.     Rimanere,  to  remain. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGUKES  OF  SPEECH. 

Slare  colle  mani  in  mano. 

To  remain  with  hand  in  hand. 

TJn  fiore  non  fa  primavera.   .       ,  „  „        -,  ,        , 

^       „  ,  ,         ,         I  One  swallow  does  not  make  a 

One  flower  does  not  make  a 


I    j-  To  stand  idle. 


summer, 
spring. 

Tener  V  anima  coi  denti.  1  t    h  f   hi    1   Id    f  If 

To  hold  the  soul  by  the  teeth,    i 

Gonfiare  legate^  }  To  be  puffed  up. 

To  inflate  the  cheeks.  )  ^  ^ 

Stringersi  nelle  spalle.  \  To    decline  compliance    by   a 

To  shrug  the  shoulders.  )      shrug  of  the  shoulders. 

Abhassare  le  spalle.  "I  To  submit  patiently  to  what 

To  drop  the  shoulders.  X     cannot  be  helped. 

Darsi  della  scare  sul  piede. 

To  cut  one's  own  foot  with  the 

axe. 
Metier  gli  occhi  addosso  ad  uno. 
To  place  the  eyes  on  one. 
Far  tanto  di  cuore* 
To  make  so  big  a  heart. 


To  bite  one's  own  nose  off. 


j-  To  look  on  one  with  affection, 
j-  To  rejoice  greatly. 


*  In  this  expression  both  hands  are  stretched  forward  so  as  to  form  a  circle. 


EXAMPIES   AND   EXERCISE.  163 

EXAMPLES. 
I  am  told  that  he  is  here.  Mi  si  dice  che  egli  e  gut 

He  thinks  so  too.  Effli  pensa  anche  cost. 

Let  this  book  be  oflfered  to  him.     Che  gli  si  presenti  questo  libro. 
Go  and  see  him  to-morrow.  Andate  a  vederlo  domani. 


EXERCISE  XLLX. 
I  am  told  that  Mr.  B.  has  bought  a  little  cottage  at  the  sea- 
shore,  in  a  very  remote  place,  about  two  hundred  miles  from  the 
city,  and  that  he  is  determined  to  give  up  society  and  the  world. 
Can  I  believe  that  a  man  so  ambitious  as  he  is  could  ever  be 
happy  in  solitude  and  retirement  ?  I  am  told  so  ;  but  I  believe 
only  those  things  which  I  see  with  my  own  eyes.  It  is  diflBcult 
to  believe  that  a  man  who  has  always  had  an  eye  to  the  main 
chance  would,  all  at  once,  give  up  all  his  schemes  of  life.  I  am 
inclined  to  think  that  he  has  been  disappointed  in  some  of  his 
anticipations.  I  think  so  too ;  I  give  no  credit  to  those  who 
prate  of  loving  quiet,  and  of  giving  up  business  because  they  are 
weary  of  ambition  ;  for  they  almost  always  think  otherwise  in 
their  hearts ;  if  they  are  reduced  to  a  private  and  quiet  life,  it 
is  either  through  necessity  or  folly.  AVe  see  examples  of  this 
every  day.  Let  the  least  chance  of  greatness  be  offered  to  such 
men,  and  they  will  forsake  the  quiet  they  boast  about  so  loudly, 
and  rush  upon  it  as  furiously  as  fire  does  on  dry  wood.  In  a 
free  country  every  man  is  bound  to  show  his  devotion  and 
attachment  to  the  laws  he  has  adopted,  and  to  the  magistrates 
he  has  elected.  This  is  not  to  be  required  from  a  man  who  lives 
under  despotism.  Life  is  a  book  of  which  man  has  read  only 
one  page,  if  he  has  seen  only  his  native  country.  A  man  must 
have  the  good  sense  to  conform  himself  to  the  usages  of  the 
people  among  whom  he  lives.  In  a  republic  men  speak  much 
and  suffer  little ;  but  under  despotism  they  suffer  much  and  can 
speak  but  little.  If  you  have  nothing  to  do,  I  wish  you  would 
go  and  visit  our  neighbor,  because  he  is  in  trouble,  and  if  no 
one  lends  him  a  helping  hand,  he  will  undoubtedly  be  forced  to 
beg.  I  cannot  go  now ;  I  will  try  to  go  there  next  week,  if  I 
have  time.  I  am  afraid  that  if  you  go  there  next  week  you  will 
find  him  starved  to  death,  and  then,  with  all  your  generosity, 
you  would  be  of  no  use  to  him. 


164  FORMATION    OF   WORDS. 


LESSON   LI 


FORMATION    OF    WORDS. 

343.  It  has  been  observed,  from  the  preceding 
lessons,  that  Italian  words,  with  few  exceptions,  end 
in  a  vowel,  and  that  o  is  the  letter  characteristic  of 
the  masculine,  as  a  and  u  of  the  feminine,  and  i  of 
the  plural. 

344.  The  following  remarks  are  here  added,  for  the 
correctness  of  the  nse  of  some  of  the  terminations : 

1.  Abstract  nouns  are  principally  formed  by  add- 
ing to  the  adjective  the  termination  td  or  ezza ;  as, 

Povertcty  falsita,  felicita,  from  povero,  falso,  felice. 
Bianchezza,  dolcezza,  grandezza,  from  bianco,  dolce,  grande. 

2.  The  termination  ione  denotes  an  active  state, 
and  is  generally  added  to  words  derived  from  verbs  j 
it  corresponds  to  the  English  tion;  as, 

Spedizione,  nutrizioney  from  spedire^  nutrire. 

3.  The  termination  ento  denotes  a  passive  state, 
or  moral  affections ;  as, 

JVutrimentOt  armamento,  contento,  spavento. 

4.  The  termination  tore  expresses  the  cause;  as, 

CrealorCy  pittorcy  scrittore. 

5.  The  termination  tura  expresses  the  effect ;  as, 

Creaiuray  piituray  scritiura. 

6.  The  termination  ata  is  used  for  words  express- 
ing a  collective  number  of  persons,  or  a  contiriua 
tion  of  a  period  of  time  ;  as, 

Armaia,  borgata,  giornatay  noltata. 


MAXIMS  AND    FIGURES   OF  SPEECH.  1G5 

7.  It  is  also  used  to  express  a  hloiv,  or  a  thrust 
with;  as, 

Bastonatay  coltellata,  pedata. 

8.  If  the  collective  number  of  persons  is  homoge- 
neous, the  termination  eria  is  used ;  as, 

Fanteria,  artigleria,  cavalleria 

9.  This  termination  is  also  used  to  express  local- 
ity; as, 

Libreria,  osteriut  spezieria. 

10.  The  termination  abile  is  chiefly  used  to  form 
adjectives  derived  from  the  verbs  of  the  first  conju- 
gation; as, 

Cantabile,  amabiUy  from  cantare,  amare. 


MAXBIS  AND  FIGURES  OF  SPEECH. 

Dare  un  calcio  ai  heni  del  mondo.  1 
To  give  a  kick  to  the  good  of 


To    give  up  society  and    the 
world. 


I  To  beg. 


the  world. 

Tendere  la  mano  a  qualcuno.       )  m    i     j  i    i   •      ■,      \ 

To  put  forth  the  hand  to  one.    I  ^^  ^'^^  ^^"  ^  helpmg-hana. 

Tendere  la  mano. 

To  stretch  forth  the  hand. 

Toccare  una  cosa  con  mano. 

To  touch  a  thing  with  one's  j-  To  see  with  one's  own  eyes. 

own  hand.  J 

Far  la  zuppa  nel paniere.  )^         i     i    .  i        .., 

._,        ,     fil  •    xi    7     1    0.   r  lo  make  bricks  without  straw. 

To  make  the  soup  in  the  basket.  ) 

Rompere  le  nova  nel  paniere.        1  ^o  prevent  the  accomplishment 
To  Wk  the  eggs  in  one's  bas-  |     ^^  ^  ^^^.^^^  ^^^^j^  completed. 

J)ar  pane  a  chi  non  ha  piu  denti. 

To  give  bread  to  one  who  has  no  \  To  give  assistance  too  late, 
longer  teeth. 


166  EXAMPLES   AND   EXERCISE. 

EXAMPLES. 

You  will  find  this  room  comforta-  Vol  troverete  questa  stanza  con* 

ble,  as  well  as  the  other.  fortabile  come  V  altra. 

It  is  very  easily  done.  Pub  farsi  facilissimamente. 

You  should  do  this,  as  it  is  indis-  Voi  dovreste  farlo,  essejidovi  iu' 

pensable  and  useful  to  you.  dispensabile  ed  utile. 

The  difficulty  is  to  do  this  well.  La  difficolta  sta  nel  farlo  bene. 


EXERCISE  L. 
Men  are  free  under  a  republican  government ;  they  are  slaves 
under  the  rule  of  despotism  ;  yet  they  are  equal  under  despotism 
as  well  as  in  the  republic.  How  can  that  be?  It  is  very  easily 
explained ;  the  reason  is  this  :  Under  a  republic  men  are  every- 
thing, under  despotism  they  are  nothing.  Have  you  studied 
your  lesson  ?  Yes ;  I  know  it,  except  the  poetry.  Is  it  very 
difficult  to  commit  a  few  lines  of  French  poetry  to  memory  ?  It 
would  have  been  very  easy  for  me  to  do  so,  if  I  were  inclined  to 
repeat  things  like  a  parrot ;  I  do  not  know  why  it  is  desirable  to 
know  things  by  heart.  The  teacher  does  not  say  that  it  is  indis- 
pensable to  know  a  piece  of  poetry  by  heart,  but  he  thinks  that 
those  who  have  a  good  memory  should  exercise  it,  as  it  is  profit- 
able and  useful  to  them  ;  and,  beside,  he  does  not  like  to  have 
scholars  in  his  school  who  cannot  recite  or  declaim  without  look- 
ing at  the  book,  which  he  thinks  (to  be)  a  sign  of  stupidity.  But, 
suppose  that  they  are  stupid,  will  they  become  wise  in  commit- 
ting to  memory  half  a  page  of  Virgil  or  Milton?  No,  they  will 
not  become  wise,  but  this  is  a  sure  indication  of  their  intel- 
lectual capacity.  Allow  me  to  tell  you  that  I  am  not  of  your 
opinion,  because  I  know  by  experience  that  many  men  are  intel- 
ligent and  have  a  great  deal  of  sense,  and  yet  they  could  not  com- 
mit to  memory  two  lines  from  Shakspeare,  were  they  to  try  ten 
years.  Is  it  not  true  that  every  man  sees  the  objects  with  the 
color  of  the  spectacles  which  he  wears  ?  Yes,  it  is  true ;  and  so 
every  man  should  endeavor  to  wear  a  pair  of  good,  clear,  trans- 
parent spectacles.  The  difficulty  is  to  know  where  to  buy  them. 
A  man  has  no  greater  enemy  than  himself,  because  all  the  evil 
and  excess  of  trou])le  he  experiences  proceed  from  nothing  but 
his  own  short-sightedness. 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH.  167 


LESSON    LII. 


j-  To  be  thick-headed. 


^      MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 

Masticare  le  parole.  ■) 

To  masticate  the  words.  J  ^o  think  before  you  speak. 

Cojioscere  il  pane  dai  sassi,  )  rr,    i  ,       ,       , 

mi  1,      J  r  i.  c  ^^  know  what 's  what. 

To  know  bread  from  a  stone.     ) 

Avere  il  cervello  nelle  calcagna.   \rn    -, 

To  have  the  brain  in  the  heels.  J  ^  ^" 

Mettere  cervello.  ")  m    i 

,p        ,  ,     .  >-  To  become  wise. 

lo  put  brain.  ) 

Aver  la  testa  dura. 
To  have  a  hard  head. 

Andar  colla  testa  nel  sacco .  ")„         ^   '  i.  <.!•      vr^i 

To  go  with  the  head  in  the  bag.  /  J        &  7* 

Sapere  una  cosa  a  mente.  ")  m    i  ,-i  .      •,     •, 

m    ,  XV  •      T.       .J  r  J-O  know  a  thing  by  heart. 

To  know  a  thing  by  mind.         )  *^    *' 

Andare  afronte  scoperta. 
To  go  with  one's  brow  uncov- 
ered. 
Far  fronte  a  qualcuno.  *» 

To  make  front  to  one.  ]"  ^o  oppose  any  one. 

Lavorare  ad  occhi  chiusi.  -»  _  ,,,.-,, 

ny  1      -xu        1  1    J.     r  To  work  Mindly, 

lo  work  with  one  s  eyes  shut,    j  •' 

Guardare  colla  coda  deW  occhio.  ^ 

To  look  with  the  tail  of  the  eye.  /  ^^  ^^^*  «^^^^P'«  ^y^«- 

E  mcglio  ogrji  Vuovo  che  domani ' 

la  gallina. 
Better  an  egg  to-day  than  the 

chicken  to-morrow. 
Toccar  sempre  lo  stesso  tasto. 
Xo  play  always  upon  the  same  j-  To  harp  on  the  same  string 

note. 


To  have  nothing  to  be  ashamed 
of. 


A  bird  in  the  hand   is  worth 
two  in  the  bush. 


168  SYNONYMS, 

SYNONYMS. 

SERVANT,  SERVJTORE,  SERVO. 

Servitore  is  the  man  who  is  actually,  and  of  his  own  will,  in 

the  service  of  another  man . 
Servo  is  the  man  in  bondage. 

In  a  despotic  government  all  men  are  servi,  but  many  of  the 
servi  have  servitori. 

In  the  United  States  of  America,  we  find  in  the  North  only 
servitori;  in  the  South,  servitori  and  servi. 

At  the  end  of  a  letter  we  would  write.  Your  servant,  vostro 
servo,  as  a  mere  matter  of  etiquette ;  but  in  saying  vostro  servi- 
tore we  should  express  more  devotion  and  a  servile  attachment. 


DEVOTION,  DEVOZIONE,  DIVOZIONE. 

Devozione  is  the  state  of  being  dedicated  to  a  particular 
purpose. 

Divozione  is  the  yielding  of  the  heart  and  affection,  with  rev- 
erence and  piety,  to  the  Supreme  Being. 

We  show  devozione  when  we  sacrifice  our  happiness  for  the 
welfare  of  our  fellow-man. 

We  show  divozione  when  we  perform  all  the  duties  and 
injunctions  of  our  religion. 

We  say  that  a  man  is  divoto  di  Dio,  and  devoto  alia  patria. 


EXAMPLES. 

I  do  not  know  the  manner  in  lo   non  so  come   qucsto  libra  d 

which  this  book  is  printed.  siampato. 

My  friend  is  permitted  to  go  out  Sipermelte  al  mio  arnica  di  uscire 

•whenever  he  likes  quanda  vuole. 

Ihey   part    but  they  will  meet  Si  separanoy  ma  si  uniranna  di 

again.  nuavo. 

If  you  permit  so  much  money  to  Se  vai  permeltete  che  gli  si  dia 

be  given  to  him,  I  do  not  know  tanio  denara,  io  von  so  che  cosa 

what  to  think  (about  it).  debba  pensarne. 


EXERCISE.  1G9 

EXERCISE  LI. 
Have  you  ever  heard  of  the  Count  of  Carmagnola?  No  ;  but 
I  should  like  to  hear  something  about  him.  Well,  he  was 
one  of  the  great  captains  who  flourished  at  the  time  of  the  Ital- 
ian republics.  Being  in  the  service  of  Venice,  whose  dominions 
he  had  largely  extended  through  his  bravery  and  military  skill, 
the  patricians,  jealous  of  his  popularity,  and  fearing  that  it 
might  prove  injurious  to  the  liberties  of  the  country,  condemned 
him  to  death.  Alessandro  Manzoni,  the  celebrated  novelist, 
generally  known  in  the  literary  world  by  his  historical  romance 
^'I  Promessi  Sposi,^^  has  written  a  tragedy  on  the  subject.  Will 
you  be  so  kind  as  to  make  me  acquainted  with  the  manner  in 
which  this  tragedy  is  conducted  ?  I  would  do  it  with  pleasure, 
but  I  prefer  to  make  you  translate  some  parts  of  the  tragedy, 
and  invite  you  to  read  the  original  by  yourself.  I  am  very 
much  obliged  to  you.  I  wish  to  begin  with  Manzoni,  because  ho 
is  a  writer  whose  main  object,  in  all  his  productions,  is  to  develop 
the  best  part  of  human  nature,  and  because  he  inspires  every 
one  with  pure  and  noble  sentiments  of  morality  and  religion. 
The  following  piece,  which  you  are  going  to  translate,  is  the  last 
scene  of  the  tragedy,  in  which  the  count,  a  few  moments  before 
his  execution,  is  permitted  to  see  his  wife  and  daughter,  and  part 
from  them  to  meet  again  in  a  better  world.  He  speaks  thus  : 
"0,  unhappy  ones !  Heaven  knows  that  these  last  moments 
are  terrible  to  me  only  for  your  sakes !  I  am  accustomed  to 
contemplate  death,  and  to  await  it  calmly.  Alas  !  for  you  only 
have  I  need  of  courage  now ;  and  you,  you  will  not  take  it  from 
me ;  is  it  not  so  ?  When  God  permits  misfortune  to  fall  on  the 
head  of  the  good  man,  He  gives  with  it  the  courage  to  bear  it 
patiently.  Let,  then,  your  courage  now  be  equal  to  our  misfor- 
tune. Even  this  last  embrace  is  a  gift  from  Heaven.  Let  us 
rejoice  for  these  last  moments,  which  are  sacred.  It  is  true  that 
the  patricians  have  done  us  great  wrong,  but  among  the  evils 
there  is  a  great  joy  —  the  joy  of  pardoning  the  offences. ' '  I  must 
stop  here,  because  I  know  that  you  have  many  other  things  to 
do,  and  I  do  not  like  to  fatigue  you  too  much  with  a  long 
exercise ;  I  will  continue  in  my  next  lesson.  I  am  much 
obliged  to  you. 


170 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 


LESSON    LIII 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGUEES   OF   SPEECH. 

I  To  keep  one  to  his  duty. 


Tenere  qudlcuno  in  tono. 

To  keep  one  in  tone. 

Volere  hallare  e  cantare. 

To  wish  to  dance  and  sing. 

Tal  sonata  tal  hallata. 

To  such  a  tune  such  a  dance. 

Non  aver  da  far  cantare  un  cieco. 


"l  To  try  to  row  one  way  and  look 
i      another. 

\To  such  a  question  such  an 
)      answer. 


Not  to  possess  enough  to  make  1  ^^*  *^  ^^^^  ^^«"g^  *^  ^^^  «^^* 
a  blind  man  sing.  J      for  one's  porridge. 

In  capo  di  dodici  mesi.  •) 

At  the  head  of  twelve  months.  |  ^*  *^^  ^^^  ^^  *^^1^«  "^«^*^«- 

Dare  il  capo  d^anno. 

To  give  the  head  of  the  year. 

Far  una  cosa  da  capo. 

To  make  a  thing  from  head. 

JEsser  come  pane  e  cacio. 

To  be  like  bread  and  cheese. 

Tenere  la  mestola. 

To  hold  the  pot-stick. 

Non  esser  pane  pei  denti  di  qual- 

cuno. 
Not  to  be  bread  for  one's  teeth. 
La  farina  del  diavolo  va  tutta  in 

crusca. 
The  flour  of  the  devil  all  goes 

to  bran. 
Cascare  il  cacio  sui  maccheroni. 
To  have  cheese  falling  on  the 

maccaroni. 


j-  To  wish  a  happy  new  year. 
I  To  begin  again. 
\  To  be  inseparable  friends. 
y  To  rule  the  roost. 

To  be  out  of  one's  reach. 
Ill-gotten  gains  bring  no  good 
To  be  unexpectedly  fortunate. 


SYNONYMS.  171 

SYNONYMS. 
LABOR,  FATICA,  TRAVAGLIO. 

Fatica  ih  the  effect  of  lavoro.  It  is  sometimes  used  in  the 
meaning  of  lavoro  and  opera,  to  express  the  difficulty  under  which 
we  labored  to  accomplish  the  lavoro  or  opera. 

"We  may  have  lavoro  without  fatica,  but  with  fatica  there  is 
always  associated  lavoro 

Travaglio  is  neither /a^ica,  nor  opera,  nor  lavoro,  but  only  a 
painful-sensation.  It  has  been  used  by  some  of  the  classics  for 
lavoro  or  fatica,  to  express  hard  and  exhausting  labor. 


PROUD,  iSUPERBO.    HAUGHTY,  ALTIERO. 

These  two  words  have  in  Italian  a  contrary  meaning  to  that 
which  they  convey  in  English. 

Altiero  comes  from  high,  elevated,  and  is  applied  to  a  man  who 
scorns  everything  mean  and  base. 

Superbo  is  applied  to  a  man  who  has  a  general  contempt  for 
every  person  or  thing. 

A  man  superbo  considers  himself  superior  to  other  men,  and 
mingles  with  them  only  to  keep  them  in  submission. 

A  man  altiero  sets  himself  apart  from  the  vulgar,  and  asso- 
ciates only  with  those  who  can  sympathize  with  him. 

We  praise  a  woman  when  we  call  her  altiera. 

"VYe  blame  a  woman  when  we  call  her  superba. 

EXAMPLES. 

Assist  me,  and  let  me  not  be  de-  Assistetemi,   e   nan   mi   lasciate 

prived  of  your  valuable  help.  privo  del  vosfro  valevole  aiuto. 

I  see  him  writing  in  the  other  Lo  vedo  scrivere  ncW  ultra  piC" 

small  room.  cola  stanza. 

Trust  in  me  !  Abbi  fiducia  in  me! 

Are  you  working  for  me?  State  lavorando  per  me  ? 

How  could  I  have  slept,  had  I  Come  avrei  io  potuto  dormire  se 

not   prayed  before  my  guard-  nan   avessi    prima  pregato   il 

ian  angel  to  send  to  me  sweet  mio  angelo  cusiode  di  mandarmi 

Bleep  !  un  dolce  sonno  ! 


172  EXERCISE. 

EXERCISE  LII. 
Did  you  not  promise  me  to  continue  to-day  the  piece  which 
we  commenced  in  our  last  lesson ?  Yes,  I  did  (promise  it).  It 
is  so  interesting  and  so  affecting,  that  I  long  to  hear  the  end  of  it. 
I  am  ready  to  comply  with  your  wish,  but  I  have  forgotten  where 
we  left  off.  It  was  where  the  count  says,  "  The  joy  of  pardoning 
the  offences."  0,  yes,  I  remember  ;  let  us  continue.  "  If  death 
were  invented  by  man,  it  would  be  detestable  and  insupportable; 
but  death  comes  from  Heaven,  and  Heaven  accompanies  it  with 
Buch  consolation  as  no  man  can  give  or  take  —  the  comfort  that 
there  is  a  reward  for  the  just.  Listen  to  my  last  words ! 
I  know  (that)  they  fall  bitterly  on  your  hearts,  but  they  will 
perhaps  one  day  alleviate  your  grief.  You,  my  wife,  live,  and 
conquer  your  misfortune ;  live,  and  let  not  this  unhappy  orphan 
be  deprived  of  both  father  and  mother.  Fly  from  Venice,  and 
reconduct  your  daughter  to  your  relatives.  She  is  of  their 
own  blood,  and  you,  you  yourself  were  once  too  dear  to  them. 
If  the  love  which  they  bore  you  was  in  part  lessened  when  you 
became  the  wife  of  their  enemy,  it  will  be  revived,  now  that  you 
go  to  them  unhappy  and  without  him,  the  object  of  their  impla- 
cable hatred,  who  in  a  few  moments  will  cease  to  exist.  And 
thou,  my  daughter,  whose  spirit  came  so  many  times  to  cheer 
my  soul  in  the  roaring  of  battles,  why  art  thou  now  casting 
down  thy  head  like  a  tender  flower?  0,  the  threatening  storm 
is  raging,  thou  tremblest,  and  thy  heart  seems  ready  to  break 
with  the  intensity  of  anguish !  I  feel  thy  warm  tears  falling 
abundantly  over  me,  yet  I  cannot  wipe  them  away  !  Mathelda, 
my  child,  art  thou  appealing  to  me  for  help  ?  Alas  !  thy  father 
can  do  nothing  for  thee  ;  but  there  is  a  Father  for  the  forsaken  ; 
thou  knowest  it ;  trust  in  Him,  and  live.  He  has  certainly  des- 
tined thee  for  tranquil,  if  not  happy  days.  How  could  He  have 
poured  out  all  this  overwhelming  torrent  of  anguish  in  the 
morning  of  thy  life,  had  He  not  preserved  all  his  mercy  for  thy 
remaining  years?  Live  and  console  thy  mother.  0,  that  she 
might  one  day  make  thee  the  happy  wife  of  a  worthy  husband." 
Now  that  you  have  translated  these  few  lines  in  plain  prose,  I 
would  direct  you  to  read  the  same  piece  in  the  original.  You 
will  find  it  on  page  227. 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES    OF   SPEECH.  173 


LESSON    LIV. 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF   SPEECH. 

Rispettare  il  cane  -per  amore  del^ 

padrone.  1 

To  have  respect  to  the  dog  for  f  '  ^      °* 

the  love  of  the  master.  J 

Lavar  la  testa  aW  asino.  -^  To  try  to  make  a  silk  purse  oui 

To  wash  the  head  of  an  ass.       j      of  a  sow's  ear. 
Aver  grilli  in  capo.  "i 

To  have  grasshoppers   in   the  I  To  be  whimsical. 

head.  J 

Raddrizzare  le  gamhe  at  cani.      \ 

To  make  straight  the  dog's  legs,  j  ° 

Aauzzare  gli  occhi.  ^  r^,    i     i     , 

,p     1  XI  ^  io  look  sharply  at  anything. 

To  sharpen  the  eyes.  J  i  j  j        ei 

Plantar  gli  occhi  in  faccia  ad^ 

uno. 
To  plant  the  eyes  in  the  face  of 
•    one. 

Parlare  a  quattro  occhi.  % 

To  speak  at  four  eyes.  |  ^o  speak  tete-a-tete. 

Lontano  dagli  occhi  lontano  dal 

cuore. 
Far  from  the  eyes,  far  from  the     ^^*  of  sight,  out  of  mind. 

heart. 

Esser  V  occhio  dritto  di  uno.       ^ 

To  be  the  right  eye  of  one.         |  ^o  be  the  right-hand  man. 

Perder  rf'  occhio  qualcuno.  ^ 

To  lose  from  the  eye.  j  ^o  lose  sight  of  one. 

In  bocca  chiusa  non  entra  mosca.  \  Nothing    is  obtained  without 

No  fly  enters  a  shut  mouth.       j"     eflPort. 

Esser  colla  morte  in  bocca  ^  •\ 

To  be  with  death  in  the  mouth.  J  ^o  be  at  the  point  of  death. 


To  confront  boldly. 


171:  SYNONYMS. 

SYNONYMS. 
COMPOSITION,  COMPONIMENTO,  COMPOSIZIONE, 

Componimento  is  a  production  of  the  mind. 

Composizione  is  a  mixture  of  material  substances. 

llie  poet  makes  componimenti,  the  apothecary  composizioni. 

Using  these  words  figuratively,  we  say  composizione  when 
we  speak  of  a  production  already  finished,  and  componimento 
when  not  yet  done. 

We  made  a  good  composizione  yesterday,  and  we  hope  to 
make  a  better  componimento  to-morrow. 


GRATITUDE,  GRATITUDINE,  RICONOSCENZA. 

Graiitudine  is  a  noble  and  generous  sentiment  of  the  soul. 

Riconoscenza  is  a  duty. 

We  show  riconoscenza  for  a  benefit  by  repaying  it  doubly 
and  then  we  may  forget  it. 

We  show  our  gratitudine  by  a  constant  and  sincere  attach- 
ment to  the  person  who  has  benefited  us. 

The  man  who  feels  riconoscenza,  and  is  unable  to  indemnify 
his  benefactor,  is  always  in  a  state  of  torment. 

The  man  who  feels  gratitudine  cherishes  always  the  hope  of 
seeing  his  benefactor  happy  and  prosperous  ;  and,  if  unable  to 
contribute  to  it,  he  shows  his  sincere  wish  by  a  word,  a  sigh,  or 
a  tear. 


EXAMPLES. 

I  am  obliged  to  go  away.  Son  costretto  di  partire. 

I  am  very  sorry    to  hear   you  J\Ii  dispiace  inoltissimo  di  sentire 

complain  of  your  friend  so  bit-  che  voi  vi  dolete  del  vostro  amico 

terly.  si  amaramente. 

My  friend  is  to  be  found  at  the  Mio  fratcllo  pub   trovarsi   alia 

library.  libreria. 

You  have  my  best  wishes.  Ve  lo  desidero  di  cuore. 

Without  further  delay.  Senza  piu  dilungarmi. 

Ihey  came  forward  from  either  Essi  si  avanzarono  daW  una  « 

side.  dalV  altra  parle. 


EXERCISE.  175 


EXERCISE  LIII. 


Where  could  I  get  Manzoni's  works?  I  cannot  tell  you  ;  but, 
if  you  are  desirous  to  obtain  them,  I  am  sure  that  you  will  suc- 
ceed in  finding  them.  I  must  have  his  works,  at  any  rate,  even 
were  I  obliged  to  write  to  Europe.  I  am  very  glad  to  hear  you 
Bay  so  ;  and,  as  I  see  you  so  well  disposed  to  become  acquainted 
with  this  great  Italian  writer,  I  will  now  give  you  a  few  more 
specimens.  I  am  extremely  obliged  to  you.  I  will  try  to  make 
you  translate  into  prose  a  chorus  which  is  to  be  found  in  the 
same  tragedy  of  "//  Conte  di  Carmagnola.^^  It  is  too  long  for 
one  exercise,  but  .  .  .  Do  not  be  alarmed  because  I  say  that  it 
is  too  long ;  I  will  divide  it  into  three  exercises.  I  am  not 
alarmed,  sir ;  but  I  have  but  little  time  for  my  Italian  lesson, 
and  I  wish  to  make  my  translation  thoroughly,  and  without 
mistakes,  if  possible.  You  have  my  best  wishes,  and  I  begin 
without  further  delay  :  "  The  sound  of  a  trumpet  is  heard  from 
the  right.  Another  trumpet  answers  from  the  left.  The  fields 
trodden  by  armed  men  reecho  from  either  side.  Here  a  banner 
is  seen  advancing,  and  there  another  unfolded  banner.  Behold 
an  army,  proceeding  in  formidable  array  ;  and  behold  another, 
which  is  steadily  advancing  to  meet  the  foe.  Already  the 
ground  which  separated  them  has  disappeared  ;  they  are  face  to 
face,  they  fight  sword  in  hand,  they  thrust  them  in  each  other's 
breast ;  though  the  blood  flows  freely  from  the  already  gaping 
wounds,  yet  they  redouble  their  blows  with  unrelenting  fury. 
Who  are  these  warriors  ?  In  which  of  the  two  armies  are  to  be 
found  the  strangers  who  dared  to  come  to  subdue  this  beautiful 
land,  and  on  which  side  are  the  Italians  who  have  sworn  to  save 
their  country  or  die?  Alas  !  they  all  speak  the  same  language, 
the  common  lineage  is  imprinted  on  the  brow  of  each ;  they  were 
all  born  in  this  land,  which  they  are  now  staining  with  their 
bl3od  ;  this  beautiful  land,  which  nature  has  set  apart,  and  sur- 
rounded with  the  Alps  and  the  sea."  You  will  hear  the  con- 
tinuation of  this  chorus  in  the  next  lesson.  I  am  very  much 
obliged  to  you,  sir ;  because,  although  this  exercise  is  extremely 
interesting,  I  cannot  give  more  time  to  it,  being  obliged  to 
get  ready  for  a  ball.     Go  and  enjoy  yourself. 


170 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OP  SPEECU. 


LESSON    LV. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OF   SPEECH. 


[-  To  be  a  great  talker. 


To  speak   with    timidity  and 
caution. 


Esser  largo  di  hocca. 

To  be  with  a  large  mouth. 

Favellare  a  hocca  stretta. 

To  speak  with  a  mouth  half 

shut. 

Avere  il  cuore  in  hocca.  ^ 

To  have  the  heart  in  the  mouth,  j  ^^  ^®  candid. 

Lasciar  la  lingua  a  casa.  ^  To  remain  silent,  or  uncommu 

To  leave  the  tongue  at  home,     j      nicative. 
La  lingua  hatte   dove  il  dente 


One  is  apt  to  talk  of  what  in 
terests  him  the  most. 


duole. 
The  tongue  strikes  where  the 
tooth  aches. 

Bimanere  a  denti  asdutti. 

To  be  left  with  dry  teeth. 

Fare  huon  viso. 

To  make  a  good  face. 

Geitar  sul  viso  una  cosa. 

To  throw  a  thing  in  the  face. 

Romper  si  il  collo. 

To  break  one's  neck. 

Scrivere  con  huon  inchiostro. 

To  write  in  good  ink. 

Non  mi  da  il  cuore  di  .  ,  i    _ 

XT  .  .  .       i-u    u      A  A         r  -Not  to  dare  to  .  .  . 

Not  to  me  gives  the  heart  to  .  .  J 

Far  cuore.  \ 

To  make  heart.  |  To  give  courage. 

Una  cosa  da  strappare  il  cuore.   \  A  thing  which  overwhelms  ui 
A  thing  to  snatch  the  heart.      )      with  grief. 


)  To  be  disappointed    in    one's 
J      expectations. 
\  To  be  pleased  with  something  ; 
/     to  welcome. 

f  To  throw  a  thing  in  one's  teeth, 
r  To  be  seriously  injured. 
I"  To  write  in  strong  terms. 


SYNONYMS.  177 

SYNONYMS. 

LEAF,  FROND  A,  FOGLIA. 

Foglie  are  the  leaves  of  a  plant  without  branches. 

Fronde  are  the  loaves  of  a  tree,  or  a  shrub. 

We  pluck  a  fronda  from  an  oak-tree. 

We  pluck  a  foglia  from  lettuce. 

The  poets  are  crowned  with  fronde,  and  not  foglie,  of  laurel. 

2^"  We  may  say  foglie  or  fronde  of  a  tree  ;  but  we  must  always 
say  una  foglia,  and  never  una  fronda,  of  lettuce. 


PURITY,  PURITA,  PUREZZA. 

Moral  and  abstract  objects  have  purita. 
Physical  and  natural  objects  have  purezza. 

The  wine,  water,  and  gold,  have  purezza,  and  not  purifa 
The  mind,  thought,  and  aspirations,  have  purita,  and  not 
purezza. 


TERROR,  TERRORS,  SPAVENTO. 

Terrore  is  the  superlative  of  timore. 
Spavento  is  the  superlative  of  paura. 
Terrore  is  accompanied  with  grief. 
Spavento  is  accompanied  with  wonder. 

A  great  calamity  causes  terrore. 

An  imminent  danger  causes  spaventf . 


EXAMPLES. 

This  is  not  my  property.  Questo  non  mi  appartiene. 

My  book  is  covered  with  dust.  II  mio  libro  e  coperto  di  polvere. 

I  saved  myself  by  flight.  Mi  salvai  colla  fuga. 

They  laid  down  their  arms.  Eglino  cessero  le  armi. 

My  books  are  lessened  in  num-  Imiei  libri  sono  scemati  di  nw 
ber.  viero. 


178  EXERCISE, 

EXERCISE  LTV 
When  did  Manzoni  live?  Manzoni  was  bom  in  the  yeai 
1784,  and  he  is  still  living.  I  hope  so,  at  least ;  but  let  us  not 
lose  any  time,  but  continue  our  chorus,  because  I  remember 
very  well  where  we  left  off  last  time.  I  am  ready.  "  But  who 
of  them  was  the  first  to  unsheathe  the  sacrilegious  sword,  and 
plunge  it  into  his  brother's  breast?  What  is  the  exciting  cause 
of  that  bitter  strife  ?  Alas,  they  know  not  (it)  !  they  are  come 
here  without  animosity,  to  inflict  death  or  to  die  ;  they  are  sold 
to  leaders,  and  they  fight  without  knowing  why.  0,  misfor- 
tune !  But  have  these  foolish  warriors  qd  mothers,  no  wives  ? 
Why  do  they  not  go  to  snatch  their  husbands  and  sons  from 
that  ignoble  contest?  Why  do  not  the  old  men,  filled  with  the 
peaceful  thoughts  of  the  grave,  endeavor  to  appease  that  mad- 
dening crowd  with  kind  and  softening  words  ?  Alas  !  they  are 
unmoved,  and  speak  of  their  brothers  slain,  and  their  cities 
burned,  with  that  indifference  with  which  the  husbandman,  sit- 
ting at  the  door  of  his  cottage,  points  to  a  whirlwind  which  is 
devastating  fields  that  are  not  his  property  ;  the  children  are 
attentively  listening  to  their  mothers,  who  speak  to  them  of 
hatred  and  revenge ;  the  women  are  making  a  show  of  the 
necklaces  and  girdles  which  their  husbands  and  lovers  have 
taken  from  the  bereaved  women  of  their  conquered  brothers. 
The  field  is  already  covered  with  dead  warriors ;  the  noise 
increases,  the  fury  redoubles.  One  of  the  armies,  lessened  in 
number,  is  obliged  to  retreat,  and  the  soldiers,  in  despair, 
endeavor  to  save  their  lives  by  flight,  and  disband  ;  but,  whilst 
the  cavalry  pursues  them,  and  they  are  spread  over  the  vast 
plain  like  the  grain  when  thrown  into  the  air  by  the  winnowing- 
fan,  a  troop  of  armed  men  attack  the  fugitives  in  front ;  they  are 
obliged  to  lay  down  their  arms  amidst  the  shouts  of  the  victors, 
which  silence  the  laments  of  the  dying  warriors.  A  courier  is 
despatched  in  great  haste.  As  he  passes  through  the  villages, 
all  hasten  to  ask  for  the  good- news.  Have  you  forgotten  whence 
he  comes  ?  Can  you  ever  expect  good  news  ?  Hear  the  vile 
news  he  brings  :  "  Brothers  have  slain  their  brothers !  "  I  think 
that  this  is  enough  for  to-day,  and  so  I  stop  here,  to  finish  thif 
Bad  recital  in  our  next  lesson. 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES    OF   SPEECH.  179 


LESSON   LVI. 


To  forget;   not  to   care  for  a 
thing. 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 

VoUare  lespalle.  |  ^^  withdraw,  to  retreat. 

To  turn  the  shoulders.  ) 

Buttarsi    un    affare    dietro    le 

spalle. 
To  throw  a  thing  behind  one's 

shoulders. 

Fare  spalla  a  gualcuno.  1  m    i     i 

„         ,      1      ,,     ^  ^ To  back  one ;  to  assist  one. 

To  make  shoulder  for  one.  ) 

Parlar  soito  voce.  '\  „.      ,  . 

.  ^  To  whisper. 

To  speak  under  voice.  } 

Mi  cadono  le  hraccia.  ")  t         j-  j 

^  I  am  discouraged. 
My  arms  fall  to  me.  ) 

Misurar  tutto  collo  stesso  hraccio.  1 

To  measure  everything  with  the  [  Not  to  allow  any  distinction, 
same  arm.  J 

Poriare  uno  in  palma  di  mano.    1  ™    ,    , ,         .  .  •  ^^^ 

„  .  ^ ,         ,        _  ,     I  To  hold  one  in  great  consider*- 

To  carry  one  in  the  palm  of  the  f      .  • 

hand.  J 

Essere  un  uomo  alia  mano. 
To  be  a  man  at  the  hand. 
Dar  V  ultima  mano  ad  un  la-  "j 

voro.  \  To  put  on  the  finishing  touch. 

To  give  the  last  hand  to  a  work.  J 
Avere  una  cosa  fra  la  mani.  ^ 
To   have  a   thing   among   the  \  To  have  a  thing  handy. 

hands.  J 

Fare  una  cosa  a  man  salva.         |  ^o  do  a  thing  without  danger. 
To  do  a  thing  at  sure  hand.        J 

Un  luogo  fuor  di  mano.  |  ^  ^^^^^^  ^^  1^^^^ 

A  place  out  of  hand.  j 


V  To  be  kind  and  affable. 


180  SYNONYMS. 

SYNONYMS. 
LIE,  MENZOGNA,  BUGIA. 

Menzogna  is  an  error.     Bugia  is  a  crime. 

If  we  make  believe  a  thing  in  jest  and  for  a  pastime,  the  lie 
is  menzogna^  and  not  bugia. 

If  we  take  advantage  from  what  we  make  believe,  the  lie  is 
bugia,  and  not  menzogna. 

We  say,  generally,  una  piccola  menzogna  and  una  gran  bugia. 

The  untruth  asserted  to  benefit  others  at  the  injury  of  our- 
selves is  menzogna,  and  not  bugia. 

Tasso  has  ennobled  this  word  by  calling  it  magnanimous. 
"  Magnanima  menzogna  /  "  he  exclaims,  when  Sofronia,  in  order 
to  save  all  the  Christians  from  the  wrath  of  the  king  of  the 
Turks,  makes  him  believe  that  she  had  taken  and  burned  the 
image  of  the  Virgin. 


LIGHT,  LUME,  LUCE. 

Luce  is  the  cause.     Lume  is  the  efiect. 

The  moon  sends  down  lume,  and  not  luce. 

The  sun  sends  down  luce,  and  not  lume. 

Lume  is  generally  used  for  those  bodies  which  throw  light  on 
something,  such  as  a  candle,  a  lantern. 

Luce  is  generally  used  for  luminous  and  shining  objects,  such 
as  a  star,  a  fire-fly. 


WORK,  OPERAy  LAVORO. 
Opera  is  the  production  of  the  mind. 
Lavoro  is  applied  to  anything  accomplished  by  the  hand. 
The  creation  of  the  world  is  the  opera  of  God. 
The  coat  I  wear  is  lavoro  of  my  tailor. 


TO  GO  OUT,  USCIRE,  SORTIRE. 
Uscire  is  used  to  express  the  act  of  departing  from  any  place 
Sortire,  in  the  meaning  of  going  out,  is  limited  to  military 
purposes,  and  only  used  to  express  the  sudden  rushing  out  of  a 
body  of  troops  from  a  fortified  place  to  attack  the  besiegers. 


EXAMPLES   AND    EXERCISE.  181 

EXAMPLES. 
They  descended  the  mountain  in     Scesero  dalla  montagna  di  gran 

great  haste,  and  fled.  fretta^  e  fuggirono. 

What  would  you  gain  in  so  afflict-     Che  cosa  potreste  guadagnare  af- 

ing  yourself?  Jliggcndovi  tanto? 

This  is  the  reason  why  I  am  here.     Kcco  pcrchc  son  qui. 


EXERCISE  LV. 
"  Tho  temple  already  reechoes  with  hymns  and  songs  ;  homi- 
cidal hearts  are  offering  thanksgivings  which  Heaven  can  but 
abhor.  Meanwhile,  the  stranger  appears  from  the  summit  of 
the  Alps,  sees  the  warriors  slain,  and  counts  them  with  cruel 
joy.  Hasten,  Italians !  away  with  feastings  !  return  to  your 
banners,  assemble  together,  the  stranger  is  coming  !  he  is  near  I 
Victors,  you  are  now  feeble  and  few,  and  this  is  the  reason  why 
he  descends  the  Alps,  and  challenges  you  in  those  same  fields 
in  which  you,  brothers,  have  slain  your  brothers.  0,  unhappy 
Italy !  fatal  land,  which  seemeth  too  small  for  thy  children,  who 
are  never  united  and  in  accord,  bow  now  to  the  stranger  ;  it  is 
now  that  the  judgment  of  Divine  Justice  begins  over  thee  ;  an 
enemy  whom  thou  hast  not  provoked  must  now  sit  at  thy  table, 
eat  thy  bread,  and  rule  over  thee.  He,  also,  the  stranger,  is 
foolish  in  so  much  rejoicing.  Has  a  nation  ever  enjoyed  happi- 
ness for  having  inflicted  wrong  and  outrages  on  other  nations  ? 
Suffering  is  not  reserved  for  the  vanquished  alone ;  the  momentary 
joy  of  the  impious  is  sooner  or  later  changed  into  woe.  If 
Divine  Justice  does  not  always  strike  the  oppressor  whilst  in  the 
height  of  his  pride,  it  marks  him,  watches  and  waits ;  it  reaches 
him,  at  last,  at  the  point  of  death.  The  image  of  God  is  reflected 
alike  on  the  brow  of  every  man  ;  in  every  part  of  tho  globe 
where  we  may  meet,  we  are  all  brothers,  all  children  of  the  same 
redemption,  all  bound  with  the  same  compact  of  mutual  love. 
Cursed  be  the  man  who  disregards  this  compact ;  cursed  be  he  who 
takes  advantage  of  the  feeble  in  sorrow  and  misfortune ;  cursed 
oe  he  who  afiiicts  the  soul  of  man,  which  is  an  immortal  spirit." 
You  can  now  read  the  original,  which  you  will  find  at  the  end 
of  the  book,  and  if  you  have  a  good  memory  I  would  advise  you 
i.0  learn  it  by  heart. 


1.82  MAilMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 


LESSON   XVII, 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES   OF   SPEECH. 

Non  va  mat  came  senza  osso.      •)  ^  ,       .       , 

m,        ,         a    I.     -^.u     4.U      «   r  Every  rose  has  its  thorn. 

There 's  no  flesh  without  bones.  )  '" 

Salvar  la  pelle.  ^  To  escape  by  the  skin  of  one's 

To  save  the  skin.  J      teeth. 

Ne  va  la  vita.  ")       o  i 

T.  ^'c^  c     -i.  h  Life  IS  at  stake. 

It  goes  life  for  it.  j 

Guadagnarsi  la  vita.  ^  ^  ,    ,.  . 

^        .  ,   T^  ^  To  get  one's  livmff. 

To  gain  one  s  life.  J 

Varsi  vita  e  buon  tempo.  "I 

To  give  to  one's  self  life  and  [  To  enjoy  one's  self, 
good  time.  J 

II  fine  corona  r  opera.  ^   ^^^  ,        n  xi    i.      j        n 

,„/      ^  f  ,  h  All 's  well  that  ends  well. 

The  end  crowns  the  work.         ) 

Toccare  il  cielo  col  dito.  "j 

To  touch  heaven  with  the  fin-  j-  To  be  at  the  height  of  fortune 
ger.  J 

JRisoIvere  su  due  piedi.  -)  _,  .  ^,  ^     ^ 

_,  ,  J.       n    .  h  To  resolve  on  the  spot,  at  once. 

To  resolve  on  two  feet.  )  ^ 

Avere  il  piede  in  due  staffe.  i 

To  have  the  foot  in  two  stir-  Po  have  two  strings  to  ones 

rups.  1     ''o^- 

Non  sapere  quanti  piedi  entrino 

in  uno  stivale. 
Not  to  know  how  many  feet  go 

in  a  boot. 

Mcltersi  la  mano  al  cuore.  "i  To  appeal  to  conscience  for  ju§- 

To  put  one's  hand  on  his  heart,  j      tico. 
Lasciar  del  pelo  in  una  cosa.       |  ^^  ^^^^  ^^^^ 
To  lose  some  hair  in  a  thing.     ) 


Not  to  know  enough  to  go  io 
when  it  rains. 


SYNONYMS  AND   EXAMPLES.  183 

SYNONYMS. 

NEW,  NUOVO,  NUVELLO. 

Nuovo  has  reference  to  use,  or  to  the  time  in  which  an  object 
has  been  used. 

Novella  has  reference  to  age,  or  to  the  time  in  which  an  object 
is  made. 

We  put  on  a  now  coat  un  ahito  nuovo,  though  it  was  made 
ten  years  ago. 

(j^"  If  newly  made,  we  call  it  also  abito  nuovo,  because  we  express 
the  time  in  which  it  is  used,  and  not  the  time  in  which  it  was  made. 

We  say  un  novella  amicOy  Valba  noueZ/a,  because  we  have  refer- 
ence only  to  time. 


SHAME,  ONTA,   VERGOGNA. 

Onta  is  an  injury,  accompanied  with  contempt. 
Yergogna  is  a  demonstration  of  modest  ingenuousness 
We  are  ready  to  revenge,  if  we  feel  onta. 
We  are  ready  to  reform,  if  we  feel  vergogna. 


EXAMPLES. 

To  turn  a  thing  into  ridicule.  Mettere  una  cosa  in  ridicolo. 

To  meet  with  great  success.  Avere  gran  successo. 

It  is  customary  here  to  sing  after  E  qui  costume  di  cantare  dopo 

breakfiist.  aver  fatto  colazione. 

I  have  a  great  desire  for  money.  Ho  gran  desiderio  di  denaro. 

They  ran  with  lightning  speed.  Corrono  colla  rapidita  del  baleno. 


EXERCISE  LVI. 
Count  Vittorio  Alfieri  was  born  at  Asti,  in  Piedmont,  in  the 
year  1749.  Slow  in  his  progress,  he  had  arrived  at  the  age  of 
twenty-four  without  knowing  even  the  elements  of  his  native 
tongue.  The  classical  heroism  of  the  Greeks  and  Romans 
inspired  him  with  a  taste  for  poetry  and  poetical  composition. 
After  some  imperfect  attempts,  he  wrote  a  tragedy,  Cleopatra, 


184  EXERCISE. 

and  attached  to  it  a  little  piece  like  a  farce,  in  which  he  endeav- 
ored to  turn  his  own  tragedy  into  ridicule.  But  the  pieces  met 
with  great  success,  and  he  applied  himself  to  cultivate  his  dra- 
matic taste,  and  in  the  course  of  six  years  produced  twenty 
tragedies,  which  filled  the  void  of  the  national  literature.  Eng- 
land has  a  Shakspeare,  France  a  Racine,  Spain  a  Calderon,  Italy 
an  Alfieri.  The  power  of  his  tragedies  results  chiefly  from  the 
energetic  sincerity  of  the  poet,  who  has  embodied  his  own  pas- 
sion and  feeling  in  hjs  writings,  offering  simplicity  in  the  plot, 
truthfulness  in  the  characters,  and  vehemence,  elegance,  and 
harmony,  in  the  comprehensive  diction.  The  following  extract 
is  taken  from  the  tragedy  Oreste,  in  which  Py lades  relates  the 
supposed  death  of  his  friend  :  "  It  w'as  customary  in  Crete  to 
renew  games  and  sacrifices  to  Jupiter  every  fifth  year.  Orestes, 
animated  by  a  desire  for  fame,  and  compelled  by  his  restless 
vigor,  went  to  that  shore  with  his  inseparable  friend,  Py  lades. 
There,  longing  for  honor  and  glory,  he  entered  the  wide  arena  in 
a  light  car,  to  obtain  the  noble  palm  for  rapid  steeds  ;  and  there, 
too  intent  for  victory,  he  lost  his  life.  Too  fierce,  heedless,  and 
impatient,  now,  with  a  threatening  voice,  he  pressed  forward  his 
ill-trained  coursers,  and  now,  with  a  whip  stained  with  blood, 
lashed  them  so  vigorously  that  they  flew  beyond  the  assigned 
limit,  more  mettlesome  as  they  were  more  swift.  Already  regard- 
less of  the  bridle,  and  the  cries  with  which  he  seeks  in  vain  to 
quiet  them,  they  emit  fire  from  their  nostrils ;  their  shaggy 
manes  float  in  the  air,  and,  wrapped  in  a  thick  cloud  of  dust, 
they  run  at  their  own  will  over  that  vast  plain  with  a  lightning 
speed.  The  tortuous  whirlings  of  the  chariot  bring  everywhere 
fright,  terror,  discomfiture,  and  death,  until,  the  fervid  axle 
striking  with  violent  shock  against  a  marble  column,  Orestes, 
being  overthrown,  fell,  and,  di'aggcd  by  the  reins,  he  stained  the 
ground  with  his  blood.  Py  lades  ran  to  his  help,  but  in  vain  ! 
Orestes  breathed  his  last  sigh  in  his  arms."  Alfieri  died  in 
Florence,  in  the  year  1803,  and  was  buried  in  the  church  of 
Santa  Croce,  wliere  a  splendid  monument  is  to  be  seen,  at 
the  side  of  Machiavelli,  Michelangelo,  and  Galileo.  His  works 
are  printed  in  twenty-two  volumes,  quarto.  (See  the  original 
of  the  above  extract,  page  232.) 


MAXIMS   AND   FIGURES   OF  SPEECH. 


185 


LESSON   LVIII. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGURES  OF  SPEECH. 


Cercare  il  pelo  nelV  novo. 
To  seek  for  hair  on  an  egg. 
Non  tor  cere  un  pelo  ad  uno. 
Not  to  twist  one  hair  of  one. 
II  lupo  cangia  il  pelo  ma  non  il 

vizio. 
The  wolf  changes  his  hair,  but 

not  his  vice. 
Chi  dorme  non  prende  pesci. 
He  who  sleeps  takes  no  fish. 
Non  entrare  in  un  affare. 
Not  to  enter  into  an  aflPair. 
Mentre  V  erha  cresce  il  cavallo  se ' 

ne  muore. 
While  the  grass  grows  the  horse 

dies. 
Star  fresco. 
To  be  fresh. 
Star  punta  per  punta. 
To  stay  point  for  point. 
Star  lontano. 
To  stay  far. 
Aver  la  testa  altrove. 
To  have  the  head  somewhere  [•  To  think  of  other  things 

else. 
Fare  il  santo.  •\ 

To  make  the  saint.  ]  ^o  ?%  the  saint 

Dar  Vanello.  1 

To  give  the  ring.  |  To  marry. 

9 


"I  To  be  excessively  particular  in 
j      everything. 

Y  Not  to  touch  a  hair  of  the  head. 


Vice  may  change  its  garb,  but 
remains  the  same. 

'J  The  sleeping    fox  catches    no 
J      poultry. 

)  Not  to  have  anything  to  do 
)      with  an  affair. 

Make  hay  while  the  sun  shines. 
■  While  the  doctors  dispute  the 
patient  dies. 

T  To  be  ruined. 

j-  To  be  always  at  variance. 

]- To  dwell  afar  off. 


18G  SYNONYMS  AND  EXAMPLES. 

SYNONYMS. 
CRAFTY,  ASTUTO,  FURBO. 

Astuto  is  said  of  a  man  who  seeks  to  obtain  an  object  without 
detection. 

Furbo  is  said  of  a  man  who  seeks  to  obtain  an  object  by 
deceiving  others. 

The  man  astuto  is  often  a  man  of  honor.  The  man  furho  is 
never  so. 

The  generous  man  may  reproach  the  astuto  for  his  want  of 
frankness ;  but  the  generous  man  and  the  astuto  both  agree  in 
exposing  and  discarding  the  furbo. 


FIEST,  PRIMO,  PRIMIERO. 

Primo  is  merely  an  ordinal  number,  which  is  expected  to  be 
followed  by  second,  third. 

Primiero  is  a  man  elevated  above  the  others. 

In  an  army  the  inferior  may  become  the  first,  il  primiero. 

In  a  play  in  which  we  are  not  well  entertained,  we  may  leave 
at  the  first  act,  al  primo  atto. 

The  president  of  a  republic  is  the  first  of  the  nation,  il  pri- 
miero delta  nazione;  but  not  the  first  president,  il  primo  presi- 
dente. 


EXAMPLES. 
The  lifeless  remains  of  my  beloved    La  spoglia  esanime  del  mio  dilelio 

son.  figlio. 

To  trample  under  foot  the  insult-     Calpestare  la  bandiera  insulta- 

ing  banner.  trice. 


EXERCISE  LVn. 
Torquato  Tasso  was  born  in  Sorrento,  near  Naples,  in  the 
year  1544.  Early  applying  himself  to  the  study  of  his  prede- 
cessors, Dante  and  Petrarch,  and  of  the  Latin  and  Greek  clas- 
Bice,  his  mind  soon  became  productive.  At  the  age  of  seventeen 
ho  wrote  his  Aminta,  a  pastoral  play,  full  of  grace,  simplicity, 


EXERCISE.  187 

and  tenderness  of  expression,  which  aroused  the  attention  and 
admiration  of  all  the  literati  of  his  age,  and  which  alone  would 
have  made  his  name  known  and  respected  in  the  Republic  of 
Letters.  But  the  young  poet  was  not  satisfied  with  his  success. 
Endowed  with  a  productive  mind,  and  able  to  express  his  crea- 
tions in  a  sonorous,  easy,  and  pathetic  language,  he  had  only 
need  of  a  subject  in  which  he  could  embody  the  intensity  of  his 
feelings,  the  purity  of  his  heart,  and  the  religious  sentiment  which 
pervaded  his  mind  and  thoughts.  He  consequently  produced 
his  masterly  poem,  Jerusalem  Delivered,  which  immortalized  his 
name,  and  added  much  lustre  to  the  Italian  literature.  And  was 
there,  indeed,  any  subject  which  could  afiford  a  wider  field  to 
a  Christian  poet  with  a  mind  like  his,  gifted  with  a  fervid  imag- 
ination ?  The  Saviour  of  the  world  dies  for  the  redemption  of 
mankind  ;  the  land  where  the  Divine  word  had  difiused  so  many 
maxims  of  morality  and  religion,  the  sacred  spot  which  had  been 
sprinkled  with  his  holy  blood,  was  now  profaned  by  the  barbar- 
ous Moslem.  It  was  not  permitted  to  the  followers  of  their 
Master  to  visit  the  dread  enclosure  where  his  lifeless  remains 
were  kept ;  to  fortify  themselves  in  the  new  faith  by  the  sight  of 
those  places  which  bear  witness  of  His  sujQfering  and  of  His 
death.  The  whole  of  Europe,  aroused  by  the  voice  of  an  enthu- 
siastic hermit,  moves  in  a  mass  to  free  the  land,  and  to  deliver 
the  brother  Christians  kept  under  the  cruel  yoke  of  a  cruel  des- 
potism. They  fight  desperately ;  they  endure  with  constancy 
and  perseverance  the  hardship  of  a  long  and  distressing  war. 
They  conquer,  at  last ;  they  trample  under  foot  the  insulting 
crescent ;  they  plant  on  the  walls  of  Jerusalem  the  cross,  as  an 
emblem  of  glory  and  triumph,  and  hasten  with  reverence  and 
awe  to  worship  their  own  inheritance,  the  holy  sepulchre. 
Nothing  more  pathetic,  noth^gVmore  sublime.  The  Jerusalem 
Delivered  was  by  the  poet  dedicated  to  the  Duke  of  Ferrara, 
Alfonzo  d'  Este,  that  ambitious  despot,  who,  suspecting  that  the 
poem  might  be  dedicated  to  some  other  Italian  prince,  rewarded 
the  poet  by  keeping  him  for  seven  years  in  the  insane  hospital, 
and  making  him  drink  to  the  last  drop  the  cup  of  bitterness. 
Tasso  died  in  Rome,  in  the  year  1595.  His  last  words  were^  "  I 
am  unhappy  because  the  world  is  unjust." 


188 


MAXIMS   AND    FIGURES    OF   SPEECH. 


LESSON    LIX. 


MAXIMS  AND   FIGUEES   OF   SPEECH. 

1  To  abscond. 


I  To  be  at  a  loss, 
j-  To  run  great  risk. 
>  To  set  on  fire. 


Saying    and 
things. 


doing    are    two 


Palmare  di  calcagna. 

To  pay  with  one's  heels. 

Promettere  mari  e  monii. 

To  promise  seas  and  mountains.  |  To  be  prodigal  of  promisee. 

Perdere  la  bussola. 

To  lose  the  compass. 

Correre  una  gran  burr  a  sea. 

To  run  a  great  storm. 

Dar  fuoco. 

To  give  fire. 

Bal  detto  al  fatto  c^  e  un  gran  ^ 

tratto. 
From  the  said  to  the  done  is  a 

great  space. 
Avere  del  bene  di  Dio.  -\ 

To  have  of  the  good  of  God.       J  ^^  P^^^^««  ^^^^^^^  blessings. 

Fare  una  cosa  in  un  credo.  1  ^^    ,         ,  .        ^,       , 

^    ,        ...      .  ,  ^  To  do  a  thing  ofi-hand. 

To  do  a  thing  m  a  creed.  j  ° 

Non  credere  al  santo  se  nonfa  il  ■ 
miracolo. 

Not  to  believe  in  the  saint  un 
less  he  performs  the  mira^ 

Avere  un  viso  di  scomunicato, 

To  have  the  look  of  an  excom- 
municated person. 

Pigliarsela  in  santa  face. 

To  take  it  in  holy  peace. 

Andate  a  farvi  benedire.  \  Go  and  attend  to  your  own 

Go  to  get  yourself  blessed.         J      business. 


To  credit  only  what  is  apparent 
to  the  senses. 


om^^TTol 


have  an  ugly  look 
r  To  be  resigned. 

} 


SYNONYMS   AND   EXAMPLES.  189 

SYNONYMS. 
TO  REPEAT,  RIPETERE,  REPLICARE. 

Ripctere  has  the  meaning  of  saying  again  what  hns  been  said 
before. 

Beplicare  has  tlie  meanhig  of  doing  again  what  has  been  done 
before. 

The  teacher  asks  us  to  repeat,  ripeterej  our  lesson. 
We  cry  aloud  "  replica,"  when  we  wish  to  see  again  some 
scene  in  a  new  performance. 

^*  When  replicare  is  used  for  words,  it  has  the  meaning  of  con- 
tradicting or  opposing  with  words  ;  as, 

L'  or  dine  era  capriccioso,  ma  nessuno  ardiva  replicare. 


KELATION,  RELAZIONE,  RAPPORTO. 
Rapporto  is  the  relation  of  an  incident,  of  something  which 
has  just  taken  place. 

Relazione  is  the  relation  of  a  great  event,  or  of  a  long  journey. 

A  corporal  makes  his  rapporto  of  the  discipline  of  his  com- 
pany. 

A  general  in  chief  makes  his  relazione  of  the  battle  he  has 
gained  or  lost,  and  of  all  the  diificulties  he  has  encountered. 

The  relations  among  friends  and  relatives  are  relazioni  dx 
amicizia,  di  parentela,  and  not  rapporti. 


EXAMPLES. 


I  have  read  many  Italian  ^Q^tKMMo  leito  molte  poesie  Italiane. 
It  is  generally  supposed  thd^^^Bjjj^  crede  da  tutti  che  egli  e  moll9 

is  very  skilful.  ^'^^^^  ahile. 

Whilst  I  am  alive  you  have  notli-    Mentre  ho  vita,  non  avete  nvlla 

ing  to  fear.  da  temere 

When  I  may  be  permitted  to  go     Quando    mi    sara   permesso    di 

out,  then  I  shall  go  to  him.  uscire,  allora  andro  da  lui. 

His  book  is  still  existing.  //  suo  libro  esiste  tuttavla. 


190  EXERCISE. 

EXERCISE  LVm. 

One  of  the  most  celebrated  characters  in  the  literary  world  if 
Francis  Petrarch.  We  are  chiefly  indebted  to  him  for  the  res- 
toration of  the  Latin  tongue  to  its  purity.  He  contributed 
greatly  to  the  revival  of  letters  in  Italy,  and,  through  Italy,  to 
the  other  realms  of  Europe.  His  Latin  works  give  evidence  of 
his  abilities  as  a  politician,  theologian,  and  philosopher.  He 
clothed  many  excellent  precepts  of  morality  with  all  the  graces 
of  pure  and  classical  lauguage.  Brucker  says,  that  in  reading 
the  moral  writings  of  Petrarch,  we  visit,  not  a  barren  desert  of 
dry  disputation,  but  a  fruitful  garden  of  elegant  observations, 
full  of  the  choicest  flowers  of  literature ;  yet  Petrarch's  fame 
depends  now  entirely  on  his  Italian  poems,  a  collection  of  about 
three  hundred  odes  and  sonnets,  which  he  wrote  as  the  light 
relaxations  of  his  mind,  almost  exclusively  given  to  Latin  works, 
which  were  the  object  of  his  serious  applications,  and  on  which 
alone,  it  is  supposed,  he  based  all  his  claims  to  the  admiration  of 
posterity.  It  is  Laura,  that  modest  and  sweet  maiden  he  sees 
for  the  first  time  on  the  morning  of  a  Good  Friday,  1327  (on  that 
day  in  which  the  sun  lost  all  its  brightness  through  pity  for  its 
Creator,  Era  il  di  che  al  sol  si  scoloraro  per  la  pieta  del  suo  Fat- 
tore  i  rai) ,  who  inspires  him,  and  he  pours  forth  those  beautiful 
verses  which  celebrate  the  accomplishments  and  bewail  the  fate 
of  his  cherished  idol.  Whilst  Laura  is  alive,  the  charms  of  her 
person  float  constantly  before  him,  and  he  pours  forth  all  the 
sweetness  of  his  heart  in  a  gay  and  animated  strain.  Laura 
dies ;  and  the  mourning  poet  does  not  lay  aside  hie  harp,  but  the 
earthly  passion  gives  way  to  a  purer  afiection,  and  he  sings,  in 
a  solemn  and  hopeful  tone,  his  Laura,  as  she  appears  to  him  in 
dreams,  as  he  sees  her  in  th^^mcentration  of  his  mind,  the 
embodiment  of  heavenly  bliss,  ^^B^ian  angel  constantly  guid- 
ing him,  watching  over  him,  amW^ding  him  be  resigned,  and 
look  with  eager  delight  for  the  day  in  which  he  may  be  permitted 
to  share  her  joy  and  happiness.  Petrarch  was  born  in  Arezzo, 
in  the  year  1304 ;  and  died  at  his  villa  in  Arguk,  near  Padua,  in 
July,  1374.  lie  was  found  dead  in  his  library,  with  his  head 
resting  on  a  book.  The  chair  in  which  he  died,  and  several  other 
relics,  are  still  existing,  and  are  scrupulously  preserved  from  the 
injuries  of  time. 


IDIOMATIC   EXPRESSIONS. 


191 


LESSON   LX. 


IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS. 


To  be  about  a  thing. 
To  abound  with  everything. 
To  absolve  from  sins. 
To  abstain  from  doing  a  thing. 
To  abuse  the  power. 
To  be  accompanied  by  a  friend. 
To  be  acquainted  with  one. 
To  address  one. 
I'o  adorn  with  .  .  . 
i  o  be  affected  by  .  .  . 
Agitated  with  such  a  thought. 
"lo  be  amazed  at  a  thing. 
To  be  angry  with  a  person. 
To  answer  for  a  thing. 
To  approve  of  a  thing. 
To  argue  upon  a  thing. 
To  be  armed  with  .  .  . 
To  arrive  at .  .  . 
To  augment  in  .  .  . 
Bathed  with  tears. 
To  bear  one  a  grudge. 
To  believe  in  .  .  . 
To  bestow  upon  .  .  . 
To  beware  of  .  .  . 
To  charge  one  with  ... 
To  be  clothed  with  ... 
To  come  near  to  .  .  .  '♦- 

To  comply  with  one's  wishes. 
To  confer  on  .  .  . 
To  confide  in  .  .  . 
To  be  contented  with  .  ,  . 
To  be  copious  in  .  .  . 


Star  facendo  una  cosa. 
Abbondare  di  ogni  cosa, 
Assolvere  dei  peccali. 
Astenersi  di  fare  una  r,osa. 
Abusare  del  potere. 
Essere  accompagnato  da  un  amico. 
Conoscere  uno. 
Favellare  ad  uno. 
Adornare  di  .  .  . 
Essere  intenerito  da  ,  ,  . 
Agitato  da  un  talpensiero. 
Esser  sorpreso  di  una  cosa. 
Essere  sdegnato  di  una  persona^ 
Render  conto  di  una  cosa. 
Approvare  una  cosa. 
Ragionare  di  una  cosa 
Armarsi  di  .  .  . 
Arrivare  in  .  .  . 
Accrescersi  di  .  .  . 
Bagnato  di  lagrime 
Voter  male  ad  uno. 
Dar  fede  a  .  .  . 
Confcrire  a  .  .  . 
Guardarsi  di  . 
Accusare  uno  di 
Esser  vestito  di  . 
Avvicinarsi  a  .  .  . 
Conformarsi  al  volere  di  un9 
Confer  ire  a  .  .  . 
Fidarsi  di  .  .  . 
Esser  contento  di  .  .  . 
Abbondare  di  .  .  . 


192        IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS   AND    EXAMPLES. 


Covered  with  .  .  . 

Crowned  with  .  .  . 

Dazzled  with  .  .  . 

fo  delight  in  .  .  . 

Co  demand  of  .  .  . 

To  be  disappointed  in  .  .  . 

I'o  be  displeased  with  .  .  . 

To  be  enraged  at  .  .  . 

To  face  one. 

To  fall  in  love  with  .  .  . 

To  feed  on  .  .  . 

To  fill  with  .  .  . 

To  fortify  with  .  .  . 

To  furnish  one's  self  with  .  . 

To  be  as  good  as  one's  word. 

To  have  done. 

To  hinder  from  .  .  . 

To  inflame  one  with  .  .  . 

To  kiss  one's  hand. 

To  be  laden  with  .  .  . 

To  laugh  at  .  .  . 

To  lavish  upon  .  .  . 

To  let  one  know. 

To  load  with  .  .  . 

To  look  at  a  thing. 

To  look  for  a  thing. 

To  look  upon  a  thing. 

To  lose  sight  of  one. 


Coperto  di .  .  . 
Coronato  di  ,  .  . 
Abbagliato  da  .  .  , 
Dilettarsi  di  .  .  . 
Domandare  a  .  .  . 
Esser  deluso  di  .  .  . 
Esser  disgustato  di  .  .  . 
Essere  arrabiato  contra  . 
Far  f  route  ad  uno. 
Innamorarsi  di .  .  . 
Nutrisi  di  .  .  . 
Empiere  di  .  .  . 
Munire  di  .  .  . 
Provvedersi  di  .  .  , 
Mantenere  la  parola. 
Aver  finito. 
Impcdire  di  .  .  . 
Accendere  uno  di  .  .  . 
Baciare  la  mano  ad  uno. 
Esser  carico  di  .  .  . 
Beffarsi  di  .  .  . 
Prodigare  a  .  .  . 
Far  sapere  ad  uno. 
Caricare  di  .  .  . 
Guar  dare  una  cosa. 
Cercare  una  cosa. 
Guar  dare  ad  una  cosa. 
Perdere  uno  di  vista. 


There  is  another  thing  to  be  done. 

Money  is  a  mere  nothing  in  com- 
parison with  honor. 

For  fear  of  being  too  long. 

Man  is  the  only  hero  in  Chris- 
tianity. 

When  I  reached  the  summit  of  the 
mountain,  I  knelt  and  prayed. 


EXAMPLES. 

Vi  e  un'  ultra  cosa  dafarsi. 
11^  denaro  e  un  mere  nulla  a  con 

fronto  deWonore. 
Temendo  di  dilungarmi  troppo. 
JVcl  Cr^'^tianesimo  nan  vi  e  ultra 

eroe  che  ruomo. 
Quando   giunsi    uUa    vetta    del 

viontey  mHnginocchiai  e  pregai. 


•  -   EXERCISE.  103 

EXERCISE  LIX. 
Who  is  this  newly-born  child,  brought  to  the  church  of  St. 
John  the  Baptist,  in  Florence,  to  be  baptized?  Why  does  the 
ago  rejoice  at  his  appearance  into  the  world  ?  Has  he  not  a 
human  form?  Is  he  not  of  flesh  and  bones ?  Yes  ;  he  is  a  child 
like  all  other  children  ;  but  the  Omnipotent  God  has  touched 
his  forehead  with  his  Divine  finger,  and  has  imparted  to  him  the 
gift  of  a  creative  mind.  The  child  becomes  a  man,  and,  with 
the  voice  of  an  inspired  prophet,  cries  out  to  a  slumbering  nation 
Rise !  and  the  nation,  at  the  sound  of  that  stirring  trumpet, 
awakes  from  a  lethargy  of  twenty  ages,  and  rises  to  light  and 
glory.  This  great  genius,  before  whom  all  men  of  merit  have 
bowed  with  wonder  and  admiration,  was  the  first  to  perceive 
that  art  and  science  must  harmonize  with  religion  ;  that  for  a 
Christian  the  sufferings,  joys,  hopes,  and  interests,  of  this  world, 
were  but  a  mere  nothing  in  comparison  with  the  immense  hap- 
piness of  an  eternal  life  ;  that  between  the  birth  of  the  first  man 
and  the  day  of  the  last  judgment  there  was  humanity ;  that 
between  the  Genesis  and  the  Apocalypse  there  was  a  book  to  be- 
made,  and  he  imagined  and  produced  it,  elevating  man,  by  the 
gradual  and  progressive  development  of  sentiments,  emotions, 
and  aspirations,  from  a  handful  of  dust  in  human  shape,  to  a 
spiritual  being  contemplating  the  Divinity,  and  longing  for  a 
world  of  joy  and  bliss.  This  great  star  in  the  horizon  of  modern 
literature  is  Dante  Alighieri  ;  the  wonderful  book  is  the  Divine 
Comedy.  Far  from  imitating  Homer  and  Virgil,  in  representing 
gods,  demigods,  and  heroes,  with  the  gravity  and  solemnity  of  a 
style  more  elevated  than  the  language  commonly  spoken,  the 
Christian  poet  felt  that  the  only  hero  in  Christianity  is  man  ;  that 
the  principles  of  charity  and  fraternity  had  already  proscribed 
from  the  human  race  every  mark  of  distinction  ;  that  men  were  all 
equal ;  that  the  humblest  among  them  was  the  first  in  the  sight  of 
God.  Overruled  by  this  grand  idea,  he  endeavored  to  represent 
man  as  he  is;  and,  adopting  the  common  language,  he  gave  to  his 
production  the  title  of  Comedy,  which  was  afterwards  acknowl- 
edged as  the  Divine  Comedy.  I  must  close  here,  for  fear  of  being 
too  long  ;  but  I  will  endeavor  to  finish  my  course  of  exercises  by 
giving  you  an  outline  of  the  poem  in  my  next  and  last  lesson. 


194 


IDIOMATIC  EXPRESSIONS. 


LESSON    LXI 


IDIOMATIC    EXPRESSIONS. 


To  take  notice  of  a  person. 

To  be  obliged  to  one  for  .  .  . 

To  be  offended  at  .  .  . 

To  offer  one  to  .  .  . 

To  omit  to  .  .  . 

To  oppose  some  one. 

To  pardon  one  for  a  fault. 

To  part  with  .  .  . 

To  permit  one  to  .  .  . 

To  pillage  a  city. 

To  play  upon  an  instrument. 

To  be  pleased  with  .  .  . 

To  praise  one  for  an  action. 

To  present  one  with  a  thing. 

To  pretend  to  .  .  . 

To  prevent  one  from  .  .  . 

To  prey  upon  a  thing. 

To  pride  one's  self  in  .  .  . 

To  profit  by  .  .  . 

To  promise  one  a  thing. 

To  propose  to  .  .  . 

To  provide  one's  self  with  .  .  . 

To  put  on  a  fair  face. 

To  be  qualified  for  .  .  . 

To  question  a  thing. 

To  receive  of  .  .  . 

To  recompense  for  .  ,  , 

To  reflect  on  .  .  . 

To  refuse  to  .  .  . 

To  refuse  one  a  thing. 

To  rejoice  at  .  .  . 

To  rely  on  .  .  . 

To  repent  for  .  .  . 


Salutare  una  persona. 
Essere  ohhligato  ad  uno  di  .  . 
Offendersi  di  .  .  . 
Offrire  ad  uno  di  ,  .  . 
Omettere  di  .  .  . 
Opporsi  a  qualcuno. 
Perdonare  un  fallo  ad  uno. 
Disfarsi  di  .  .  . 
Permettere  ad  uno  di  ,  .  . 
Dare  ilsacco  ad  una  citta. 
Sonare  uno  strumento. 
Compiacersi  di  .  .  . 
Lodare  Vazione  di  uno. 
Donare  una  cosa  ad  uno. 
Far  semhiante  di  .  .  . 
Impedire  ad  uno  di  .  .  . 
Divorare  una  cosa. 
Gloriarsi  di  .  .  . 
Profittare  di  .  .  . 
Promcttere  una  cosa  ad  uno, 
Proporre  di  .  .  . 
Provvedersi  di  .  . 
Fare  buon  viso. 
Esser  hen  alto  a  .  .  . 
Dubitare  di  una  cosa. 
Ricevere  da  .  .  . 
Ricompensare  di  .  .  . 
Riflcttere  a  .  .  . 
Ricusare  di  .  .  . 
Neffare  una  cosa  ad  uno. 
Ralkgrarsi  di  .  .  . 
Far  capitate  di  .  .  . 
Pentirsi  di  .  .  , 


IDIOMATIC  EXPRESSIONS  AND   EXERCISE. 


195 


To  require  a  thing  of  one. 

To  resemble  one. 

To  resound  with  .  .  . 

To  be  respectful  to  .  .  . 

To  reward  for  .  .  . 

To  be  satisfied  with  .  .  . 

To  scatter  with  .  .  . 

To  seem  to  be  so. 

To  set  one  at  liberty. 

To  shelter  one. 

To  sit  for  one's  picture. 

To  be  smitten  with  .  .  . 

To  be  sorry  for  .  .  . 

To  steal  a  thing  from  .  .  . 

To  take  example  from  one. 

To  take  from  one's  hand. 

To  take  one  in. 

To  teach  one. 

To  think  of... 

To  throw  one's  self  from  .  .  . 

To  throw  one's  self  on  .  .  . 

Tired  with  .  .  . 

Trample  upon  a  thing. 

To  fall  a  victim  to  .  .  . 

To  make  much  of  a  person. 

To  make  free  with  .  .  . 

To  make  one  laugh. 

To  make  a  present  of  a  thing. 

To  marvel  at  ...  . 

To  be  master  of  a  thing. 

To  meddle  with  .  .  . 

To  meditate  on  .  .  . 

To  take  notice  of  a  thing. 


Richicdcre  una  cosa  da  uno. 

Somigliare  ad  uno. 

Risuonare  di  .  .  . 

Esscre  rispcttoso  verso  .  .  . 

Ricompensare  di  .  .  . 

Contentarsi  di  .  .  , 

Spargcre  di  .  .  . 

Rarer  cos\. 

Dar  la  liberta  ad  uno . 

Dar  ricovero  ad  uno. 

Farsi  dipingere. 

Essere  innamorato  di  .  .  , 

Dolersi  di  .  .  . 

Ruhare  una  cosa  a  .  .  . 

Imitare  uno. 

Tor  di  mano  ad  uno. 

Jngannare  uno. 

Jnsegnare  ad  uno. 

Pensare  a  .  .  . 

Precipitarsi  di .  .  . 

Lanciarsi  a  .  .  . 

Stanco  di  .  .  . 

Calpestare  una  cosa. 

Esser  la  vitiima  di  .  .  , 

Far  civilta  ad  una  persona. 

Non  far  cerimonie  con  .  .  . 

Dar  di  che  ridere  ad  uno. 

Donare  una  cosa. 

Maravigliarsi  di  .  .  . 

Saper  perfettamente  uiyx  cosa. 

Impicciarsi  di  .  .  . 

Meditare  di  .  .  . 

Osservare  una  cosa. 


EXERCISE  LX. 
The  spirit  which  pervades  the  whole  poem  of  Dante  is  that  of 
religion  and  morality.     The  Divine  Comedy  is  the  expression  of 
a  man  eminently  pious  and  devout,  the  pouring  out  of  a  heart 


196  EXERCISE. 

beating  with  intensity  of  feeling,  to  benefit  and  instruct  man- 
kind. The  poem  is  divided  into  three  parts  :  Hell,  Purgatory, 
and  Paradise ;  in  other  words,  Punishment,  Expiation,  and 
Howard.  The  personages  most  prominent  are  three  :  Dante, 
Virgil,  and  Beatrice.  The  Inferno  has  nine  levels  ;  the  Purga- 
torio,  nine  degrees  ;  the  Paradise,  nine  spheres.  The  inferno  ia 
represented  as  an  inverted,  hollow,  truncated  cone,  commencing 
from  the  surface  of  the  earth  with  a  diameter  of  three  hundred 
miles,  and  reaching  its  centre  with  a  diameter  of  half  a  mile.  In 
following  the  poet  through  the  dark  abysses,  we  find  that  this  ia 
not  the  place  for  the  cast  down,  and  for  those  destitute  of  means  to 
buy  a  passport  to  heaven  ;  but,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  destined  for 
those  who  are  really  wicked,  without  excepting  cardinals,  popes, 
and  personages  of  high  rank.  In  this  first  part  of  the  poem, 
viewed  with  a  scientific  eye,  the  poet  limits  himself  to  questions 
concerning  geology  and  mineralogy  ;  but,  what  is  more  impor- 
tant to  be  noticed,  and  what,  I  think,  has  been  overlooked  by 
many,  is,  that  Dante  was  acquainted  with  the  theory  of  the  cen- 
tre of  gravitation  of  the  earth  —  a  discovery  which  was,  several 
ages  afterwards,  attributed  to  Newton.  The  mountain  of  pur- 
gatory is  placed  on  the  surface  of  the  earth  ;  its  form  is  just  the 
reverse  of  that  of  the  inferno.  Here  the  sufferers,  instead  of 
being  attracted  to  the  centre  of  the  earth  by  the  weight  of  their 
sins,  are  patiently  toiling  in  ascending  the  mountain,  and,  becom- 
ing gradually  lighter  by  repentance  and  expiation,  they  reach 
the  summit,  where  they  find  the  terrestrial  paradise.  Here  the 
poet,  left  by  Virgil, — representing  human  reason,  —  finds  a  new 
guide  in  his  Beatrice,  symbolizing  Divine  Wisdom.  The  Para- 
dise of  Dante  is  based  on  the  system  of  Ptolemeus,  that  the  earth 
was  the  nucleus  or  centre  of  the  universe.  Here  the  poet,  true 
model  of  a  man  eminently  religious  and  devout,  felt  the  impossi- 
bility of  our  limited  intelligence  to  define  the  Supreme  Being  ; 
consequently,  after  having  soared  upon  the  wings  of  an  exalted 
imagination  from  sphere  to  sphere,  and  described  the  various 
degrees  of  blessedness  of  the  happy  beings,  which  he  could  detect 
by  the  gradual  increase  of  rapidity  in  motion,  and  of  intensity 
in  splendor,  he  reaches  the  source  of  every  light  and  motion, 
and  bows  down  before  the  Divinity  in  wonder  and  amazement. 


AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


197 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  AUXILIARY  VERBS 
AVERE,  TO  ILVVE.  ESSERE,  TO   BE. 

GERUND. 
Avendo  or  coif  avcre,  having.  Esscndo  or  colV  essere,  being. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 
Avuio,  had.  Siato,  been 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 


lo  ho. 

lo  sono 

Tu  hai. 

Tusei 

Effli  ha,  poet.  have. 

Egli  e. 

Noi  ahbiamo. 

Noi  siamo. 

Vol  avete. 

Voi  siete. 

Eglino  hanno,  or  han. 

Eylino  sono,  or  son. 

IMPERFECT 

. 

Aveva  or  avca. 

Era. 

Avevi. 

Eri. 

Avhva  or  avca. 

Era. 

Avevamo. 

Eravamo. 

Avevaie. 

Eravate. 

Avevano  or  avcano,  p.  aviano.  Erano. 

PERFECT. 


EbU. 

Fui. 

Avesti. 

Fosti. 

Ebbe. 

Fu. 

Avemmo. 
Aveste. 

Fummo. 
Foste. 

Ebbero  or 

ebber. 

Furono,  ^.furo  oifur. 

FUTURE. 

Avro. 

Sard. 

Avrai. 

Sarai. 

Avra. 

Sara,  ^.fia. 

Avremo. 

Saremo. 

Avrete. 

Sarete. 

Avranno. 

Saranno,  p.  Jiano. 

198 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 


CONDITIONAL. 

Avrei  or  avria. 

Sarei,  saria,  p.  fora. 

Avresti. 

Saresti. 

Avrebbe  or  avria. 

Sarebbe,  saria,  p.  fora. 

Avremmo. 

Saremmo. 

Avreste. 

Sareste. 

Avrebbero  or  avriano 

Sarebbero ,  sariano ,  p.  forano. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

MOOD. 

PRESENT 

Che  to  abbia. 

Che  io  sia. 

Che  tu  Mia. 

Che  tu  sii,  or  sia. 

Che  egli  abbia. 

Che  egli  sia. 

Che  noi  abbiamo. 

Che  noi  siamo. 

Che  vol  abbiate. 

Che  voi  siate. 

Che  eglino  bbbiano 

Che  eglino  s\ano. 

IMPERFECT. 

Se  io  avessi. 

Se  io  fossi. 

Se  tu  avessi. 

Se  tu  fossi. 

Se  egli  avesse. 

Se  egli  fosse. 

Se  noi  avessimo. 

Se  noi  fossimo. 

Se  voi  aveste. 

Se  voi  foste. 

Se  eglino  avessero. 

Se  eglino  fossero. 

IMPERATIVE  : 

MOOD. 

Abbi. 

Sii  or  sia. 

Abbia. 

Sia. 

Abbiamo. 

Siamo. 

Abbihte. 

Siate. 

Abbiano. 

Slano  or  sieno. 

N.  B.  —  The  compound  tenses  of  these  auxiliary  verbs  are  formed 
t)y  adding  the  past  participle  of  their  own  verbs  to  the  simple  tenses- 

Io  ho  avutOj  Io  sono  stato, 

Io  aveva  avuto,  Io  era  stato, 

Io  avrei  avuto,  Io  sarei  stato, 


REGULAR  VERBS. 


loy 


REGULAR  VERBS. 

First  Goiyugaticn.           Second  Conjugation.  Third  Conjugation. 

dMARE,  TO  LCVE.     TEMERE,  TO   FEAK.  PART  IRE,  TO   DEPAlll 

GERUND. 

Am-andoj  loving.      Tem-cndo,  fearing.  Part-cndo,  departing. 


Am-ato,  loved. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 
Tem-uto,  feared.         Part-ito,  departed 


PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 
Am-ante,  loving.      Tcm-ente,  fearing.       Part-eiite,  departmg 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


PRESENT. 

Am-o. 

Tem-0. 

Part-o 

Am-i. 

Tem-i. 

Part-i. 

Arn-a. 

Tem-e. 

Part-e. 

Am-iamo. 

Tem-iamo. 

Part-iamo 

Am-ate. 

Tem-ete. 

Part-\te. 

Am-ano. 

Tem-ono. 

IMPERFECT. 

Part-ono 

Am-ava. 

Tem-eva  or  ea. 

Part-iva. 

Am-avi. 

Tem-evi. 

Part-ivi. 

Am-ava. 

Tem-eva  or  ea. 

Part-iva. 

Am-avamo. 

Tem-evamo. 

Part-ivamo. 

Am-avate. 

Tem-evate. 

Part-ivate. 

Am-avano. 

Tem-evano  or  eano. 

PERFECT. 

Part-ivano. 

Am-ai. 

Tem-ei  or  etti. 

Part-ii. 

Am-asti. 

Tem-esti. 

Part-isti. 

Am-b. 

Tem-e  or  ette. 

Part-\. 

Afn-cLTTtmo, 

Tem-emmo. 

Part-immo, 

A.m-aste. 

Tem-este. 

Part-lste. 

Am-arono 

Tcm-erono  or  ctlero. 

Part-irono. 

200 


REGULAR   VERBS. 


FUTURE. 

Am-erb. 

Tem-erb. 

Part-irb. 

Am-erai. 

Tcm-crai. 

Part-irai. 

Am-cra. 

Tern-era. 

Part-ira. 

Am-eremo. 

Tem-eremo. 

Part-iremo. 

Am-erete. 

Tem-erete. 

Part-irete. 

Am-eranno. 

Tem-eranno. 
CONDITIONAL. 

Part-iranno. 

Am-erei  or  eria. 

Tem-erei  or  eria. 

Part-irei  or  ir\a. 

Am-eresti. 

Tcm-eresti. 

Part-iresti. 

Am-erebhe  overia. 

Tcm-erebbe  or  eria. 

Part-irebbe  or  iria 

Am-eremmo. 

Tem-eremmo. 

Part-iremmo. 

Am-ereste. 

Tem-ereste. 

Part-iresie. 

Am-erebbero. 

Tem-erebbero. 

Part-irebbero 

SUBJUNCTIYE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Che  io  am-i. 

Tem-a. 

Part-a.      . 

Chetuam-i. 

Tem-a. 

Part-a. 

Che  egli  am-i. 

Tem-a. 

Part-a. 

C/ie  noi  am-iamo. 

Tem-iamo. 

Part-iamo. 

Che  vol  am-iate. 

Tem-iate. 

Part-iate. 

Che  eglino  am-ino. 

Tem-ano. 

IMPERFECT. 

Part-ano. 

Se  to  am-assi. 

Tem-lssi. 

Part-issi. 

Se  tu  am-assi. 

Tem-essi. 

PartAssi. 

Se  egli  am-asse. 

Tem-esse. 

Part-\sse. 

Se  noi  am-assimo 

Tem-essimo. 

Part-issimo . 

Se  voi  am-aste. 

Tem-este. 

Part-\ste. 

Se  egli  am-assero. 

Tem-ess?ro. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Part-isscro. 

Am-a. 

Tem-i. 

Part-i. 

Am-i. 

Tem-a. 

Part-a. 

Am-iamc 

Tem-iamo. 

Part-iamo. 

Am-ate. 

Tem-ete. 

Part-ite. 

Xm-ino. 

Tem-ano. 

Part-ano, 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


201 


niREGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  FIRST  CONJUGATION 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


ANDARE, 

DARE,                     FARE, 

STARE, 

TO   GO. 

TO   GIVE.                  TO   DO. 

TO  STAY. 

GERUND. 

Andando. 

Dando. 

Facendo. 

Stando. 

PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Andato. 

Dato. 

Fatto. 

Staio. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Vado. 

Do. 

Faccio  or  fo. 

Sto. 

Vai. 

Dai. 

Fat. 

Stai. 

Va. 

Da. 

Fa. 

Sta. 

Andiamo. 

Diamo. 

Facciamo. 

Stamo. 

Andate. 

Date. 

Fate. 

State. 

Vanno. 

Danno. 

Fanno. 

IMPERFECT. 

Stanno. 

Andava. 

Dava. 

Faceva. 

Stava. 

Andavi. 

Davi. 

Facevi. 

Stavi. 

Andava. 

Dava. 

Faceva. 

Stava. 

Andavamo. 

Davamo. 

Facevamo. 

Stavamo. 

Andavate. 

Davate. 

Facevate. 

Stavate. 

Andavano. 

Davano. 

Facevano. 

PERFECT. 

Stavano. 

Andai. 

Diedi  or 

detti      Feci. 

Stetti. 

Andasti. 

Desti. 

Faces  ti. 

Stesti. 

Andb. 

Diede,  deite,  die.  Fece  or/e. 

Stette. 

Andammo. 

Demmo. 

Facemmo. 

Stemmo. 

Andaste. 

Deste. 

Faceste. 

Steste. 

Andarono. 

Diedero,  dettero.  Fecero  or  feronc 

>.  Stettero. 

N  B.  —  RiandarBt  to  review,  trasandare,  to  neglect,  are  regular 


202 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


, 

FUTURE. 

Andrb. 

Darb. 

Farb. 

Stard. 

Andrai 

Darai, 

Farai, 

Starai. 

Andra. 

Dara. 

Fara, 

Stara. 

Andremo. 

Daremo, 

Faremo. 

Staremo. 

Andrete. 

Darete. 

Farete, 

Slarete. 

Andranno. 

Daranno. 

Faranno . 

Star  anno. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Andrei, 

Darei  p.  daria.  Farei,  p./< 

iria,  Starei  p.  staria 

Andrestu 

Daresti. 

Faresti. 

Staresti, 

Andrebbe. 

Darebbe. 

Farebbe, 

Starebbe. 

Andremmo. 

Daremmo. 

Faremmo. 

Slaremmo. 

Andreste. 

Dareste. 

Fareste, 

Stareste, 

Andrebbero. 

Darebbero. 

Farebbero. 

Siarebbero. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT. 

Vada. 

Dia, 

Faccia, 

Stia, 

Vada, 

Dia. 

Faccia, 

Slia. 

Vada. 

Dia, 

Famia, 

Stia. 

Andiamo, 

Diamo. 

Facciamo. 

Stiamo. 

Andiate, 

■     Diate. 

Facciaie, 

Stiate. 

Vadano. 

Diano. 

Facciano. 

IMPERFECT. 

Stiano. 

Andassi. 

Dassi. 

Facessi. 

Stassi  or  stessi. 

Andassi. 

Dassi . 

Faces  si. 

Stassi  or  stessi. 

Andasse. 

Dasse, 

Facesse, 

Slasse  or  stesse. 

AndassimOi 

Dassimo. 

Faces  simo. 

Stassimo  or  stessimo. 

Andaste. 

Daste, 

Faceste. 

Staste  or  steste. 

Andasscro. 

Dasscro. 

Faccsscro. 

Stassero  or  stessero. 

1^"  The  following  compound  verbs  are  also  irregular: 

Riandare,  to  go  again.  Addarsi,  to  addict. 

Ridare,  to  give  again.  Ristare,  to  stop. 

Distare,  to  be  distaut.  Soprastare,  to  delay,  to  temporize. 


APPENDIX. 


203 


VERBS    OF    THE    TIHRD    CONJUGATION    IN    WHICH 
THE  TERmNATION  ISCO  IS  INDISPENSABLE 


Abbellire, 

Abbonire, 

Abbrividiro, 

Abbronzire, 

Abbrostolire, 

Abbruttire, 

Abolire, 

Abortire, 

Accalorire, 

Accanire, 

Accolorire, 

Accudire, 

Acetire, 

Addolcire, 

Aderire, 

Affievolire, 

Affortire, 

Affralire, 

Aggrandire, 

Agguerrire, 

Agire, 

AUeggerire, 

Allenire, 

Allestire, 

Amarire, 

Ambire, 

Ammanire, 

Ammansire, 

Ammattire, 

Ammollire, 

Ammonire, 


Ammorbidiro, 

Ainmortire, 

Ammutiro, 

Ainmutolire, 

Anneghittire, 

Annorire, 

Annichilire, 

Annobilire, 

Apparire,* 

Appassire, 

Appetire, 

Appiccinire, 

Appigrire, 

Ardire,f 

Arricchire, 

Arrossire, 

Arrossirsi, 

Arrostire, 

Arrozzire, 

Arrugginire, 

Arruvidire, 

Assalire,* 

Asserire, 

Assopire, 

Assordire, 

Assortire, 

Assoggettire, 

Atterrire, 

Attribuire, 

Attristire, 

Attutire, 


Avvilire, 

Avvizzire, 

Balbuttire, 

Bandire, 

Benedire,* 

Bianchire, 

Blandire, 

Brandire, 

Brunire, 

Candire, 

Capiro, 

Chiarire, 

Circuire, 

Colorire, 

Colpire, 

Comparire,* 

Compartire, 

Compatire, 

Concepire, 

Condire, 

Conferire, 

Construire, 

ContribuirGj 

Contrire, 

Costruire, 

Castodire, 

Deferire, 

Definire, 

Demolire, 

Differire, 

Diffinire, 


Digerire, 

Diminuirej 

Disasprire, 

Disseppelliro, 

Disfavorire, 

Disfinire, 

Disgradire, 

Disimpedire, 

Disparire,* 

Dispartire, 

Disruvidire, 

Distribuire, 

Disubbidire, 

Disvigorire, 

Disunire, 

Erudire, 

Esaudiro, 

Esaurire,J 

Esibire, 

Esinanire, 

Fallire, 

Fastidire, 

Favorire, 

Ferire, 

Finire, 

Fiorire, 

Fluire, 

Fornire, 

Fruire, 

Garantire, 

Garrire, 


*  See  list  of  irregular  verbs. 

t  Ardire,  to  dare,  borrows  from  osare,  to  dare,  the  words  osiamo,  osiate,  osancl9 
because  ardiamo,  ardiate,  ardendo,  belong  to  the  verb  ardere^  to  bvirn. 
I  Past  participle  esaurito  and  esausto. 


204 


APPENDIX. 


Gestire, 

Ghermire, 

Gioire,* 

Gradire, 

Granciro, 

Granire, 

Gremire, 

Grugnire, 

Guaire, 

Gualcire, 

Guarire, 

Guarnire, 

lUaidire, 

lUanguidire, 

lUingaidire, 

Imbaldanzire, 

Imlbaldire, 

Imbalsimire, 

Imbandire,   . 

Embarberire,! 

Imbarbogire, 

Imbastardire, 

Imbastire, 

Imbelliro, 

Imbestialire, 

Imbianchire, 

Imbiondire, 

Imbizzarrire, 

Imbolsire, 

Imbonire, 

Imbottire, 

Imbozzacchire, 

Imbricconire, 

Imbranire, 

Imbruschire, 


Imbruttire, 

Immagrire, 

Immalinconire, 

Immalvagire, 

Immarcire, 

Immattire, 

Impadronire, 

Impallidire, 

Impaurire, 

Impazientire, 

Impedire, 

Impervertire, 

Impiccolire, 

Impidocchire, 

Impigrire, 

Impoltronire, 

Impostemire, 

Impoverire, 

Improsperire, 

Impuntire, 

Imputridire, 

Impuzzolire, 

Inacerbire, 

Inacetire, 

Inacidire, 

Inacutire, 

Inagrire, 

Inalidire, 

Inanimire, 

Inaridire, 

Inasinire, 

Inaspire, 

Inavarire, 

Incagniro, 

Incallire, 


Incalviro, 

Incancherire, 

Incanutire, 

Incaparbire, 

Incappoccbire, 

Incaponire, 

Incapriccire, 

Incarognire, 

Incatarrire, 

Incatozzoliro, 

Incattivire, 

Incenerire, 

Incerconire, 

Inciprignire, 

Incivilire, 

Incodardire, 

Incollerire, 

Incoragire, 

Incrudelire, 

Incrudire, 

Indebolire, 

Indocilire, 

Indolcire, 

Indolent  ire, 

Indolenzire, 

Indurire, 

Inerire, 

Infarcire, 

Infastidire, 

Infellonire, 

Infemminire, 

Inferire, 

Inforociro, 

Infervorire, 

Infiaccliire, 


InJSevolire, 

Infingardire, 

Infistolire, 

Influire, 

Infallire, 

Infortire, 

Infracidire, 

Infragilire, 

Infralire, 

Infrigidire, 

Ingagliardire, 

Ingelosire, 

Ingentilire, 

Ingerirsi, 

Ingiallire, 

Ingiovanire, 

Ingobbire, 

Ingrandire, 

Inlividire, 

Innuzzolire, 

Inorgoglire, 

Inorridire, 

Inquisire, 

Insalvatiohire 

Insanire, 

Inschiavire, 

Ineerire, 

Insignire, 

Insignorire, 

Insipidire, 

Insolentire, 

Insollire, 

Insordire, 

Insospettire, 

Insozzire, 


*  Defective  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  two  presents, 
t  Often  written  imbarbarire. 


APPENDIX. 

205 

Instupidire, 

Istituiro, 

Rancidire, 

Rinvezzire, 

lasuperbire, 

Istolidire, 

Rapire, 

Rinvigorire, 

Inteaebrire, 

Istruire, 

Rattiepidire, 

Rinvilire, 

Intenerire, 

Largire, 

Ravvilire, 

Ripartire, 

Intiepidiro, 

Leniro, 

Rawincidire, 

Ripartorire, 

IntigQosiro, 

Malodiro,* 

Redarguire, 

Ripulire, 

Intiinidiro, 

Marcire, 

Rcstituiro, 

Risalire,* 

Intimorire, 

Muniro, 

Retribuire, 

Risarcire, 

Intirannire, 

Obbedire, 

Riabbcllire, 

Risbaldire, 

Intirizzire, 

Oliro, 

Riagire, 

Risquittire, 

Intisichire, 

Ordire, 

Riapparire,* 

Risteccliire, 

Intorbidire, 

Ostruire, 

Riarricchire, 

Ritrosire, 

Intormentire, 

Par  tire, 

Ribadire, 

Riunire, 

Intorpidire, 

Partorire, 

Ribandire, 

Riverire, 

Intristire, 

Patire, 

Richiarire, 

Salire,* 

Inumidire, 

Pattuire, 

Ricolorire, 

Saporire, 

Invaghire, 

Percepire, 

Riconcepire, 

Sbaldanzire, 

Invanire, 

Piatire, 

Ricondire, 

Sbalordiro, 

Inveire, 

Polire, 

Ricostruire, 

Sbandire, 

Invelenire, 

Poltrire, 

Riferire, 

Sbigottire, 

Inverminire, 

Preferire, 

Rifiorire, 

Sbizzarrire, 

Invigorire, 

Presagire, 

Rimbambire, 

Scalfiro, 

Invitire, 

Preterire, 

Rifrondire, 

Scarnire, 

Invincidire, 

Proferire, 

Rifronziro, 

Scaturire, 

Inviperire, 

Progredire, 

Ringontilire, 

Schermire, 

Inviscidiro, 

Proibire, 

Ringioire, 

Schiarire, 

Invizzire, 

Pulire, 

Ringiovanire, 

Schiattire, 

fnvolpire, 

Punire, 

Ringiovialire 

Sciapidire, 

Inzoti(?bire, 

Putire, 

Ringrandire, 

Scipidire, 

Irretire, 

Rabbellire, 

Rinsanire, 

Scolorire, 

Irricchire, 

Rabbonire, 

Rinsavire, 

Scolpire, 

Irrigidire, 

Raddolcire, 

Rinsorenire, 

Scomparire, 

Irritrosire, 

Raggentilire, 

Rinsignorire 

Scompartire, 

Irruginire, 

RammoUire, 

Rintenerire, 

Semenzire, 

luterilire, 

Rammorbidire 

1,  Rintiepidire, 

Seppellire, 

See  list  of  irregular  verbs. 


206 

APPENDIX. 

Sfavorire, 

Soprassalire,* 

Statuire, 

Suggerire, 

Sfinire, 

Sortire,! 

Stecchire 

Supplire, 

Sfornire, 

Sostituire, 

Sterilire, 

Tradire, 

Sgarire, 

Spar  ire,* 

Stizzire, 

Traferire, 

Sghermire, 

Spar  tire, 

Stolidire, 

Trainortire, 

Sgomentire, 

Spaurire, 

Stordire, 

Trasferire, 

Sgradire, 

Spedire, 

Stormire, 

Trasgredire, 

Sinagrire, 

Spervertire, 

Stramortire, 

Trasparire,* 

Smaltire, 

Spessire, 

Stremenzire, 

Trasricchire, 

Smarrire, 

Squittire, 

Stupidire, 

Ubidire, 

Sminuire, 

Stabilire, 

Stupire, 

Unire. 

Smunire, 

Sruginire, 

Svanire, 

Usucapire, 

Sopire, 

Starnutire, 

Svelenire, 

Vagire. 

*  See  list  of  irregular  verbs. 

t  Sortire,  to  draw  lots,  has  the  present  in  isco ;  but  sortire,  to  go  out,  is  a  regu^ 

iar  verb. 

LIST  OF  VERBS  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION,  WITH 
THE  PRESENT  ENDING  BOTH  IN    O  AND   ISCO. 


Abborrire, 

Adompire,*  ' 

Applaudire, 

Assaporire, 

Assorbire, 

Avvertire, 

Bollire,t 

Carpire, 

Compire,* 

Convertire,! 

Disinghiottire, 

Divertire, 


Empire,* 

Forbire, 

Impazzire, 

Inghiottire, 

Inverdire, 

Investire, 

Lambire, 

Languire, 

Mentire, 

Muggire,^ 

Nudrire, 

Nutrire, 


Offrire,|| 

Offerire,|| 

Pervertire, 

Riforbire, 

Rinverdire, 

Rinvestire, 

Ruggire,^ 

Schernire, 

Soffrire,|| 

Sowertire,J 

Tossire, 

Travestire. 


*  The  present  in  o  is  taken  from  the  verbs  adempiere,  compiere,  tmpiere,  ao4 
mA'k.es  adempio,  compio,  empio. 

\  Bollire,  to  boil,  makes  bogliamo,  bogliate  ;  because  bolliamo,  bolliate,  belong 
to  the  verb  bollare,  to  seal. 

J  We  may  also  say  conversi,  converso  ;  soiwer/ii,  sowerso, 

§  Better,  mugyisco,  ruggisco,  rmtggiscono,  ruggiscono. 

I  The  past  participle  is  offerto,  soj'erto. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


207 


LIST  OF  IRREGULiVR  VERBS. 
J^  Verbs  marked  with  an  •  will  be  found  in  a  separate  list. 


Term  in.           Infln. 

Fast. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

-endere.  Accendere, 

Accesi, 

Reg. 

Acceso. 

Appendere, 

Appesi, 

Reg. 

Appeso. 

Apprendere, 

Appresi, 

Reg. 

Appreso. 

Arrendere, 

Arresi,  r. 

Reg. 

Arreso . 

Attendere, 

Atteei, 

Reg. 

Atteso. 

Ascendere, 

Ascesi, 

Reg. 

Asceso. 

Comprendere, 

Compresi, 

Reg. 

CompresQ 

Condiscendere, 

Condiscesi, 

Reg. 

Condisceso* 

Contendere, 

Contesi, 

Reg. 

Conteso. 

Difendere, 

Difesi,  r. 

Reg. 

Difeso. 

Disapprendere, 

Disappresi, 

Reg. 

Disappresc 

Discendere, 

Discesi, 

Reg. 

Disceso. 

Distendere, 

Distesi, 

Reg. 

Disteso. 

Estendere, 

Estesi, 

Reg. 

Esteso. 

Fendere, 

Fessi,  r. 

Reg. 

Fesso,  r. 

Imprendere, 

Impresi, 

Reg. 

Impreso. 

Incendere, 

Incesi, 

Reg. 

luceso. 

Intendere, 

Intesi, 

Reg. 

Inteso. 

Intraprendere, 

Intrapresi, 

Reg. 

Intrapreso. 

OflFendere, 

Offesi, 

Reg. 

Offeso. 

Prendere, 

Presi, 

Reg. 

Preso. 

Pretendere, 

Pretesi, 

Reg. 

Preteso. 

Protendere, 

Protesi, 

Reg. 

Proteso. 

Prostendere, 

Prostesi, 

Reg. 

Prosteso. 

Rendere, 

Resi,  r. 

Reg, 

Reso. 

Riaccendere, 

Riaccesi, 

Reg. 

Riacceso. 

Riprendere, 

Ripresi, 

Reg. 

Ripreso. 

Scendere, 

Scesi, 

Reg. 

Sceso. 

Scoscendere, 

Scoscesi, 

Reg. 

Scosceso. 

Soprapprendere 

,  Soprappresi 

Reg. 

Soprappreso. 

Sopraintendere, 

Sopraintesi, 

Reg. 

Soprainteso. 

Spendere, 

Spesi, 

Reg. 

Speso. 

Sopraspendere, 

Sopraspesi, 

Reg. 

Sopraspeso. 

Sorprendere, 

Sorpreei, 

Reg. 

Sorpreso. 

208 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


Termin.      Infln. 

Past. 

Future. 

Past  pa    . 

Stendere, 

Stesi, 

Reg. 

Steso. 

Tendere, 

Tesi, 

Reg. 

Teso. 

Trascendere, 

Trascesi, 

Reg. 

Trasceso 

Vilipendere, 

Vilipesi, 

Reg. 

Vilipeso 

Airre. 

Addurre,* 

Addussi, 

Addurro, 

Addotto. 

Indurre,* 

Indussi, 

Indurrb, 

Indotto. 

Dedurre,^ 

Dedussi, 

Dedarrb, 

Dedotto. 

Condurre,* 

Condussi, 

Condurro 

,  Condotto. 

Produrre,* 

Produssi, 

Produrro, 

Prodotto. 

-arire. 

Apparire,* 

Apparvi,  r. 

Reg. 

Apparso,  r. 

Comparire,! 

Comparvi, 

Reg. 

Comparso. 

Disparire, 

Disparvi, 

Reg. 

Disparito. 

Riapparire, 

Riapparvi,  r. 

Reg. 

Riapparso,  r 

Sparire, 

Sparvi,  r. 

Reg. 

Sparito. 

Trasparire, 

Trasparvi,  r. 

Reg. 

Trasparito. 

-prire. 

Aprire,J 

Apersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Aperto. 

Coprire, 

Copersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Coperto. 

Discoprire, 

Discopersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Discoperto 

Ricoprire, 

Ricopersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Ricoperto 

Scoprire, 

Scopersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Scoperto 

ardere.  Ardere.^ 

Arsi, 

Reg. 

Arso. 

Riardere,^ 

Riarsi, 

Reg. 

Riarso. 

Astere. 

Assistere, 

Afisist-ei  or  etti,   Reg. 

Assistito. 

Esistere, 

Esist-ei  or  etti. 

,     Reg. 

Esistito. 

•umere 

.  Assumero, 

Assunsi, 

Reg. 

Assunto. 

Consumere, 

Consunsi, 

Reg. 

Consunto. 

Desumere, 

Desunsi, 

Reg. 

Desunto. 

Presumere, 

Presunsi,  r. 

Reg. 

Presunto. 

Riassumere, 

Riassunsi, 

Reg. 

Riassunto. 

'dire. 

Dire,* 

Dissi, 

Diro, 

Detto. 

Bendiro,* 

Bondissi, 

Bendirb, 

Bendetto. 

Benedire,* 

Benod-issi  or  ii 

,   Reg. 

Benedetto. 

Contraddire,* 

Contraddissi, 

Reg. 

Contraddetto. 

•  Jppare  and  appaiono  may  be  used  instead  of  apparisce,  appariseono. 
t  Compaio  and  compaiono  are  used  instead  of  compariscoy  compariscono 
X  Petrarcli  lias  used  opra  instead  of  apra. 
§  With  the  auxiliary  verbs  avere  and  essere,  in  its  compound  tenses 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


209 


Vermiz 

I.            Infln. 

Past. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

Maldire,* 

Maldissi, 

Reg. 

Maldotto. 

Maledire,* 

Malod-issi  or  ii,  Re^. 

Maledetto. 

Predire,* 

Predissi, 

Reg. 

Predetto. 

-bere. 

Bere,» 

Bewi,  bovei. 

,  Bero, 

Bevuto. 

-adere 

Cadere, 

Caddi, 

Cadro,  r. 

Caduto. 

Accadere,* 

Accaddi, 

Accadr6,r 

'.  Accaduto. 

Decadere, 

Decaddi, 

Decadr6,r 

'.  Decaduto 

Dissuadere 

Dissuasi, 

Reg. 

Dissuaso. 

Ricadere, 

Ricaddi, 

Ricudro,  r 

.  Ricaduto. 

Scadere, 

Scaddi, 

Scadr5,  r. 

Scaduto. 

Persuadere, 

Persuasi, 

Reg. 

Persuaso. 

-alere. 

Calere,"^ 

Calsi, 

Reg. 

Caluto. 

Valere/ 

Valsi, 

Varrb, 

ValutOjValso 

Prevalere," 

Prevaisi, 

Prevarro, 

Prevaluto. 

-edere.- 

j-  Cedere, 

Cessi,  r. 

Reg. 

Ceduto. 

Concedere, 

Concessi,  r. 

Reg. 

Concesso,  r. 

Intercedere, 

Intercessi,  r 

.      Reg. 

Interce8so,r. 

Ledere, 

Lesi, 

Reg. 

Leso. 

Succedere, 

Success!,  r. 

Reg. 

Successo,  r. 

Chiedere,! 

Chiesi, 

Reg. 

Chiesto. 

Riedere,* 

Def. 

Def. 

Def. 

'iidere. 

Chiudere, 

Chiusi, 

Reg. 

Chiuso. 

Alludere, 

AUusi, 

Reg. 

Alluso. 

Acchiudere, 

Acchiusi, 

Reg. 

Acchiuso. 

Conchiudere,^ 

Conchiusi, 

Reg, 

Conchiuso. 

Deludere, 

Delusi, 

Reg. 

Deluso. 

Inchiudere,^ 

Inchiusi, 

Reg. 

Inchiuso. 

Illudero, 

Illusi, 

Reg. 

Illuso. 

Racchiudere, 

Racchiusi, 

Reg. 

Bacchiuso. 

Rinchiudere, 

Rinchiusi, 

Reg. 

Rinchiuso. 

-eplre. 

Concepire, 

Concepii, 

Reg. 

Concepito. 

Percepire. 

Percepii, 

Reg. 

Percepito. 

*  Used  only  in  the  third  person. 

t  Accedere,  eccedere,  procedere,  precedere,  are  regular  verbs 
\  The  d  is  often  changed,  in  poetry,  to  gg ;  as,  chieggo,  ckiegga,  instead  of  ciictto, 
ckieda. 

§  Often  written  concludire.,  includere. 

10 


210 

APPENDIX. 

TermiE 

L.         In  fin. 

Past. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

-oscere. 

Conoscere, 

Conobbi, 

Reg. 

Conosciuto. 

Kiconoscere, 

Riconobbi, 

Reg. 

Riconosciuta 

Sconoscere, 

Sconobbi, 

Reg. 

Sconosciuto. 

.  orrere, 

,  Correre, 

Corsi, 

Reg. 

Corso. 

Accorrere, 

Accorsi, 

Reg. 

Accorso. 

Concorrere, 

Concorsi, 

Reg. 

Concorso. 

Decorrere, 

Decorsi, 

Reg. 

Decorso. 

Discorrere, 

Discorsi, 

Reg. 

Discorso. 

Incorrere, 

Incorsi, 

Reg. 

Incorso. 

Occorrere, 

Occorsi, 

Reg. 

Occorso. 

Percorrere, 

Percorsi, 

Reg. 

Percorso. 

Precorrere, 

Precorsi, 

Reg. 

Precorso. 

Ricorrere, 

Ricorsi, 

Reg. 

Ricorso. 

Soccorrere, 

Soccorsi, 

Reg. 

Soccorso. 

Trascorrere, 

Trascorsi, 

Reg. 

Trascorso. 

•escere. 

Crescere, 

Crebbi, 

Reg. 

Cresciuto. 

Accrescere, 

Accrebbi, 

Reg. 

Accresciuto, 

Decrescere, 

Decrebbi, 

Reg. 

Decresciuto, 

Increscere, 

Increbbi, 

Reg. 

Incresciuto. 

Mescere, 

Mescei, 

Reg. 

Misto. 

Rincrescere, 

Rincrebbi, 

Reg. 

Rincresciuto 

•ucire. 

Cucire,a 

Cucii, 

Reg. 

Cucito. 

Scucire,* 

Scucii, 

Reg. 

Scucito. 

Sdrucire,* 

Sdrucii, 

Reg. 

Sdrucito. 

'Ubcere 

.  Cuocere,* 

Cossi, 

Cocero, 

Cotto. 

Concuocere, 

Concossi, 

Concocerb 

,  Concotto. 

Nuocere, 

Nocqui, 

Nocer6, 

Nociuto. 

Ricuocere, 

Ricossi, 

RicocQro, 

Ricotto. 

-Igere. 

Negligere, 

Neglessi, 

Reg. 

Negletto. 

Dirigere, 

Diressi, 

Reg. 

Diretto. 

Erigere, 

Eressi, 

Reg. 

Eretto. 

Esigere, 

Esigei, 

Reg. 

Esatto. 

4n^tiere.D  istinguero , 

Distinsi, 

Reg. 

Distinto. 

Estinguero, 

Estinsi, 

Reg. 

Estinto. 

*  Verbs  with  the  diphthong  uo  oniit  the  u  whenever  the  accent  falls  on  any  ithef 
rowel  but  the  o  of  this  diphthong,  or  when  followed  by  a  double  consonant. 


APPENDIX. 

211 

Termin.      Infln. 

Fast. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

-overe. 

Dovere,* 

Doveioretti, 

Dovrb, 

Dovuto. 

'<>ndere 

.  Fondere, 

Fusi,  r. 

Reg. 

Fuso,  r. 

Confondere, 

Confusi, 

Reg. 

Confuso. 

Ascondere, 

Ascosi, 

Reg. 

Ascoso. 

Diffondere, 

Diffusi, 

Reg. 

Diffuse. 

Effondere, 

Effusi, 

Reg. 

Effuso. 

In  fondere, 

InfuBi, 

Reg. 

Infuso. 

Rifondere, 

Rifusi, 

Reg. 

Rifuso. 

Sconfondore, 

Sconfusi, 

Reg. 

Sconfuso. 

Trasfondere, 

Trasfusi, 

Reg. 

Trasfuso. 

Nascondere, 

Nascosi, 

Reg. 

Nascosto. 

-ellere. 

Espellere,* 

Espulsi, 

Reg. 

Espulso. 

Divellere,a 

Divelsi, 

Reg. 

Divelto. 

Impellere,* 

Impulsi, 

Reg. 

Impulso. 

Repellere,* 

Repulsi, 

Reg. 

Repulso. 

Compellere,* 

Compulsi, 

Reg. 

Compulso. 

Convellere,* 

Convulsi, 

Reg. 

Convuko. 

Svellere,* 

Svelsi, 

Reg. 

Svelto. 

-ervere. 

.  Fervere, 

Fervei, 

Reg. 

Def. 

-iedere. 

Fiedere,f 

Fiedei, 

Def. 

Def. 

-give. 

Gire,» 

Gii, 

Reg. 

Gito  or  Ito. 

-adere. 

Invadere, 

Invasi, 

Reg. 

Invaso. 

Radere, 

Rasi,  r. 

Reg. 

Raso. 

-iggere. 

,  Figgere, 

Fissi  or  fisi. 

Tteg. 

Fitto  or  Fisso. 

Affiggere, 

Affissi, 

Reg. 

Affisso. 

Configgere, 

Confissi, 

Reg. 

Confitto. 

Crocifiggere, 

Crocifissi, 

Reg. 

Crocifisso. 

Prefiggere, 

Prefissi, 

Reg. 

Prefisso. 

Sconfiggere, 

Sconfissi, 

Reg. 

Sconfitto. 

Trafiggere, 

Trafissi, 

Reg. 

Trafitto. 

A  ffl  iggere, 

Afflissi, 

Reg. 

Afflitto. 

Friggere, 

Frissi, 

Reg. 

Fritto. 

Soffriggere, 

Soffrissi, 

Reg. 

Soffritto. 

*  Of  but  little  use  in  the  language. 

t  Fiedere  is  defective  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  the  Indicative  and 
iubjunctive  present,  and  but  little  used. 


:ivz 

APPENDIX. 

Terrain.           Infln. 

Fast. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

-unc/ere,  Giungere,* 

Giunsi, 

Reg. 

Giunto. 

Aggiungere, 

Aggiunsi, 

Reg. 

Aggiunto. 

Cobgiungere, 

Congiunsi, 

Reg. 

Congiunto. 

Ingiungere, 

Ingiunsi, 

Reg. 

Ingiunto. 

Raggiungere, 

Raggiunsi, 

Reg. 

Raggiunto. 

Soggiungere, 

Soggiunsi, 

Reg. 

Soggiunto. 

'idere.    Ridere, 

Risi, 

Reg. 

Riso. 

Arridere, 

Arrisi, 

Reg. 

Arriso. 

Deridere, 

Derisi, 

Reg. 

Deriso. 

Dividere, 

Divisi, 

Reg. 

Diviso. 

Elidere, 

Elisi, 

Reg. 

Eliso. 

Intridere, 

Intrisi, 

Reg. 

Intriso. 

Irridere, 

Irrisi, 

Reg. 

Irriso. 

Sorridere, 

Sorrisi, 

Reg. 

Sorriso. 

Suddividere, 

Suddivisi, 

Reg. 

Suddiviso. 

-e£f(/ere.  Leggere, 

Lessi, 

Reg. 

Letto. 

Eleggere, 

Elessi, 

Reg. 

Eletto.  . 

Correggere, 

Corressi, 

Reg. 

Corretto. 

Proteggere, 

Protessi, 

Reg. 

Protetto. 

Reggere, 

Ressi, 

Reg. 

Retto. 

Rileggere, 

Rilessi, 

Reg. 

Riletto. 

Sorreggere, 

Sorressi, 

Reg. 

Sorretto. 

Scorreggere, 

Scorressi, 

Reg. 

Scorretto. 

erffere.  Ergere, 

Ersi, 

Reg. 

Def. 

Emergere, 

Emersi, 

Reg. 

Emerso. 

Immergere, 

Immersi, 

Reg. 

IniTnerso. 

Dimergere, 

Dimersi, 

Reg. 

Dimerso. 

Sommergere, 

Sommersi, 

Reg. 

Sommerso. 

Tergere, 

Tersi, 

Reg. 

Terso. 

Aspergere, 

Aspersi, 

Reg. 

Asperso. 

Astergere, 

Astersi, 

Reg. 

Asterso. 

Detergere, 

Detersi, 

Reg. 

Deterso. 

4//ere.   Mcttere, 

Misi, 

Reg. 

Messo. 

Ammettere, 

Ammisi, 

Reg. 

Ammesso. 

Annettere, 

AnneBsi,  r. 

Reg. 

Annosso. 

Commettere, 

Commisi, 

Reg. 

Com  messo. 

*  Of  but  little  use  in  the  language.  —  Verbs  ending  in  ungere  often  transpose  th« 
Kg  when  the  following  vowel  is  e  or  t ,  as,  giu'jnc,  giugni,  or  giunge,  giungi. 


APPENDIX. 

2U 

Termio 

\.           Infln. 

Past. 

Future. 

Paat  part. 

Connettere, 

Connessi,  r. 

Reg, 

Oonnesso,  r. 

Dimettere, 

Dimisi, 

Reg. 

D!me8so. 

Dismettere, 

Dismisi, 

Reg. 

Dismesso. 

Frammettere, 

Frammisi, 

Reg. 

Frammesso. 

Intromettere, 

Intromisi, 

Reg. 

Intromesso. 

Promettere, 

Promisi, 

Reg. 

Promcsso. 

Rimottere, 

Rimisi, 

Reg. 

R!me8S0. 

Scommettere, 

Scommisi, 

Reg. 

Scommesso. 

Sconnettere, 

Sconnessi,  r, 

.      Reg. 

Sconnesso. 

Spromettere, 

Spromisi, 

Reg. 

Spromesso. 

•brdere 

.  Mordere, 

Morsi, 

Reg. 

Morso. 

Rimordere, 

Rimorsi, 

Reg. 

Runorso. 

'Orire. 

Morire,* 

Morii, 

Morro, 

Morto. 

'Ubvere 

.  Muovere, 

Mossi, 

Movero, 

Mosso. 

'hscere. 

,  Nascere, 

Nacqui, 

Nascer6, 

Nato. 

-frire. 

Offrire, 

Ojffersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Offerto. 

Soffrire, 

Soffersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Sofferto. 

^ferire. 

Proferire, 

Profersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Proferito. 

Riferire, 

Rifersi,  r. 

Reg. 

Riferito. 

Amere. 

Opprimere, 

Oppress!, 

Reg. 

Oppresso. 

Comprimere, 

Compressi, 

Reg. 

Compreseo. 

Esprimere, 

Espressi, 

Reg. 

Espresso. 

Imprimere, 

Impressi, 

Reg. 

Impresso. 

Deprimere, 

Depress!, 

Reg. 

Depresso. 

Reprimere, 

Repress!, 

Reg, 

Represso. 

Redimere, 

Redensi,  r. 

Reg. 

Redento. 

-arere. 

Parere,a 

Parv!, 

Parro, 

Parso,  r. 

-erdere. 

,  Perdere, 

Pers!,  r. 

Reg. 

Perso,  r. 

Disperdere, 

Dispersi, 

Reg. 

Disperse. 

-acere. 

Piacere,* 

Piacqui, 

Reg. 

P!ac!uto. 

Compiacere,* 

Comp!acqiii. 

,     Reg. 

Comp!ac!uto. 

Dispiacere,^ 

Dispiacqui, 

Reg. 

Disp!ac!uto. 

Giacere,* 

Giacqui, 

Reg. 

G!aciuto. 

Ripiacere,* 

Rip!acqui, 

Reg. 

Rip!ac!uto. 

Spiacere,* 

Sp!acqiii, 

Reg. 

Spiac!uto. 

Tacere,* 

Tacqu!, 

Reg. 

•Tac!uto. 

-hngere.  Piangere, 

Piansi, 

Reg. 

Pianto. 

214 

APPENDIX. 

Termin.        Infln 

Fast. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

Frangere, 

Fransi, 

Reg. 

Franto. 

'tngei-e  Pingere, 

Pinsi, 

Reg, 

Pinto. 

Dipingere, 

Dipinsi, 

Reg. 

Dipinto. 

Attingere, 

Attinsi, 

Reg. 

Attinto. 

Tingere, 

Tinsi, 

Reg. 

Tinto. 

Ritingere^ 

Ritinsi, 

Reg. 

Ritinto. 

Stringere, 

Strinsi, 

Reg. 

Stretto. 

Fingere, 

Finsi, 

Reg. 

Finto. 

Infingere, 

Infinsi, 

Reg. 

Infinto. 

Cingere, 

Cinsi, 

Reg. 

Cinto. 

Accingere, 

Accinsi, 

Reg. 

Accinto. 

Incingere, 

Incinsi, 

Reg. 

Incinto. 

Ricingere, 

Ricinsi, 

Reg. 

Ricinto. 

Scingere, 

Scinsi, 

Reg. 

Scinto. 

Spingere, 

Spinsi, 

Reg. 

Spinto. 

Respingere, 

Respinsi, 

Reg. 

Respinto. 

Sospingere, 

Sospinsi, 

Reg. 

Sospinto. 

Astringere, 

Astrinsi, 

Reg. 

Astretto. 

Costringere, 

Costrinsi, 

Reg. 

Costretto. 

Distringere, 

Distrinsi, 

Reg. 

Distretto. 

Ristringere, 

Ristrinsi, 

Reg. 

Ristretto. 

'bvere.    Piovere,* 

Piowe,  r. 

Reg. 

Piovuto. 

-otkre,    Potere,* 

Potei, 

Potro, 

Potuto. 

'<)rgere.  Porgere, 

Porsi, 

Porgero, 

Porto. 

Accorgere, 

Accorsi, 

Reg. 

Accorto. 

Assorgere, 

Assorsi, 

Reg. 

Assorto. 

Risorgere, 

Risorsi, 

Reg. 

Risorto. 

Scorgere, 

Scorsi, 

Reg. 

Scorto. 

Sorgere, 

Sorsi, 

Reg. 

Sorto. 

brre.     Porre,» 

Posi, 

Porro, 

Posto. 

Coinppre,a 
Oppdrre,* 

Composi, 

Comporro, 

Composto. 

Opposi, 

Opporrb, 

Opposto. 

Scomporre,* 

Scomposi, 

Scomporr6, 

Scomposto. 

Interporre/ 

Interposi, 

Interporro, 

Interposto. 

\ndere.  Scindoro, 

Scinsi, 

Reg. 

Scinto. 

*  Defective,  used  only  In  the  third  persons. 


Termin.           Infln. 

APPENDIX. 
Past. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

Discindere, 

Discinsi, 

Keg. 

Discinto. 

Rescindere, 

Rescinsi, 

Reg. 

Rescinto. 

:^«//€r€.Riflettere, 

Riflettei, 

Beg. 

Riflettuto. 

Inflettere, 

Inflettei, 

Reg. 

Inflesso. 

Circonflettere, 

Circonflettei 

,     Reg. 

Circonflesso 

Genuflettere, 

Genuflettei, 

Reg. 

Genuflesso. 

"ulgere.  Rifulgere, 

Rifulsi, 

Reg. 

Def. 

-iicere.    Rilucere, 

Rilussi,  r. 

Reg. 

Def. 

-anere.  Rimanere,* 

Rimasi, 

Rimarrb, 

Rimasto. 

-bndere.  Rispondere, 

Risposi, 

Reg. 

Risposto. 

-bdere.    Rodere, 

Rosi, 

Reg. 

Roso. 

Corrodere, 

Corrosi, 

Reg. 

Corroso. 

-bmpere.  Rompero, 

Ruppi, 

Reg. 

Rotto. 

Corrompere, 

Corruppi, 

Reg. 

Corrotto. 

Dirompere, 

Diruppi, 

Reg. 

Dirotto. 

Interrompere, 

Interruppi, 

Reg. 

Interrotto. 

Prorompere, 

Proruppi, 

Reg. 

Prorotto. 

-atire.    Salire,* 

Salii, 

Reg. 

Salito. 

Assalire,* 

Assalii, 

Reg. 

Assalito. 

Soprassalire,« 

Soprassalii, 

Reg. 

Soprassalito 

Risalire,* 

Risalii, 

Reg. 

Risalito. 

•^fere.   Sapere,* 

Seppi, 

Sapro, 

Saputo. 

"Igliere.  Scegliere,* 

Scelsi, 

Reg. 

Scelto. 

Prescegliere,* 

Prescelsi, 

Reg. 

Prescelto. 

Trascegliere,* 

Trascelsi, 

Reg. 

Trascelto. 

'•hgliere.  Sciogliere,* 

Sciolsi, 

Reg. 

Sciolto. 

Disciogliere,* 

Disciolsi, 

Reg. 

Disciolto. 

Prosciogliere,* 

Prosciolsi, 

Reg. 

Prosciolto. 

4t;ere.     Scrivere, 

Scrissi, 

Reg. 

Scritto. 

Ascrivere, 

Ascrissi, 

Reg. 

Ascritto. 

Coscrivere, 

Coscrissi, 

Reg. 

Coscritto. 

Descrivere, 

Descrissi, 

Reg. 

Descritto. 

Iscrivere, 

Iscrissi, 

Reg. 

Iscritto. 

Prescrivere, 

Prescrissi, 

Reg. 

Prescritto. 

Proscrivere, 

Proscrissi, 

Reg. 

Proscritto. 

Riscrivere, 

Riscrissi, 

Reg. 

Riscrittd. 

Soscrivere, 

SoBcrissi, 

Reg. 

Soscritto. 

2ia 

APPENDIX. 

Termin.       Infin- 

Past. 

Future. 

Past  -part. 

Sottoscrivere, 

Sottoscrissi, 

Reg. 

Sottoscritto, 

'ubtere. 

,  Scuotere, 

Scossi, 

Scotero, 

Scosso. 

Percuotere, 

Percossi, 

Percuotero, 

Percosso. 

Riscuotere, 

Riscossi, 

Riscuotero, 

Riscosso. 

-e^uire. 

.  Seguire,* 

Seguii, 

Reg. 

Seguito. 

Conseguire,a 

Conseguii, 

Reg. 

Conseguito. 

Proseguire,a 

Proseguii, 

Reg. 

Proseguito. 

Susseguire,* 

Susseguii, 

Reg. 

Susseguito. 

•oVere. 

Dolere,* 

Dolsi, 

Dorrb, 

Doluto. 

Solere,* 

Def. 

Def. 

Solito. 

Volere,a 

Volli, 

Vorrb, 

Voluto. 

-argere 

.  Spargere, 

Sparsi, 

Beg. 

Sparso. 

-eynere 

.  Spegnere,a 

Spensi, 

Reg. 

.  Spento. 

Aiggere 

.  Struggere, 

Strussi, 

Reg. 

Strutto, 

Distruggere, 

Distrussi, 

Reg. 

Distrutto 

"Cnere, 

Tenere,a 

Tenni, 

Terro, 

Tenuto. 

Appartenere,« 

'  Appartenni, 

,  Apparterro, 

Appartenuto. 

Attenere,* 

Attenni, 

Atterro, 

Attenuto. 

Contenere,a 

Contenni, 

Con  terro, 

Contenuto. 

Ditenere,* 

Ditenni, 

Diterro, 

Ditenuto. 

Mantenere,a 

Mantenni, 

Man  terro, 

INIantenuto. 

Ottenere,* 

Ottenni, 

Otterro, 

Ottenuto. 

Ritenere,* 

Ritenni, 

Riterro, 

Ritenuto. 

Sostenere,* 

Sostenni, 

Sosterro, 

Sostenuto. 

^gliere 

.  Cogliere,t 

Colsi, 

Coglierb, 

Colto4 

Accogliere, 

Accolsi, 

Accogliero, 

Accolto. 

Ricogliere, 

Ricolsi, 

Ricogliero, 

Ricolto. 

Togliere, 

Tolsi, 

Torr6,  r. 

Tolto. 

Distogliere, 

Distolsi, 

Distorro, 

Distolto. 

Ritogliere, 

Ristolsi, 

Ritorro, 

Ritolto. 

-hrcere. 

Torcere, 

Torsi, 

Reg. 

Torto. 

Attorcero, 

Attorsi, 

Reg. 

Attorto. 

Contorcere, 

Con  torsi, 

Reg. 

Contorto. 

Distorcere, 

Distorsi, 

Reg. 

Distorto. 

*In  the  past  and  future  it  makes  fui  solito,  sard  solito,  etc. 
t  Often  written  corre. 

t  The  0  of  thts  past  participle  bas  a  abort  sound.    C6lto  is  used  in  poetry  toi 
toUivato,  educated. 


APPENDIX. 

217 

Termla.       Infln. 

Past. 

Future. 

Fast  part. 

Estorcere, 

Estorsi, 

Reg. 

Estorto. 

Ritorcero, 

Ri  torsi, 

Reg. 

Ritorto. 

Storcere, 

Storsi, 

Reg. 

Storto. 

•^rre.     Trarre,* 

Trassi, 

Trarro. 

Tratto. 

Astrarre,* 

Astrassi, 

Astrarro, 

Astratto. 

Attrarre,* 

Attrassi, 

Attrarro, 

Attratto. 

Contrarre,* 

Contrassi, 

Con  trarro, 

Contratto. 

Detrarre,* 

Detrassi, 

Detrarro, 

Detratto. 

Estrarre, 

Estrassi, 

Estrarro, 

Estratto. 

Ri  trarre/ 

Ritrassi, 

Ritrarro, 

Ritratto. 

Protrarre,"^ 

Pro  trassi, 

Pro  trarro. 

Protratto. 

Sottrarre,* 

Sottrassi, 

Sottrarro, 

Sottratto. 

Adere.    Assidere,* 

Assisi, 

Reg. 

Assiso. 

Uccidere, 

Uccisi, 

Reg. 

Ucciso. 

Conquidere, 

Conquisi, 

Reg. 

Conquiso 

Decidore, 

Decisi, 

Reg. 

Deciso. 

Precidere, 

Precisi, 

Reg. 

Preciso. 

Recidere, 

Recisi, 

Reg. 

Reciso. 

Uccidere, 

Uccisi, 

Reg. 

Ucciso. 

-udXre.    Udire,a 

Udii, 

Udr6, 

Udito. 

'\vere.    Vivere, 

Vissi, 

Reg. 

Vissuto,  r. 

Convivere, 

Convissi, 

Reg. 

Convivuto. 

Rivivere, 

Rivissi, 

Reg. 

Rivivuto. 

Soprawivere, 

Sopravvissi, 

Reg. 

SopravYivuta 

'■edere.    Vedere,* 

Vidi, 

Vedro, 

Veduto. 

Antivedere,* 

Antividi, 

Antivedro, 

Antiveduto. 

Awedere,* 

Awidi, 

Avvedrb, 

Aweduto. 

Divedere,* 

Dividi, 

Divedrb, 

Diveduto. 

Prowedere,* 

Prowidi, 

Provvedrb, 

Proweduto. 

Prevedere,* 

Previdi, 

Prevedro, 

Preveduto. 

Ravvedere,* 

Ravvidi, 

Rawedro, 

Ravyeduto. 

Sprowedere,^ 

SprovYidi , 

Sprowedero; 

,  Sproweduto. 

Travedere,"^ 

Travidi, 

Travedro, 

Traveduto. 

Sedere,* 

Sed-ei,  etti, 

Sedr6, 

Seduto. 

Risedere,"^ 

Reg. 

Risedro, 

Riseduto. 

Possedere,* 

Possedei, 

Possedro, 

Possoduto. 

*  Reflective  verb. 

218 

APPENDIX. 

Tennir 

I.           Infin. 

Past. 

Future. 

Past  part. 

Soprassedere,' 

'  Soprassedei, 

Soprassedro. 

,  Soprasseduto 

-eiiire. 

Venire,'^ 

Venni, 

Verro, 

Venuto. 

Avvenire,a 

Avvenni, 

Awerro, 

Avvenuto. 

Addivenire,* 

Addivenni, 

Addiverro, 

Addivenuto. 

Convenire,* 

Con  venni, 

Converro, 

Convenuto. 

Divenire,* 

Divenni, 

Diverro, 

Divenuto. 

Prevenire,'^ 

Prevenni, 

Preverro, 

Prevenuto. 

Provenire,* 

Pro  venni, 

Proverro, 

Provenuto. 

Rinvenire,* 

Rinvenni, 

Rin  verro. 

Rinvenuto. 

Soprawenire,' 

"  Soprawenni 

,Sopravverr6. 

,  Soprawenuto. 

Sowenire,* 

Sowenni, 

Sovverro, 

Sowenuto. 

-incere. 

,  Yincere, 

Vinsi, 

Reg. 

Vinto. 

Awincere, 

Awinsi, 

Reg. 

Awinto. 

Convincere, 

Convinsi, 

Reg. 

Convinto. 

-uscire. 

Uscire,* 

Uscii, 

Reg. 

Uscito. 

Riuscire,* 

Riuscii, 

Reg. 

Riuscito. 

•hlgere.  Volgere, 

Volsi, 

Reg. 

Volto. 

Avvolgere, 

Awolsi, 

Reg. 

Awolto. 

Involgere, 

Involsi, 

Reg. 

Involto. 

S volgere, 

Svolsi, 

Reg. 

Svolto. 

Travolgere, 

Travolsi, 

Reg. 

Travolto. 

VERBS  OF  THE  SECOND  CONJUGATION  WITH  THE 

ACCENT  ON  THE  LAST  SYLLABLE  BUT  ONE. 

Godere,              Sedere,  Tenero, 

Parere,               Solere,  Valere, 

Piacere,              Suadere,  Vedere, 

Potere,               Tacere,  Volere. 
Temere, 


Calere, 
Cadere, 
Dolere, 
Dovere, 
Giacere, 


REGULAR  VERBS  OF  THE  THHID  CONJUGATION. 

Consentire,     Dormire,        Pentirsi,        Sdrucire,    Vestire 
Conventire,    Fuggire,         Seguire,        Servire, 
Cucire,  Partire,  Sentire,         Sortire, 

With  their  compounds ;  as,  scurire,  proseguire. 


APPENDIX.  219 

LIST  OF  EXCEPTIONAL  IRREGULARITIES  OF  VERBS. 

AddurrCf  formerly  adducere. 

Present  Ind.    AdducOj   adducij  adduce j  adduciamo,   adducetCy 

adducono. 
Imperfect.    Adduceva,  adducevij  adducevay  addticevamOf  addu- 

cevate,  adducevano. 
Indurre,  like  addurre, 
Dcdurre,  like  addurre. 
Condurre,  like  addurre. 
Produrre,  like  addurre. 
Dire,  formerly  dicere. 

Present  Ind.   DicOj  diet,  dice^  diciamo^  dite^  dicono. 
Imperfect.     Diceva  .... 
Bendire,  like  dire. 

Benedire.     Two  present,  one  in  isco,  the  other  like  dire. 
Contraddire,  like  benedire. 
Maldire,         like  dire. 
Maledire,       like  dire. 
PredirCf         like  dire. 
Bere,  forms  the  present  and  imperfect,  from  hevere.  Bevo,  bevi . . 

Beveva,  bevevi  .  .  . 
Calere,  defective  verb,  used  only  in  the  third  persons  ;  as,  cale, 

caleva,  calse,  cafflia,  calesse. 
Valere,  Pres.  Ind.    Valgo,  vali,  vale,  valiamo,  valete,  valgono,  or 

vagliono. 
Prevalere,  like  valere. 
Riedere,  defective  verb,  used  only  in  the  present  indicative  and 

subjunctive,  and  in  the  imperfect. 
Cucire,  Pres.  Ind.  Cucio,  cud,  cuce,  cuciamo,  cucite,  cuciono. 
Scucire,     like  cucire. 
Sdrudre,  like  cucire. 
Dovere,  Pres.  Ind.  Devo,  or  debho,  devi,  deve,  dobbiamo,  dovete, 

devono. 
Pres.  Sub.   Bebba,  debba,  debba,  dobbiamo,  dobbiate,  debbano  or 

devano. 
In  poetry,  it  is  used,  deggio,  dei,  dee,  deggiamo ;  denno,  deg- 

giono,  or  deono. 
Svellere,  Pr.  Ind.  Svello  or  svelgo,  svelli,  svelle,  svelliamo,  siiellete, 

svellono,  or  svelgono. 


2i20  APPENDIX. 

Divellere,  like  svcllere. 

Girey  Def.  Verb.  It  has  only  ffiamo,  giate,  gite,  in  the  two  pres- 
ents and  imperative.  It  may  be  supplied  by  the  Latin  verb 
vadcre  ;  as,  vado,  vai,  va,  giamo,  gite,  vanno. 

Morirc,  Pres.  Ind.  Muoro  or  muoio,  muori,  muove^  moriamoy 
morite,  muorono  or  muoiono. 

Parere,  Pres.  Ind.  Paio,  pari,  pare,  pariamo,  parete,  parono  or 
paiono. 

Piacere,  Pres.  Ind.    Piaccio,  piaci,  place,  piacciamo,  piacete,  piac- 
ciono. 
Pres.  Sub.    Piaccia,  piaccia,  piaccia,  piacciamo,  piacciate,  piac- 

ciano. 
Imperative.    Piaci,  piaccia,  piacciamo,  piacciate,  piacciano 

Compiacere,  like  piacere. 

Dispiacere,    like  piacere. 

Giacere,        like  piacere. 

Ripiacere,      like  piacere. 

Spiacere,        like  piacere. 

Tacere,         like  piacere. 

Potere,  Pres.  Ind.  Posso,  puoi,  pud,  possiamo,  potete,  possono. 
Pres.  Sub.  Possa,  possa,  possa,  possiamo,  possiate,  possano. 
Imperative.   Possa,  possa,  possiamo,  possiate,  possano. 

Porre,  from  ponere. 
Pres.  Ind.    Pongo,  poni,  pone,  poniamo,  ponete,  pongono. 
Imperfect.   Poneva,  ponevi,  poneva  .  .  . 

Comporre,  like  porre. 

Opporre,    like  porre. 

Scomporre,  like  porre. 

Interporre,  like  porre. 

Rimanere,  Pres.  Ind.  Rimango,  rimani,  rimane,  rimaniamo 
rimanete,  rimangono. 

Satire,   Pres.  Ind.   Salgo  or  salisco,  salt  or  salisd,  sale  or  salisce, 
sagliamo,  salite,  salgono  or  saliscono. 
Pres.  Sub.    Saiga,  saiga,  saiga,  sagliamo,  sagliate  or  saliate, 
salgano. 

Assalire,        like  salire. 

Soprassalire,  like  salire. 

Risalire,         like  salire. 


APPENDIX.  221 

SaperCj  Pres.  Ind.    So,  sai,  sa,  sappiamo,  sapete,  sanno. 

Pres.  Sub.    Sappia,  .  .  .  sappiamo,  sappiate,  sappiano. 

Imperative.    Sappi,  sappia,  sappiamo,  sappiate,  sappiano. 
Scegliere  or  scerre,   Pres.  Ind.    Scelgo,  scegli,  sceglie,  sceyliamo 
scegliete,  scelgono. 

Pres.  Sub.    Scelga  or  sceglia,  .  ,  .  scelgano  ot  scegliano. 

Imperative.    Scegli,  scelga  or  sceglia,  scegliamo,  scegliete,  sceh 
gano  or  scegliano. 
Prescegliere,  like  sccgliere. 
Trascegliere,  like  scegliere. 
Scioglicre  or  sciorre,  Pres.  Ind.    Sciolgo  or  scioglio,  sciogli,  scio' 

glie,  scogliamo,  sciogliete,  sciolgono  or  sciogliono. 
Disciogliere,    like  sciogliere. 
Prosciogliere,  like  sciogliere. 
Seguire,   Pres.  Ind.   Seguo  or  sieguo,  segui  or  siegui,  segue  oi 

siegue;  seguiamo,  seguite,  seguono  or  sieguono. 
Conseguire,  like  seguire. 
Perseguire,  like  seguire. 
Proseguire,  like  seguire. 
Susseguire,  like  seguire. 
Dolere,  Pres.  Ind.   Dolgo,  duoli,  duole,  dogliamo,  dolete,  dolgono. 

Pres.  Sub.   Bolga,  dolga,  dolga,  dogliamo,  dogliale,  dolgano. 
Volere,  Pres.  Ind.    Voglio  or  vo,  t?Moi,  rwo/e,  vogliamo,  volete, 
vogliono. 

Pres.  Sub.    Voglia,  voglia,  voglia,  vogliamo,  vogliate,  vogliano. 

Imperative.    Vogli,  voglia,  vogliamo,  vogliate,  vogliano. 
Spegnere,   Pres  Ind.   Spengo,  spegni,  spegne,  spegniamo,  spegnete 

spengono. 
Tenere,  Pres.  Ind.  Tengo,  tieni,  tiene,  teniamo,  ienete,  tengono. 
Appartenere,  like  tenere. 
Attenerey  like  tenere. 
Contenere,  like  tenere. 
Ditenere,  like  tenere. 
Mantenere,  like  tenere. 
Ottenere,  like  tenere. 
Ritenere,  like  tenere. 
Sostenere,       like  tenere. 

Trarre,  from  /roere,    Pres.  Ind.    Traggo,  trai,   trae,   iraiamo, 
traete,  traggono. 


222  APPENDIX. 

Astrarre,    like  trarre. 

AttrarrCj    like  trarre. 

Contrarre,  like  trarre. 

Detrarre,    like  trarre. 

Estrarre,    like  trarre. 

Ritrarre,    like  trarre. 

Protrarre,  like  trarre. 

Sottrarre,   like  trarre. 

TJdire,   Pres.  Ind.    O^o,  odi,  ode^  udiamo,  udite,  odono. 

TJscire,  Pres.  Ind.  Esco^  esci,  esce,  usciamo,  uscite,  escono. 

Riuscrire,  like  uscire. 

Vedere,   Pres.  Ind.  Vedo,  veggo  or  veggio,  vedi,  vede,  vediamo  o, 

veggiamo,  vedete,  veggono  or  veggiono. 
Antivedere,  like  vedere. 
Avvedere,  like  vedere. 
Rivedere,  like  vedere. 
Provvedere,  like  vedere. 
Prevedere,  like  vedere. 
Ravvedere,  like  vedere. 
Jmprovvedere,  like  vedere. 
Travederey  like  vedere. 
Sedere,  Pres.  Ind.   <&'e6?o  or  seggo,  siedi,  siede,  sediamo^  sedete 

siedono  or  seggono. 
Risedere,         like  sedere. 
Possedere,       like  sedere. 
Soprassederej  like  sedere. 

Venire^  Pres  Ind.    Vengo,  vienij  vieney  veniamo,  venite,  vengono, 
Awenire,  like  venire. 

Addivenire,  like  venire. 
Convenire,  like  venire. 
Divenirej  like  venire. 

Prevenire,  like  venire. 
Proveniref  like  venire. 
Rivenire,  like  venire. 

Rinvenire,  like  venire. 
Sorvenire,  like  venire. 
Sopravvvenire,  like  venire. 
Sovvenirej       .  like  venire. 


APPENDIX. 


223 


MASCULINE  NOUNS  ENDING  IN  A. 


Amacorota,* 

Anagramma, 

Analemma, 

Anatema, 

Antagonista,* 

Apostata,* 

Apostema, 

Apotegma, 

Artista, 

Assioma, 

Asma, 

Atoista,* 

Ateroma, 

Automa, 

Borea, 

Calvinista,* 

Chitarrista,* 

Clima, 

Deicida,* 

Beista,* 

Diadema, 

Dilemma, 

Diploma, 

Domma, 


Dramma, 

Duca, 

Emblema, 

Enimma, 

Epigramma, 

Ensimena, 

Entomata, 

Eremita,* 

Eresiarca, 

Fantasma,* 

Fisima, 

Fraticida,* 

Gesuita, 

Idioma, 

Idiota,* 

Ippocrita,* 

Macchinista,* 

Materialista, 

Matricida,* 

Monarca, 

Monopolista,* 

Omicida, 

Papa, 

Parricida  * 


Patriarca, 

Patriotta, 

Pianeta,* 

Poeta, 

Poema, 

Prisma, 

Problema, 

Proclama, 

Profeta, 

Programma, 

Realista,* 

Kegicida,* 

Reuma, 

Scisma, 

Sistema, 

Sofisma, 

Sofista, 

Sperma, 

Stemma, 

Stratagemma, 

Tema, 

Teorema, 

Tetrarca, 

Timiama. 


*  Used  also  for  the  feminine  :  as,  un  anacoreta,  and  una  anacoreta. 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN   CO  AND   GO,  WHICH  TAKE  OR 
REJECT  THE  H. 


Analogo, 

Apologo, 

Astrologo, 

Chirurgo, 

Dialogo, 


Dittongo, 

Domestico, 

Equivoco, 

Farmaco, 

Mendico, 


Monaco, 

Pratico, 

Reciproco, 

Salvatico, 

Statico. 


224 


APPENDIX. 


MASCULINE  NOUNS  WITH  TWO  PLURALb 


Anello, 

Fondamento, 

Mure, 

Braccio, 

Frammento, 

Orecchio, 

Budello, 

Frutto, 

OSBO, 

Calcagno, 

Fuso, 

Peccato, 

Carro, 

Gesto, 

Porno, 

Castello, 

Ginoccliio, 

Prato, 

Cerchio, 

Gomito, 

Pugno, 

Cervello, 

Granello, 

Quadrello, 

Ciglio, 

Grido, 

Riso, 

Coltello, 

Guscio, 

Sacco, 

Comandamento, 

Labbro, 

Strido, 

Corno, 

Legno, 

Tino, 

Cuoio, 

Lenzuolo, 

tJrlo, 

Ditello, 

Letto, 

Vestigio, 

Dito, 

Membro, 

Vestimento. 

Filo, 

Mulino, 

NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES  ENDING  IN  CO  AND  GO 
PRECEDED  BY  A  VOWEL,  WHICH  TAKE  AN  H  IN 
THE  PLURAL. 


Abaco, 

Farmaco, 

Presage, 

Abbaco, 

Fondaco, 

Prodigo, 

Antico, 

Impiego, 

Prolago, 

Aprico, 

Intrigo, 

Pudico, 

Beccafico, 

Manico, 

Rammarico, 

Caduco, 

Monologo, 

Ripiego, 

Carico, 

Obbligo, 

Sacrilego, 

Castigo, 

Opaco, 

Scarico, 

Catalogo, 

Parroco, 

Stomaco, 

Dialogo, 

Pelago, 

Traffico, 

Dimentico, 

Pedagogo, 

Ubbriaco, 

Dittongo, 

Publico, 

Usbergo.  . 

APPENDIX. 

225 

IRREGULAR  FEIMININES. 

Abate, 

Badessa. 

Gallo, 

Gallina. 

Barone, 

Baronessa. 

Leone, 

Leonessa. 

Cane, 

Cagna. 

Marchese, 

Marchesa. 

Canonico, 

Canonichessa. 

Mercante, 

Mercantessa. 

Cantante, 

Cantatrice. 

Oste, 

Ostessa. 

Conte, 

Contessa. 

Padrone, 

Padrona. 

Dio, 

Dea. 

Papa, 

Papessa. 

Diavolo, 

Diavolessa. 

Pavone, 

Pagonessa. 

Dottore, 

Dottoressa. 

Principe, 

Principesaa. 

Duca, 

Duchessa. 

Pastore, 

Pastorella. 

Elefanto, 

Elefantessa. 

Priore, 

Prioressa. 

Eroe, 

Eroina. 

Profeta, 

Profetessa. 

Fattore, 

Fattoressa. 

Re, 

Regina. 

Filosofo, 

Filosofessa.* 

Sartore, 

Sarta. 

*  Used  onl 

y  in  derision. 

LIST  OF  EQUIVOCAL  WORDS. 

E  like  e  in  me 

t. 

E  more  open. 

Accetta. 

Axe. 

He  accepts. 

Affetta. 

He  cuts  into 

slices. 

He  afiects. 

Bet. 

Thou  drinke 

St. 

Beautiful. 

Cera. 

Wax. 

Aspect. 

Colletto. 

Little  hill. 

Collected. 

Desti. 

Thou  didst  { 

5ive. 

Awaken. 

Detti. 

Words. 

I  gave. 

Esca. 

Bait. 

Go  out. 

Fello. 

He  did  it. 

Felon. 

Teste. 

You  did  it. 

Festivals. 

Lega. 

He  binds. 

A  league. 

Legge. 

Law. 

He  reads. 

Lessi. 

Boiled. 

I  read. 

Letto. 

Bed. 

Read. 

Mele. 

Apples. 

Honey. 

Messe. 

Masses. 

Harvest. 

Pesca. 

The  fishing. 

A  peach. 

Pesco. 

I  fish. 

A  peach-tree. 

z^ 

APPENDIX. 

Peste. 

Trampled. 

Plague. 

Tema. 

Fear. 

Theme. 

Temi. 

Thou  fearest. 

Themes. 

Veglio. 

I  watch. 

Old  man. 

Velio. 

See  him. 

A  skin. 

Venti. 

Twenty. 

Winds. 

0  close. 

0  open. 

Accorre. 

He  runs. 

To  receive 

Accorto. 

I  shorten. 

Prudent. 

Botte. 

A  cask. 

Blows 

Colla. 

With  the. 

Glue. 

Colle. 

With  the. 

A  hill. 

Collo. 

With  the. 

Neck. 

Color  0. 

I  color. 

Those. 

Colto. 

Refined. 

Gathered. 

Corre. 

He  runs. 

To  gather 

Costa. 

It  costs. 

A  rib. 

Folia. 

Crowd. 

I  do  it. 

Fosse. 

Were  he. 

Ditches. 

Indotto. 

Induced. 

Ignorant. 

Ora. 

Now,  hour. 

*He  prays. 

Orno. 

To  adorn. 

A  wild  ash. 

Porsi. 

To  put  one's  self. 

I  offered. 

Pose. 

He  put. 

Pauses. 

Posi. 

I  put. 

Let  him  rest. 

Pasta. 

Placed. 

The  post-office. 

Ricorre. 

He  has  recourse. 

He  reaps. 

Riposi. 

I  concealed. 

Rests. 

Rosa. 

Rotten. 

A  rose. 

Scopo. 

I  sweep. 

Scope. 

Sole. 

The  sun. 

He  is  accustomed. 

Sono. 

I  am. 

I  play. 

Tomo. 

I  fall. 

Volume. 

Torre. 

A  tower. 

To  take  away. 

Torta. 

A  pie. 

Twisted. 

Volgo. 

The  plebeians. 

I  turn. 

Volto. 

Face. 

Turned. 

Voto. 

Vow. 

Vacant. 

APPENDIX.  227 

EXTRACT     FROM 

IL    CARMAGNOLA    OF    MANZONI. 

0  misere,  sa  il  Cielo 
Che  per  voi  sole  ei  m'6  tremendo.     Awezzo 

10  son  da  lungo  a  contemplar  la  morte, 

E  ad  aspettarla.     Ah  !  sol  per  voi  bisogno 
IIo  di  coraggio ;  e  voi  —  voi  non  vorrete 
Tormelo,  e  vero?    AUor  che  Iddio  sui  buoni 
Fa  cader  la  sciagura,  ei  dona  ancora 

11  cor  di  sostenerla.     Ah !  pari  il  vostro 
Alia  sciagura  or  sia.     Godiam  di  questo 
Abbracciamento  :  e  un  don  del  Cielo  anch'  esso. 
Figlia,  ta  piangi ;  e  tu  consorte  !  .  .  Ah  !  quando 
Ti  feci  mia,  sereni  i  giorni  tuoi 

Scorreano  in  pace  ;  —  io  ti  chiamai  compagna 

Del  mio  tristo  destin  :  questo  pensiero 

Mi  awelena  il  morir.     Deh  ch'  io  non  veggia 

Quanto  per  me  sei  sventurata  ! 

^  grande  il  torto ; 

Ma  perdona,  e  vedrai  che  in  mezzo  ai  mali 

Un'  alta  gioia  anco  riman.  —  La  morte  ! 

II  pill  crudel  nemico  altro  non  puote 

Che  accelerarla.  —  Oh  !  gli  uomini  non  hanno 

Inventata  la  morte :  ella  saria 

Rabbiosa,  insopportabile  :  —  dal  Cielo 

Ella  ne  viene,  e  I'accompagna  il  Cielo 

Con  tal  conforto,  che  n^  dar  ne  torre 

Gli  uomini  ponno.  —  0  sposa,  o  figlia,  —  udite 

Le  mie  parole  estreme :  amare,  il  veggio, 

Vi  piombano  sul  cor  ;  ma  un  giorno  avrete 

Qualche  dolcezza  a  rammentarle  insieme.  — 

Tu  sposa,  vivi  —  il  dolor  vinci,  e  vivi ; 

Questa  infelice  orba  non  sia  del  tutto  : 

Fuggi  da  questa  terra,  e  tosto  ai  tuoi 

La  riconduci  —  ella  e  lor  sangue  —  ad  esei 

Fosti  SI  cara  un  di :  —  consorte  poscia 

Del  lor  nemico,  il  fosti  men ;  le  crude 


228  APPENDIX. 

Ire  di  Stato  awerSi  fean  gran  tempo 

De'  Carmagnola  e  de'  Yisconti  il  nome.  — 

Ma  tu  riedi  infelice  ;  il  tristo  oggetto 

Dell'  odio  e  tolto  :  —  e  un  gran  pacier  la  morte. 

E  tu,  tenero  fior,  tu  che  fra  I'arini 

A  rallegrare  il  mio  pensier  venivi,  — 

Tu  chini  il  capo  ;  —  oh  !  la  tempesta  rugge 

Sopra  di  te  —  tu  tremi,  ed  al  singulto 

Pill  non  regge  il  tuo  sen  —  sento  sul  petto 

Le  tue  infocate  lagrime  cadermi ; 

E  tergerle  non  posso  ;  —  a  me  tu  sembri 

Chieder  pietk,  Matilde ;  ah  !  nulla  il  padre 

Puo  far  per  te  ;  —  ma  pei  diserti,  in  cielo 

V  e  un  padre,  il  sai.  —  Confida  in  esso,  e  vivi 

Ai  di  tranquilli,  se  non  lieti ;  ei  certo 

Te  li  destina.     Ah  !  per  che  mai  versato 

Tutto  il  torrente  dell'  angoscia  avria 

Sul  tuo  mattin,  se  non  serbasse  al  resto 

Tutta  la  sua  pietk  ?  —  Vivi,  e  consola 

Questa  dolente  madre.  —  Oh  ch'  ella  un  giorno 

A  un  degno  sposo  ti  conduca  in  braccio  !  —  ... 


CORO. 

S'  ODE  a  deetra  uno  squillo  di  tromba ; 
A  sinistra  risponde  uno  squillo  : 
D'ambo  i  lati  calpesto  rimbomba 
Da  cavalli  e  da  fanti  il  terren. 
Quinci  spunta  per  I'aria  un  vessillo  ; 
Quindi  un  altro  s'  avanza  spiegato  : 
Ecco  appare  un  drappello  schierato  ; 
Ecco  un  altro  che  incontro  gli  vien. 

Gib.  di  mezzo  sparito  h  il  terreno  , 
Gik  le  spade  rispingon  le  spade  ; 
L'un  dell'altro  le  immerge  nel  seno  , 
Gronda  il  sangue ;  raddoppia  il  ferir.  — 
Chi  son  essi  ?    Alle  belle  contrade 
Qual  ne  venne  stranioro  a  flir  guerra  ? 


APPENDIX.  229 

Qual  h  quel  che  ha  giurato,  la  terra 
Dove  nacque,  far  salva,  o  morir  ? 

D'una  terra  son  tutti :  un  linguaggio 
Parian  tutti :  fratelli  li  dice 
Lo  straniero  .  il  commune  lignaggio 
A  ognun  d'essi  dal  volto  traspar. 
Questa  terra  fu  a  tutti  nudrice, 
Questa  terra  di  sangue  ora  intrisa, 
Che  Natura  dall'  altro  lia  divisa, 
E  recinta  coU'Alpe  e  col  mar. 

Ahi !  Qual  d'essi  il  sacrilege  brando 
Trasse  il  prime  il  fratello  a  ferire  ? 
Oh  terror  !     Del  conflitto  esecrando 
La  cagione  esecranda  qual'  e?  — 
Non  la  sanno  :  a  dar  morte,  a  morire 
Qui  senz'  ira  ognun  d'essi  e  venuto  ; 
E  venduto  ad  un  duce  vcnduto, 
Con  lui  pugna,  e  non  chiede  il  perchfe. 

Ahi  sventura  !     Ma  spose  non  hanno 
Non  han  madri  gli  stolti  guerrieri  ? 
Perche  tutte  i  lor  cari  non  vanno 
Dall'ignobile  campo  a  strappar  ? 
E  i  vegliardi  che  ai  casti  pensieri 
Delia  tomba  gia  schiudon  la  mente, 
Ch^  non  tentan  la  turba  furente 
Con  prudenti  parole  placar  ?  — 

Come  assise  talvolta  il  villano 
Sulla  porta  del  clieto  abituro 
Segna  il  nembo  die  scende  lontano 
Sovra  i  campi  che  arati  ei  non  ha  ; 
Cosi  udresti  ciascun  che  sicuro 
Vede  lungi  le  armate  coorti, 
Raccontar  le  migliaia  de'morti, 
E  la  pieta  dell'arse  cittk. 

Lk,  pendenti  dal  labbro  materno 
Vedi  i  figli,  che  imparano  intenti 
A  distinguer  con  nomi  di  scheme 
Quel  che  andranno  ad  uccidere  un  di , 


230  APPENDIX. 

Qui,  le  donne,  alle  veglie  lucenti 
Dei  monili  far  pompa  e  dei  cinti, 
Che  alle  donne  deserte  dei  vinti 
II  marito  o  I'amante  rapi.  — 

Ahi  sventura  !  sventura  !  sventura  * 
Gik  la  terra  e  coperta  d'uccisi ; 
Tutta  e  sangue  la  vasta  pianura  ; 
Cresce  il  grido,  raddoppia  il  furor. 
Ma  negli  ordini  manchi  e  divisi 
Mai  si  regge,  gih,  cede  una  schiera  ; 
Gik  nel  volgo,  che  vincer  dispera, 
Delle  vita  rinasce  I'amor. 

Come  il  grano  lanciato  dal  pieno 
Ventilabro  nell'  aria  si  spande  ; 
Tale  intorno  per  I'ampio  terreno 
Si  sparpagliano  i  vinti  guerrier. 
Ma  improvvise  terribili  bande 
Ai  fuggenti  s'affaccian  sul  calle  ; 
Ma  si  senton  piii  presso  alle  spalle 
Scalpitare  il  temuto  destrier. 

Cadon  trepidi  a  pie  dei  nemici, 
Rendon  I'arme,  si  danno  prigioni  : 
H  clamor  delle  turbe  vittrici 
Copre  i  lai  del  tapino  che  muor. 
Un  corriero  h  salito  in  arcioni ; 
Prende  un  foglio,  il  ripone,  s'awia, 
Sferza,  sprona,  divora  la  via  ; 
Ogni  villa  si  desta  al  romor. 

Perche  tutti  sul  pesto  cammino 
Dalle  case,  dai  campi  accorrete  ? 
Ognun  chiede  con  ansia  al  vicino, 
Che  gioconda  novella  rec6  ? 
Donde  ei  venga,  infelici,  il  sapete, 
E  sperate  che  gioia  favelli ! 
I  fratelli  hanno  ucciso  i  fratelli : 
Questa  orrenda  novella  vi  do. 

Odo  intorno  festevoli  gridi ; 
S'orna  il  tempio,  e  risuona  del  canto « 


APPENDIX.  231 


Oik  s'innalzan  dai  cuori  omicidi 
Grazie  ed  inni  die  abbomina  il  Ciel. 
Giu  dal  cerchio  dell'Alpi  frattanto 
Lo  staniero  gli  Bguardi  rivolve  ; 
Vede  i  forti  che  mordon  la  polve, 
E  li  conta  con  gioia  crudel.  — 

Affrettatovi,  empito  la  schiere, 
Sospendete  i  trionfi  ed  i  giuochi, 
Eitornate  alle  vostre  bandiere ; 
Lo  straniero  discende  ;  egli  e  qui. 
Vincitor  !     Siete  deboli  e  pochi  ? 
Ma  per  questo  a  sfidarvi  ei  discende ; 
E  voglioso  a  quel  compi  v'  attende 
Ove  il  vostro  fratello  peri.  — 

Tu  che  angusta  a'  tuoi  figli  parevi*, 
Tu  che  in  pace  nutrirli  non  sai, 
Fatal  terra,  gli  estranei  ricevi : 
Tal  giudizio  comincia  per  te. 
Un  nemico  che  offeso  non  hai, 
A  tue  mense  insultando  s'  asside ; 
Degli  stolti  le  Bpoglie  divide  ; 
Toglie  il  brando  di,mano  a'tuoi  re. 

Stolto  anch'  esso  !     Beata  fu  mai 
Gente  alcuna  per  sangue  ed  oltraggio  ? 
Solo  al  vinto  non  toccano  i  guai ; 
Torna  in  plan  to  dell'empio  il  gioir. 
Ben  talor  nel  superbo  viaggio 
Non  I'abbatte  I'eterna  vendetta  : 
Ma  lo  segna  ;  ma  veglia  ed  aspetta  ; 
Ma  lo  coglie  all'  estremo  sospir. 

Tutti  fatti  a  sembianza  d'  un  Solo  ; 
Figli  tutti  d'  un  solo  riscatto, 
In  qual'  ora,  in  qual  parte  del  suolo 
Trascorriamo  quest'  aura  vital, 
Siam  fratelli ;  siam  stretti  ad  un  patto ; 
Maledetto  colui  che  lo  infrange, 
Che  s'innalza  sul  fiacco  che  piange, 
Che  contrista  uno  spirto  immortal ! 


232  APPENDIX. 


EXTRACT  FROM  ALFIERI'S  ORESTE 

Antica  usanza  ogni  quint'  anno  in  Creta 
Giuochi  rinnova  e  sacrifizii  a  Giove. 
Desio  di  gloria  e  natural  vaghezza 
Tragge  a  quel  lido  il  giovinetto  :  al  fiance 
Pilade  egli  ha  non  divisibil  mai. 
Calda  brama  d'onor  nell'  ampia  arena 
Su  lieve  carro  a  contrastar  lo  spinge 
De'  veloci  corsier  la  nobil  palma  ; 
Troppo  a  vincere  intento,  ivi  la  vita 

Per  la  vittoria  ei  dk 

Feroce  troppo,  impaziente.  incauto, 
Or  coUa  voce  minacciosa  incalza, 
Or  del  flagel,  cbe  sanguinoso  ei  ruota, 
Si  forte  batte  i  destrier  suoi  mal  domi 
Ch'  oltre  la  meta  volano,  piii  ardenti 
Quanto  veloci  piii.     Gia  sordi  al  freno, 
Gik  sordi  al  grido,  ch'  ora  invan  gli  acqueta 
Foco  spiran  le  nari ;  all'  aura  i  crini 
Svolazzan  irti :  e  in  denso  nembo  awolti 
D 'agonal  polve,  quanto  h  vasto  il  circo, 
Corron,  ricorron  come  folgor  ratti. 
Spavento,  orrore,  alto  scompiglio  e  morte 
Per  tutto  arreca  in  torti  giri  il  carro 
Finche  percosso  con  orribil  urto 
A  marmorea  colonna  il  fervid'  asse 

Riverso  Oreste  cadde 

lo  non  diro,  come  di  sangue  il  piano 

Rigasse,  orribilmente  strascinato 

Pilade  accorse  .  .  .  invan  .  .  .  fra  le  sue  braccia 
Spiro  I'amico,  .... 


INDEX. 


PAGI 

Preface m 

Introduction, v 

Pronunciation, 1 

Accent, 5 

Reading  Exercise, 9 

Nouns, 11 

Definite  Article, 13 

Personal  Pronouns  ;  Auxiliary  Verb  to  have, 14 

Formation  of  the  Plural,     16 

Possessive  Pronouns, 19 

Articles  affixed  to  Prepo^tions, 21 

Auxiliary  Verb  to  be, 22 

Adjectives, 24 

Verbs,  First  Conjugation, 27 

Demonstrative  Adjectives, 30 

Personal  Pronouns, 82 

Indefinite  Article, 35 

Partitive  Article, 36 

Formation  of  the  Plural,  continued, 38 

Months,  Days,  Seasons, 39 

Irregular  Verbs  to  go  and  to  give, 41 

Conjunctive  Pronouns,      43 

Irregular  Verbs  to  make  and  to  stay, 46 

Use  of  the  Definite  Article, 48 

Relative  Pronouns, 51 

Demonstrative  Pronouns, 54 

Regular  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation, 65 

Omission  of  the  Definite  Article.  —  Interjections,    ......  57 

Conjunctions, 58 

Numeral  Adjectives, GO 

11 


•234  INDEX. 

Interrogative  Pronouns, 64 

t^     Kegular  Verbs,  Third  Conjugation, 67 

Hours  of  the  Day  :  Half  past,  a  quarter  past,  a  quarter  of,  .   .    .    68 

Conjunctive  Pronouns,  continued, 71 

Table  of  Compound  Conjunctive  Pronouns, 73 

yt  Remarks  on  the  Regular  Verbs, 75 

Collective  and  Distributive  Numbers, 76 

Ordinal  Numbers, 78 

Proportional  Numbers, 79 

Irregular  Verbs, 81 

■"y  Agreement  of  Verbs.  —  Use  of  the  Imperfect  and  Perfect,  ....    86 

/    Comparatives, 89 

Superlatives, 92 

Irregular  Comparatives  and  Superlatives, 93 

Possessive  Pronouns,  continued,      95 

^  Use  of  the  Subjunctive, 98 

'^  Past  Participle, 102 

Formation  of  the  Plural,  continued, 105 

Augmentatives  and  Diminutives, 108 

^  Adverbs,     Ill 

Indefinite  Pronouns  used  substantively  for  Pei*sons, 115 

Indefinite  Pronouns  used  substantively  for  Things, 118 

Indefinite  Pronouns  used  substantively  for  Persons  and  Things,    .111 
Indefinite  Pronouns  used  adjectively  for  Persons  and  Things,    .   .124 

Formation  of  the  Feminine, 127 

Prepositions  di,  a, 130 

Prepositions  c?a,  ^er,  in/Mon,      133 

/ 


Use  of  the  Third  Person  Feminine, 137 

Idiomatic  Expressions  with  the  verbs  av^rc^  to  have,  and  cssere, 

to  be 138 

^  Of  the  Pronoun  si 140 

Synonyms  :  Fear,  paura,  timore  ;  to  rub,  strofmare,  stropicciare. 
—  Idiomatic  Expressions  "with  the  Verbs  andare,  to  go,  and 

^^      starCy  to  stay, 141 

^-  Ellipses, 143 

^    Idiomatic  Expressions  with  the  Verb  daret  to  give, 144 

Ellipses,  continued, Ii6 


INDEX.  235 

Idiomatic  Expressions  with  the  verb /are,  to  make 147 

Diminution  of  Words, 149 

Maxims  and  Figures  of  Speech, 150 

Diminution  of  Words,  continued, 152 

Maxims  and  Figiu-es  of  Speech, 153 

Transposition  of  Words, 155 

Synonyms:  Step  of  a  staircase,  i;'ra<fino,  sca/ino, 156 

Derivation  of  Words, 158 

^Maxims  and  Figures, 150 

Derivation  of  Words,  continued," IGl 

Maxims  and  Figures, 162 

Formation  of  Words, 164 

IMaxims  and  Figures, 165 

Maxims  and  Figures, 167 

Synonyms  :  Servant,  servitorey  servo ;  devotion,  devozionet  divo- 

zioney 168 

Maxims  and  Figures, 170 

Synonyms:  Loibor,  faiic a,  travaglio ;  i^rond,  superbo ;  haughty, 

aliierOy .  171 

Maxims  and  Figures, 173 

Synonyms  :    Composition,  composizionCy   componimsnto ;   grati- 
tude, gratitudinny  riconoscenza, \ 174 

Maxims  and  Figures, 1 

Synonyms  :  Leaf,  fronday  foglia ;  purity,  parita,  purezza  ,•  ter- 
ror, te/rore,  spavcnto, 177 

Maxims  and  Figures, 179 

Synonyms :   Lie,   menzogna,   bugia ;   light,   luce,   lume ;   work, 

lavoroy  opera ;  to  go  out,  uscire,  soriire, 181 

Maxims  and  Figures, 182 

Synonyms  :  New,  nvoco,  «oye/Zo;  shame,  onfa,  wer^/oy/ia,    .    .   .183 

Maxims  and  Figures, 185 

Synonyms:  Crafty,  asfMfo,/ttr6a;  first,  prmo,;?rtmiero,    .    .    .186 

!Maxims  and  Figures, 188 

Synonyms:  To  repeat,  ripcterey  replicare;   relation,  relazioney 

rapportOy 189 

Iiliomatic  Expressions,      191 

Idiomatic  Expressions,      194 

Conjunction  of  the  Auxiliary  Verbs  to  have  and  to  be, 107 

Inaectlons  of  the  Regular  Verbs  of  the  First,  Second,  and  Third 
Conjugation,     7 '.  V  .  : 


236  INDEX. 

Irregular  VerbSi^oftheJB^stC^  201 

^^Bsol^the  Third  Conju^at^^^  in  which  the  termination  iscojs 

inclispensable, 203 

Verbs  of  the  Third  JI!onjugation  with  the  present  ending  in  o  or 

~^    isco, "7  .""^.  V  rr.    .    .   .   .   .   .TT^frr  .  206 

List  of  Jrrg^lMj^bs, 207 

Teribs  of  the  Second  Conjugation  with  the  accent  on  the  Penulti- 

mate;     TTTTTT'T  .   .   ."  .V  .  T VT  .  218 

Regular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation, .218 

Exceptional  Irregularities  of  Verbs, 210 

Masculine  Nouns  ending  in  a, .    .22.^ 

Nouns  ending  in  co  and  go  which  take  or  reject  the  h  in  the  Plural,  223 

Masculine  Nouns  with  two  Plurals, .  224 

Nouns  ending  in  co  and  go  which  take  an  h  in  the  Plural,  though 

preceded  by  a  Vowel, 224 

Irregular  Feminines, 225 

List  of  Equivocal  Words, 225 

Extract  from  Manzoni 227 

Extract  from  Alfieri 23S 


1 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  PINE  OP  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $I.OO  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


'AN    16   1943 


«4« 


'Hji'J  t; — rrzj 


Sep^3'^^^^ 


w 


%4i^ 


i-i'EC-D  LD 


# 


S^5^ 


ir,>^3n'65-5PM 


m€0^)uii' 


FEB    319bZ 


26  May  63  PS 


1/0  21-100m-7,'40(69S6a) 


YB  00604 


7yn 

r^  7/  77 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

